Quantum Scalar i6000 Users`s Guide - Support

User’s Guide
Scalar i6000
6-66879-15 Rev B
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide, 6-66879-15 Rev B, December 2017, Product of USA.
Quantum Corporation provides this publication “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or
implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular
purpose. Quantum Corporation may revise this publication from time to time without notice.
COPYRIGHT STATEMENT
© 2017 Quantum Corporation. All rights reserved.
Your right to copy this manual is limited by copyright law. Making copies or adaptations without prior
written authorization of Quantum Corporation is prohibited by law and constitutes a punishable
violation of the law.
TRADEMARK STATEMENT
Quantum, the Quantum logo, DLT, DLTtape, the DLTtape logo, SuperLoader, Scalar, StorNext, and DXi are
registered trademarks of Quantum Corporation, registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Preserving the World's Most Important Data. Yours., Backup. Recovery. Archive. It’s What We Do., the
DLT logo, DLTSage, Dynamic Powerdown, FastSense, FlexLink, GoVault, MediaShield, Optyon, Pocketsized. Well-armored, SDLT, SiteCare, SmartVerify, StorageCare, Super DLTtape, and Vision are trademarks
of Quantum.
LTO and Ultrium are trademarks of HP, IBM, and Quantum in the U.S. and other countries. All other
trademarks are the property of their respective companies.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
ii
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Contents
Preface
Chapter 1
Description
xiii
1
Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Hardware Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Dual Robotics Configurations and Parking Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Library Management Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
I/O Management Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Control Management Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Fibre Channel I/O Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Ethernet Expansion Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Import/Export Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
I/E Station Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Extended I/E Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
iii
Contents
Cartridge Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Tape Drives and Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
LTO Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Mixed Media Support and Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Support for WORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Power System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Library Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Centralized Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Proactive Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Serviceability and Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Data Path Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Host Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Remote Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Capacity on Demand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Chapter 2
Troubleshooting Your Library
43
How Does the Library Report Issues?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Status Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
System Status Button Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
E-mail Notifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
SNMP TRAP Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Working With Tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Ticket Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Displaying Ticket Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Viewing Ticket Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Viewing History Ticket Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Viewing Ticket Details Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Viewing Ticket Repair Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Viewing Tape Alerts and Generating Media Integrity Analysis
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Mailing, Saving, and Printing Ticket Information . . . . . . . . . . 80
Running Verification Tests to Determine Issue Resolution. . . . 82
Closing Tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Generating the Tickets Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Suppressing Tickets and Ticket Notifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
iv
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Contents
Interpreting LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Interpreting Blade Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Interpreting Drive Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Interpreting Fibre Port Link LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Interpreting Ethernet Expansion Blade LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Interpreting MCB Port LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Interpreting LBX Terminator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Interpreting Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Interpreting Gen 2 Robot Status LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Interpreting HDEM Tower Enable Button Blinking Pattern . . 114
Working With Command History Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Viewing Command History Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Mailing and Saving Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Accessing Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Chapter 3
Configuring Your Library
123
Running the Setup Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Accessing Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Enabling Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Working With Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Understanding Partition Media Policy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Creating Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Modifying Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Deleting Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Configuring Control Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Configuring an IBM or HP LTO-5 or later Drive as the Control Path
159
Setting Up the Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Setting up IPv4 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Setting up IPv6 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Configuring DNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Viewing the Current Network Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Changing the Internal IP Network Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Managing Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
FC Host Port Failover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
v
Contents
Setting Up Policies for the Physical Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Specifying the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Configuring E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Setting Up or Changing the E-Mail Configuration . . . . . . . . 188
Testing the Current E-Mail Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Setting Up E-mail Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Setting Up Media Security Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Viewing the Media Security Events Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Configuring Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Configuring Drive SCSI ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Configuring Fibre Channel Drive Speed, Topology, and Loop ID . . . . 202
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
FC Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Channel Zoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
FC Host LUN Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Generating the LUN Mapping Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Generating the Library Configuration Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Configuring Drive Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Assigning Cleaning Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Importing Cleaning Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Exporting Cleaning Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Unassigning a Cleaning Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Registering SNMP Traps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Registering an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Removing an Application’s Trap Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Configuring Library Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Accessing the Security Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 235
Configuring Access for Network Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Configuring Access for Remote LMC Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Configuring Access for SNMP and SMI-S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Using LDAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
LDAP Server Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Configuring LDAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Configuring Screen Saver Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Working With Data Path Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Configuring Datapath Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
vi
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Contents
About the Configuration Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Setting Aisle Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Configuring a Webcam For Your Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Working with Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Chapter 4
Active Vault
259
About Active Vault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Configure Active Vault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Create Active Vault Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Configure Access to External Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Configure Active Vault Policies on Partitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
View Active Vault Partition Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Chapter 5
Advanced Reporting
267
Media Usage Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Viewing Cross-Partition Media Moves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Chapter 6
Automated Media Pool
273
Requirements for Automated Media Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Configure Automated Media Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Create an AMP Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Create Magazine Extensions in Standard Partitions . . . . . . . 276
Configure AMP Import Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Configure AMP Auto Export Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Use an Automated Media Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Assign Storage Magazines to/from the AMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Move Media to/from the AMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Auto Import Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Chapter 7
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Capacity on Demand
285
vii
Contents
Chapter 8
Encryption Key Management
287
Encryption Key Management Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
KMIP-compliant Encryption Key Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
FIPS-Certified Encryption Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Enabling and Disabling FIPS Mode on HP LTO-5 or Later Tape
Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Viewing FIPS Status on the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Step 1 — Installing the EKM License Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Step 2 — Preparing Partitions for Library-managed Encryption .
294
Step 3 — Installing TLS Communication Certificates on the
Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Step 4 — Configuring the EKM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Step 5 — Configuring Partitions for Library-managed Encryption
306
Step 6 — Saving the Library Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Using EKM Path Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Troubleshooting EKM Path Diagnostics Problems . . . . . . . . . 312
Monitoring EKM Server Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Using Q-EKM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Using SKM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
SKM Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Chapter 9
Extended Data Lifecycle Management
327
About EDLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Configuring EDLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Step 1: Creating the EDLM Library Managed Partition . . . . . 330
Step 2: Configuring Access to StorNext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Step 3: Configuring EDLM Policies on Partitions . . . . . . . . . . 332
Step 4: Viewing EDLM Partition Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Running Manual EDLM Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Viewing EDLM Test Sessions and Report Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Working with the EDLM Test Sessions List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Viewing EDLM Session Report Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
viii
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Contents
Viewing the EDLM Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Diagnosing a Suspect EDLM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Chapter 10
Path Failover
357
Use the Storage Networking Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
License Drives for Path Failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Configure Control Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Multi Control Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Basic Control Path Failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Advanced Control Path Failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Advanced Control Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Configuring Data Path Failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Basic Data Path Failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Advanced Data Path Failover (ADPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions . .
383
Requirements for Host Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Configuring Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Creating, Modifying, and Deleting Host Access Groups . . . . 396
Host Access Configuration – Modifying Drives/Partitions and
Viewing Host Access Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Chapter 11
Configuring Access to StorNext
419
Step 1: Confirming the External Application is Supported . . 420
Step 2: Installing/Removing the Scalar i6000 API Client Plug-in .
420
Step 3: Configuring External Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Chapter 12
Partition Utilization Reporting
427
Viewing the Partition Utilization Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Interpreting the Partition Utilization Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Scheduling Partition Utilization Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Chapter 13
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Running Your Library
433
ix
Contents
Logging On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Logging On From the Touch Screen (Local Client). . . . . . . . . 434
Logging Off From the Touch Screen (Local Client) . . . . . . . . 436
Logging On From a Web Browser (Remote Client) . . . . . . . . 436
Logging Off the Web Browser (Remote Client) . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Connecting to Multiple Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Indicator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Library Management Console (LMC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Reading the Library Information Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
System Status Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Understanding Location Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Cartridge Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Tape Drive Location Coordinates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
I/O Blade Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
I/E Station Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Tower Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Viewing the Library (Physical or Partition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Displaying the Physical Library or a Partition. . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Managing Library Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Changing the Library’s State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Working With Local User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Creating Local User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Modifying Local User Accounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Deleting Local User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Viewing Local User Account Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Shutting Down/Rebooting the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Powering Off the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Powering On the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Locking/Unlocking the I/E Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
When Robotics Are Not Ready. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Using the Library Access Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Aisle Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Robot Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
x
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Contents
Chapter 14
Using the Command Line Interface
497
Logging on to the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Initial Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Navigating Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Global Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Path-specific Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Issuing a Command from the Initial Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
CLI Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Chapter 15
Maintaining Your Library
515
Monitoring the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Monitoring System Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Monitoring Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Monitoring Connectivity Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Monitoring I/E Station Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Monitoring Slot and Extended I/E Slot Status . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Monitoring Media Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Monitoring Sensor Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Monitoring Users Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Monitoring Partition Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Monitoring Partition Policies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Monitoring EKM Server Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Mailing, Saving, and Printing Status Information. . . . . . . . . 548
Mailing or Saving the Configuration Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Maintenance Actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Is the Access Door Closed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Is a Cartridge Old? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Using Library Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Re-enable Robot Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Working With Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Capturing Snapshots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Capture a Network Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Updating Library Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Updating Drive Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Teaching the Library (Configuration and Calibration) . . . . . . 599
Saving and Restoring Library Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Viewing the Drive Resource Utilization Reports. . . . . . . . . . . 610
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
xi
Contents
Setting Up Advanced Reporting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Working With Verification Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Using the Partitions Defragmentation Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Removing Lodged Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Sift Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Exporting Media via Sift/Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Capturing Sift Sort Screen Shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Retrieving MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Emailing or Saving an MIB File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Maintaining Air Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Removing an Air Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
Replacing an Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Robot, Tower and Power Rail Health Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Chapter 16
Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
689
Handling Cartridges Properly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Write-Protecting Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
Supported Barcode Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Barcode Label Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Installing Barcode Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Using Cleaning Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Managing and Moving Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
Importing Cartridges Into Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
Exporting Cartridges From Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Loading Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Unloading Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
Moving Media Within a Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Moving Media Between Active Vault or AMP and Standard
Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
Taking Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
xii
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Preface
This guide contains information and instructions necessary for the
normal operation and management of the Scalar i6000 library. This
guide is intended for system administrators, operators, or anyone
interested in learning about or using the Scalar i6000 library after its
initial installation and configuration. Be aware that you must have
administrator privileges to use many of the features that this guide
describes.
Caution: Be sure to read all operating instructions in this manual
and in the System, Safety, and Regulatory Information
Guide before operating this product.
Product Safety Statements
This product is designed for data storage and retrieval using magnetic
tape. Any other application is not considered the intended use.
Quantum will not be held liable for damage arising from unauthorized
use of the product. The user assumes all risk in this aspect.
This unit is engineered and manufactured to meet all safety and
regulatory requirements. Be aware that improper use may result in
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
xiii
Preface
bodily injury, damage to the equipment, or interference with other
equipment.
Caution: Be sure to read all operating instructions in this manual
and in the System, Safety, and Regulatory Information
Guide before operating this product.
WARNING: Before powering on or using this equipment, read THE
System, Safety, and Regulatory Information Guide. Keep
the Guide for future reference.
Note: When drive sled positions are empty, drive cover plates must be
installed and in place at all times to prevent access into the
empty drive sled Positions.
Mechanical Locks
The access and service doors can only be opened with a key. The key
should be kept by an authorized person at your company. Access to the
interior of the library is both a data-integrity and safety issue.
Power Button on the
Library’s Indicator Panel
Switching off the Power button on the indicator panel, located on the
front of the library, removes power from the electronics, which causes
the picker to stop immediately. This button also removes power from
the drives.
WARNING: This power button functions as a power interrupt only. To
completely remove all power before servicing or in an
emergency, turn off the circuit breaker on the power
distribution unit, and then disconnect the power cord
from the electrical source.
Mercury Statement
xiv
Projectors, LCD displays, and some multifunction printers may
use lamp(s) that contain a small amount of mercury for
energy-efficient lighting purposes. Mercury lamps in these
products are labeled accordingly. Please manage the lamp
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Preface
according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, contact
the Electronic Industries Alliance at www.eiae.org. For lamp-specific
disposal information check www.lamprecycle.org.
Disposal of Electrical
and Electronic
Equipment
This symbol on the product or on its packaging
indicates that this product should not be disposed of
with your other waste. Instead, it should be handed
over to a designated collection point for the
recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. The
separate collection and recycling of your waste
equipment at the time of disposal will help to
conserve natural resources and ensure that it is
recycled in a manner that protects human health and
the environment. For more information about where you can drop off
your waste equipment for recycling, please visit our Web site at: http://
qcare.quantum.com or contact your local government authority, your
household waste disposal service or the business from which you
purchased the product.
Product Model Number
The Scalar i6000 Regulatory Model Number is as follows:
SCi6000.
Explanation of Symbols and Notes
The following symbols appear throughout this document to highlight
important information.
Note: Indicates important information that helps you make better
use of your system.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
xv
Preface
Caution: Indicates a situation that may cause possible damage to
equipment, loss of data, or interference with other
equipment.
WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or bodily injury.
Other Documents you Might Need
The following documents are also available for this product. These
documents can be found at www.quantum.com/support.
• Scalar i6000 Planning Guide (6-66882-xx)
• Scalar i6000 Release Notes (6-66883-xx)
• Scalar i2000/i6000 Maintenance Guide (6-66880-xx)
• Scalar i6000 Installation Guide (6-66881-xx)
• Scalar i6000 Unpacking Instructions (6-00771-xx [Gen 1] or 667467-01-xx [Gen 2])
• System, Safety, and Regulatory Information Guide (6-00618-xx)
Note: Release Notes are also available for this product. The Release
Notes describe changes to your system or firmware since the
last release, provide compatibility information, and discuss any
known issues and workarounds. The Release Notes can be
found at www.quantum.com/support.
xvi
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Preface
Contacts
Quantum company contacts are listed below.
Quantum Corporate Headquarters
To order documentation on the <Product Name> or other products
contact:
Quantum Corporation (Corporate Headquarters)
1650 Technology Drive, Suite 700
San Jose, CA 95110-1382
Technical Publications
To comment on existing documentation send e-mail to:
doc-comments@quantum.com
Quantum Home Page
Visit the Quantum home page at:
http://www.quantum.com
Getting More Information or Help
StorageCare™, Quantum’s comprehensive service approach, leverages
advanced data access and diagnostics technologies with crossenvironment, multi-vendor expertise to resolve backup issues faster and
at lower cost.
Accelerate service issue resolution with these exclusive Quantum
StorageCare services:
• Service and Support Website - Register products, license software,
browse Quantum Learning courses, check backup software and
operating system support, and locate manuals, FAQs, firmware
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
xvii
Preface
downloads, product updates and more in one convenient location.
Benefit today at:
http://www.quantum.com/ServiceandSupport/Index.aspx
• eSupport - Submit online service requests, update contact
information, add attachments, and receive status updates via
e-mail. Online Service accounts are free from Quantum. That
account can also be used to access Quantum’s Knowledge Base, a
comprehensive repository of product support information. Sign up
today at:
http://www.quantum.com/osr
• StorageCare Guardian - Securely links Quantum hardware and the
diagnostic data from the surrounding storage ecosystem to
Quantum's Global Services Team for faster, more precise root cause
diagnosis. StorageCare Guardian is simple to set up through the
internet and provides secure, two-way communications with
Quantum’s Secure Service Center. More StorageCare Guardian
information can be found at:
http://www.quantum.com/ServiceandSupport/Services/
GuardianInformation/Index.aspx
For further assistance, or if training is desired, contact the Quantum
Customer Support Center:
United States
800-284-5101 (toll free)
949-725-2100
EMEA
00800-4-782-6886 (toll free)
+49 6131 3241 1164
APAC
+800 7826 8887 (toll free)
+603 7953 3010
For worldwide support:
http://www.quantum.com/ServiceandSupport/Index.aspx
xviii
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1
Description
The Scalar i6000 library automates the retrieval, storage, and control of
tape cartridges. Application software on the host can use the library’s
robotics to mount cartridges into tape drives and retrieve them without
operator intervention.
The library can be installed on a solid or raised floor. It has a standard
19-inch rack footprint and can be placed in a standard server rack space.
Because the library provides access by way of the access and service
doors, the library can be placed with either side against a wall or
between racks.
In December, 2011, the library robotics were redesigned. The redesign
accommodates either a single robot or dual robotics. The original robot
hardware is referred to as Gen 1; the new robot hardware is referred to
as Gen 2.
With firmware version i11, robots in a dual-robot system work in an
active/active manner, where both robots perform move commands and
other library operations.
In March 2013, the library electronics were redesigned, including a new
second generation Management Control Blade (MCB 2). The electronics
redesign is referred to as Gen2 Electronics and is required for to support
new features, such as Active/Active operation for Dual Robots and the
High-Density Expansion Module (HDEM).
In June 2015 new Series 3 modules were released for the Control
Module (CM3), Drive Ready Expansion Module (DREM3) and Storage
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
1
Chapter 1: Description
Expansion Module (SEM3). These new modules are capable of a higher
number of drive support than the previous modules.
Dual robotics libraries require special modules on either end called
parking modules, which house the robots when not in use. See Dual
Robotics Configurations and Parking Modules on page 7 for more
information.
You can tell which generation robot you have via the library user
interface. The library displays which generation of robot hardware is
installed. Select Monitor > System from the menu, click the Robot tab,
and look in the Generation column (see Figure 1).
Figure 1 Robot Tab
To determine what generation electronics your library is running, select
Monitor > System from the menu, click the Components tab and look in
the Name column. If you have MCB2 and RCU2, you have gen2
electronics. Any other MCB or RCU level means gen1 electronics.
2
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Figure 2 Components Tab
For Gen 1 systems, the maximum library can be configured to
accommodate from 100 LTO cartridges to 5,322 LTO cartridges (for a
single-robot library) or 5,376 LTO cartridges (for a dual-robot library).
For Gen 2 systems, the maximum library can be configured to
accommodate from 100 LTO cartridges to 7,146 LTO cartridges (for a
single-robot library) or 7,224 LTO cartridges (for a dual-robot library).
In March of 2013, a High Density Expansion Module (HDEM) was made
available to provide increased storage capabilities. A single HDEM can
hold up to 720 total slots; 540 on two independent carousels and 240
on the front door.
This chapter provides a description of the following features and
components:
Note: The library software features described in this guide apply to
both the Scalar i2000 and the Scalar i6000. However, certain
features are available on Scalar i6000 only.
This chapter includes the following sections:
• Front View on page 5
• Hardware Configuration Options on page 6
• Dual Robotics Configurations and Parking Modules on page 7
• Control Module on page 10
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
3
Chapter 1: Description
• Expansion Modules on page 13
• Library Management Module on page 18
• I/O Management Unit on page 21
• Robot on page 25
• Import/Export Stations on page 25
• Cartridges on page 28
• Cartridge Magazines on page 29
• Tape Drives and Media on page 33
• Mixed Media Support and Rules on page 35
• Support for WORM on page 36
• Operator Panel on page 37
• Power System on page 38
• Library Features on page 39
4
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Front View
Front View
Figure 3 shows a front view of the library, consisting of a control
module and an expansion module.
Figure 3 Front View of a
Control Module and Expansion
Module
expansion module
operator panel
control module
touch screen
I/E station
access doors
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
5
Chapter 1: Description
Hardware Configuration Options
Hardware Configuration Options
The library is designed for ease of installation, configuration, and field
upgrades. The minimum library configuration consists of one control
module. You can add up to 15 expansion modules as storage and tape
drive requirements change.
Note: Expansion modules in positions nine through sixteen are no
longer storage-only modules and can contain I/E stations or
drives.
For LTO, the maximum library configuration can accommodate
• 1 control module
• 0 to 15 expansion modules
• Gen 1 systems: 100 to 5322 cartridges (single robotics)
• Gen 2 systems: 100 to 7146 cartridges (single robotics), or 100 to
7224 (dual robotics). For libraries containing high-density expansion
modules, the maximum capacities are 12,006 LTO cartridges (for a
single-robot library) or 11,760 LTO cartridges (for dual-robot
libraries).
• 1 to 192 tape drives.
An LTO library I/E Station configuration can accommodate:
• 1 to 8 24-slot Import/Export (I/E) stations in the control module and
first 7 expansion modules.
Or
• 1 24-slot I/E in the control module and up to 7 72-slot I/E stations
and first 7 expansion modules.
6
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Dual Robotics Configurations and Parking Modules
Dual Robotics Configurations and Parking Modules
A dual robotics library requires Gen 2 robotics hardware. A dual robotics
library requires, at a minimum, a control module, a left parking module,
and a right parking module. See Figure 4.
The left and right parking modules have the same size and appearance
as expansion modules, but they function differently. Each parking
module contains a “parking space” in which the respective left or right
robot resides when not in use. The “parking space” occupies four
magazine columns which cannot be used for storage.
The left parking module is located to the left of the control module in
position zero. It is referred to in the user interface as “module 0.” The
left parking module does not contain tape drives, I/E stations, or power
supplies. The control module supplies its power. If you are upgrading to
dual robotics, you will receive a left parking module to add onto your
existing system. This increases your system size, so you must take this
into account when planning for an upgrade.
The right parking module is the right-most module in the system. As of
firmware version i11, a right parking module can contain drives in any
position in the library and up to one 24-slot I/E station. Right parking
modules may not contain 72-slot I/E stations.
Note: High-density expansion modules (HDEM) cannot be used as
right parking modules.
If you are upgrading a single-robotics library to a dual-robotics library,
the existing right-most expansion module can, in most cases, be
converted into a right parking module. However, if the existing rightmost expansion module contains a 72-slot I/E station, you may need
another module to be added to the right of your system which will
become the right parking module. If space considerations prohibit the
addition of another module, then the right-most module will be
swapped with another module in the library that does not contain a
72-slot I/E station.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
7
Chapter 1: Description
Dual Robotics Configurations and Parking Modules
Figure 4 Dual Robotics Library
Left parking
module
(Position 0)
Side panels, doors, and door posts have been removed for clarity.
Control
module
(Position 1)
Expansion
module
(Position 2)
Right parking
module
(Position 3)
Right parking space
(right-most two columns)
Left parking space
(left-most two columns)
8
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Dual Robotics Configurations and Parking Modules
Figure 5 Left Parking Module
Slot Configuration (Dual
Robotics Only)
= Columns
unavailable
for storage
= Calibration
target
Rack 1 (rear wall)
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Rack 2 (door)
9
Chapter 1: Description
Control Module
Figure 6 Right Parking Module
Slot Configuration (Dual
Robotics Only)
= columns
unavailable
for storage
= Calibration
target
Optional
24-slot
I/E
station
Optional drive
clusters
Rack 1 (rear wall)
Rack 2 (door)
Control Module
All libraries contain a control module. A single-frame library consists of a
control module only. The control module manages library operations via
the library management module and includes an operator panel touch
screen for local operator use. For more information, see:
• Library Management Module on page 18
• Support for WORM on page 36
10
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Control Module
The control module also contains all of the other components common
to expansion modules, including:
• Import/Export Stations on page 25
• Tape Drives and Media on page 33
• Cartridges on page 28
• Cartridge Magazines on page 29
• Power System on page 38
The control module always occupies module position 1 in the library. (In
dual-robotics configurations, the left parking module is in position 0.)
Figure 7 Front and Back View
of the Control Module
front view
magazines
and
cartridge
slots
back view
I/O
management
unit
I/E
station
drive
clusters
library
management
module
power
supplies
accessor
picker
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
11
Chapter 1: Description
Control Module
Figure 8 Front and Back View
of a Series 3 Control Module
(CM3)
rear view
Magazines
and
cartridge
slots
Power
supplies
Library
management
module
24-slot
I/E station
I/O
management
unit
Robot
Drive
clusters
front view
12
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Expansion Modules
Expansion Modules
Expansion modules enable the library to expand by adding space for
tape drives, an I/E station, and storage. Each expansion module from 96
to 780 LTO cartridge slots depending on the number of tape drives
installed and whether an I/E station is installed. See Figure 9 on page 14
for location information.
In Gen 1 configurations, the library’s maximum configuration includes
up to 11 expansion modules for a total of 12 modules. in Gen 2
configurations, up to 16 modules can be added. Expansion modules can
be added only to the right of the control module.
In firmware version i11, all standard expansion modules can
accommodate the following functional units:
• I/O Management Unit on page 21
• Control Management Blade on page 21
• Fibre Channel I/O Blades on page 22
• Ethernet Expansion Blades on page 22
• Robot on page 25
• Import/Export Stations on page 25 (optional)
• Tape Drives and Media on page 33 (drives are optional)
• Cartridge Magazines on page 29
• Support for WORM on page 36
• Power System on page 38 (required only if drives are installed; if an
expansion module contains only cartridges, all power is derived
from the control module).
High-density expansion modules can accommodate the following
functional units:
• Robot on page 25
• Import/Export Stations on page 25 (optional)
• Tape Drives and Media on page 33 (media only)
• Cartridge Magazines on page 29
• Support for WORM on page 36
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
13
Chapter 1: Description
Expansion Modules
• Power System on page 38
Figure 9 SEM with 24 Slot I/E
Station
cartridge
magazines
I/E station 24 slot
(optional)
drive cluster
(optional)
drive side
14
door side
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Expansion Modules
Figure 10 Series 3 SEM with a
24-slot I/E Station
magazines
24-slot
I/E station
(optional in
DREM and
SEM)
DREM drive
cluster
(optional)
drive side
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
door side
15
Chapter 1: Description
Expansion Modules
Figure 11 SEM with 72 Slot I/E
Station
magazines
72-slot
I/E station
(optional)
drive cluster
(optional)
drive side
16
door side
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Expansion Modules
Figure 12 Series 3 SEM with a
72-slot I/E Station
magazines
72-slot
I/E station
(optional in
DREM and
SEM)
DREM drive
cluster
(optional)
drive side
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
door side
17
Chapter 1: Description
Library Management Module
Library Management Module
The library management module is located in the control module. It
controls system hardware and enables external devices to perform
configuration and obtain system status. The library management
module contains the following boards:
• Management control blade (MCB) - Manages the library, passing
commands to and from the robotics control unit as well as the
storage area network (SAN) components.
• Robotics control unit (RCU) - Controls the picker and accessor
functionality.
• Library motor drive (LMD) (Gen 1 libraries only) - Distributes power
to the picker along with the X and Y-axis circuits. It also distributes
power to the touch screen.
• Library power control (LPC) (Gen 2 libraries only) - Distributes power
to the robot through the power rails. It also distributes power to the
touch screen.
18
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Library Management Module
Figure 13 Library Management
Module Boards
Library motor drive (LMD) or
library power control (LPC)
Robotics control unit (RCU)
Management control blade (MCB)
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
19
Chapter 1: Description
Library Management Module
Figure 14 Library Management
Module Boards in Series 3 CM
Management control blade (MCB)
20
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
I/O Management Unit
I/O Management Unit
The I/O management unit is an optional component that provides
connectivity and data path management to a SAN fabric and the hosts.
The I/O management unit houses up to four FC I/O blades, which
provide FC connections for the Fibre Channel drives in the module.
The I/O management unit also houses up to two Ethernet Expansion
blades, which handle internal Ethernet communication between the
MCB and HP LTO-5 or later drives. (The control module and each of the
expansion modules can contain up to 12 FC drives.) The I/O
management unit performs all tape drive and library host
communication functions in a library that is attached to a SAN.
I/O management units may be installed in the control module and
expansion modules. The I/O management unit supports the following
blades:
• Control Management Blade
• Fibre Channel I/O Blades
• Ethernet Expansion Blades
When FC I/O blades or Ethernet Expansion blades are installed in the
library, the following rules regarding control management blades
(CMBs) apply:
• Any module (including the control module) that contains FC I/O
blades or Ethernet Expansion blades must also contain a CMB.
• A CMB must be installed in the control module and all modules that
contain drives. Modules that don’t contain drives, blades or network
chassis will contain drive and network jumpers that maintain
communications between the MCB located in the control module
and the modules that contain drives, FC I/O blades and EEBs.
Control Management
Blade
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
The control management blade (CMB) performs unit status monitoring
including power and I/O present conditions, and internal network
switch functions connecting I/O blades with the library management
module.
21
Chapter 1: Description
I/O Management Unit
Fibre Channel I/O
Blades
There is one Fibre Channel (FC) I/O blade type supported: 7404 that
auto-negotiates up to 4 Gbps. The 7404 FC I/O blade has an embedded
controller that provides connectivity and features that enhance the
performance and reliability of tape operations. It also provides two host
communication ports and four connection ports to drives.)
• Fibre Channel LTO-1, LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-4, LTO-5, LTO-6 and
LTO-7 drives can be connected to drive-aggregating Fibre
Channel I/O blades or directly attached to a host, so these drives
do not require an external SNC.
• We recommend that you do not connect an LTO-5 or later drive
to an FC I/O blade. These drives support speeds of 8 Gbps, but
the FC I/O blade only supports 4 Gbps.
Ethernet Expansion
Blades
22
The Ethernet Expansion Blade (EEB) provides the option for Ethernet
connectivity to each LTO-5 or later drive (for MCB-to-drive
communication purposes only). The connection is at T100. The EEB
provides a control path to the drive for commands as well as facilitates
taking drive logs and downloading drive firmware. Each EEB has 6
Ethernet ports to allow attachment to 6 LTO-5 or later drives. The EEB
provides Ethernet connectivity to the library's internal Ethernet only and
should not be connected to an external Ethernet source.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
I/O Management Unit
Figure 15 I/O Management
Unit
Bay 2 - CMB
Bay 4 - FCB #2
Bay 6 - FCB #4
Bay 8 - EEB for
upper drive
cluster
Bay 1 - Not used
Bay 3 - FCB #1
Bay 5 - FCB #3
Bay 7 - EEB for lower
drive cluster
CMB = Control management blade
FCB = Fibre Channel I/O blade
EEB = Ethernet Expansion blade
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
23
Chapter 1: Description
I/O Management Unit
Figure 16 I/O Management
Unit in Series 3 Module
Bay 1 - Not used
Bay 3 - FCB or EEB
Bay 5 - FCB or EEB
Bay 7 - EEB
Bay 2 - CMB
Bay 4 - FCB or EEB
Bay 6 - FCB or EEB
Bay 8 - EEB
CMB = Control Management Blade
FCB = Fibre Channel I/O Blade
EEB = Ethernet Expansion Blade
24
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Robot
Robot
The robot moves cartridges between storage cells, tape drives, and the
I/E station. A picker is used to get or put cartridges in a storage cell or a
tape drive slot. The picker moves along an X and Y axis and can pivot
180o. A barcode scanner on the picker assembly identifies cartridges
located in storage cells.
The library can be configured for either one or two robots. See Dual
Robotics Configurations and Parking Modules on page 7 for more
information.
Import/Export Stations
I/E stations enable you to import and export cartridges without
interrupting normal library operation. There are two types of I/E
stations: 24-slot I/E stations and 72-slot I/E stations.
Each 24-slot I/E station has a capacity of 24 LTO cartridges that are
located in four removable magazines. The 72-slot I/E station consists of
two side-by-side 36-slot I/E stations that can operate independently or
as a single 72-slot I/E station. Each 36-slot I/E station provides I/E
capacity of 36 LTO cartridges in six removable magazines.
The I/E station is installed on the front of the control module or any of
the first seven expansion modules, including high-density expansion
modules. It can be installed in a right parking module if the right
parking module is in position 2 through 8. Expansion modules (and the
right parking module) in positions nine through seventeen are storageonly modules and do not contain I/E stations or drives. See Figure 3 on
page 5, Figure 9 on page 14, and Figure 11 on page 16 for I/E station
location.
Note: The I/E station cannot be configured as a storage location, but
it can be part of a logical division of library resources known as
partitions. For information about partitions, see Working With
Partitions on page 128.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
25
Chapter 1: Description
Import/Export Stations
Note: The maximum number of I/E element addresses in any partition
is 240. This includes both physical slots and Extended I/E virtual
slots.
I/E Station Options
An expansion module is designed for customers who have an increased
need to import or export cartridges. An expansion module, including
high-density expansion modules, can have no I/E station, a 24 slot I/E
station, or a 72 slot I/E station. The increased capacity is achieved by
increasing the overall length of the I/E station and doubling its width.
The 24-slot I/E station has a capacity of 24 LTO cartridges that are
located in four removable magazines.
The 72- slot I/E station consists of two side-by-side 36-slot I/E stations
that can be operate as one 72-slot I/E station or can be operated
independently. Each 36-slot I/E station provides I/E capacity of 36 LTO
cartridges in six removable magazines.
Extended I/E Option
The number of I/E slots in a library is usually associated with the number
of I/E slots in an actual physical I/E station, but this physical slot count
could limit how many I/E slots may be available to a host application.
Extended I/E configurations remove such I/E slot count limitations by
increasing the I/E slot count for a partition with storage slots that will be
reported to a host as I/E slots. Thus, extended I/E allows the user to
configure their partitions with I/E slots beyond the number of physical
I/E slots configured in the library. As a result, the host can export more
media than previously allowed.
Keep in mind that as extended I/E slots are used, fewer storage slots are
available. You will need to initiate move/import operations of tape
cartridges into the extended I/E area for host access. Conversely, to
move/export tape cartridges from extended I/E area slots to the emptied
physical I/E Station slots, you need to initiate the move/export operation
from the user interface for physical access to the library.
26
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Import/Export Stations
Note: By default, the extended I/E feature is disabled and is only
available on Scalar i6000 libraries. Extended I/E can be enabled/
disabled from the 'Physical Library' dialog (Setup > System
Settings > Physical Library). Refer to Setting Up Policies for
the Physical Library on page 180.
Note: To configure a partition with extended I/E segments, you must
use the Partition Wizard (Setup > Partition > Configure). The
extended I/E feature is only available in expert creation mode or
if you are modifying an existing partition. Refer to Using Expert
Mode on page 141. Extended IE is not supported on library
managed partitions.
Extended I/E must be enabled before using it. When configuring
extended I/E in a partition, ensure you have enough licensed slots
[Capacity On Demand (COD)] to accommodate the new extended I/E
slots, since extended I/E slots use the COD licensed slot count.
When you configure extended I/E slots you must have at least one
physical I/E segment configured in the partition. The maximum number
of physical and extended I/E slots per partition is 240.
The I/E area configured with the extended I/E feature will report the SCSI
element addresses starting with the actual physical I/E slots, followed by
the extended I/E slots. This will allow hosts to always first use the
available slots in the actual physical I/E Station before “spilling” into the
extended I/E area.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
27
Chapter 1: Description
Cartridges
Cartridges
Cartridges are stored in magazines within the library, as shown in
Figure 17.
Figure 17 Example of LTO
Cartridge Insertion into a
Magazine
magazine barcode
LTO cartridge
LTO magazine
cartridge barcode location
28
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Cartridge Magazines
Each cartridge has an operator-attached, machine-readable barcode
label on it for identification purposes. The library can dynamically
support barcode labels with 1 to 14 characters plus a one-character or
two-character media identifier, depending on drive type. The library
currently supports Code 39 (3 of 9) type barcode labels. For more
information about tape cartridges, see Tape Drives and Media on
page 33. For additional specification information, see Barcode Label
Requirements on page 693. For details about the use of drives and
cartridges, see Mixed Media Support and Rules on page 35.
Note: Media must contain valid barcode labels. The library will not
support tapes without valid barcode labels.
Note: A 14-character barcode label length may not be printable
according to the Code 39 label specifications for the tape
cartridge area to which the label is attached. The effective tape
cartridge barcode label length, including any media ID, may be
limited to a maximum of 12 characters.
Cartridge Magazines
The cartridge magazine is a storage assembly that installs on the drive
side or door side of the control module or expansion module, as shown
in Figure 18. It contains the cartridge slots and provides flexibility when
adding storage cartridges to a module.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
29
Chapter 1: Description
Cartridge Magazines
Figure 18 Magazine and Drive
Locations in the Control
Module
I/E
station
cartridge
magazines
upper
drive
cluster
drives or
storage
lower
drive
cluster
drive side
30
door side
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Cartridge Magazines
Figure 19 Magazine and Drive
Location in the Single-Robotics
Series 3 Control Module
cartridge
magazines
24-slot I/E
station
drives
or
storage
drive side
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
door side
31
Chapter 1: Description
Cartridge Magazines
Table 1 Cartridge Capacities in
Library Modules
Type
Magazine Capacity
Cartridge Capacity
Magazine (LTO)
--
6
Control module (single-robotics)a
36 min/51 max
216 min/306 max
Control module (dual-robotics)a
42 min/64 max
252 min/384 max
Standard Expansion modulec
48 min/76 max
288 min/456 max
Drive Ready Expansion Moduleb
16 min/76 max
96 min/456 max
High-Density Expansion Modulec
102 min/130 max
612 min/780 max
Left parking module (dual-robotics)d
38
228
Right parking module (dual-robotics)e
12 min/38 max
72 min/228 max
a. Control module: The minimum is based on having 18 drives and one 24-slot I/E station installed. The maximum
is based on having one drive and one 24-slot I/E station installed.
b. Drive Ready Expansion module: The minimum is based on having 24 drives and one 72-slot I/E station and 24
drives installed. The maximum is based on having no drives or an I/E station installed.
c. Standard and HDEM: The minimum is based on one 72-slot I/E station and 12 drives installed. The maximum is
based on having no drives or an I/E station installed.
d. Left parking module: No drives or I/E stations are allowed. The left parking space takes up 4 columns of storage.
There are six empty magazines located in the unusable 4 columns which are used for calibration only. These six
magazines are not counted toward the total capacity.
e. Right parking module: The minimum is based on having 12 drives and one 24-slot I/E station installed. The
maximum is based on no drives or I/E station installed. The right parking space takes up 4 columns of storage.
Each magazine has a barcode label that the scanner reads for
identification and inventory. An optional, snap-on dust cover is available
for the magazines. Magazines with the dust cover have interlocked
stacking that enables easier storage of the media when they are
removed from the library for external storage.
32
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Tape Drives and Media
Tape Drives and Media
Note: Library firmware versions 630Q (i10) and later do not support
DLT tape drives, media, or magazines. If you upgrade to these
library firmware versions, make arrangements to remove and/
or replace all DLT tape drives, media, and magazines in your
library. If you want to continue to use DLT tape drives and
media, your library firmware must be at version 617Q.GS01001
(i8.4) or earlier.
Tape drives are enclosed in a universal drive sled. You can hot swap and
hot add all supported drives, regardless of type. The library supports the
following types of tape drives:
• IBM LTO-1 or LTO-2 LVD–SCSI
• IBM LTO-1, LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-4, LTO-5, LTO-6 or LTO-7
FC Multi-mode
• HP LTO-3, LTO-4, LTO-5, LTO-6 FC Multi-mode
Caution: A single partition can have a mixture of drive types and
interface types within the same domain (for example,
LTO-5 and LTO-6 with SCSI or Fibre Channel interfaces). For
more information, see Mixed Media Support and Rules on
page 35 and Understanding Partition Media Policy Settings
on page 131.
The standard control module and expansion modules have upper and
lower drive clusters. Series 3 control modules have one upper and two
lower clusters and expansion modules have two upper and lower
clusters. Each library must have at least one tape drive. Each drive
cluster can house up to six tape drives. Additional drives can be added
to any expansion modules in the configuration, except high-density
expansion modules. This enables you to have a total of 192 drives. In
dual-robot systems, the left parking module cannot contain drives.
Note: When you add drives, you lose storage slots.
As of firmware version i11, drives can be installed in any module in the
library except a left parking module or high-density expansion module.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
33
Chapter 1: Description
Tape Drives and Media
However, it is still recommended that drives be installed in bottom-totop order.
Note: The term drive cluster defines a grouping of up to six tape
drives below or above the middle X-axis rail.
Figure 18 on page 30 shows the locations of drives in the control
module. For details about the use of drives and cartridges, see Mixed
Media Support and Rules on page 35.
Fibre Channel LTO-1, LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-4, LTO-5, LTO-6 and LTO-7 drives
can be connected to drive-aggregating Fibre Channel I/O blades or
directly attached to a host, so these drives do not require an external
SNC. More detailed information about LTO drives follows.
LTO Drives
Six generations of LTO drives are supported, but they are not fully
compatible as shown in Table 2. (N/C = Not Compatible)
Table 2 LTO Drive and
Cartridge Compatibility
LTO-3
LTO-3
WORM
LTO-4
LTO-4
WORM
LTO-5
LTO-5
WORM
LTO-6
LTO-6
WORM
LTO-7
LTO-7
WORM
LTO-3
Drives
Reads/
Writes
Write
Once,
Read
Many
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
LTO-4
Drives
Reads/
Writes
Write
Once,
Read
Many
Reads/
Writes
Write
Once,
Read
Many
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
LTO-5
Drives
Read
Read
Many
Reads/
Writes
Write
Once,
Read
Many
Reads/
Writes
Write
Once,
Read
Many
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
LTO-6
Drives
N/C
N/C
Reads
Read
Many
Reads/
Writes
Write
Once,
Read
Many
Reads/
Writes
Write
Once,
Read
Many
Reads/
Writes
Write
Once,
Read
Many
34
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Mixed Media Support and Rules
LTO-7
Drives
LTO-3
LTO-3
WORM
LTO-4
LTO-4
WORM
LTO-5
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
Reads
LTO-5
WORM
LTO-6
Read
Many
Reads/
Writes
LTO-6
WORM
Write
Once,
Read
Many
LTO-7
Reads/
Writes
LTO-7
WORM
Write
Once,
Read
Many
All LTO cartridges are the same physical size, which means they use the
same magazines in the library.
LTO drives can be directly attached to hosts, the SAN, or to FC I/O blades
in the I/O management unit. SCSI drives must be directly attached to
hosts or to the SAN.
Mixed Media Support and Rules
The library supports LTO cartridges and drives in the same configuration,
provided that you adhere to the following rules:
Note: Libraries with Gen 2 hardware do not support DLT drives or
media.
Note: Libraries with firmware at version 630Q or later do not support
DLT drives or media.
• When purchasing a library with mixed media, the new orders must
specify the base system technology and the number of magazines,
the number of drives, and the number of I/E station magazines for
each media type required. The base system is considered the
primary media type used in the library.
• Multiple generations of LTO media can be mixed at the magazine
level.
• The supported multiple media are LTO-1, LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-3
WORM, LTO-4, LTO-4 WORM, LTO-5, LTO-5 WORM, LTO-6, LTO-6
WORM, LTO-7 and LTO-7 WORM.
• Drives can be installed in any frame.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
35
Chapter 1: Description
Support for WORM
Support for WORM
The Scalar i6000 library supports WORM (write once, read many)
technology in LTO-3, LTO-4, LTO-5, LTO-6 and LTO-7 tape drives. WORM
requirements include:
• Cartridges
• Firmware
• WORM-supported LTO-3 tape drives
• WORM-supported LTO-4 tape drives
• WORM-supported LTO-5 tape drives
• WORM-supported LTO-6 tape drives
• WORM-supported LTO-7 tape drives
WORM allows non-erasable data to be written once and provides extra
data security by prohibiting accidental data erasure. When the library
firmware and WORM-supported LTO-3, LTO-4, LTO-5, or LTO-6 tape
drive code are installed on a library with LTO-3, LTO-4, LTO-5, LTO-6 or
LTO-7 tape drives, the WORM feature is supported whenever the
operator uses WORM cartridges.
36
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Operator Panel
Operator Panel
The operator panel is located on the front of the control module and
consists of indicators and a touch screen (see Figure 20). The buttons
are for library control and power, and the indicators provide library
status.
Figure 20 Operator Panel
Status indicator
Power indicator
Robotics Enabled
indicator
Power button
Robotics Enabled
button
touch screen
The touch screen is the library navigation point and provides access to
the LMC. For more information about the touch screen and the LMC,
see Library Management Console (LMC) on page 442.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
37
Chapter 1: Description
Power System
Power System
The library supports single and redundant power configurations. The
single configuration has a single AC line input and single DC power
supply. The redundant configuration has dual AC line input and dual DC
power supplies. You can hot swap a power supply if you have a
redundant power supply. You can hot add a second power supply.
The power system consists of the following:
• Power supply
• Power distribution unit
• AC power cord
A single power switch, located on the front door of the control module,
turns on and off all power for the control module and attached
expansion modules. Each power distribution unit has a second circuit
breaker, located in the rear of the module, that controls the module
power supply output. The power supply has three LEDs that provide
status information. The power system also has four fuses for system
protection.
The control module and all expansion modules or right parking modules
that contain drives must contain a power system. If an expansion
module or right parking module contains only cartridges, its power is
derived from the control module and a power system is not needed.
High-density expansion modules have their own AC power systems that
can supply power to up to six (6) additional HDEMs if redundant power
is installed. The additional HDEMs must be in consecutive positions to
receive power from a single HDEM. Each power distribution unit has a
circuit breaker located at the rear of the module.
38
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Library Features
Library Features
This section describes several library features.
Density
The library provides a storage density of 720 cartridges (LTO) per square
meter. Each module, also referred to as a frame, has two storage racks:
one on the drive side and another on the door side. A rack consists of up
to 10 horizontal sections and three or four columns of magazines,
depending on the rack configuration. Each magazine, located at the
intersection of a particular section and a particular column, consists of
five or six cartridge slots, depending on the type of media.
Centralized
Management
The Library Management Console (LMC) gives you a single point from
which to view all library components, including robotics, drives, storage,
I/E stations, and network connectivity. You can use this graphical user
interface both locally from the library’s touch screen and remotely from
a remote client. The LMC communicates with the LMC server that runs
on the library. The LMC uses a simple and intuitive graphical style that is
secure and provides library managers with native partitioning ability.
Proactive Availability
The library can alert you about problems before they occur. The library
checks the complete data path at user-defined intervals to make sure
that it is functioning properly before backups begin. The library also
monitors its six major subsystems (drives, power, robotics, cooling,
connectivity, and control). You can configure the library to send
notifications of problems to one or more e-mail accounts, including
Quantum service personnel. For more information about the library’s
monitoring and reporting capabilities, see Maintaining Your Library on
page 515.
Serviceability and
Reliability
The library has extensive serviceability and reliability features. You can
hot swap drives, power supplies (in redundant power configurations
only), Input/Output (I/O) blades, and fans. Host port failover, an
advanced feature that moves a host’s communication stream from a
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
39
Chapter 1: Description
Library Features
failed connection to a working connection without disrupting the
backup operation, maintains connectivity whether the failure occurs on
the host, the switch, or the library.
Your backup system and data path are idle most of the time. When
backups begin, the system is used intensively at maximum bandwidth.
The library provides you with notifications and a robust ticket system
that notifies you of any problems it identifies, enabling you to solve
them before backups begin. For more information about the library’s
notification system, ticket system, and other troubleshooting help, see
Troubleshooting Your Library on page 43.
Data Path Conditioning
Quantum provides an automatic means of verifying, monitoring, and
protecting data path integrity between hosts and library drives. This
feature is referred to as data path conditioning. Using this feature,
administrators can proactively detect and resolve data path problems
before they affect backups, restore operations, and other data transfer
operations. Data path conditioning makes sure that data transmissions
are optimized and reliable, resulting in improved system availability.
Data path conditioning occurs in two separately managed areas:
• Between host and Fibre Channel (FC) I/O blades
• Between FC I/O blades and library drives
The FC I/O blade manages data path conditioning along the path
between itself and the library drives. Data path monitoring
automatically occurs at regular, configurable intervals. The FC I/O blade
generates a RAS ticket if monitoring tests fail for two intervals. This
indicates either loss of connectivity or drive failure. The FC I/O blades
include the data path conditioning feature. Administrators can use the
LMC to configure data path conditioning.
Host Attachment
40
Requests issued from the host application result in cartridge movement
in the library. The primary requests issued are for mounting and
dismounting cartridges in and out of the tape drives and for importing
and exporting cartridges in and out of the library. The library manages
the physical location. In addition to requesting cartridge movement in
the library, the host application can use the FC command interface to
obtain status information, configuration information, and cartridge
storage information from the library.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 1: Description
Library Features
Hosts can be attached to the library in the following ways:
• FC drives can be directly attached to host systems or to the SAN. In
these configurations, the management control blade (MCB) has one
library control port (FC) connecting to the controlling host
computer.
• FC drives can be attached to FC I/O blades in the I/O management
unit. There are two ports on each FC I/O blade that can be
connected directly to the host or to the SAN.
Remote Management
The library can be managed locally or remotely using the LMC. Locally,
the LMC appears on the touch screen on the front of the library.
Remotely, the LMC is accessed through a client instance of the LMC
software on any computer on the network. For more information about
accessing Logging On From a Web Browser (Remote Client) on
page 436. For more information about the LMC, see Library
Management Console (LMC) on page 442.
The LMC provides additional monitoring of a SAN-attached library over
the network to a management server by using Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP). This includes library subsystem health
and status information and early fault notification. For more
information, see the Intelligent Libraries Basic SNMP Reference Guide.
The library also supports the Common Information Model (CIM) server
based on the Storage Management Initiative Specification (SMI-S) on
the MCB. A CIM client can use the CIM server to monitor the SANattached library. For more information, see the Intelligent Libraries SMIS Reference Guide.
Capacity on Demand
If you purchased capacity on demand, the library is initially licensed for
a default configuration of 102 LTO storage slots.
Capacity on Demand allows you to license physical slots in 100-slot
blocks. Any number of slots can be licensed between 100 and 12,000.
You do not need to license all the physical slots, but only licensed slots
can be assigned to host managed partitions. It is often desirable to have
more physical slots installed than will be licensed.
Capacity on Demand allows you to purchase capacity for your library as
needed. As your storage needs change, you can add storage in blocks of
100. Scalar i6000 licensing begins at 100 cartridges and can be
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
41
Chapter 1: Description
Library Features
increased to as many as 7,146 LTO cartridges (for a single-robot library)
or 7,224 LTO cartridges (for a dual-robot library).
Expansion modules are sold separately from the slot licensing. This
separation provides the flexibility to order the exact modules needed
(DREM, SEM or HDEM).
42
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2
Troubleshooting Your
Library
This chapter describes how the library informs you of issues that it
detects within its subsystems. It also provides information about
working with tickets to resolve issues, running verifications tests to
check whether they have been resolved, interpreting LEDs, viewing
command history logs, and accessing Online Help.
This chapter consists of the following sections:
• How Does the Library Report Issues? on page 43
• Working With Tickets on page 48
• Viewing Ticket Details on page 57
• Interpreting LEDs on page 92
• Working With Command History Logs on page 115
• Accessing Online Help on page 121
How Does the Library Report Issues?
The library has advanced problem detection, reporting, and notification
functionality. The library has many processors and sensors that monitor
conditions and operations, such as temperatures, voltages, current,
calibrations, firmware versions, and so forth.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
43
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
How Does the Library Report Issues?
The library reports issues in several ways, which are described below:
• Status Indicator on page 44
• System Status Button Indicators on page 46
• E-mail Notifications on page 47
Status Indicator
The first indication of issues is the status indicator on the indicator
panel, as shown in Figure 21.
Figure 21 Status Indicator
Status indicator
• If the Status indicator light is solid green, the library currently has
no tickets in an Open state.
• If the Status indicator light is flashing amber, at least one of the six
subsystems has a ticket in an Open state.
When the library detects an issue, it creates a ticket for it. A ticket
includes the following types of information:
• Details about the issue
• Reports that are associated with the ticket
• A repair page that provides corrective actions
In most cases, tickets indicate operational failures that do not always
point to a single CRU/FRU as having failed or causing an issue. IN such
44
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
How Does the Library Report Issues?
cases, customer repair instructions are provided to isolate the issue and
recover from the failure. Only if the library is able to clearly identify a
failing CRU/FRU will the repair instruction request service or specific
CRU/FRU replacement.
Note: Tickets can indicate failures or other serious problems, but they
also can indicate warning conditions that you should
investigate. For example, opening the library’s access door or
intentionally disconnecting drive fibre channel connections,
causes the library to create a ticket, but if such operation is
performed intentionally this condition would not indicate
serious problems. However, you should still investigate the
tickets to make sure no issue has been caused inadvertently by
an aisle access operation or SAN configuration.
The library assigns a severity level to each ticket that it creates, and it
notifies users of the ticket. Table 3 describes possible severity levels for
tickets.
Table 3 Severity Levels
Assigned to Tickets
Severity Level
Description
1 (Failed)
Indicates that a failure or serious condition has occurred within a library
subsystem that requires immediate corrective action. In some cases, a hardware
component is no longer functioning at an acceptable level or has failed. In other
cases an operation may not have completed without a component having actually
failed.
Examples of failure situations include a FRU that is not functioning, a temperature
threshold that may affect operations, or an Ethernet or FC connectivity issue that
requires resolutions to network or SAN fabric connectivity issues before operations
function normally again.
2 (Degraded)
Indicates that a degraded condition exists within a library subsystem that impacts
system performance or redundancy. Typical library operations can continue
without immediate corrective action, but an administrator should investigate the
condition and correct the problem soon.
Examples of degraded situations include a redundant power supply that has failed
or a connectivity problem that has caused failover to occur.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
45
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
How Does the Library Report Issues?
Severity Level
Description
3 (Warning)
Indicates that a condition exists within a library subsystem that has some or little
effect on system operations. Typical library operations can continue without
immediate corrective action, but you should investigate the condition and correct
the problem when possible.
Examples of warning situations include a FRU that is functioning less reliably, or
drives that cannot unload a tape while other drives are still available to service
other requests, or a temperature threshold that has been reached that does not
affect reliable operations.
The library has three ways of notifying users that it has discovered
issues and has created tickets for them:
• Status indicators on Library Management Console (LMC) system
status buttons
• E-mail notifications
• SNMP TRAP notifications
System Status Button
Indicators
System status buttons are located in the Overall System Status area at
the bottom of the LMC display. Each button displays a status indicator
for the library subsystem it represents. For more information about the
buttons, see System Status Buttons on page 457. When the library
creates a ticket, the status indicator button for the affected subsystem
automatically changes from the following icon:
Good (green)
to one of the following icons:
Warning or Degraded
(yellow)
Failed (flashing red)
46
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
How Does the Library Report Issues?
The meanings of these status indicators correspond to the severity levels
described in Table 3 on page 45. If a system status button indicates
anything other than a Good state, clicking it displays a list of open
tickets for the subsystem. To access tickets by using the system status
buttons, see Working With Tickets on page 48.
E-mail Notifications
The library collects status information on its components and, if the
appropriate e-mail notifications have been set up in the LMC, the library
can send notifications whenever tickets with severity levels 1, 2, or 3 are
created. For information about severity levels, see Table 3 on page 45.
The library assigns a severity level to each ticket it creates. If the ticket’s
severity level matches one of an e-mail address’ severity codes (as set up
in e-mail notifications), the library sends a notification to that particular
e-mail address. The library also sends a notification if a ticket’s severity
level escalates to a more severe level. The library does not send one
when an ticket’s severity level becomes less severe.
By default, the only e-mail address to which the library sends e-mail
notifications is techsup@quantum.com (Quantum technical support).
When configured for Quantum technical support notification, the
library notifies Quantum technical support only of those severity 1 issues
that suggest a component failure requiring a possible CRU/FRU
replacement. Severity 1 tickets that do not identify a library component
failure, such as customer network connection issues and SAN fabric
connection problems, do not automatically notify Quantum technical
support, but allow customer issue analysis and customer-initiated
support calls. To set up other e-mail addresses to receive any severity 1,
and/or severity 2 and severity 3 ticket notification, see Configuring Email on page 187 and Setting Up E-mail Notifications on page 190.
Note: Even though you can remove the Quantum technical support
e-mail address so that Quantum does not receive severity level
1 notifications, Quantum recommends that you do not remove
it. Also, do not include the Quantum technical support e-mail
address for severity level 2 or 3 notifications.
The subject line of the e-mail notification indicates “Scalar i6000,” the
library’s serial number, and the severity level of the ticket. The body of
the message states that the library sent the message automatically. The
message body also includes the following information, which provides
details about the ticket and library conditions at the time of the event:
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
47
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
• Ticket summary
• Ticket details, including status information
• Firmware versions, including MCB, RCU, CMB, and drive bricks
• Physical library configuration
• Library states, such as physical library online or offline, partitions
online or offline, or robotics varied on or varied off
• Time stamps of recent activity
• Report summary
• Report details for the ticket
The notification also includes a repair page attachment. This page
provides a problem description and corrective actions you or a customer
service engineer (CSE) can perform. For more information about repair
pages, see Viewing Ticket Repair Pages on page 67.
Note: A notification e-mail contains helpful information about a
ticket and how to resolve it. However, the notification
represents a condition that existed at a certain time in the past.
The notification might not reflect the current situation. The
notification indicates a specific ticket ID, so you should find
and examine that specific ticket in the LMC. The ticket reflects
the real-time status of the issue. For more information about
accessing tickets, see Working With Tickets on page 48.
SNMP TRAP Notification
The library can be configured for SNMP TRAP receiver addresses which
to send RAS subsystem change event notification and other library event
as discussed in the Basic SNMP Reference Guide for the Scalar i2000/
i6000 Library.
Working With Tickets
Tickets are your primary troubleshooting tool when you experience
problems with the library. A ticket provides details and reports about
48
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
the issue and library conditions at the time of the event. It also provides
guidance on how to resolve the issue. If you are an administrator or a
service representative, you can access the tickets through the LMC. This
section explains how to display ticket lists, view ticket and report details,
view repair pages, and resolve and close tickets.
Ticket Guidelines
To help you quickly troubleshoot an issue by using tickets, read the
following guidelines.
What is the issue and its cause?
You became aware of a library issue because either the library sent an
e-mail notification, an LMC system status button indicated a subsystem
status of Warning, Degraded, or Failed, or a backup/archive software
application indicated a problem. Tickets include details about the issue
and library conditions at the time of the event. They also include
reports, any history tickets that the library has created in the past for the
same FRU, and a repair page that provides a detailed description of the
issue and its possible causes. The repair page also provides corrective
actions that you or a CSE can perform. To use a ticket to determine an
issue and its cause, you can perform the following general steps:
1 Display a list of tickets (see Displaying Ticket Lists on page 52).
2 View the details for the appropriate ticket (see Viewing Ticket
Details on page 57).
3 View the reports that are associated with this ticket (see Viewing
Ticket Details Reports on page 63.
4 View the ticket’s repair page (see Viewing Ticket Repair Pages on
page 67).
Where did the issue occur in the library?
The Status Group field on the Details tab of the Ticket Details dialog
box indicates the library subsystem that caused the ticket. For more
information about the Details tab, see Viewing Ticket Details on
page 57 The FRU ID field on the Report tab of the Ticket Details dialog
box indicates the type of FRU that is affected, and the FRU Instance
field indicates the specific FRU by its location in the library. For more
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
49
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
information about the Report tab, see Viewing Ticket Details Reports on
page 63.
When did the issue first occur?
The Posted field on the Details tab of the Ticket Details dialog box
indicates the date and time on which the library first reported the issue
and created a ticket for it. For more information about the Details tab,
see Viewing Ticket Details on page 57.
Has the issue occurred repeatedly?
The Duplicates field on the Details tab of the Ticket Details dialog box
indicates how many times the library has reported the same issue while
the ticket has been open. In addition, you can determine whether the
same issue has occurred and been resolved in the past. The FRU History
List area on the Details tab lists tickets that have been opened for the
same FRU in the past, but have been resolved and are now in the Closed
or Verified state. By selecting a history ticket and then clicking Show,
you can investigate the ticket history of a particular FRU. For more
information about the Details tab and viewing history tickets, see
Viewing Ticket Details on page 57.
Does the issue involve drives or tapes?
You can determine if the issue involves a particular drive or tape by
viewing tape alerts and generating tape alert reports.
Tape alerts are issued by a drive whenever there is a problem in the drive
that relates to a tape cartridge. The problem can be with the drive or
with the tape cartridge. You can view tape alerts on the Media Integrity
Analysis tab of the Ticket Details dialog box for tickets in the drive
group. For more information on the Media Integrity Analysis tab, see
Viewing Tape Alerts and Generating Media Integrity Analysis Reports on
page 68.
Tape alert reports enable you to cross-reference tape alerts for drives
and tape cartridges over a specified period of time, in order to
determine if the problem belongs to the drive or to a specific tape
cartridge. You generate tape alert reports using the Report Criteria
dialog box. You need an Advanced Reporting license in order to use
view tape alerts reports. For more information on using the Report
50
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
Criteria dialog box, see Viewing Tape Alerts and Generating Media
Integrity Analysis Reports on page 68.
Has the FRU been replaced before?
You can determine whether a specific FRU has been replaced in the past
by examining the FRU SN field on the Details tab of the Ticket Details
dialog box for the open ticket and the history tickets. Because the
history tickets associated with an open ticket are for the same specific
instance of a FRU, and because a FRU instance is identified by its
location in the library, the FRU serial number, which is uniquely assigned
to each FRU, will change if the unit has been replaced in the past. For
more information about the Details tab and viewing history tickets, see
Viewing Ticket Details on page 57.
How do I resolve the issue?
The repair page provides comprehensive, step-by-step procedures for
resolving the issue. Both user and CSE procedures are provided. When
the procedures require a CSE to perform them, contact technical
support. For more information, see Viewing Ticket Repair Pages on
page 67.
How can I know whether the issue is resolved?
Some issues require you to determine whether they are resolved and
others the library will detect automatically.
• In some cases, the library can automatically detect that an issue is
resolved (for example, an open door that is now shut). For these,
the library automatically transitions the ticket to the Verified state.
• In other cases, the library cannot automatically detect that an issue
is resolved (for example, a faulty tape cartridge). You must
determine whether the issue is resolved by running a verification
test or, if an applicable test does not exist, by following the repair
page instructions. If you run a test and the results are all good, the
library automatically transitions the ticket to the Verified state. If
you cannot run a test, you should physically examine the FRU, and
then manually transition the ticket to the Closed state after
determining that the issue is resolved. After you close the ticket, the
library transitions it to the Verified state if it is able to do so. For
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
51
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
more information, see Running Verification Tests to Determine Issue
Resolution on page 82 and Closing Tickets on page 83.
The library reopens tickets that receive failed, degraded, or warning
reports within 30 minutes of transitioning to the Closed or Verified
state. If a Closed or Verified ticket remains free of failed, degraded, or
warning reports for 30 minutes, the library locks them from
transitioning back to the Open state. A failed, degraded, or warning
report that is received beyond 30 minutes causes the library to open a
new ticket.
What do I do if I cannot resolve the issue?
Contact Quantum technical support. See Getting More Information or
Help on page xvii. Technical support personnel might ask you to send
them an electronic copy of the ticket. For instructions, see Mailing,
Saving, and Printing Ticket Information on page 80.
How do I view the number of tickets that occurred in a
certain time range?
The Tickets Report lets you see how many tickets occurred in a particular
time period. You can choose to group tickets by subsystem, module, or
FRU, and the results can be presented as a rollup summary or as a trend
so you can see if the number of issues is increasing or decreasing over
time. Also, the report results can be presented in different chart
formats, such as bar graphs or pie charts. For more information, see
Generating the Tickets Report on page 84.
Displaying Ticket Lists
The LMC provides three ways to display ticket lists:
• By clicking a system status button that indicates a Warning,
Degraded, or Failed state
This option displays a list of open tickets for the associated
subsystem. See Using System Status Buttons to Display Ticket Lists
on page 53.
• By clicking Tools > Tickets
This option displays the Tickets dialog box from which you can
obtain a list of all tickets or a partial list of tickets according to
52
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
selection criteria. See Using the Tickets Command or the Tickets
Button to Display Ticket Lists on page 55.
• By clicking the Tickets button on the toolbar
This option displays the same Tickets dialog box as the Tools >
Tickets command does. See Using the Tickets Command or the
Tickets Button to Display Ticket Lists on page 55.
From the ticket list, you can select a ticket to view ticket details,
associated reports, and a repair page.
Using System Status Buttons to Display Ticket Lists
To display a list of tickets by using a system status button, the button
must indicate a Warning, Degraded, or Failed state. Clicking a system
status button that indicates a Good state either displays a list of
subsystem tickets that are in Closed or Verified states or informs you
that no tickets exist for the subsystem.
1 Click the system status button that corresponds with the subsystem
for which you want to display a list of open tickets. The Ticket List
dialog box appears with a list of open tickets for the subsystem.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
53
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
The following table describes the elements on the Ticket List dialog
box.
Element
Description
In the Select Ticket area:
Check Box
To close multiple tickets, select each ticket you want to close by clicking the
check box.
ID
The library-assigned identifier for the ticket.
Description
A summary description of the ticket. The description identifies the FRU that
caused the ticket and includes reason text that describes the cause of the ticket.
State
The current state of the ticket. Possible states are:
Open — indicates that an issue, whether problem or warning condition, has
occurred in the library that requires attention
Closed — indicates that a user has closed the issue
Verified — indicates that the library has successful operational results or
positive data that verifies that the problem is resolved
Severity
The severity level of the ticket. Possible levels are:
• 1 (Failed)
• 2 (Degraded)
• 3 (Warning)
• 5 (Good)
Serial #
The serial number that the manufacturer assigns to the particular FRU.
Sub-system
The subsystem that caused the ticket. Possible subsystems are:
• Connectivity
• Drives
• Control
• Power
• Cooling
• Robotics
Posted Date
The date and time on which the library created the ticket.
The Details button displays the Ticket Details dialog box. For more
information, see Viewing Ticket Details on page 57.
54
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
2 By default, the ticket list is sorted by ticket ID in ascending order
with the oldest ticket at the top and the newest one at the bottom.
To change the sorting (for example, by state or severity), click the
column heading by which you want the tickets sorted. Repeatedly
clicking a column heading toggles between ascending and
descending order.
Using the Tickets Command or the Tickets Button to Display
Ticket Lists
1 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
2 Click Tools > Tickets or click the Tickets button on the toolbar. The
Tickets dialog box appears.
The Tickets dialog box enables you to specify the kinds of tickets
that will appear in the ticket list. For example, you can do the
following:
• To display all tickets in the library, select All for state, severity,
and subsystem.
• To display all open tickets with a severity level 2 status for the
drives and control subsystems, select Opened for state, 2 for
severity, and Drives and Control for subsystem.
• To display all tickets that users have manually closed for the
robotics subsystem, select Closed for state, All for severity, and
Robotics for subsystem.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
55
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
• To display all tickets that the library has automatically
determined as having been resolved, select Verified for state,
All for severity, and All for subsystem.
If you select a combination that does not produce a ticket list, a
No Tickets Found error message appears.
By default, this dialog box is set to Opened for state, All for
severity level, and All for subsystem.
Note: Tickets that the library has automatically verified and
closed are in the Verified state. Tickets that users have
manually closed are in the Closed state.
3 Select the appropriate check boxes in the Select State, Select
Severity, and Select Sub-system areas, and then click OK. The
Ticket List dialog box appears.
For descriptions of elements on the Ticket List dialog box, see Using
System Status Buttons to Display Ticket Lists on page 53.
4 By default, the ticket list is sorted by ticket ID in ascending order
with the oldest ticket at the top and the newest one at the bottom.
To change the sorting (for example, by state or severity), click the
56
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
column heading by which you want the tickets sorted. Repeatedly
clicking a column heading toggles between ascending and
descending order.
Viewing Ticket Details
Tickets provide detailed information about the ticket itself, the reports
that are associated with it, and a repair page that gives guidance for
resolving the issue. These tickets provide important information about
library conditions from which the issue emerged and helpful
information for resolving it.
To display the detailed information for a particular ticket, perform the
following steps:
1 On the Ticket List dialog box in the Select Ticket area, click the
appropriate ticket row to highlight it.
2 Click Details. The Ticket Details dialog box appears with the Details
tab displayed.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
57
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
The Ticket # area of the Ticket Details dialog box displays detailed
information about the ticket. The FRU History Ticket List area lists
all tickets that were ever opened in the past and that see the same
specific FRU (based on the FRU’s location in the library) as the one
reported by this ticket.
Table 4 on page 59 describes the elements on the Details tab.
58
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
Table 4 Details tab
Element
Description
In the Ticket # area:
State
The current state of the ticket. Possible states are:
Open — indicates that an issue, whether problem or warning condition, has
occurred in the library that requires attention
Closed — indicates that a user has closed the issue
Verified — indicates that the library has successful operational results or
positive data that verifies that the problem is resolved
Posted
The date and time on which the library created the ticket.
Status Group
The subsystem that caused the ticket. Possible subsystems are:
• Connectivity
• Drives
• Control
• Power
• Media
• Robotics
Closed
If the ticket is closed, the date and time on which it was closed.
Severity
The severity level that is associated with the status group (subsystem).
Possible levels are:
• 1 (Failed)
• 2 (Degraded)
• 3 (Warning)
• 5 (Good)
Duplicates
The number of times that the library has reopened the ticket. If a ticket is in
the Closed or Verified state and the identical problem occurs again within 30
minutes, the library reopens the ticket and increments the ticket’s duplicate
count. If the library has not reopened the ticket, the value is zero (0).
Tickets that are in the Closed or Verified state for more than 30 minutes
cannot be reopened. In this case, if the identical problem occurs again, the
library creates a new ticket.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
59
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
Element
Description
FRU SN
The serial number of the particular FRU.
Repair Link
The name of the repair page that is associated with the ticket.
FRU Status
The status of the FRU. Possible statuses are:
• Failed
• Degraded
• Warning
• Good
Error Code
A number that is associated with a particular issue that caused the ticket
report. Because more than one issue can cause a report, an error code
provides another level of detail to what the report provides. The error code
maps to a portion of library firmware code, which a trained analyst can
examine to determine the root cause of an issue. If the ticket is in the Closed
or Verified state, this field is set to N/A. This information is for technical
support use only.
FRU Logical SN
The logical serial number that the library assigns to a drive in a specific
location. This is not the serial number of the particular FRU (see FRU SN in
this table). If a drive is replaced by another drive in the same library location,
the logical serial number remains the same. From the host’s perspective, the
replacement drive is the same as the original one. This field appears for all
drive-related tickets only. If the logical serial number addressing feature is
disabled for the library, Disabled appears in this field.
Description area
A summary description of report information that is associated with the
ticket. It includes reason text that describes the cause of the ticket.
In the FRU History Ticket List area:
ID
The library-assigned identifier for the history ticket.
Description
A summary description of the history ticket. The description identifies the
FRU that caused the ticket and includes reason text that describes the cause
of the ticket.
All tickets that appear on the Details tab, including the ones in the FRU
History Ticket List area and the Ticket # area, see the same specific FRU.
State
60
The current state of the history ticket. All history tickets are in the Closed or
Verified state.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
Element
Description
Severity
The historical ticket’s current severity level.
Serial #
The serial number of the particular FRU.
Sub-system
The subsystem that caused the ticket. Possible subsystems are:
• Connectivity
• Drives
• Control
• Power
• Media
• Robotics
Posted Date
The date and time on which the library created the ticket.
From the Ticket Details dialog box, you can perform the following
tasks:
• Generate a QR code to send RAS ticket details by using the QR
Code button.
• Display detailed information for a history ticket by using the
Show button, and then redisplay the original ticket details
using the Initial Ticket button (see Viewing History Ticket
Details on page 62)
• Connect to online service and support resources by clicking
Online Support. Online service and support resources include
free, secure access to KnowledgeBase articles and the Online
Service Request tool. (If clicking Online Support does not
connect you to the online service and support website, try
disabling your Web browser’s pop-up blocker.)
• Mail, save, or print ticket information by using the Send button
(see Mailing, Saving, and Printing Ticket Information on
page 80)
• Determine whether the issue is resolved by using the FRU Test
button. FRU Test is available only if the ticket’s FRU has an
applicable verification test that you can run. (FRUs that belong
to the Accessor, Picker, Drive, I/E Assembly, or Bar Code Label
categories have applicable verification tests.) When you click
FRU Test, the Verification Tests dialog box appears with the
appropriate verification test already selected and ready to start.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
61
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
If you run a verification test and the results are all good, the
library automatically transitions the ticket to the Verified state.
For more information, see Working With Verification Tests on
page 622.
Note: If the library does not have a verification test for the
FRU, after you resolve the issue, you must manually
transition the ticket to the Closed state by using the
Close Ticket button. After you close the ticket, the
library transitions it to the Verified state if it is able to
do so. For more information about manually closing a
ticket, see Closing Tickets on page 83.
• Display report information (see Viewing Ticket Details Reports
on page 63)
• Display the repair page (see Viewing Ticket Repair Pages on
page 67)
Viewing History Ticket
Details
To display the detailed information for a particular history ticket,
perform the following steps:
1 On the Ticket List dialog box in the FRU History Ticket List area of
the Details tab, click the appropriate ticket row to highlight it and
click Show.
The history ticket details appear in the Ticket # area. However, the
list of tickets in the FRU History Ticket List remains the same as
what the initial ticket displayed. This list does not change. The
Report and Repair tabs show information that is specific to the
history ticket, but the Close Ticket and FRU Test buttons at the
62
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
bottom of the Ticket Details dialog box are grayed out because the
history ticket is in the Closed or Verified state already.
2 To return to the non-history ticket that appeared initially, click Initial
Ticket.
Viewing Ticket Details
Reports
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
The library creates a key report for each issue that occurs. As updates to
the issue occur, the library creates subordinate reports that it associates
with the key report. Typically, you should examine the key report
because it represents the earliest time at which the ticket reached its
highest severity level. It often isolates the most significant problem.
63
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
To display all report information that is associated with a ticket, click the
Report tab on the Ticket Details dialog box.
By default, the Report # area displays report details for either the key
report or, if subordinate reports exist, the most recent subordinate
report.
Table 5 on page 65 describes the elements on the Report tab.
64
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
Table 5 Report tab
Element
Description
In the Reports Tree area:
Report tree area
Provides a hierarchy of report information that is associated with the ticket.
Descriptions includes reason text that describes the cause of the report.
Initially, only the highest level of the report tree appears. Clicking this level
(Reports for Ticket #) reveals one or more second-level reports, and clicking a
second-level report reveals one or more third-level reports. Second-level reports
function essentially as containers of third-level reports. A ticket in the Open
state has one or more third-level reports, including one key report. The key
report represents the earliest time at which the ticket reached its highest
severity level. It often isolates the most significant problem. A ticket in the
Closed or Verified state does not have a key report.
In the Report # area:
Report ID
The library-assigned identifier for the report.
Posted
The date and time on which the library created the report.
Duplicates
For open tickets only, the number of times that the library created the same
report. If the identical issue occurs while the ticket remains open, the library
creates an identical report and increments the report’s duplicate count. If the
library has not created duplicate reports, the value is zero (0).
Status Group
The subsystem that caused the ticket. Possible subsystems are:
• Connectivity
• Drives
• Control
• Power
• Media
• Robotics
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
65
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
Element
Description
Severity
The severity level that is associated with the status group (subsystem). Possible
levels are:
• Failed
• Degraded
• Warning
• Good
FRU ID
The identifier for the FRU.
FRU Instance
In libraries with multiple FRUs of the same kind, the specific FRU that caused the
report. This field usually identifies a particular FRU by its location in the library
(for example, [1,1,1,8,1,1] for a drive sled). If the library has only one instance of
the FRU, this field is blank.
FRU Category
The category to which the FRU belongs.
Reason
A brief explanation of why the FRU caused the report. Reasons describe the
causes of issues.
Error Code
A number that is associated with a particular issue that caused the ticket report.
Because more than one issue can cause a report, an error code provides another
level of detail to what the report provides. The error code maps to a portion of
library firmware code, which a trained analyst can examine to determine the
root cause of an issue. This information is for technical support use only.
Modifier
A numerical qualifier, in hexadecimal format, that provides context for an error
condition. A modifier adds another level of detail to what the error code
provides. If a modifier does not exist for the error condition, this field is set to
“0x0”. This information is for technical support use only.
Repair Link
The name of the repair page that is associated with the report.
Report Description
A summary description of the report.
66
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
Viewing Ticket Repair
Pages
Repair pages provide problem descriptions and corrective actions that
you or a CSE can perform. To display the repair page that is associated
with a ticket, click the Repair tab on the Ticket Details dialog box.
The repair page provides the following information:
• The title at the top of the repair page is a brief description of the
issue.
• The Problem section describes the issue in more detail.
• The User and Customer Service Engineer Actions section provides
corrective actions that the user or the CSE can perform.
• The Customer Service Engineer Actions section provides
additional corrective actions that the CSE can perform. If you are a
user, do not perform these steps. Contact technical support for
assistance.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
67
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
Note: If you are a CSE, see the Scalar i2000/i6000 Maintenance
Guide for detailed maintenance action plans, and removal
and replacement procedures.
• The Technical Support Information section provides a
comprehensive list of FRUs that could be involved.
• Text on the repair pages can include links to specific Online Help
pages, which appear in place of the repair page when you click
them. Navigation buttons near the top of the Repair tab enable you
to access Online Help pages as follows:
• The Back button returns you to the previously viewed page
(either a previously viewed Online Help page or the repair page).
• The Next button returns you to the page that you were viewing
before you clicked the Back button.
• The Content button displays a table of contents for the Online
Help system.
Viewing Tape Alerts and
Generating Media
Integrity Analysis
Reports
A drive issues a tape alert whenever there is a problem encountered by
the drive. The problem can be with the drive, library, or with the tape
cartridge. You can view tape alerts on the Media Integrity Analysis tab of
the Ticket Details dialog box. You can also access Media Integrity
Analysis via Reports on the LMC menu. See Viewing Tape Alerts on
page 69 or Generating Media Integrity Analysis Reports on page 71.
Note: The Media Integrity Analysis feature (including viewing tape
alerts) requires an Advanced Reporting license key to use. For
more information, see Enabling Licenses on page 125.
You can use these reports to cross-reference tape alerts for drives and
tape cartridges over a specified period of time, in order to determine if
the problem belongs to the drive or to a specific tape cartridge.
Typically, tape alerts point to a drive problem if a specific drive exhibits
tape alerts against multiple pieces of media. Conversely, tape alerts
point to a media problem if a specific piece of media exhibits tape alerts
against multiple drives. See Generating Media Integrity Analysis Reports
on page 71.
68
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
Viewing Tape Alerts
To view tape alerts:
1 Click the Media Integrity Analysis tab on the Ticket Details dialog
box.
Note: The Media Integrity Analysis tab only appears on the
Ticket Details dialog box for drive subsystem tickets.
The Media Integrity Analysis view appears, displaying one of the
following:
• If the ticket contains a valid drive serial number and the drive is
present in the library, the view displays a list of drive SNs in the
left pane and media IDs in the right pane for which tape alerts
exist for the specified date range.
• If the drive serial number given in the ticket is invalid or if the
drive is not present in the library, the view displays the message,
“Invalid serial number or drive is no longer present.”
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
69
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
2 To change the date range, click the down arrow next to the date box
and select the range you want.
The Media Integrity Analysis tab displays the tape alert
information available for the selected range.
3 To sort the lists, click the column heading you want to sort.
70
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
4 To generate a report, click Report. The Report Criteria dialog box
appears.
Go to Generating Media Integrity Analysis Reports on page 71.
Generating Media Integrity Analysis Reports
Note: The Media Integrity Analysis feature requires an Advanced
Reporting license key to use. For more information, see
Enabling Licenses on page 125.
This function allows you to generate reports using the criteria described
in Table 7 on page 86.
To generate Media Integrity Analysis reports:
1 Do one of the following:
• On the Media Integrity Analysis tab of the Ticket Details
dialog box, click Report.
• On the menu bar, click Tools > Reports > Media > Integrity
Analysis. The Report Criteria dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
71
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
2 To view a report, select the report criteria described in Table 6 and
click View.
Table 6 Report Criteria
Element
Description
Range
Specifies the range of time to cover in the report. Choices include:
• Historical
• Current Month
• Last Month
• Last 3 Months
• Last 6 Months
• Last 12 Months
• Last 30 Days (default)
• Last 7 Days
72
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
Element
Description
Grouping
Determines which drive or tape cartridge to base the report. Choices include:
• All (default)
• Selected Drive by Physical SN—displays the Choose Drive dialog box
• Selected Media by Media ID—displays the Specify Media dialog box
Media ID,
Drive Physical SN,
Tape Alert
check boxes
Selected in any combination to determine which values are included in the
report. (All=default)
Type
Type of report. Choices include:
• Rollup — displays the values based on which of the above check boxes,
Media ID, Drive Physical SN, and/or Tape Alert, that you have selected
(default)
• Trend — shows the occurrence of tape alerts over time
Sort By
How the report is sorted. Choices include:
• Alphabetically (default)
• Count
• Last Occurrence
Chart
Determines the type of chart. Choices include:
• Area
• Bar
• Bar 3D
• Line
• Stacked Area
• Stacked Bar
• Stacked Bar 3D
• Pie
• Pie 3D (default)
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
73
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
The Report Viewer dialog box appears. The content and
appearance of the report varies depending on the selected criteria.
3 Click Preview. The report appears in the Media Integrity Analysis
Print Preview window.
74
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
4 To navigate through the report, click the Next or Back icons on the
toolbar. The next or previous page appears.
5 To increase or decrease the magnification of the report, click the
Zoom In or Zoom Out buttons.
6 In the report viewer, you can perform the following tasks:
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
75
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
• To print the report, click the Print icon on the toolbar. Refer to
Printing Media Integrity Analysis Reports on page 76.
• To save the report as an Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF)
file, click the Adobe PDF icon on the toolbar. Refer to. Creating
Report PDFs on page 76.
• To export the report, refer to Exporting a Report to an E-mail or
a Text File on page 89.
• To save the report template, refer to Saving a Report Template
on page 89.
Printing Media Integrity Analysis Reports
To print a tape alert report:
1 In the Media Integrity Analysis Reports Print Preview window,
click the Print button. The local system’s print dialog box appears.
2 Follow the prompts.
Note: The Print function is not available on the touch screen.
Creating Report PDFs
To create a PDF of a report:
1 In the Media Integrity Analysis Print Preview window, click the
PDF button. The Saving Report into a PDF-File dialog box appears.
76
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
2 Click Select File. The Save dialog box appears.
3 In the Save dialog box, browse to the location where you want to
save the file, type the filename, and click Save.
4 In the Saving Report into a PDF-File dialog box, enter the settings
you want and click Confirm. The PDF file is saved in the specified
location.
Note: The PDF function is not available on the touch screen.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
77
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
Exporting Media Integrity Analysis Reports
You can export the report data as a comma-delimited text (.CSV) file
that you can open in Microsoft Excel. This function allows you to:
• E-mail the file as an attachment
• Save the file to a folder
To export report data:
In the Report Criteria dialog box, select the range and grouping
you want to export and click Export. The Export Raw Data dialog
box appears.
Note: The only criteria that the export function uses are range
and grouping.
To e-mail the data:
1 Select Email.
2 Type the e-mail address or click the down arrow and select the email address from the drop-down list.
3 If you want, type a comment.
4 Click OK.
To save the data to a folder:
1 Select Save.
2 Type the file name in the text box.
78
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
3 Click Browse. The Open dialog box appears.
4 In the Open dialog box, browse to the location where you want to
save the file, type the file name, and click Open.
5 Click OK.
Note: The Save function is not available on the touch screen.
Saving a Report Template
If you frequently generate the Media Integrity Analysis Report with the
same set of report criteria, save the criteria as a template. Loading the
template recalls the saved report criteria and lets you quickly generate a
report based on the saved criteria.
1 On the menu bar, click Tools > Reports > Media Integrity
Analysis. The Report Criteria dialog box appears.
2 Under Specify Report Criteria, click criteria options in the lists to
customize the content and appearance of the Media Integrity
Analysis Report.
Table 6 on page 72 summarizes the available report criteria options.
3 Under Templates, click Save.
4 Type a name for the template, and then click OK. The template
appears in the list under Templates.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
79
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
To load the saved report criteria at a later time, click the template in
the list, and then click View to generate the report.
5 To close the Report Criteria dialog box, click Cancel.
Mailing, Saving, and
Printing Ticket
Information
The Send button on the Ticket Details dialog box enables you to send
detailed ticket information, including all report details, to e-mail
addresses. If you are accessing the LMC from a remote client, Send also
enables you to save the information to a file or print it.
Note: You can mail, save, or print ticket information from a remote
client. However, you cannot save or print the information from
the library’s touch screen.
Ticket information that a user sends by using the Send button is
essentially the same as the information that the library automatically
provides in e-mail notifications (see E-mail Notifications on page 47).
The only differences are that the subject line states “Library RAS
Information” and the body of the message does not have a “REASON
FOR AUTOMATED E-MAIL” section, but it has a “REPAIR AND
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS ATTACHED” section.
The message body also includes the following information, which
provides details about the ticket and library conditions at the time of
the event:
• Ticket summary
• Ticket details, including status information
• Firmware versions, including MCB, RCU, CMB, and drive bricks
• Physical library configuration
• Library states, such as physical library online or offline, partitions
online or offline, or robotics varied on or varied off
• Time stamps of recent activity
• Report summary
• Report details for the ticket
The RAS repair page attachment is in HTML format.
80
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
Note: Before you perform the following procedure, you must make
sure that e-mail is appropriately configured in the LMC so that
the library can send ticket details to the recipient. See
Configuring E-mail on page 187.
To mail, save, or print information for a particular ticket, perform the
following steps:
1 Make sure that the Ticket Details dialog box displays information
for the ticket that you want to send. See Displaying Ticket Lists on
page 52 and Viewing Ticket Details on page 57.
2 Click Send. The Ticket Information dialog box appears.
3 Perform one of the following tasks:
• To indicate that you want to send the information as an e-mail
message to a recipient, select Email, and then either type an email address in the Email text box or select an existing address
from the drop-down list. You can type a comment in the
Comment text box to send with the information.
• To indicate that you want to save the information, select Save,
and then either type in the Save text box a path and a file name
to which you want the information saved or click Browse to
specify a location and a file name.
Note: The Save option is available to remote client users only.
It appears grayed out on the touch screen.
• To indicate that you want to send the information to a printer,
select Print.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
81
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
Note: The Print option is available to remote client users only.
It appears grayed out on the touch screen.
4 To send, click OK.
Running Verification
Tests to Determine
Issue Resolution
A ticket is always generated against a particular FRU when the library
detects an issue. Therefore, the library provides FRU tests that you can
run to determine whether the conditions that caused the ticket have
been resolved. Running the FRU tests is an important part of ensuring
that the system is working properly.
The library can detect issues under the following contexts:
• When the library polls at regular intervals, or
• When a host or user commands the library to perform an operation
(such as occurs with GUI commands, host inventory, and host move
media)
FRU tests are designed to help resolve issues under the second context.
During FRU testing, the library creates operational scenarios to evaluate
the functionality of a FRU. FRU tests attempt to evaluate as many
aspects of the FRU as possible, but they might not fully recreate the
conditions that caused the original ticket. The library cannot recreate all
conditions and, therefore, the library does not provide tests for some
FRUs.
The instructions on the ticket’s repair page direct you to run a FRU test if
an applicable one exists. If you run the test and the results are all good,
the library automatically transitions the ticket to the Verified state.
Note: If you cannot run a test, make sure that you complete the
repair page instructions and, if needed, physically examine the
FRU. After you determine that the issue is resolved, manually
transition the ticket to the Closed state. See Closing Tickets on
page 83. After you close the ticket, the library transitions the
ticket to the Verified state if it is able to do so.
You can access the tests in two ways:
• On the main LMC display, click Tools > Verification Tests. The
Verification Tests dialog box appears. From this dialog box, you can
choose from a variety of verification tests, including the FRU tests.
82
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
• On the Ticket Details dialog box, click FRU Test.
Note: The FRU Test button is available only if the ticket’s FRU has
an applicable verification test that you can run.
The Verification Tests dialog box appears with the appropriate test
already selected and ready to start.
For details about the verification tests and how to run them, see
Working With Verification Tests on page 622.
Closing Tickets
Manually close a ticket if all of the following conditions are true:
• You have completed the repair page instructions to resolve the issue
(for example, replaced a FRU).
• You have physically examined the FRU to make sure that the issue is
resolved.
• The FRU Test button on the Ticket Details dialog box is not
available. This means that an applicable verification test does not
exist.
Note: If the FRU Test button is available for a ticket, you should
use it to access and run the verification test. You should not
manually close it. The verification test determines whether
the issue is resolved, and the library automatically
transitions the ticket to the Verified state if the test passes
without problems. See Running Verification Tests to
Determine Issue Resolution on page 82.
• The issue has been resolved, but the ticket remains in an Open state
(for example, when defective media has been replaced in the
library).
You should manually transition a ticket to the Closed state after
performing the resolution steps and making sure the issue is resolved.
Closing Individual Tickets
To transition a ticket to the Closed state, perform the following steps:
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
83
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
1 Make sure that the Ticket Details dialog box displays information
for the open ticket that you want to close. See Displaying Ticket Lists
on page 52 and Viewing Ticket Details on page 57.
2 Click Close Ticket. The ticket’s state changes to Closed. If the library
is able to do so, it automatically transitions the closed ticket to the
Verified state.
Note: If the identical issue occurs again within 30 minutes after
the ticket transitions to the Closed or Verified state, the
library reopens the ticket and increments the ticket’s
duplicate count.
Tickets that are in the Closed or Verified state for more
than 30 minutes cannot be reopened. In this case, if the
identical problem occurs again, the library creates a new
ticket.
Closing Multiple Tickets
You can use this method when you have many tickets relating to the
same issue, for example, when you have many drives in a library or
many tape alerts.
To transition multiple tickets to the Closed state, do the following:
1 On the Ticket List dialog box, select each ticket you want to close by
clicking the check box.
See Displaying Ticket Lists on page 52 and Viewing Ticket Details on
page 57.
2 Click Close Tickets.
3 In the Attention message box, click Yes to confirm that you want to
close multiple tickets. The tickets’ state changes to Closed. If the
library is able to do so, it automatically transitions the closed tickets
to the Verified state.
Generating the Tickets
Report
84
The Tickets Report lets you see how many tickets occurred in a particular
time period. You can choose to group tickets by subsystem, module, or
FRU, and the results can be presented as a rollup summary or as a trend
so you can see if the number of issues is increasing or decreasing over
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
time. Also, the report results can be presented in different chart
formats, such as bar graphs or pie charts.
After generating a report, you can print it or save it as a PDF file. In
addition, you can save a set of report criteria as a template for reports
you frequently generate.
Specifying Tickets Report Criteria
To generate the Tickets Report, first specify the report criteria, and then
view the report.
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 On the menu bar, click Tools > Reports > Tickets. The Report
Criteria dialog box appears.
3 Under Specify Report Criteria, click criteria options in the lists to
customize the content and appearance of the Tickets Report.
Table 7 summarizes the available report criteria options.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
85
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
Table 7 Tickets Report Criteria
Options
Criteria
Description
Range
Specifies the range of time to cover in the report. Choices include:
• Historical
• Current Month
• Last Month
• Last 3 Months
• Last 6 Months
• Last 12 Months
• Last 30 Days (default)
• Last 7 Days
Grouping
Determines how tickets are grouped in the report. Choices include:
• Subsystem (default)—tickets are grouped according to subsystem
• FRU Category—tickets are grouped according to FRU category
• FRU Id—tickets are grouped according to FRU ID
• Serial Number—tickets are grouped according to module serial number
• Selected Drive by Physical SN—tickets are grouped according to drive serial
number (displays the Choose Drive dialog box)
Attribute
Determines how tickets are identified in the report. Choices include:
• All (default)—tickets are separated according to attribute (Failed,
Degraded, Warning, or Other)
• Total—tickets are not separated according to attribute
Type
Specifies the type of report. Choices include:
• Rollup (default)—displays the values based on the selected grouping
• Trend—shows the occurrence of tickets over time (grouping criteria is not
used)
86
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
Criteria (Continued)
Description
Chart
Determines the type of chart. Choices include:
• Area
• Bar
• Bar 3D
• Line
• Stacked Area
• Stacked Bar (default)
• Stacked Bar 3D
• Pie
• Pie 3D
4 Click View. The Report Viewer dialog box appears. The content and
appearance of the report varies depending on the selected criteria.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
87
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
5 When you are finished viewing the Tickets Report, click Close.
6 To close the Report Criteria dialog box, click Cancel.
Printing or Exporting a Report to PDF
After generating the Tickets Report, you can print it or export it to a PDF
file.
1 On the Report Viewer dialog box, click Preview. The Print Preview
dialog box appears.
2 Do one or more of the following:
• To navigate through the pages of the report, click Back or Next.
• To increase or decrease the magnification of the report, click
Zoom In or Zoom Out.
• To print the report, click Print. Specify print options, and then
click OK.
88
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
• To save the report as a PDF file, click PDF. Specify a file path and
file name, and then click Confirm.
3 When you are finished working with the Print Preview dialog box,
click Close.
Note: You cannot print reports or save them to a PDF file using the
touch screen.
Exporting a Report to an E-mail or a Text File
Instead of viewing the report as a chart, you can e-mail the report data
to an e-mail address. Or export the report data to a comma delimited
text file (*.csv) for use in other programs.
1 On the menu bar, click Tools > Reports > Tickets. The Report
Criteria dialog box appears.
2 Under Specify Report Criteria, click criteria options in the lists to
customize the content and appearance of the Tickets Report.
Table 7 on page 86 summarizes the available report criteria options.
3 Click Export. The Export Raw Data dialog box appears.
4 Do one of the following:
• To send the report data to an e-mail address, click Email. Type or
select the e-mail address, type an optional comment in the
Comment box, and then click OK.
• To save the report data to a comma delimited text file, click
Save. Specify a file path and file name, and then click OK.
5 To close the Report Criteria dialog box, click Cancel.
Saving a Report Template
If you frequently generate the Tickets Report with the same set of report
criteria, save the criteria as a template. Loading the template recalls the
saved report criteria and lets you quickly generate a report based on the
saved criteria.
1 On the menu bar, click Tools > Reports > Tickets. The Report
Criteria dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
89
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
2 Under Specify Report Criteria, click criteria options in the lists to
customize the content and appearance of the Tickets Report.
Table 7 on page 86 summarizes the available report criteria options.
3 Under Templates, click Save.
4 Type a name for the template, and then click OK. The template
appears in the list under Templates.
5 To load the saved report criteria at a later time, click the template in
the list, and then click View to generate the report.
6 To close the Report Criteria dialog box, click Cancel.
Suppressing Tickets and
Ticket Notifications
By default, the library provides notifications whenever a problem occurs.
Notifications include:
• For Severity 1 issues, an e-mail is sent to Quantum Technical Support
(techsup@quantum.com). This is set up by default in the Setup >
Notifications > System Setup dialog box, Rules tab. See Setting
Up E-mail Notifications on page 190 for more information.
• An e-mail is sent to individuals that you have set up in the Setup >
Notifications > System Setup dialog box, Rules tab. See Setting
Up E-mail Notifications on page 190 for more information.
• A ticket is generated (see Viewing Ticket Details on page 57 for
more information).
You can suppress these notifications and ticket generation as follows:
1 Select Setup > Notifications > Tickets Filter.
2 The Suppress Tickets Filter dialog box appears. The displayed table
lists all tickets that have ever been issued for your library, plus all
tickets pertaining to Tape Alerts (indicated by the Tape Alert number
in the TA# column). Tape Alert tickets are listed even if they were
not issued for the library.
Note: The list does not update dynamically. You can click the
Refresh button to update the list
90
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Tickets
Figure 22 Suppress Tickets
Filter
3 Filter the displayed list by selecting an option from the Category
drop-down list in the Table Filter section. Options include All
(default) or any of the six system status categories (Connectivity,
Control, Media, Drives, Power, and Robotics).
4 For each ticket that you want to suppress, choose a suppression
option from the drop-down list in the Suppression Option column.
Options include:
• Tech Support E-mail — No e-mail notification will be sent to
Technical Support for this ticket.
• E-mail — No e-mail notification will be sent to Technical
Support or to the individuals configured in the Setup >
Notifications > System Setup, Rules tab for this ticket.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
91
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
• Ticket — No RAS ticket will be generated. Additionally, no email notification will be sent to Technical Support or to the
individuals configured in the Setup > Notifications > System
setup, Rules tab.
5 Once you have chosen a suppression option, click somewhere else in
the table and the row containing the ticket you suppressed turns a
color corresponding to the suppression option (colors are identified
in the legend at the top of the table).
6 Click OK.
Interpreting LEDs
LEDs can help you assess the state of a library component. The primary
library LEDs can be grouped as follows:
• Interpreting Blade Status LEDs on page 92
• Interpreting Drive Status LEDs on page 95
• Interpreting Fibre Port Link LEDs on page 99(for Fibre drives and
Fibre Channel I/O blades)
• Interpreting Ethernet Expansion Blade LEDs on page 102
• Interpreting MCB Port LEDs on page 103
• Interpreting LBX Terminator LEDs on page 105
• Interpreting Power Supply LEDs on page 110
• Interpreting Gen 2 Robot Status LEDs on page 112
Interpreting Blade
Status LEDs
Each of the following library blades has a set of green, amber, and blue
LEDs that indicate blade processor status, health status, and power
control status:
• Management control blade (MCB)
• Control management blade (CMB)
• Fibre Channel (FC) I/O blade
92
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
• Ethernet Expansion blade
• Robotics control unit (RCU)
• Library motor drive (LMD)
• Library power control (LPC)
Figure 23 shows the locations and colors of the status LEDs on the five
blades that can be in the library.
Figure 23 Locations and Colors
of Blade Status LEDs
management control blade
robotics control unit
library motor drive
blade LEDs
- left = green
- middle = amber
- right = blue
blade LEDs
- left = blue
- middle = amber
- right = green
Ethernet Expansion Blade
FC I/O Blade
Control Management Blade
Blade status LEDs provide troubleshooting information that you can use
in conjunction with tickets that the library creates. However, the LEDs
might not directly correspond to tickets. The LEDs can indicate a
firmware or hardware problem so severe that the library cannot create
or display a ticket. For example, if the MCB firmware becomes
inoperable, the amber LED flashes at 1 Hz, but the library might not be
able to display any related tickets.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
93
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
For a description of each LED color and what its state might mean, see
Table 8 on page 94. For a description of how the blade status LEDs
appear under normal conditions, see Table 9 on page 95.
Table 8 Explanations of Blade
Status LED States
LED Color
Represents
Possible States and Explanations
Green
Processor status
• Solid off — blade’s main processor is not operating (or
blade is booting)
• Solid on — blade’s main processor is not operating
(however, this does not apply to the LMD; solid on
indicates that the LMD’s main processor is operating
normally)
• Blinks one time every second (1 Hz) — blade’s main
processor is operating normally
• Blinks 10 times every second (10 Hz) — identify mode
• Solid on for three seconds, then blinks twice at 1 Hz, and
then repeats — blade firmware is downloading
Amber
Health status
• Solid off — blade’s power and control subsystem is
operating normally
• Solid on — blade’s power and control subsystem has failed
Solid on also can mean that the blade’s power and control
subsystem firmware is autoleveling. In conjunction with
the blue amber LED blinking one time every 10 seconds,
this is a normal condition.
Autoleveling takes about three minutes for each blade,
and blades within an I/O management unit autolevel in
series. It can take as long as three minutes for the power
and control subsystem to download. Never remove a blade
when the amber LED is solid on unless it has been on
continuously for at least 10 minutes.
Blue
Power control status
• Solid off — blade is not receiving power
• Solid on — blade is powered down; ready to be replaced
(swap mode)
• Blinks one time every 10 seconds (flash) — blade is
powered on; operating normally
94
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
Table 9 Blade Status LED
States - Normal Conditions
LED Color
State and Explanation
Green
Blinks one time every second (1 Hz) — blade’s main processor is operating normally
(however, this does not apply to the LMD; solid on indicates that the LMD’s main
process is operating normally)
Note: If there are issues during an update using an embedded flash, the green LED is
solid for two seconds, and then off for one second.
Amber
Solid off — no errors are detected; blade’s power and control subsystem is operating
normally
Blue
Blinks one time every 10 seconds (flash) — blade is powered on; operating normally
Actions Based on LED States
When the RAS system is operating properly, service actions should be
based on tickets first and foremost. However, some situations occur
when the amber LED indicates problems that are not detected by the
ticket system. You should always act on any amber LED that is solidly on,
which indicates that the blade’s power and control subsystem has
failed. In this case, replace the blade.
When you replace a blade FRU or escalate a problem based on LED
states, perform the following steps:
1 Observe and report the timing pattern of the blue, amber, and
green LED group. Spend at least 30 seconds observing the LEDs and
record the results in the service request (SR) and on any equipment
failure report form that you return with the part. Proper reporting
of all LED states is critical for determining the root cause of the
failure.
2 Capture a system snapshot and send it to technical support for
analysis.
Interpreting Drive
Status LEDs
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
The library reports all drive issues that can affect customer operations.
In addition to examining library reports, you should observe drive sled
link LED and status LED activity.
95
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
Note: The blinking codes described in Table 10 on page 98 are the
same for Fibre Channel and SCSI drives in the UDS-2 drive sleds.
Figure 24 shows the locations of the status LEDs and the Fibre Channel
link LED on the rear of a UDS-2 drive sled.
Figure 24 Rear View of Fibre
Channel Drive Sled (UDS-2)
status LEDs:
- top = blue
- middle = amber
- bottom = green
fibre port
FC link LED
Figure 25 shows the locations of the status LEDs and the Fibre Channel
link LED on the rear of a UDS-3 drive sled.
96
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
Figure 25 Rear View of Fibre
Channel Drive Sled (UDS-3 LTO4 and LTO-5 Drives)
LTO-4
status LEDs:
- top = blue
- middle = amber
- bottom = green
fibre port
fibre ports
LTO-5
1
2
EEB port
Table 10 on page 98 describes how to interpret the drive sled status LED
activity that you might see on the rear of a UDS-2 or UDS-3 drive sled.
For a description of how the blade status LEDs appear under normal
conditions, see Table 11 on page 98. For information about interpreting
the drive link LED, see Drive Sled Fibre Channel Link LED on page 99.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
97
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
Table 10 Drive Sled Status LED
States (UDS-2 and UDS-3)
LED Color
Represents
Possible States and Explanations
Green
Processor status
• Solid off — drive sled’s main processor is not operating (or
blade is booting)
• Solid on — drive sled’s main processor is not operating
• Blinks one time every second (1 Hz) — drive sled’s main
processor is operating normally
• Blinks 10 times every second (10 Hz) — identify mode
• Solid on for three seconds, then blinks twice at 1 Hz, and
then repeats — drive sled or drive brick firmware is
downloading
• Blinks three times in three seconds (1 Hz), then pauses
(solid off), and then repeats — drive brick is activating
(varying on)
Amber
Health status
• Solid off — drive sled’s controller (drive DC to DC converter
[DDC]) is operating normally
• Solid on — drive sled’s DDC has failed
Blue
Power control status
• Solid off — drive sled is not receiving power
• Solid on — drive brick is powered down; ready to be
replaced (swap mode) or varied on
• Blinks one time every 10 seconds (flash) — drive brick is
powered on; operating normally
Table 11 Drive Sled Status LED
States - Normal Conditions
LED Color
State and Explanation
Green
Blinks one time every second (1 Hz) — drive sled’s main processor is operating
normally. The green LEDs for all drive sleds that are operating normally blink together.
Amber
Solid off — no errors are detected; drive sled’s controller is operating normally.
Blue
Blinks one time every 10 seconds (flash) — drive sled is powered on; operating
normally.
98
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
Interpreting Fibre Port
Link LEDs
A fibre port link LED shows the state of the Fibre Channel link and
whether the link is ready to transmit commands.
Drive Sled Fibre Channel Link LED
The Fibre Channel link LED for a drive sled is located on the rear of the
drive sled. Figure 24 on page 96 shows the location of the Fibre Channel
link LED on the rear of the UDS-2 drive sled, and Figure 25 on page 97
shows the location of the Fibre Channel link LED on the rear of the UDS3 drive sled.
Table 12 describes how to interpret the Fibre Channel link LED activity
that you might see on the rear of the UDS-2 drive sled. Table 13 on
page 100 on page 135 describes the Fibre Channel link LED activity on
the rear of the UDS-3 drive sled.
Table 12 Explanation of Fibre
Drive Sled Link LED States
(UDS-2)
LED Color
Represents
State and Explanation
Green
LIP and
activity
• Solid on — loop initialization protocol (LIP) has occurred.
Online and
light
detected
• Solid on — the library has enabled the drive data bus; it can detect
light through a fiber optic cable.
Amber
No color
• Blinks at irregular intervals — host command/data activity is
occurring.
• Solid off — the drive brick is varied off or the drive cannot detect
light through a fiber optic cable (equivalent to no fibre cable plugged
in). If the drive brick is varied off, the blue status LED will be solid on.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
99
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
Table 13 Explanation of Fibre
Drive Sled Link LED States
(UDS-3)
LED Color
Represents
State and Explanation
Green
LIP and
activity
• Solid on — loop initialization protocol (LIP) has occurred.
Online and
light
detected
• Solid on — the library has enabled the drive data bus; it can detect
light through a fiber optic cable.
Amber
No color
• Blinks at irregular intervals — host command/data activity is
occurring.
• Blinks at regular intervals — the library has enabled the drive data
bus, but light is not detected through the fiber optic cable.
• Solid off — the library has not enabled the drive data bus or the drive
brick is varied off. If the drive brick is varied off, the blue status LED
will be solid on.
Note: A UDS-2 drive with no fiber optic cable plugged in is healthy if
the link LED is solid off. A UDS-3 drive with no fiber optic cable
plugged in is healthy if the LED is amber and blinking at regular
intervals, indicating that the library has enabled the drive data
bus, but no light is detected.
FC I/O Blade Fibre Port Link LED
The link LED for an FC I/O blade fibre port is located next to the port. On
the I/O blade faceplate, black lines indicate how each link LED belongs
to a port. Figure 26 shows the locations of the I/O blade Fibre port link
LEDs.
100
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
Figure 26 Locations - Colors of
I/O Blade Fibre Port Link LEDs
I/O blade link LEDs
- left = green (belongs
to port below)
- right = green (belongs
to port above)
Table 14 on page 101 describes how to interpret the link LED activity
that you might see. There is one supported model of FC I/O blade: 7404.
LED behavior varies based on which model is installed in the library.
Table 14 FC I/O Blade Link LED
States
FC I/O Blade
Model
Possible Green LED States and Explanations
7404
4 gigabit/sec
• Solid on — the FC I/O blade has established a link but is not currently
transporting data.
• Blinks — the link is active and is currently transporting data.
• Solid off — the FC I/O blade has not established a link OR the link is active and is
currently transporting a large amount of data.
Note: For the 7404 FC I/O blade, fibre port LEDs are off while the
blade is booting up.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
101
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
Interpreting Ethernet
Expansion Blade LEDs
The status LEDs for an Ethernet Expansion blade are located at the top
of the EEB above ETH 6. Figure 27 shows the locations of the EEB status
LEDs.
Figure 27 Location of Ethernet
Expansion Blade Status LEDs
EEB status LEDs
Ethernet
Port status LEDs
Table 15 Ethernet Expansion
Blade LED States
Blue
Green
Amber
Description
Off
Off
Off
No power
1 Hz
Off
Off
Powered Down - Ready for removal
102
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
Blue
Green
Amber
Description
Off
Off
On
Booting
Flash
1 Hz
Off
Normal
Flash
10 Hz
Off
Normal - Identify
Table 16 Ethernet Expansion
Blade Ethernet Port LED States
LED Color
Possible States and Explanations
Green
• Solid on — the link is up; data can be sent or received through the Ethernet port
• Solid off — the link is not up; data cannot be sent or received through the Ethernet
port
Amber
• Flashes at irregular intervals — data activity is occurring through the Ethernet port
• Solid off — no data activity is occurring through the Ethernet port
Interpreting MCB Port
LEDs
The MCB has LEDs for the Ethernet, Fibre Channel, and SCSI ports.
MCB Ethernet Port LEDs
The LEDs on the MCB Ethernet port indicate status and activity.
Figure 28 shows the locations and colors of the MCB Ethernet port LEDs.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
103
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
Figure 28 Locations - Colors of
MCB Ethernet Port LEDs
MCB Ethernet
port LEDs
- top = green
- bottom = amber
Table 17 describes how to interpret the Ethernet port LED activity that
you might see.
Table 17 Explanations of MCB
Ethernet Port LED States
LED Color
Possible States and Explanations
Green
• Solid on — the link is up; data can be sent or received through the Ethernet port
• Solid off — the link is not up; data cannot be sent or received through the Ethernet
port
Amber
• Flashes at irregular intervals — data activity is occurring through the Ethernet port
• Solid off — no data activity is occurring through the Ethernet port
104
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
MCB Fibre Channel and SCSI Port LEDs
The LEDs for the MCB Fibre Channel and SCSI ports are for future use.
Ignore LED behaviors that might appear. Figure 29 shows the locations
and colors of the LEDs.
Figure 29 Locations - Colors
MCB FC / SCSI Port LEDs
MCB port LEDs
- left = green (belongs to
SCSI port below)
- right = green (belongs
to FC port above)
Interpreting LBX
Terminator LEDs
The LBX terminator has three versions. Version 01 has four LEDs and
Versions 03 and 2.0 have six LEDs. For more information, see the Scalar
i2000/i6000 Maintenance Guide.
LBX Terminator Version 01 LEDs
The LBX terminator has four green LEDs that indicate the presence of
modules in the library. Figure 30 on page 106 shows the locations of the
LEDs. Table 18 on page 106 describes how to interpret LED activity on
the LBX terminator.
The terminator must be located in the LBX of the last expansion module.
The LED status should reflect the physical installed module count of the
system.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
105
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
Figure 30 Locations of LBX
Terminator LEDs (Version 01)
4
3
2
1
Table 18 Explanations of LBX
Terminator LED States (Version
01)
LED On/Off Combinations
1
2
3
4
Explanation
Off
Off
Off
Off
Robotics are disabled, the access door is open, or the LBX
terminator is misaligned.
On
Off
Off
Off
The library has one control module and no expansion modules.
On
On
Off
Off
The library has one control module and one expansion module.
On
On
On
Off
The library has one control module and two expansion modules.
On
On
On
On
The library has one control module and three expansion modules.
On
Off
On
On
The library has one control module and four expansion modules.
On
On
Off
On
The library has one control module and five expansion modules.
On
Off
On
Off
The library has one control module and six expansion modules.
On
Off
Off
On
The library has one control module and seven expansion modules.
106
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
LBX Terminator Version 03 LEDs
The LBX terminator has six green LEDs that indicate the presence of
modules in the library. Figure 31 shows the locations of the LEDs.
Table 19 on page 107 describes how to interpret LED activity on the LBX
terminator.
Figure 31 Locations of LBX
Terminator LEDs (Version 03)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Table 19 Explanations of LBX
Terminator LED States (Version
03)
LED On/Off Combinations
1
2
3
4
5
6
Explanation
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Robotics are disabled, the access door is open, or the LBX
terminator is misaligned.
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
The library has one control module and no expansion modules.
On
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
The library has one control module and one expansion module.
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
The library has one control module and two expansion modules.
On
Off
Off
On
On
On
The library has one control module and three expansion modules.
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
The library has one control module and four expansion modules.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
107
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
LED On/Off Combinations
1
2
3
4
5
6
Explanation
On
Off
Off
On
Off
On
The library has one control module and five expansion modules.
On
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
The library has one control module and six expansion modules.
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
The library has one control module and seven expansion modules.
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
The library has one control module and eight expansion modules.
On
On
Off
On
Off
Off
The library has one control module and nine expansion modules.
On
On
Off
On
On
Off
The library has one control module and ten expansion modules.
On
On
Off
On
On
On
The library has one control module and eleven expansion
modules.
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
The library has one control module and twelve expansion
modules.
On
On
Off
On
Off
On
The library has one control module and thirteen expansion
modules.
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
The library has one control module and fourteen expansion
modules.
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
The library has one control module and fifteen expansion
modules.
LBX Terminator Version 2 LEDs
The LBX terminator has six blue LEDs that indicate the presence of
modules in the library. Figure 32 shows the locations of the LEDs.
Table 20 on page 109 describes how to interpret LED activity on the LBX
terminator.
108
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
Figure 32 Locations of LBX
Terminator LEDs (Version 2)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Table 20 Explanation of LBX
Terminator LED States
(Version 2)
LED On/Off Combinations
1
2
3
4
5
6
Explanation
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Robotics are disabled, the access door is open, or the LBX
terminator is misaligned.
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
The library has one control module and no expansion modules.
On
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
The library has one control module and one expansion module.
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
The library has one control module and two expansion modules.
On
Off
Off
On
On
On
The library has one control module and three expansion modules.
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
The library has one control module and four expansion modules.
On
Off
Off
On
Off
On
The library has one control module and five expansion modules.
On
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
The library has one control module and six expansion modules.
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
The library has one control module and seven expansion modules.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
109
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
LED On/Off Combinations
1
2
3
4
5
6
Explanation
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
The library has one control module and eight expansion modules.
On
On
Off
On
Off
Off
The library has one control module and nine expansion modules.
On
On
Off
On
On
Off
The library has one control module and ten expansion modules.
On
On
Off
On
On
On
The library has one control module and eleven expansion
modules.
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
The library has one control module and twelve expansion
modules.
On
On
Off
On
Off
On
The library has one control module and thirteen expansion
modules.
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
The library has one control module and fourteen expansion
modules.
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
The library has one control module and fifteen expansion
modules.
Interpreting Power
Supply LEDs
Power supply problems are reported in tickets. To physically identify a
power supply, note the power supply number and module number in
the ticket details. Modules can have up to two power supplies each. The
top supply is #1 and the bottom supply is #2.
Figure 33 shows the locations and colors of the AC power supply LEDs.
110
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
Figure 33 Locations and Colors
of Power Supply LEDs
power supply LEDs
- top (AC OK) = green
- middle (DC OK) = green
- bottom (FAULT) = blue
Table 21 describes how to interpret LED activity that you might see.
Table 21 Explanation of Power
Supply LED States
LED Color
Represents
Possible States and Explanations
Green
AC OK
• Solid on — power supply’s AC input is above minimum requirements
to operate
(top LED)
Green
(middle LED)
• Solid off — power supply’s AC input is below minimum
requirements to operate
DC OK
• Solid on — power supply’s output voltage is within specifications
• Solid off — power supply’s output voltage is outside of
specifications
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
111
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
LED Color
Represents
Possible States and Explanations
Blue
(bottom
LED)
Fault
• Solid on — indicates any of the following conditions:
• Power supply output is outside of specifications
• Current limit has been exceeded
• Temperature limit has been exceeded
• Fan failed while AC input is present and above minimum operating
voltage
• AC input is below minimum operating voltage
• PDU is on, but the Power button on the library’s indicator panel is
off
• Solid off — no faults are detected
Interpreting Gen 2
Robot Status LEDs
The Gen 2 robot has six status LEDs on the front plate of the picker on
the robot itself (see Figure 34). These LEDs are described in Table 22.
If there are no problems with the robot, the LEDs should display as
follows:
• If this is a left-side robot, the Left Position LED should be ON
• If this is a right-side robot, the Right Position LED should be ON
• The Sensors Engaged, Robot Power, and Robot Rail Engaged LEDs
should all be ON
• The Sensors Disengaged LED should be OFF
If any of the LEDs are incorrectly illuminated, Quantum Support will
need to troubleshoot, adjust, and possibly replace components to make
sure all LEDs are correctly illuminated. Table 22 describes what the LEDs
mean and how to troubleshoot them.
112
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
Figure 34 Robot Status LEDs
Robot LEDs
Table 22 Robot Status LEDs
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
LED
When ON, indicates the following
Right Position
Indicates this is a right-side robot.
Sensors Engaged
The Lock/Unlock handle is in the fully Locked
position, and the home/parking sensors are
positioned correctly for robot operations. It is
safe to use the robot for library operations.
Robot Power
Robot control power is ON.
Power Rail Engaged
Connection to power rail is OK
Left Position
Indicates this is a left-side robot.
Sensors Disengaged
The robot’s X-axis home/parking sensors are
disengaged. The robot locking lever is fully
unlocked. It is safe to remove the robot from
the library.
113
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Interpreting LEDs
Interpreting HDEM
Tower Enable Button
Blinking Pattern
The high-density expansion module (HDEM) operator panel contains a
button that allows users to vary on and off the tower (see Figure 35 on
page 114). The tower enable button has two colors: Amber (varied off)
and green (varied on). Table 23 on page 114 describes what the blinking
pattern mean and how to troubleshoot them.
Figure 35 HDEM Operator
Panel with Tower Enable
Button
Table 23 HDEM Status LEDs
114
Lighting Pattern
Description
OFF, solid
Tower is not functioning properly or
powered off completely
GREEN, solid
Tower is fully active, varied on and online
BLINKING GREEN
(1 sec on, 1 sec off)
Tower is initializing/activating to an online
or offline, varied on state
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Command History Logs
Lighting Pattern
Description
AMBER, solid
Tower is varied off, online or offline. Vary off
status trumps online/offline status display.
Note: It does not matter if the tower is
offline or offline if it is varied off or
being varied off.
BLINKING GREEN
(3 sec ON, 1 sec OFF
Tower is varied on and UI takes the tower
offline
BLINKING AMBER
(10 HZ frequency)
Tower door is opened while tower is still
varied on, or is currently in performing a
vary-on or vary-off operation before
completing the state transition, regardless
of being logically online or offline, hereby
interrupting tower motor control.
BLINKING (3 secs
AMBER, 1 sec GREEN)
Aisle door opened while tower is varied on,
regardless of being logically online or
offline, hereby interrupting tower motor
control.
Note: If the tower was varied off before
the aisle power was interrupted, the
tower continues to display the vary
off blink pattern.
10 Hz blinking pattern
Tower identification initiated
Working With Command History Logs
The Command History Log dialog box enables you to view command
and response activity that has occurred with externally addressable
library devices, including the LMC, controller LUNs, partitions, and
drives. This information can help you isolate the source of an issue, such
as a library device or host application.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
115
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Command History Logs
Note: The number of selected drives affects the performance of the
Command History Log.To ensure proper operations, limit drive
log requests to twenty-five.
Viewing Command
History Logs
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 You can perform this procedure while viewing either the physical
library or a partition. From the View menu, click the name of the
physical library or the appropriate partition.
3 Click Tools > Command History Log. The Command History Log
dialog box appears.
The first example dialog box that follows represents the physical
view, and the second one represents a partition view. These
examples show expanded levels for “Controller LUNs”, “Partitions”,
and “Tape Drives”. Initially, these areas are not expanded. Click the
highest-level items to show next-level items.
116
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Command History Logs
If logical serial number addressing is enabled on the Physical
Library dialog box (Setup > System Settings > Physical Library),
tape drives are listed according to their logical serial numbers. If
logical serial number addressing is disabled, the drives are listed
according to their physical serial numbers.
Also notice that command history logs for the LMC and the
controller LUNs are available only from the physical view.
Note: The library is a multi-LUN device. To meet SCSI standards, a
LUN 0 is allocated as a controller LUN on each blade,
including the MCB and the I/O blades. The command
history log for a controller LUN includes commands
intended for the blade, not a specific logical unit connected
to the blade.
4 To access the command history logs (for LMC, controller LUNs,
partitions, or tape drives), select one or more device check boxes,
and then click OK. A list of log files appears in the Command
History Log dialog box.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
117
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Command History Logs
From this log-list view of the Command History Log dialog box,
you can perform the following tasks:
• Display the contents of a log by clicking the Open button
(proceed to the next step)
• Mail or save a log by clicking the Send button (see Mailing and
Saving Logs on page 119)
5 Click a log file to highlight it, and then click Open. The contents of
the log file appear.
118
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Command History Logs
Mailing and Saving
Logs
The Send button on the log-list view of the Command History Log
dialog box enables you to send logs to e-mail addresses. If you are
accessing the LMC from a remote client, Send also enables you to save
the information to a file.
Note: You can mail or save logs from a remote client. However, you
cannot save logs from the library’s touch screen.
Note: Before you perform the following procedure, you must make
sure that e-mail is appropriately configured in the LMC so that
the library can send logs to the recipient. For more information
about configuring e-mail, see Configuring E-mail on page 187.
1 From the log-list view of the Command History Log dialog box,
click a log file to highlight it, and then click Send. The Email, Save
or Print Table dialog box appears.
2 Perform one of the following tasks:
• To indicate that you want to send the log as an e-mail message
to a recipient, select Email, and then either type an e-mail
address in the Email text box or select an existing address from
the drop-down list. You can type a comment in the Comment
text box to send with the log.
• To indicate that you want to save the log, select Save, and then
either type in the Save text box a path and a file name to which
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
119
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Working With Command History Logs
you want the information saved or click Browse to specify a
location and a file name.
Note: The Save option is available to remote client users only.
It appears grayed out on the touch screen.
3 To send, click OK.
120
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Accessing Online Help
Accessing Online Help
For further help, you can access the library’s Online Help system.
• To access the entire Online Help system, click Help > Content.
• To access context-sensitive help, click the Help button on any dialog
box.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
121
Chapter 2: Troubleshooting Your Library
Accessing Online Help
122
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3
Configuring Your Library
You can use either the local or remote versions of the Library
Management Console (LMC) to modify your library’s configuration. The
Setup menu includes most of the configuration commands.
This chapter consists of the following sections:
• Running the Setup Wizard on page 124
• Enabling Licenses on page 125
• Working With Partitions on page 128
• Understanding Partition Media Policy Settings on page 131
• Creating Partitions on page 134
• Modifying Partitions on page 147
• Deleting Partitions on page 155
• Configuring Control Paths on page 156
• Setting Up the Network Configuration on page 162
• Managing Connectivity on page 173
• Setting Up Policies for the Physical Library on page 180
• Specifying the Date and Time on page 185
• Configuring E-mail on page 187
• Setting Up E-mail Notifications on page 190
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
123
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Running the Setup Wizard
• Setting Up Media Security Notifications on page 196
• Configuring Devices on page 198
• Configuring Drive Cleaning on page 227
• Registering SNMP Traps on page 233
• Configuring Library Security on page 235
• Using LDAP on page 241
• Configuring Screen Saver Preferences on page 248
• Working With Data Path Conditioning on page 250
• About the Configuration Record on page 252
• Setting Aisle Lights on page 253
• Configuring a Webcam For Your Library on page 254
• Working with Towers on page 255
For a brief overview of the LMC, see Library Management Console (LMC)
on page 442.
If you are configuring your library for the first time, see the Scalar i6000
Installation Guide for information about performing an initial library
configuration.
Note: Only one administrator can be logged on and performing
library configuration at any one time. If another administrator
attempts to log on, a message appears, warning that only one
administrator at a time is permitted on the library. If a service
user logs on while an administrator or regular users are logged
on already, the library automatically logs off those users.
Running the Setup Wizard
Use the Setup Wizard command to initially configure important
settings on a library as part of the normal installation procedure. Before
you can manage your library from a remote LMC client, you must
initially configure the library from its touch screen by either running the
Setup Wizard command or using individual configuration commands
124
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Enabling Licenses
from the Setup menu. For detailed information about initially
configuring the library, see the Scalar i6000 Installation Guide.
Caution: Use the Setup Wizard only once to initially configure the
library.
Prerequisites
Before you run the Setup Wizard, do the following:
• Note the name and IP address of your network Domain Name Server
(DNS) or the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway for your
network segment.
• Verify that your network is attached to the library network
connection.
• Delete the default partition. Refer to Deleting Partitions on
page 155 for more information.
Accessing Setup Wizard
To access the setup wizard, log on as an administrator from the library’s
touch screen, make sure that you are viewing the physical library, and
then click Setup > Setup Wizard.
Enabling Licenses
In addition to the standard features, the following licensable features
are available:
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
License/Feature
For more information about this
feature, see...
Active Vault
Chapter 4, Active Vault.
Advanced Reporting
Chapter 5, Advanced Reporting
125
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Enabling Licenses
License/Feature
For more information about this
feature, see...
Automated Media Pool (AMP) /
Partition license
The Partition license allows you to
create from 2 to 16 partitions, and
gives you access to the Automated
Media Pool features. See
Chapter 6, Automated Media Pool.
Capacity on Demand (COD)
Chapter 7, Capacity on Demand
Encryption Key Management
Chapter 8, Encryption Key
Management.
Extended Data Lifecycle
Management (EDLM)
Chapter 9, Extended Data Lifecycle
Management.
Partition Utilization
Chapter 12, Partition Utilization
Reporting
Storage Networking (SNW)
Chapter 10, Path Failover
The following situations require you to enable license keys:
• During initial installation and configuration of the library. For more
information about enabling licenses for the first time, see the Scalar
i6000 Installation Guide
• During a feature upgrade
• When you need to activate additional storage slots in your current
COD configuration
If you cannot locate the license keys shipped with the library, you can
obtain them by contacting technical support or, if you are an end user,
by contacting your inside sales representative.
Note: Authorized service personnel are involved in the first two
situations. However, any administrator can activate additional
storage slots.
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 If you are not already working from the physical library, select it
from the View menu.
126
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Enabling Licenses
3 From the menu bar, click Setup > Licenses. The Licenses dialog box
appears.
This dialog box lists the licensed features for your library, including
their status, expiration date, and quantity. The following guidelines
apply to the Quantity column:
• Capacity on Demand displays the number of licensed slots.
• Encryption Key Management and Storage Networking
display the number of licensed drives.
• Partition quantity displays the number of licensed partitions.
• Extended Data Lifecycle Management and Advanced
Reporting quantity is always set to 1.
• For features that are not licensed by quantity but instead apply
to the entire library, such as the drive monitoring feature, the
Quantity is always set to 1.
4 In the Enter License Key text box, type the appropriate license key.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
127
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
Note: License keys are not case-sensitive, so if you are using the
library’s touch screen, enter the library key from the
lowercase keyboard, which gives you access to the dash (-)
character.
If you cannot locate the license keys shipped with the
library, you can obtain them by contacting technical
support (see Contacts on page xvii) or, if you are an end
user, by contacting your inside sales representative.
5 Click OK.
6 If you have upgraded the library’s storage capacity, the extra
storage slots you just added are not assigned to a partition. You can
either create a new partition to include them or manually modify an
existing partition to include them by using expert partitioning
mode.
Caution: Consult your service representative and see the
Scalar i6000 Planning Guide before you reconfigure
your partitions.
For more information, see Working With Partitions on page 128.
Working With Partitions
A partition is an abstraction of a single underlying physical library that
presents the appearance of multiple, separate libraries for purposes of
file management, access by multiple users, or dedication to one or more
host applications. For example, you can choose to run one software
application in one partition, and a different software application in a
second partition.
There are two types of partitions in the Scalar i6000 library:
• Standard partitions — Standard partitions are visible to hosts and
are used for normal backup operations. You can create standard
partitions via the setup wizard or manually using simple or expert
mode.
128
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
• Library managed partitions — Library managed partitions (LMPs)
are similar to other partitions, except they are not visible to backup
applications or hosts. The library manages the LMP, rather than the
backup application. The library uses the LMP to facilitate the
following value-added features, each of which requires its own
license:
• Active Vault on page 259
• Automated Media Pool on page 273
• Extended Data Lifecycle Management on page 327
You can create library managed partitions via the setup wizard or
manually using expert mode.
Each partition contains the following components of the physical
library:
• Accessor — the robotic assembly that moves media within the
library. The accessor includes the picker and reach assemblies.
• I/E station magazine — a magazine, consisting of slots for
cartridges, that enables media to be moved into or removed from
the physical library.
Note: Partitions do not require I/E station slots, but if you do not
assign any, you will need to bulk load/unload cartridges in
the partition, which requires taking the entire library
offline. I/E stations allow you to import and export
cartridges to and from a partition without taking the
library offline.
• Storage magazine — a static column location within a section of the
physical library rack that holds removable media. For more about
location coordinates, see Understanding Location Coordinates on
page 459.
• Drive — the read/write device for removable media.
Note: Partitions can be created that have zero (0) drives
allocated.
Note: Active Vault and Automated Media Pool (AMP) library
managed partitions do not contain drives.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
129
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
For more information about the library’s physical components, see the
Scalar i2000/i6000 Maintenance Guide. For help with planning before
you configure your system, see the Scalar i6000 Planning Guide.
A standard partition consists, at a minimum, of one storage magazine
and one drive. Neither the storage magazine nor the drive can be shared
with another partition.
Note: Active Vault and AMP partitions do not contain drives; they
must contain at least one storage magazine.
One 24-slot I/E station can be used by up to four partitions. One 72-slot
I/E station can be used by up to twelve partitions. The maximum
number of I/E station slots per partition is 240. The maximum number of
partitions is determined by the lesser of the number of drives available
in the physical library (assuming there are at least as many storage slots)
or 16.
Note: The library is licensed for either one partition or the maximum
number of partitions, which is 16. For more information about
partition licensing, see Enabling Licenses on page 125.
Gen 1 libraries support multiple drive and media domains. However,
drive and media domains cannot be mixed within a partition. Each Gen
1 partition can contain only one drive and media domain. Within that
domain, a partition can contain multiple drive interface types (FC and
SCSI) as well as multiple media types (for example, LTO-3, LTO-4, LTO-5,
and LTO-6).
Gen 2 libraries only support LTO drives and media. A single partition can
contain multiple drive interface types (FC and SCSI) as well as multiple
media types (for example, LTO-3, LTO-4, LTO-5, and LTO-6).
Configuration controls, such as FC Host and SNW (Storage Networking)
Host Access provide the means to permit host access to particular
partitions and tape drives. Multiple hosts can share a single partition, or
a partition can be restricted to one exclusive host. Host applications
control access to elements within the shared partition. Each application
can have a partition assigned to it. Each application uses its partition as
if it were a dedicated physical library.
Note: For information about creating library-managed encryption on
partitions, see Chapter 8, Encryption Key Management.
130
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
Understanding
Partition Media Policy
Settings
A partition’s Media Type Checking, Media Checking Policy, and
Return Media Identifier settings help determine how the library
handles differing media types within the same library. You can configure
media policy settings when you manually create or modify a partition.
The key concepts regarding partition media policies are the media
domain, media type, media ID checking, and media identifier.
Media Domain
Gen 2 libraries only support the LTO media domain.
Media Type
The media type is a particular generation of tape technology. Several
media types can exist within one media domain. For example, within the
LTO media domain is the LTO-1 media type, the LTO-2 media type, and
so forth. A media type has an identifier, chosen by the tape
manufacturer or consortium, that enables users and libraries to
distinguish between them. The LTO consortium uses L1, L2, L3, L4, L5,
L6 and L7 to identify the LTO-1, LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-4, LTO-5, LTO-6 and
LTO-7 media types in a volume serial number.
A single partition can contain a mixture of media types and interface
types within the same domain (for example, LTO-1 and LTO-2 with SCSI
or Fibre Channel interfaces).
To create or modify a partition with mixed media types, you must use
Expert mode (select Expert mode on the Partitions Wizard dialog box).
You cannot create or modify partitions with mixed media while in
Automatic mode or Simple mode.
Media ID Checking
Media ID checking policy restricts the movement of tape cartridges
based on the media ID on the barcode label. This policy also helps you
monitor the management of tapes and drives by the host applications.
When you create or modify a partition, you can enable or disable the
Media Type Checking option. If you choose to enable media type
checking, you also can use the Media Checking Policy option to select
from two modes of operation: Required or Not Required. With either
mode, the library checks whether a cartridge has a valid media ID on the
barcode label.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
131
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
In Required mode, if the library does not find a valid media ID on a
cartridge, the library does not allow it to be moved into or within the
library. If the library finds a valid media ID, the library allows it to be
moved from an I/E station into a partition that contains magazines
matching the media domain of the cartridge, but the library does not
allow the cartridge to be moved from storage to an incompatible drive
type (for example, an LTO-2 cartridge will not be allowed to move to an
LTO-1 drive).
In Not Required mode, if the library does not find a valid media ID on a
cartridge, the library allows it to be moved into or within the library as
long as the I/E station magazine, storage magazine, or drive matches
the media domain of the cartridge. If the library finds a valid media ID,
the library does not allow the cartridge to be moved from storage to a
drive that does not have a compatible type (for example, an LTO-2
cartridge will not be allowed to move to an LTO-1 drive).
Return Media Identifier
For the media policy settings, the library makes assumptions about a
media identifier and its position in a media barcode label. To be
considered a media identifier, the identifier characters must be correct
for the media domain and media type. Also, the identifier, which for
some media types can consist of more than one character, must be
complete and in the correct location. The correct characters in the
wrong position are not viewed as a media type identifier. In a physical
library or partition containing mixed media, the media identifier is not
required for all cartridges.
Table 24 explains the media type identifiers and assumptions.
Table 24 Sampling of Media
Type Identifiers
132
Media Domain
Media Type
Identifier
LTO
LTO-1
“L1” as the last characters in
the barcode
LTO
LTO-2
“L2” as the last characters in
the barcode
LTO
LTO-3
“L3” as the last two
characters in the barcode
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
Media Domain
Media Type
Identifier
LTO
LTO-3 WORM
“LT” as the last two
characters in the barcode
LTO
LTO-4
“L4” as the last two
characters in the barcode
LTO
LTO-4 WORM
“LU” as the last two
characters in the barcode
LTO
LTO-5
“L5” as the last two
characters in the barcode
LTO
LTO-5 WORM
“LV” as the last two
characters in the barcode
LTO
LTO-6
“L6” as the last two
characters in the barcode
LTO
LTO-6 WORM
”LW” as the last two
characters in the barcode
LTO
LTO-7
“L7” as the last two
characters in the barcode
LTO
LTO-7 WORM
”LX” as the last two
characters in the barcode
With a valid media type identifier present and the Media Type
Checking setting enabled, which is the case by default, a host is
prevented from executing invalid media moves across differing media
types. For example, a host can be prevented from moving LTO-2 media
to an LTO-1 drive. If an invalid move is attempted, the library returns an
error to the host.
Regardless of whether or not partition media policies are enabled or
disabled, the library always prevents host move-media commands that
cross different media domains.
With the Return Media Identifier setting, you can control if and where
a media type identifier appears in the volume serial number that is
returned to the host.
Table 25 shows an example of how the return media identifier is
reported to the host, depending on the setting you choose: Disabled,
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
133
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
Prefix, Suffix, and Pass Through. The bold, underlined portion is the
media identifier.
Table 25 Return Media
Identifier Behavior Example
Setting
Volume Serial Number Returned to
Host*
Disabled
ABC123
Prefix
L1ABC123
Suffix
ABC123L1
Pass Through
ABC123L1
*Based on actual LTO-1 barcode: ABC123L1
For more information about configuring the Media Type Checking and
Return Media Identifier settings, see Creating Partitions Manually on
page 136.
Creating Partitions
You can create library partitions in three ways:
• Creating Partitions Automatically on page 135
• Creating Partitions Manually on page 136, using one of the
following modes:
• Using Simple Mode on page 136
• Using Expert Mode on page 141
The method you should choose depends on the circumstance and the
level of control you want in allocating resources to the partition. When
creating partitions Automatically, the library assigns available system
resources to create the number of partitions you specify. Automatic
mode is not available if a partition already exists. Creating partitions
Manually enables you to pick specific drives, storage magazines, and
magazines within an I/E station to assign to a partition.
Note: Make sure that you have adequately planned for the number of
partitions that you want to configure.
134
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
Creating Partitions Automatically
You can use the library’s Automatic mode to create partitions within
limits based on licensing restrictions and available resources. Automatic
mode is available only if no partitions currently exist.
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Partitions > Configure. The Partitions dialog box
appears.
Figure 36 Partitions dialog box
4 Click Create. The Partitions – Step 1: Choose Creation Mode
dialog box appears.
5 Select Automatic, and then click Next. The Partitions – Step 2:
Automatic Creation dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
135
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
6 In the Partitions column, type the number of partitions you want to
create for each media/drive type.
The maximum number of partitions that you can create is
determined by the number of partitions you are licensed to create
and the number of drives available. See Enabling Licenses on
page 125.
7 Click Finish. The Partitions dialog box appears again.
8 Click Close.
Creating Partitions Manually
If one or more partitions already exist in the library, you must manually
create a new partition to allocate drives, storage slots, and I/E station
magazines. You have two options to allocate system resources when
manually creating a new partition:
• Using Simple Mode
• Using Expert Mode
In Simple mode, you can specify the quantity of each element you want
assigned to the partition. In Expert mode, you can indicate which
specific drives, storage magazines, I/E station magazines, or if enabled,
extended I/E station magazines to assign to the partition. You can also
configure library managed partitions in Expert mode.
Using Simple Mode
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Partitions > Configure. The Partitions dialog box
appears, listing partitions that are currently configured within the
library.
Note: If you want to cancel the partition creation process, click
Close. The Close button becomes unavailable after you
click Create later in this procedure.
4 Click Create. The Partitions - Step 1: Choose Creation Mode
dialog box appears.
136
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
5 Select Simple, and then click Next. The Partitions - Step 2: Choose
Partition Properties dialog box appears.
6 Configure the following settings:
• In the Name text box, type a name that describes the new
partition.
• In the Drive Domain list, select the type of drive to be used in
the partition.
• From the Vendor ID list, select the vendor.
The Vendor ID information is used in the SCSI Inquiry
command. The choices are QUANTUM and ADIC. The default is
QUANTUM. Some backup applications may only support or be
configured for ADIC libraries, so if you configure a logical library
using the vendor ID of QUANTUM, the backup application
would not work with the library.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
137
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
• From the Product ID drop-down list, click the appropriate
product type.
The Product ID setting controls the product ID string that is
returned in a standard SCSI INQUIRY response. The library can
report that it is a Scalar i500,Scalar i2000, or Scalar i6000. This
feature can enable the library to be used with host applications
that do not yet include the Scalar i6000 in a list of recognized
devices. In addition, the various Microsoft Windows operating
systems maintain a list of recognized devices. If the Scalar i6000
is not in an operating system’s list of recognized devices, the
library will appear as an “unknown” device in device lists. You
might prevent the library from being listed as “unknown” by
setting Product ID to a library other than Scalar i6000. This
setting does not cause any library operational changes other
than the SCSI INQUIRY response.
7 To continue, click Next. The Partitions - Step 3: Choose Policy
Settings dialog box appears.
8 Configure the following media policy settings:
138
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
• For Media Checking Policy, select one of three options:
• No Restrictions - Allow any media to be moved anywhere
• Enforce Restrictions - If the media type is known, the
barcode contains a media identifier that will enforce
restrictions. For example, LTO-6 supports reading LTO-6,
LTO-5 and LTO-4 media and writing to LTO-6 and LTO-5
drives. This setting is the default setting.
• Full Restrictions - The media type identified must be known
before we can import or move a media to a drive.
• From the Barcode reporting area, select an option from the
Return Media Identifier drop-down list. Options include
Suffix, Pass Through, Prefix, or Disabled. Depending on which
setting you choose, you can control the use of the media type
identifier in the volume serial number that is returned to the
host.
Caution: After a media volume serial number has been
reported to a host, changing the Return Media
Identifier setting could cause the host to not
recognize media within the library.
For more information about how media policies work, see
Understanding Partition Media Policy Settings on page 131.
9 Configure the Drive Cleaning policy, by selecting either Enable or
Disable. This setting is enabled by default.
Enabling drive cleaning allows the library to initiate drive cleaning
each time a drive requests a cleaning operation. For drive cleaning
to function, you must first configure drive cleaning for the library.
For more information about configuring drive cleaning, refer
Configuring Drive Cleaning on page 227.
Note: Drive cleaning should be enabled for partitions only if the
host application does not support the coordination of drive
cleaning. If drive cleaning functionality is enabled on the
host application, do not enable automatic drive cleaning
for any partitions in the library.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
139
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
10 If you are enabling Drive Cleaning, select the number of motion
hours you want the drives in the partition to be cleaned. Values
include:
• None
• 100 hours (default)
• 200 hours
• 400 hours
• 800 hours
• 1000 hours
Note: Drive cleaning settings only apply to HP LTO-5 or higher
drives.
11 To continue, click Next. The Partitions - Step 4: Choose Resource
Quantities dialog box appears.
12 Type the number of elements to include in the partition by
specifying:
• Number of drives
Note: Partitions can be created that have zero (0) drives
allocated.
• Number of storage slots
• Number of I/E slots
The quantity available for each type of resource indicates resources
not yet assigned to existing partitions.
13 To continue, click Next. The Partitions - Summary Information
dialog box appears.
14 Verify that the parameters you set are correct.
15 To create the partition, click Create. The Partitions - Completed
dialog box appears.
Note: After you click Create, the Cancel button becomes
unavailable.
16 Review the information to make sure it is correct.
140
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
17 If you want to view the drive information after creating the
partition, click Next.
18 Click Finish. The Partitions dialog box appears again with the
partition you just created listed.
19 Click Close.
Using Expert Mode
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Partitions > Configure. The Partitions dialog box
displays a list of partitions currently configured within the library.
Note: If you want to cancel the partition creation process, click
Close. The Close button becomes unavailable after you
click Create later in this procedure.
4 Click Create. The Partitions - Step 1: Choose Creation Mode
dialog box appears.
5 Select Expert, and then click Next. The Partitions - Step 2: Choose
Partition Properties dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
141
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
6 In the Name text box, type a name to describe the new partition.
7 From the Partition Type drop-down list, select the type of partition
you want to create.
• The default is Standard. If you are creating a standard partition,
accept the default and go to Step 8.
• The other choices are for creating library managed partitions
(LMPs). You can only select a library managed partition if it is
already licensed. The choices are:
• Library Managed (EDLM) — For more information, see
Extended Data Lifecycle Management on page 327)
• Library Managed (AMP) — For more information, see
Automated Media Pool on page 273
• Library Managed (VAULT) — For more information, see
Active Vault on page 259
When you select a library managed partition, the Vendor ID, and
Product ID fields become disabled. If you are creating a library
managed partition, make your selection and continue to Step 9.
8 If you are not creating a library managed partition, do the
following:
a From the Vendor ID drop down list, select the vendor.
The Vendor ID information is used in the SCSI Inquiry
command. The choices are QUANTUM and ADIC. The default is
QUANTUM. Some backup applications may only support or be
configured for ADIC libraries, so if you configure a logical library
using the vendor ID of QUANTUM, the backup application
would not work with the library.
b From the Product ID drop-down list, click the appropriate
product type.
The Product ID setting controls the product ID string that is
returned in a standard SCSI INQUIRY response. The library can
report that it is a Scalar 24, Scalar 100, Scalar i500, Scalar 1000,
Scalar i2000, Scalar i6000, or Scalar 10K. This feature can enable
the library to be used with host applications that do not yet
include the Scalar i6000 in a list of recognized devices.
In addition, the various Microsoft Windows operating systems
maintain a list of recognized devices. If the Scalar i6000 is not in
an operating system’s list of recognized devices, the library will
142
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
appear as an “unknown” device in device lists. You might
prevent the library from being listed as “unknown” by setting
Product ID to a library other than Scalar i6000. This setting
does not cause any library operational changes other than the
SCSI INQUIRY response.
9 To continue, click Next. The Partitions - Step 3: Choose Policy
Settings dialog box appears.
Note: If you are configuring an LMP, all choices on this screen are
pre-selected and you cannot change them. To continue, go
to Step 12.
10 Configure the following settings:
• For Media Checking Policy, select one of three options:
• No Restrictions - Allow any media to be moved anywhere
• Enforce Restrictions - If the media type is known, the
barcode contains a media identifier that will enforce
restrictions. For example, LTO-6 supports reading LTO-6,
LTO-5 and LTO-4 media and writing to LTO-6 and LTO-5
drives. This setting is the default setting.
• Full Restrictions - The media type identified must be known
before we can import or move a media to a drive.
• From the Return Media Identifier drop-down list, click either
Suffix, Pass Through, Prefix, or Disabled. Depending on which
setting you choose, you can control the use of the media type
identifier in the volume serial number that is returned to the
host.
Caution: After a media volume serial number has been
reported to a host, changing the Return Media
Identifier setting could cause the host to not
recognize media within the library.
For more information about how media policies work, see
Understanding Partition Media Policy Settings on page 131.
• For Drive Cleaning, click either Enable or Disable.
Enabling drive cleaning allows the library to initiate drive
cleaning whenever a drive in the partition recommends or
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
143
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
requires cleaning. For drive cleaning to function, you must first
configure drive cleaning for the library. For more information
about configuring drive cleaning, refer Configuring Drive
Cleaning on page 227.
Note: Drive cleaning should be enabled for partitions only if
the host application does not support the coordination
of drive cleaning. If drive cleaning functionality is
enabled on the host application, do not enable
automatic drive cleaning for any partitions in the
library.
11 If you are enabling Drive Cleaning for a partition containing HP
LTO-5 and higher drives, select the number of motion hours after
which the drive will recommend cleaning. Values include:
• 100 hours (default)
• 200 hours
• 400 hours
• 800 hours
• 1000 hours
12 To continue, click Next. The Partitions - Step 4: Select Drives dialog
box appears.
Note: If you are creating a library managed Automated Media
Pool (AMP) or Active Vault partition, this screen is skipped
because drives are not allowed in these partitions. Go to
Step 16.
Note: If you are creating an EDLM partition, only EDLM-capable
drives are shown.
13 In the left column, select the location of one or more drives.
Make sure that you select the appropriate module because the
library can have drives in the control module and any of the eleven
expansion modules.
Note: With the release of version i12, you can create partitions
that have zero (0) drives allocated.
144
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
14 To assign a drive to the partition, select the appropriate check box.
You can identify a drive by its serial number and location
coordinates. For more information, see Understanding Location
Coordinates on page 459.
15 To continue, click Next. The Partitions - Step 5: Select Storage
Slots dialog box appears.
16 Storage slots are assigned by magazine. In the left column, select
the location of one or more storage magazines.
17 To assign a storage magazine, select the appropriate check box. You
can identify a magazine by its location coordinates. The number of
slots available is determined by the drive media type.
18 If this is a standard partition and you are using Automated Media
Pool (AMP), you can add logical element extensions to the partition
for possible later use. Type the number of magazines by which you
would like to extend the standard partition in the Magazine
Extensions field. For more information, see Create Magazine
Extensions in Standard Partitions on page 276.
19 To continue, click Next. The Partitions - Step 6: Select I/E Slots
dialog box appears.
20 Select the location of one or more I/E station magazines.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
145
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
a To assign an I/E station magazine, select the appropriate check
box. You can identify an I/E station magazine by its location
coordinates.
b Make sure that you select the appropriate module because the
library can have I/E stations in the control module and
expansion modules.
Note: The maximum number of I/E element addresses in any
partition is 240. This includes both physical slots and
Extended I/E virtual slots.
21 To continue, click Next.
Note: Depending on whether Extended I/E is enabled, Step 6:
Select Extended I/E Slots may appear. If Extended I/E is
enabled, go to Step 22. If Extended I/E is not enabled, go
to Step 24.
To enable Extended I/E, go to Setup > System Settings >
Physical Library, and select the feature. For more
information about Extended I/E, see I/E Station Options on
page 26.
22 In the Partitions - Step 6: Select Extended I/E Slots dialog box, do
the following:
a In the left column, select the location of one or more Extended
I/E station magazines.
b To assign an Extended I/E station magazine, select the
appropriate check box. You can identify an I/E station magazine
by its location coordinates.
Note: The maximum number of I/E element addresses in any
partition is 240. This includes both physical slots and
Extended IE virtual slots.
23 To continue, click Next. The Partitions - Summary Information
dialog box appears.
24 In the Partitions - Summary Information dialog box, verify that the
parameters you set are correct.
146
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
To create the partition, click Create. The Partitions - Completed
dialog box appears.
Note: After you click Create, the Cancel button becomes
unavailable.
25 Review the information to make sure it is correct.
26 If you want to view the drive information after creating the
partition, click Next.
27 Click Finish. The Partitions dialog box appears again with the
partition you just created listed.
28 Click Close.
Modifying Partitions
You can use the Modify process to change the allocation of drives and
storage magazines in existing partitions without having to delete the
entire partition and then recreate it. You also can use Modify to change
partition properties, partition settings and I/E elements.
Caution: Modifying partitions improperly, particularly when deleting
partition elements, can disrupt host applications.
Before you modify any partitions, understand the configuration changes
you plan to make and the potentially disruptive effects that those
changes could have on the host application(s). Be careful whenever you
add or delete partition elements that include drives, storage magazines,
and I/E station magazines.
For best results, follow these guidelines when adding or deleting
partition elements:
• Shut down the host application
• Update the inventory in the library
• Reconfigure the library in the application
• Update the inventory in the application
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
147
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
Note: This procedure includes instructions for downloading new drive
firmware images. You can modify partitions from either the
library’s touch screen or a remote client. However, if you want
to download drive firmware images, you must do so from a
remote client.
To modify an existing partition, perform the following steps:
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Partitions > Configure. The Partitions dialog box
appears.
Note: If you want to cancel the partition modification process,
click Close. The Close button becomes unavailable after
you click Modify later in this procedure.
4 Select the partition you want to change, and then click Modify. The
Partitions - Step 1: Choose Partition Properties dialog box
appears.
Note: For Library Managed Partitions, you cannot modify these
properties; all options are disabled.
5 On this dialog box, you can modify the partition Name, Vendor ID,
and Product ID.
6 To continue, click Next. The Partitions - Step 2: Choose Policy
Settings dialog box appears.
Note: For Library Managed Partitions, you cannot modify these
properties; all options are disabled.
7 On this dialog box, you can modify the following settings:
• For Media Type Checking, select either Enable or Disable. This
setting is enabled by default.
• From the Media Checking Policy drop-down list, click either
Required or Not Required.
148
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
• From the Return Media Identifier drop-down list, click either
Suffix, Pass Through, Prefix, or Disabled. Depending on which
setting you choose, you can control the use of the media type
identifier in the volume serial number that is returned to the
host. When you have made your modifications, including
adding or deleting elements, your proposed changes to the
partition are highlighted in the New Value column of the table
that appears on the Partitions – Summary Information dialog
box.
Caution: After a media volume serial number has been
reported to a host, changing the Return Media
Identifier setting could cause the host to not
recognize media within the library.
For more information about how media policies work, see
Understanding Partition Media Policy Settings on page 131.
• For Drive Cleaning, click either Enable or Disable. This setting is
enabled by default.
Enabling drive cleaning allows the library to initiate drive cleaning
each time a drive requests a cleaning operation. For drive cleaning
to function, you must first configure drive cleaning for the library.
For more information about configuring drive cleaning, refer
Configuring Drive Cleaning on page 227.
Note: Drive cleaning should be enabled for partitions only if the
host application does not support the coordination of drive
cleaning. If drive cleaning functionality is enabled on the
host application, do not enable automatic drive cleaning
for any partitions in the library.
8 To continue, click Next. The Partitions - Step 3: Select Drives dialog
box appears.
Note: If you are creating an Automated Media Pool (AMP) library
managed partition or an Active Vault library managed
partition, this screen is skipped because drives are not
allowed in these partitions. Go to Step 16.
9 Select the location of one or more drives.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
149
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
Make sure that you select the appropriate module because the
library can have drives in the control module and in any of the
expansion modules.
10 You can add a drive to the partition by selecting the appropriate
drive check box. You can delete a drive from the partition by
clearing the drive's check box. You can identify a drive by its serial
number and location coordinates.
11 To continue, click Next. The Partitions - Step 4: Select Storage
Slots dialog box appears.
12 Select the rack you want to modify.
13 You can add a storage magazine by selecting the appropriate check
box. You can delete a storage magazine by clearing its check box.
You can identify a storage magazine by its location coordinates.
14 If this is a standard partition and Automated Media Pool (AMP) is
configured on the library, you can add virtual storage to the
partition for possible use later by adding magazine extensions. Type
the number of magazines to add in the Magazine Extensions field.
For more information, see Create Magazine Extensions in Standard
Partitions on page 276.
150
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
15 To continue, click Next. The Partitions - Step 5: Select I/E Slots
dialog box appears.
16 Select the location of one or more I/E station magazines.
• Make sure that you select the appropriate module because the
library can have I/E stations in the control module and in
expansion modules.
• You can add an I/E station magazine by selecting the
appropriate check box. You can delete an I/E station magazine
by clearing its check box. You can identify an I/E station
magazine by its location coordinates.
Caution: If you delete magazines that contain media, the media
will be inaccessible unless you reassign the magazines
to another partition.
Note: The maximum number of I/E element addresses in any
partition is 240. This includes both physical slots and
Extended I/E virtual slots.
17 To continue, click Next. If Extended I/E is configured, the Extended
I/E Slots dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
151
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
Otherwise, the Partitions - Step 6: Configure Drive Firmware
Autoleveling dialog box appears.
Note: The Partitions - Step 6: Configure Drive Firmware
Autoleveling dialog box appears only if the drives are
connected via an FC I/O blades or an Ethernet Expansion
blade. If this dialog box does not appear, the Partitions Summary Information dialog box appears instead. See
Step 19 on page 153.
The Partitions - Step 6: Configure Drive Firmware Autoleveling
dialog box enables you to set up drives to participate in autoleveling
operations. Drives are autoleveled whenever they are reset, such as
when the library is power cycled or rebooted.
18 To enable autoleveling for the partition, perform the following
steps:
a From the Drive Type drop-down list, click the type of drives that
you want to list in the table. Listed drive types use the following
format:
<vendor>_<product>_<interface>
152
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
Drives of the specified type within the partition appear in the
table.
Note: All drives of the specified type within the partition are
listed, regardless of whether they are attached to an FC
I/O blade or Ethernet Expansion blade.
If you need to download a new drive firmware image to use
with drives that you want to participate in auto leveling
operations, perform the procedure under Updating Drive
Firmware on page 592, and then proceed with the next substep.
Otherwise, proceed directly to the next substep.
After you download a new image, the new drive firmware
version is automatically added to the Firmware Version dropdown list.
b In the left-most column of the table in the Selected Drives will
be Autoleveled area, select one or more check boxes that
correspond to drives that you want to update with the same
drive firmware version, and then click the version in the
Firmware Version drop-down list.
Note: Only drives that are attached to an FC I/O blade or an
Ethernet Expansion blade can participate in drive
firmware autoleveling operations.
19 To continue, click Next. The Partitions - Summary Information
dialog box appears.
20 Verify that the parameters you set are correct.
21 If the summary information is correct, click Modify. The Partitions Completed dialog box appears.
Note: After you click Modify, the Cancel button becomes
unavailable.
22 Review the information to make sure it is correct.
23 If you want to view the drive information after modifying the
partition, click Next.
24 Click Finish. The Partitions dialog box appears again.
25 Click Close.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
153
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
Downloading Drive Firmware for Autoleveling
Note: Before you begin the following procedure, make sure that you
have obtained the new drive firmware image from Quantum
technical support and placed it in an accessible location on
your laptop.
1 On the Partitions - Step 6: Configure Drive Firmware
Autoleveling dialog box, click Manage Images. The Manage Drive
Firmware Images dialog box appears.
The library sets aside space for drive firmware. You can load multiple
firmware images. The library screen indicates how much space is
free. Quantum recommends you use the latest firmware available
(as specified in the Release Notes). A check mark in the In Use
column indicates one of the following conditions:
• An autoleveling policy exists that uses this drive firmware
image.
• A pending autoleveling policy exists that uses this drive
firmware image.
• A pending firmware update exists that uses this drive firmware
image.
Under these conditions, you cannot delete the drive firmware
image. If the check box for a drive firmware image is clear, you can
154
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Partitions
delete the image by clicking it to highlight it, and then clicking
Delete.
2 To download a new drive firmware image, click Download. The
Select firmware image file to download dialog box appears.
3 Navigate to the location of the drive firmware image file (with either
a.drv, .fmr, .img, .E, or .ro extension) you want to download, and
then click the image file to highlight it.
4 Click Open.
The download process copies the drive firmware image from the
remote file system to the MCB. When the download process
completes, the Partitions - Step 6: Configure Drive Firmware
Autoleveling dialog box appears again.
Deleting Partitions
Caution: For the host application to have access to the written data
on the partition that you want to delete, you must recreate
a partition that includes the same media type, interface, I/E
station magazines, and a host at the same SCSI ID and LUN.
To delete a partition, perform the following steps:
1 Log on as an administrator.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
155
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Control Paths
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Partitions > Configure. The Partitions dialog box
appears.
4 Click the partition you want to delete.
Note: You can delete only one partition at a time.
5 Click Delete.
Note: If the physical library is not offline, you receive a message
that asks you whether you want to take the library offline
and delete the partition. Click Yes. If the partition is already
offline, you receive a message that asks you whether you
want to delete the partition. Click Yes.
6 The library deletes the selected partition. Repeat the process to
delete another partition, or click Close.
Configuring Control Paths
You must define a control path for each library partition. The control
path is used to connect a partition to a host application. The i6000 does
not automatically assign a control path when you create a partition.
Each partition control path can occur through one of several different
physical connection points depending on the hardware configuration of
your library.
The procedure for setting up and defining the control path for a
partition depends on which physical connection point you choose to
use. Table 26 describes how to set up different types of control paths.
Note: Only IBM and HP LTO-5 or later drives can be configured for
control path bridging (using a drive as the control path for a
partition), and in order to do so, they must be connected to an
Ethernet Expansion blade.
156
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Control Paths
Note: Both IBM and HP LTO-5 or later drives with SNW licenses can be
configured for control path failover.
Note: A partition can be LUN mapped through any FC I/O blade, but
you must manually configure LUN mapping to present the
partition to specific hosts.
Caution: When configuring a control path using an FC I/O blade
connection, the partition LUN can be presented multiple
times through any FC I/O blade and even the MCB at the
same time. In a direct attached control path configuration,
you can choose the drive to present the partition and it
remains dedicated to the drive until you change it to
another drive.
Note: IO blades connected to drives configured with a control path
may report certain library ready conditions differently than
drives without a control path configured.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
157
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Control Paths
Table 26 Control Path Matrix
GUI Menu
Path
Procedure
References
MCB Direct
Connection
FC I/O Blade
Connection
LTO-5 or
later EEB
Direct
Connectiona
Setup >
Partitions >
Configure
Creating Partitions
on page 134
Step 1
Step 1
Step 1
Setup >
Blades >
Connectivity
Configure
FC I/O Blade
LTO-5 or later
EEB
Connection w/
SNW Licenseb
Step 1
Step 2
Port Configuration
on page 173
FC Host Port
Failover on
page 177
Enabling a Target
Port on page 179
Configuring
Datapath
Conditioning on
page 250
Setup >
Blades
Connectivity
Port Configuration
on page 173
Step 2
Setup >
Blades >
Access
FC Host LUN
Mapping on
page 209
Step 3
Step 3
Channel Zoning on
page 208
Using the LUN
Mapping Wizard
on page 215
158
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Control Paths
GUI Menu
Path
Procedure
References
Setup >
Drives >
Access >
SNW Wizard
Use the Storage
Networking Wizard
on page 358
~OR~
~OR~
Setup >
Partitions >
Control Path
MCB Direct
Connection
FC I/O Blade
Connection
LTO-5 or
later EEB
Direct
Connectiona
LTO-5 or later
EEB
Connection w/
SNW Licenseb
Step 2
Step 2
Configuring
Control Paths on
page 156
Setup >
Drives >
Access >
SNW Wizard
License Drives for
Path Failover on
page 359
Step 3
Setup >
Drives >
Access >
SNW Wizard
Configure Control
Path on page 361
Step 4
(HP drives only)
a.Only IBM and HP LTO-5 or later drives support control path bridging.
b.Only HP LTO-5 or later Storage Networking licensed drives can be configured for control path failover. See License
Drives for Path Failover on page 359.
Configuring an IBM or
HP LTO-5 or later Drive
as the Control Path
You can configure IBM and HP LTO-5 or later FC drives as the control
path for a partition. The drive must not be connected to an FC I/O blade,
but it must be connected to an Ethernet Expansion blade.
Note: The control path drive and control path failover settings are
configured on the same screen. You do not need an SNW
license to configure a drive for control path. However, you do
need an SNW license to configure control path failover (see
Configure Control Path on page 361).
The instructions that follow only describe how to configure a drive as
the control path for a partition. If you would like to configure both the
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
159
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Control Paths
control path and control path failover, see Configure Control Path on
page 361 instead.
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Access the appropriate screen in one of two ways:
• Select Setup > Partitions > Control Path from the main
console.
• Select Setup > Drives > Access > SNW Wizard. Click Next.
From the Select Storage Networking Option screen, select
Control Path and click Next.
The Storage Networking Partitions dialog box appears,
displaying all partitions that contain drives eligible to for control
path bridging (HP LTO-5 or later drives connected to an Ethernet
Expansion blade).
3 Click to highlight the row containing the partition whose control
path settings you want to configure.
4 Click OK. The Control Path dialog box appears.
160
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Control Paths
5 From the CP Drive drop-down list select the drive you want to
configure as the control path. The primary CP drive you selected is
highlighted in yellow.
6 IN the CPF Mode area, select the radio button for the type of control
path failover you want to configure.
Note: If you want to configure control path failover, you must
have a SNW license with sufficient licensed drive counts to
configure a CPF drive. For more information, see Configure
Control Path on page 361.
7 Click OK. An Operation in Progress dialog box appears.
8 The control path drive is configured.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
161
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up the Network Configuration
Setting Up the Network Configuration
If your library has an MCB2 installed, you can configure two (2) network
settings for your library. When looking at the Setup > Network Settings
menu, you’ll notice two (2) interface options. Depending on what you
have enabled, you’ll see IPv4 or IPv6 listed.
The intended use of these settings is twofold:
• Interface 1 is for configuring a gateway to go outside the network.
• Interface 2 is for accessing devices on it’s own network, encryption
keys and for security. You cannot configure a gateway and cannot
access any devices outside the network. You can access the library
from a browser, however.
Make sure that your library is attached to a network before you use the
Network Configuration command.
Caution: When configuring both interface settings, the IPs must be
on separate subnets. If you configure the second interface
with the same IP, you will not be able to save the
configuration settings.
Caution: You must fully understand all network issues before you
change the network configuration for an already
configured library. It is recommended that you consult with
your network administrator before changing your network
configuration.
Note: To set up an iPv6 network connection, make sure that the IPv6
option is enabled on the Physical Library dialog, as described
in Setting Up Policies for the Physical Library on page 180.
Note: For all site-to-site customer firewall network settings, see
Appendix B, Network Port Settings.
1 Log on as an administrator.
162
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up the Network Configuration
2 If you are not already working from the physical library, select the
physical library from the View menu.
3 Do one of the following, depending on whether IPv6 is enabled or
disabled and the protocol of the network connection you want to
configure:
• IPv4 Configuration — Proceed to Setting up IPv4 Network
Configuration on page 163.
• IPv6 Configuration — Proceed to Setting up IPv6 Network
Configuration on page 167.
Note: The IPv6 Configuration sub-menu only appears if you
have enabled IPv6 for the physical library, as described
in Setting Up Policies for the Physical Library on
page 180.
• DNS Configuration — Proceed to Configuring DNS on
page 170.
Setting up IPv4
Network Configuration
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
After completing the steps listed in Setting Up the Network
Configuration on page 162, select Setup > Network
Configuration > Interface (#) > IPv4 Configuration. The IPv4
Network Configuration - Interface # dialog box appears.
163
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up the Network Configuration
Figure 37 Network
Configuration - Interface 1
164
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up the Network Configuration
Figure 38 Network
Configuration - Interface 2
4 Use the following table to assist you in completing the elements on
the IPv4 Network Configuration dialog box.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
165
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up the Network Configuration
Element
Description
In the Host Settings area:
DHCP
If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is
enabled on your network, do one of the following:
• Select Enable to have DHCP automatically
configure the library network settings. Enable
makes the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Default Gateway text boxes unavailable.
• Select Disable to make the IP Address, Subnet
Mask, and Default Gateway text boxes
available for you to manually set the library
network settings.
Library Name
The network name that you want to assign to the
library.
IP Address
The IP address of the library. This text box is
available only if DHCP is disabled.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask. This text box is available only if
DHCP is disabled.
Default
Gateway
The IP address of the default gateway for your
portion of the Ethernet network. This text box is
available only if DHCP is disabled only for Interface
1.
In the Port Settings area:
Auto Negotiate
• Select Enable to have the library automatically
negotiate port speeds. Enable makes the Speed
options unavailable.
• Select Disable to make the Speed options
available for you to manually set the port speed.
Speed
The port speed (10, 100 or 1000 Mbps). Speed
options are available only if Auto Negotiate is
disabled.
The current port settings are listed in the Current Port Settings
section. For more information, see Viewing the Current Network
Port Settings on page 171.
166
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up the Network Configuration
The Cycle button enables you to cycle the external Ethernet
interface without rebooting the library.
5 Make the appropriate network configuration changes, and then
click OK. A message appears that informs you that network
connectivity will be lost temporarily, and asks whether you want to
proceed.
6 Click Yes.
Setting up IPv6
Network Configuration
After completing the steps listed in Setting Up the Network
Configuration on page 162, select Setup > Network
Configuration > Interface (#) > IPv6 Configuration. The IPv6
Network Configuration - Interface # dialog box appears.
Figure 39 Network
Configuration - Interface 1
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
167
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up the Network Configuration
Figure 40 Network
Configuration - Interface 2
7 Use the Static IP tab to disable or to enable and specify a static IP
address. Valid static IP addresses include link local, site local, and
global unchaste.
Caution: The IP address for Interface 2 must be on a different
subnet than Interface 1.
8 Click DHCP to display the DHCP tab.
9 As prompted, use the DHCP tab to enable or disable the Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) auto configuration function.
10 Click Hostname to display the Hostname tab.
168
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up the Network Configuration
11 Use the Hostname tab to specify a library name that can be used
for remote connections to the library.
12 Click Settings to display the Settings tab.
13 Use the Settings tab to view the current IPv6 configuration settings.
14 After you make the appropriate network configuration changes,
click OK. A prompt appears informing you that network connectivity
will be temporarily lost and asks whether you want to proceed.
15 Click Yes.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
169
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up the Network Configuration
Configuring DNS
If DHCP is disabled, you can specify primary, secondary, and tertiary
Domain Name System (DNS servers). DNS servers provide IP address
resolution of fully qualified domain names. DNS settings are optional.
Caution: You must fully understand all network issues before you
change the network configuration for an already
configured library. It is recommended that you consult with
your network administrator before changing your network
configuration.
To configure DNS servers:
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 If you are not already working from the physical library, select the
physical library from the View menu.
3 Click Setup > Network Configuration > DNS Configuration. The
DNS Configuration dialog box appears.
4 Enter a primary DNS server IP address. Optionally, enter secondary
and tertiary addresses.
5 Click OK.
170
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up the Network Configuration
Viewing the Current
Network Port Settings
To view the current settings on the library’s network Ethernet port,
select Setup > Network Configuration > IPv4 Configuration. The
Current Port Settings section of the dialog displays the following
information:
• Port Speed — Current speed
• Auto Negotiate — On or off
• Duplex — Half or full
• Link — Indicates whether the Ethernet link is up (yes or no)
Changing the Internal
IP Network Address
Note: The Change Internal IP dialog box is accessible only from the
library’s touch screen.
The default internal network subnet setting for the library is 192.19.X.X.
Attaching the library to a 192.19.X.X external network can cause library
and network problems. The Change Internal IP dialog box enables you
to change the library’s internal IP addressing so that conflicts do not
occur.
Keep in mind the following considerations:
• You only need to change the default internal IP setting if your
external network is 192.19.X.X.
• Do not set up internal IP addressing to conflict with existing external
IP addressing. If you set up the same IP subnet for both the internal
and external IP networks (for example, 192.19.X.X), the library will
become unusable.
• If you change the internal IP addressing, and then later a user uses
the Network Configuration dialog box (Setup > Network
Configuration) to assign to the library a static IP address that
conflicts with the internal network, the assignment request will fail
and the library will issue a ticket.
• If you change the internal IP addressing, and if Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled and DHCP assigns to the
library an IP address that conflicts with the internal network,
address conflicts could occur between internal library devices and
external customer devices and the library will issue a ticket.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
171
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up the Network Configuration
1 From the local operator panel only, select Setup > Network
Configuration > Internal IP. The Change Internal IP dialog box
appears.
By default, the internal IP subnet address that is automatically
selected on the Change Internal IP dialog box is not the one to
which your internal network is currently set. For example, the
current internal network IP setting is 192.19.x.x,. The drop-down
menu has multiple subnet options from 192.19.x.x to 10.90.x.x.
2 To accept the automatic internal IP setting, click OK. The following
warning message appears.
Caution: Setting the internal IP network to be on the same
subnet that the external IP network is on causes library
failure and results in the management interface (the
MCB) becoming unusable. For example, if you set
10.10.X.X as the internal IP network and your external
IP network is also 10.10.X.X, a conflict occurs. If you
are unsure about whether the change is appropriate,
select No.
3 If you are sure that you want to make the change, select Yes.
4 After the library processes the request successfully, a message
appears that asks you whether you want to shut down the library.
You must shut down and restart the library in order for the changes
to take effect.
172
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Managing Connectivity
Managing Connectivity
The Connectivity command on the Setup menu enables you to access
three connectivity-related commands for the library: Port
Configuration, Datapath Conditioning, and FC Host Port Failover.
For information about configuring data path conditioning monitoring
levels and intervals, see Configuring Datapath Conditioning on
page 250.
Port Configuration
Use the Port Configuration command to view and configure
connectivity parameters for FC ports. Port Configuration gives you
access to the FC ports on the I/O blades.
Note: You can only view EEB port connection status and configure or
view I/O blade port connections status.
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Blades > Connectivity > Port Configuration. The
Connectivity dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
173
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Managing Connectivity
4 Click the highest-level items to show next-level items.
5 Click a port to highlight it, and then click Configure. For an FC port
on an I/O blade, the Fibre Channel Parameters dialog box appears.
174
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Managing Connectivity
You can configure all settings for an I/O blade connection. The
figure above shows an FC port configured for target mode and a
loop preferred connection.
a In the Loop ID area of the Fibre Channel Parameters dialog
box, repeatedly selecting Soft acts as a toggle, checking and
clearing the box. If the box is not checked, you can click a hard
loop ID (within the range from 0 to 125) from the drop-down
list. Some operating systems require hard ID settings. Consult
your service representative before making changes to this
setting.
b Select Auto to automatically set the interface speed. To
configure the speed manually, uncheck the Auto check box and
use a setting from the drop-down list.
c FC Frame Size is specified by each receiving node and need not
match any other node. The frame size is typically set to 2048.
(You can use another frame size if it is required by a particular
software application.)
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
175
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Managing Connectivity
d FC ports support Private and Public Fibre Channel attachments.
The default port mode setting for FC ports 1 and 2 is Target
Public, and the default port mode setting for FC ports 3
through 6 is Initiator Public. With Public, the loop is scanned
for Fabric devices and allows the Fabric to have access to all
available target devices that are attached to it. With Private, the
local loop is scanned for devices except for Fabric devices. In
Target mode, the port is set to receive connections from
another FC initiator, such as a host or FC switch. In Initiator
mode, the port scans for storage devices. In Target and
Initiator mode, the port operates in both modes
simultaneously.
e The default connection mode for both target and initiator ports
is Loop Preferred. For target ports, other options include Loop
and Point to Point. For initiator ports, other options include
Loop and Loop Preferred. If you change a target port that is
set to Point to Point to initiator mode, the port connection type
automatically changes to Loop Preferred. Consult your service
representative before making changes to this setting.
For reference purposes, the following table shows the default FC I/O
blade port settings as initially set up at installation.
Table 27 FC I/O Blade Port
Settings
Port
Loop ID
Speed
Frame Size
Port Mode
Connection Option
Private/Public
FC-1
Soft
Auto
2048
Target
Loop preferred
Public
FC-2
Soft
Auto
2048
Target
Loop preferred
Public
FC-3
Soft
Auto
2048
Initiator
Loop preferred
Public
FC-4
Soft
Auto
2048
Initiator
Loop preferred
Public
FC-5
Soft
Auto
2048
Initiator
Loop preferred
Public
FC-6
Soft
Auto
2048
Initiator
Loop preferred
Public
6 After you finish selecting the port configuration settings, click OK. A
message appears that asks whether you want to make the change.
7 Click Yes.
176
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Managing Connectivity
FC Host Port Failover
Configure the optional FC Host Port Failover (HPF) feature so that an
alternate “standby” target port on an I/O blade can assume the identity
and LUN mapping configuration of the primary “active” target port if
the primary port fails. HPF enables the library to continue operations
without requiring you to reconfigure the host or the SAN.
To enable HPF, you must make sure that two ports on the FC I/O blade
are in target mode and point-to-point connection. Use ports 1 and 2,
which are ports that are traditionally configured to be host targets.
FC I/O blade ports are numbered from bottom to top as the blade sits in
the I/O management unit.
Both ports must be attached to the same SAN fabric to provide host
access. The active primary port is used for host communications, while
the passive standby port is kept idle. The way that you configure the
recovery settings determines how the failed port behaves after it is
restored from a failed state.
The library generates a ticket when port failover occurs. Examine the
ticket and the repair page associated with the ticket to determine the
reason for the failover.
To configure HPF, perform the following steps:
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Confirm that there are two ports on the I/O blade in target mode
and point-to-point connection. For more information, see Port
Configuration on page 173.
4 Click Setup > Blades > Connectivity > FC Host Port Failover. The
FC Host Port Failover dialog box appears, showing all the FC I/O
blades found in the library. Each blade is identified by name and by
location.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
177
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Managing Connectivity
5 Click a blade to highlight it, and then click Configure. The FC Host
Port Failover dialog box appears
6 In the Feature Enable area, select Enable FC Host Port Failover,
and then click Set to make the Configuration tab available.
178
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Managing Connectivity
On the Configuration tab, settings are unavailable if the current
state of the tab is set to Disabled.
Be aware that there might be incompatibilities with channel zoning
configuration on the I/O blade if you enable host port failover.
7 Accept the recovery setting default values unless an authorized
representative advises you otherwise.
8 Before you set recovery settings, understand the following elements
in the Recovery Setting area:
• Error count recovery mode sets the recovery scenario for all
ports when port failure is caused by excessive errors on the port.
The only setting option is Require Intervention.
• Link down error recovery mode sets the recovery scenario for
all ports when port failure is caused by the port going offline for
more time than the threshold specified in the Link down delay
time text box. The only setting option is Require Intervention.
• Link down delay time sets the timeout threshold before link
down status applies. The default value is zero (0) seconds. There
is no maximum value. Require Intervention means that a user
must manually use the Physical Ports tab to bring a failed port
that has recovered back online.
9 Configure the Primary Port. Only ports that are in target mode and
point-to-point connection can participate in host port failover. The
primary port becomes active by default and the alternate port will
go on passive standby until a failover occurs. Use the Select
Primary drop-down list to select from the target ports that are
online and available. You must select a primary port. Current Active
indicates the currently active port.
10 Click Set. If your configuration has errors, a warning message
appears.
Enabling a Target Port
Use the Physical Ports tab to manually enable an online target port that
was disabled because of a previous connection error. If the Intervention
column displays “true,” you must manually bring the recovered port
back online using Enable. If the port state is “disabled,” the port's
connection is repaired and it is ready to be re-enabled. If the
Configuration tab itself is disabled, the table on the Physical Ports tab
will be empty.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
179
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up Policies for the Physical Library
Note: If the target port state is offline, the port's connection has not
been repaired. The error condition that caused the port to fail
still exists.
On the FC Host Port Failover dialog box, click the Physical Ports
tab. The dialog box shows you each target port on the I/O blade, the
port’s state, and the type of failure that has occurred, if applicable.
11 Click the port you want to enable.
12 Click Enable.
Note: Enable is available only if the port is disabled.
13 To return to the main FC Host Port Failover dialog box, click Close.
Setting Up Policies for the Physical Library
The Physical Library dialog box enables you to configure various
operating modes:
180
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up Policies for the Physical Library
Policy
Settings
Automatic Inventory
Enabled: automatically inventories all library content whenever the
library powers up or when a main library access door closed and
robotics are enabled (except for UI initiated Aisle Access or Robot
Replacement operations). In this mode, individual I/E stations are
always scanned upon I/E station door closure detection, and
individual tower modules will automatically be scanned if varied on
after a tower door closure, independent of the tower having a
scanner installed or not.
Disabled (default): requires the user to initiate inventory scan
operations whenever the tape cartridge inventory is manually
manipulated in drives, linear storage magazines, and tower
modules without scanners while the library is powered off or a
library access door is opened and closed. In this mode, only I/E
stations and tower modules with scanners are automatically
scanned upon library power-up, and also scanned when an I/E
station door is closed or a tower module, with or without an
installed scanner, is varied on after a tower door closed.
Note: Tower modules with configured but inoperable scanners
will be scanned by a robot. Tower modules without
scanners will not be inventoried.
Automatic Drive Unload
Enabled (default): will automatically initiate unload operations to
a drive if a SCSI move request is received and the drive is not
already unloaded.
Disabled: Drives need to be unloaded by allocated host
applications. SCSI move requests from drives that are not already
unloaded will fail.
Logical SN Addressing
Enabled (default): Drive are configured to report a library unique,
drive position unique drive serial number. This methodology allows
drive replacements without affecting host configured drive serial
number re-configurations as the repeated drive serial number will
not change if a drive is replaced.
Disabled: Installed drives report their physical serial number to
attached hosts. Drive replacement operations will cause the
replacement drive to report its assigned physical serial number and
host applications may have to re-configure drive support if the
drive serial number changes.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
181
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up Policies for the Physical Library
Policy
Settings
IPv6
Enabled: will support the configuration of IPv6, as well as IPv4,
network settings.
Disabled (default): will not support the configuration of IPv6
network settings and only allow IPv4 network configuration.
Extended I/E
Enabled: will support the configuration of storage slots as I/E slots,
extending the number of available I/E slots for host configurations
that require non-I/E elements not physically provided in I/E stations.
Disabled (default): will not allows I/E slot extensions to be
configured.
EKM Path Diagnostics
Enabled (default): EKM server connectivity and functionality are
performed in regular intervals to alert of connectivity or
operational issues.
Disabled: EKM path connectivity and functionality tests are not
performed.
Send Usage Statistics
Enabled (default): If e-mail notification settings are configured,
library usage and performance data will be sent to Quantum for
statistical review purposes. These emails contain configuration and
status information only, and do not contain any customer data
stored on the system.
Disabled: Usage statistics are not sent regardless of e-mail
notification settings.
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > System Settings > Physical Library. The Physical
Library dialog box appears.
182
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up Policies for the Physical Library
4 Select Enable in the Automatic Inventory area to schedule
automatic inventories of library contents when the library powers
up or when the library door is opened and closed.
Note: Automatic Inventory is disabled by default.
5 Select Enable in the Automatic Drive Unload area to cause the
library to issue unload commands when host applications issue
move media commands to the library. If you set this to Disable,
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
183
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up Policies for the Physical Library
proper library operation requires host applications to issue unload
commands to the drives. Automatic Drive Unload is enabled by
default.
Note: The Logical SN Addressing area is available only to CSEs.
You cannot enable or disable logical serial number
addressing for drives. If a CSE enables this feature, the
library assigns logical serial numbers to all drives in the
library. Specifically, the library assigns a logical serial
number to a drive in a specific location. This is not the serial
number of the particular drive. If a drive is replaced by
another drive in the same library location, the logical serial
number remains the same. From the host’s perspective, the
replacement drive is the same as the original one.
6 Select Enable in the IPv6 area to enable the Network
Configuration dialog that you can use to configure the settings for
an IPv6 network connection.
Note: IPv6 is disabled by default.
Note: Enabling IPv6 adds a sub-menu to the Network
Configuration command on the Setup menu that you use
to display the IPv4 or IPv6 Network Configuration dialog.
7 Select Enable in the Extended I/E area to enable the Extended I/E
feature.
Note: Extended I/E is disabled by default.
Note: Extended I/E allows the user the capability to increase the
number of I/E slots presented to the host. For more
information, refer to I/E Station Options on page 26
8 Select Enable in the EKM Path Diagnostics area to enable
Encryption Key Management background diagnostics.
The diagnostics test determines whether the EKM servers are
connected and operating properly. The test runs in the background
at regular intervals and generates a RAS ticket if key server
connectivity issues are found. For more information about the tests
184
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Specifying the Date and Time
included in the diagnostics, see Using EKM Path Diagnostics on
page 311.
Default configurations are as follows:
• Q-EKM — Not available.
• SKM — Enabled by default. You can disable it for SKM but it is
not recommended unless directed by a service technician. The
background diagnostic should always be enabled so the library
can monitor SKM server status and report issues as soon as they
arise.
• KMIP key managers - Enabled; cannot be disabled.
9 When finished, click OK.
Specifying the Date and Time
You can use the Date and Time command to set or reset the system
time. If you want to synchronize the library over a network, you can use
the Network Time Protocol (NTP) setting. The default date and time is
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
To set the date and time or to use NTP:
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Date and Time. The Date and Time dialog box
appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
185
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Specifying the Date and Time
4 In the NTP section
• If you choose to enable NTP, click Enable.
The Date and Time sections of the dialog box are grayed out.
• Type valid IP addresses for the Primary Server and optionally
the Secondary Server and Tertiary Server.
• If the DNS Server has not been configured in the LMC, type
valid numeric IP addresses that are accessible from the
library (example 111.11.11.111). Go to step 7.
• If the DNS Server has been configured through the LMC
(Setup > Network Configuration > DNS Configuration),
type the valid alpha/numeric IP Addresses that are accessible
from the library. Go to step 7.
• If NTP is enabled and you no longer want to use this setting,
click Disable.
186
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring E-mail
If you choose to disable NTP, you must manually set the date
and time. Go to the next step.
5 Use the Date drop-down lists to select the month, date, and year.
6 Use the Time drop-down lists to select the hour, minute, and
whether the time is A.M. or P.M.
7 Use the Time Zone drop-down list to select the appropriate time
zone.
The default time zone is GMT. The time zone that you select appears
only on your library information panel. Regardless of your selection,
the system operates on the GMT zone.
8 Click OK.
Configuring E-mail
The library uses the e-mail settings on the Email Configuration dialog
box whenever library e-mail services are used, such as when you use the
Send command to e-mail snapshots or logs and when the library
automatically sends e-mail notifications of library problems.
Use the procedures in the following subsections for:
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
187
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring E-mail
• Setting Up or Changing the E-Mail Configuration on page 188
• Testing the Current E-Mail Configuration on page 189
Note: Any undeliverable emails will be sent to the email address listed
in the Contact Information tab of the System Setup
Notifications dialog. See Setting Up E-mail Notifications on
page 190. If the email addresses in the Contact tab of the
Notifications dialog and the Email Notifications dialog are the
same, the email will ‘bounce’ (ie, undeliverable) and fail to be
delivered.
Setting Up or Changing
the E-Mail
Configuration
To set up or change the e-mail configuration:
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Email Configuration. The Email Configuration
dialog box appears.
4 In the SMTP Server text box, type the iPv4 or iPv6 address of the
SMTP server (for example, 192.16.96.201).
Caution: You must identify the SMTP server by its server address.
5 If your SMTP server requires authentication of accounts and
passwords, select Password in the Authentication field. If it does
not, select None.
6 In the Account text box, type the name of a valid account on the
SMTP server (for example, Jay.User).
Note: The Account text box is not available if None is selected in
the Authentication field.
7 In the Password text box, type the password for the account that
you specified in the Account field.
Note: The Password text box is not available if None is selected
in the Authentication field.
188
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring E-mail
8 In the Sender Address text box, type an e-mail address for the
library (for example scalari6000@mycompany.com).
The library uses this address in the From field of e-mail messages
that it sends out, indicating the originator of the message. For
example, if you type scalari6000, the library appends the domain
information (for example, @mycompany.com). If you type
scalari6000@mycompany.com, the library does not append any
additional information.
9 To test the e-mail configuration, type an e-mail address in the
Recipient box of the Test Current Configuration area and click Test
email.
10 Confirm that the library displays a message indicating that the test
completed successfully and sends a test message to the specified email address.
The subject of the test message should be Test email from Scalar
i6000 and the message text should include the library name,
version, and serial number, along with the date and time that the
message was sent.
11 To finish, click OK.
Testing the Current
E-Mail Configuration
To test the current e-mail configuration:
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Email Configuration. The Email Configuration
dialog box appears.
4 Type an e-mail address in the Recipient box of the Test Current
Configuration area and click Test email.
5 Confirm that the library displays a message indicating that the test
completed successfully and sends a test message to the specified email address.
The subject of the test message should be Test email from Scalar
i6000 and the message text should include the library name,
version, and serial number, along with the date and time that the
message was sent.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
189
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up E-mail Notifications
6 Click OK to close the Email Configuration dialog box.
Setting Up E-mail Notifications
You can set up notifications in the LMC so that the library automatically
sends an e-mail message to specified e-mail addresses whenever an
issue of a particular severity level occurs. The information in the e-mail
notification provides details about the issue and the library conditions at
the time of the error.
Note: Before you set up notifications, you must configure e-mail in
the LMC so that the library can send notifications to the
recipients. See Configuring E-mail on page 187.
Table 28 describes the severity levels for which the library can send
notifications if e-mail addresses are set up appropriately to receive
them.
Table 28 Severity Levels
Assigned to Issues
Severity Level
Description
1 (Failed)
Indicates that a failure has occurred or a different serious condition exists within a
library subsystem that requires immediate corrective action. In most cases, a
hardware component is no longer functioning at an acceptable level or has failed.
Typical library operations are either impossible or highly unreliable.
Examples of failure situations include a FRU that is not functioning, a temperature
threshold that has been reached that causes unreliable operations, or a partition
that the library has automatically taken offline.
2 (Degraded)
Indicates that a degraded condition exists within a library subsystem that impacts
system performance or redundancy. Typical library operations can continue
without immediate corrective action, but an administrator should investigate the
condition and correct the problem soon.
Examples of degraded situations include a redundant power supply that has failed
or a connectivity problem that has caused host port failover to occur.
190
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up E-mail Notifications
Severity Level
Description
3 (Warning)
Indicates that a condition exists within a library subsystem that has little effect on
system operations. Typical library operations can continue without immediate
corrective action, but you should investigate the condition and correct the
problem when possible. Warnings also can provide helpful information, such as
indicating that a door is open.
Examples of warning situations include a FRU that is functioning less reliably or a
temperature threshold that has been reached that does not affect reliable
operations.
The body text in the e-mail notification provides details about the issue
and library conditions at the time of the event. The e-mail notification
also includes an attachment, referred to as a repair page, that provide a
problem description and corrective actions you or a customer service
engineer (CSE) can perform. For more information about e-mail
notifications, see E-mail Notifications on page 47.
Note: If the email addresses in the Contact tab of the Notifications
dialog and the Email Notifications dialog are the same, the
email will ‘bounce’ (ie, undeliverable) and fail to be delivered.
To set up e-mail recipients for notifications, perform the following steps:
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Notifications > System Setup. The System Setup
Notification dialog box appears with the Contact Information tab
displayed.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
191
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up E-mail Notifications
4 Enter the contact information you want included in an e-mail
notification if an error occurs in the library.
5 Click OK. A message is displayed asking you to perform a Save
Configuration operation.
6 Click Yes. The Save and Restore Library Configuration dialog box
appears.
7 Click Save and then save the file to a desired location. The
configuration is saved.
8 Click Close.
9 Set up the rules.
a Click Setup > Notification > System Setup. The System
Setup Notification dialog box appears with the Contact
Information tab displayed.
The Notification dialog box displays the Rules tab.
This dialog box shows all notification recipients that are set up
currently in the LMC. By default, the only e-mail address to
which the library sends e-mail notifications (severity level 1
[Failed] issues only) is techsup@quantum.com (Quantum
technical support), as shown in this Notification dialog box
example.
192
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up E-mail Notifications
Note: Even though you can remove the Quantum technical
support e-mail address so that Quantum does not receive
severity level 1 notifications, Quantum recommends that
you do not remove it. Also, do not include the Quantum
technical support e-mail address for severity level 2 or 3
notifications.
Note: The remaining steps in this procedure guide you through
setting up new e-mail notification recipients. To delete an
existing e-mail address, click the e-mail address in the Send
Email To column, and then click Delete.
10 To set up a new e-mail notification recipient, click Create. The New
Email Notification dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
193
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up E-mail Notifications
11 In the Email Address text box, type the e-mail address to which you
want to send notifications.
Note: Do not enter more than one address in the Email Address
text box. Continue to Step 7 and Step 8 for this address,
and then repeat Step 5 through Step 8 for each additional
address.
12 In the Choose Severity box, click the severity level you want to
assign to this e-mail address.
Note: If you are using the remote client LMC, you can assign
more than one severity level. While pressing the Ctrl key,
click the severity levels you want to assign. The touch
screen on the library enables you to select only one severity
level.
194
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up E-mail Notifications
13 To accept this notification setup, click OK. The System Setup
Notification dialog box reappears.
14 Setup the heartbeat.
a Click Setup > Notification > System Setup. The System
Setup Notification dialog box appears with the Contact
Information tab displayed.
The Notification dialog box displays the Heartbeat tab.
This tab allows users to assign an email address to notify
someone of the status of the library at regular intervals. Users
can designate the interval in minutes.
15 After you finish setting up all notifications, click OK.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
195
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up Media Security Notifications
Setting Up Media Security Notifications
Note: You need an Advanced Reporting License installed on the
library in order to use media security notifications. See Enabling
Licenses on page 125.
You can configure the library to automatically notify you via a RAS ticket
when media is moved in or out of the library, either intentionally or
unintentionally. First, you must choose under which circumstances you
wish to be notified, and then you must enable automatic inventory on
the library.
1 Log on as administrator.
2 Click Setup > Notifications > Media Security. The Media Security
Notifications dialog box appears.
3 Check the box to the left of your media security notification choices.
You can select as many as you want:
• Unexpected Removal Detection After Power-up and Reboot
Only — Media were physically removed from the library when it
was powered down.
• Unexpected Removal Detection During Library Operation —
While library is powered up someone opens the door of the
library and removes media.
• Expected Removal Detection From I/E Slots During Library
Operation — Media are exported to the I/E (via backup
196
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Up Media Security Notifications
application or LMC) and are then physically removed from the
I/E station.
• Unexpected Removal Detection From I/E Slots During Library
Operation — Someone puts media in the I/E station for import,
the robot scans the media, and then the media are physically
removed from the I/E station.
4 Click OK to close the dialog.
5 From the main console, select Setup > System Settings > Physical
Library. The Physical Library dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
197
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Devices
6 For Automatic Inventory, click Enable.
7 Click OK.
Viewing the Media
Security Events Report
You can view a report of media security events by selecting Tools >
Reports > Media > Security.
The log displays events which met the criteria you selected in the Media
Security Notifications dialog box (see Setting Up Media Security
Notifications on page 196).
Configuring Devices
You can change the way library components appear to the hosts. The
Setup > Device command enables you to change the way system
components appear to the hosts.
The Setup > Drives > SCSI IDs command is available while viewing a
partition. Use this command to set the SCSI ID for a SCSI-attached drive.
All hosts that view the drive will see the same SCSI ID associated with
the drive.
The Setup > Drives > FC Settings command is available when viewing
the physical library and allows you to configure speed, topology, or
Loop ID for a Fibre-attached drive.
The Setup > Blades > Access command gives you access to the
Channel Zoning, FC Host, and LUN Mapping Wizard commands,
which are available while viewing the physical library.
The Setup > Drives > Access > SNW Wizard is available when viewing
the physical library and gives you access to the SNW Drive Licenses,
Control Path, Data Path Failover, and Host Access.
• Use the Channel Zoning command to restrict host access to
particular I/O blade ports.
• Use the FC Host commands to configure access to partition
accessors and drives on a per-host basis. If you have connected your
host to the FC port on the MCB, or to a port on one of the FC I/O
blades, you must map the appropriate partitions by using the FC
Host command. If you have connected your hosts directly to the
198
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Drive SCSI ID
drives, use third-party software of your choice to manage media
from the host itself.
• Use the SNW Wizard to select the drives you want managed by the
Storage Networking (SNW) feature. The selected drives can be
configured so client hosts can be granted or denied access. Only
IBM or HP LTO-5 or later drives are supported. Each drive selected
will consume a SNW license.
• Use the LUN Mapping Wizard command to set up LUN Mapping for
your Fibre Channel hosts
If you have not otherwise restricted access, FC Host has full control of
all LUNs on all FC and SCSI channels. Each FC host attached to an FC I/O
blade can be configured to access a maximum of 255 LUNs, up to an
overall system total of 2,048.
Configuring Drive SCSI ID
From a partition, you can change the SCSI ID for a SCSI-attached drive.
For example, the default SCSI ID for a drive that you are installing might
conflict with the assigned SCSI ID of an existing drive. You might be
using an application that expects to communicate with a device at a
specific SCSI ID, but that ID might already have been configured for use
in another partition. Use the Setup > Device > IDs command to correct
these situations.
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the partition that includes the drive
you want to configure. From the View menu, click the name of the
appropriate partition.
3 Click Setup > Drives > SCSI ID’s. The SCSI ID’s dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
199
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Drive SCSI ID
4 Select the drive who’s SCSI ID you want to change from the Select
Device drop-down list. The drop-down list uses the drive’s location
coordinates to identify the drive.
For example, in the figure above, the drive is in position 10. The
following figure shows its location in the control module. For more
information about location coordinates, see Understanding
Location Coordinates on page 459.
200
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Drive SCSI ID
Drive 12
(1,1,1,10,1,1)
Drive 11
Drive 10
Drive 9
Drive 8
Drive 7
Drive 6
Drive 5
Drive 4
Drive 3
Drive 2
Drive 1
5 To specify a particular ID for a drive, click a new ID number from the
New ID drop-down list.
6 Click Set.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
201
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel Drive Speed, Topology, and Loop ID
Configuring Fibre Channel Drive Speed, Topology, and
Loop ID
Administrators can view and modify Speed, Topology, and Loop ID
settings for Fibre Channel tape drives.
If the affected partition is online, it will be taken offline before the
parameters are set, and brought back online after they are set.
1 Click Setup > Drives > FC Settings. The Drive Settings dialog box
appears.
2 From the Partition Filter drop-down list, select all partitions or a
single partition whose drive settings you want to set.
3 Configure the settings as described below:
202
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel Drive Speed, Topology, and Loop ID
Speed
The requested interface speed can be set to Auto (default;
autonegotiates to highest speed possible), 1 Gb/s, 2 Gb/s, 4 Gb/s, or 8
Gb/s (depending on drive type).
Caution: LTO-5 and later Fibre Channel tape drives can be
configured for speeds of up to 8 Gb/s. If they are
configured for 8 Gb/s, you should connect them directly to
a host and not to an FC I/O blade, because the FC I/O blade
only allows speeds up to 4 Gb/s. If you connect an LTO-5 or
later Fibre Channel tape drive to an FC I/O blade, you must
configure the tape drive speed of 4 Gb/s or less.
Note: The speed settings you choose are requested, not actual. If the
requested speed setting is not supported, the next appropriate
setting is negotiated.
Topology
The requested topology connection mode can be set to one of the
following:
• Loop (default) — Force L-Port
• Loop Preferred — Auto-configure trying L-Port first
• Point to Point — Force N-Port
Notes about point to point
• You can use Point to Point if the tape drive is connected via a switch
or directly to a host.
• You cannot use Point to Point if the tape drive is connected to an FC
I/O blade.
• You must use Point to Point if the tape drive is being used for
control path failover (see Configure Control Path on page 361).
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
203
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
Loop ID
You can only set Loop ID when the Topology is set to Loop. You cannot
set the Loop ID if the Topology is set to Point to Point or Loop Preferred.
The loop ID can be set to Soft (default) or to a value from 0 to 125.
When set to Soft, a unique loop ID is selected for the drive. If you
change the Loop ID to a specific value, make sure that each FC tape
drive has a unique loop ID.
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
FC Host
The FC Host command enables you to manually modify host
information and set LUN mappings.
During device discovery, a particular partition or drive could map to a
higher LUN space than is optimal for a particular application. The FC
Host command enables you to create a virtual private remapping of
available LUNs for a specific Fibre Channel-attached host. LUN mapping
is required to give hosts access to partitions and devices. You also can
make devices appear to the host as if they were at lower LUNs in order
to optimize system performance.
Note: Use the FC Host command to map partitions when a Fibre
Channel host is connected either to the MCB or to an I/O blade.
Depending on host operating system constraints, it might be necessary
to reboot or reconfigure the host because of device map changes that
result from using the FC Host command.
Caution: If you change LUN mapping after host computers or
applications have already discovered devices, you must
make sure that device discovery occurs again. Device
discovery occurs automatically when you reboot the library.
Some host computers have plug and play capability, which
discovers devices automatically. In general, host
applications do not discover devices automatically.
204
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
Note: EEBs connected to drives configured with a control path may
report certain library ready conditions differently than drives
without a control path configured.
Accessing FC Hosts
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Blades > Access > FC Host. The FC Host dialog box
appears.
Only the host’s port, blade, and World Wide Name (WWN) appear.
Note: Clicking Refresh allows you to update the current state of
the host devices.
Adding, Modifying, and Deleting FC Hosts
You can add and configure FC hosts without powering down the
system. Manually add an FC host if it was not already connected to the
library when it was turned on.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
205
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
Adding an FC Host
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Blades > Access > FC Host. The FC Host dialog box
appears.
4 Click Create. The Add Host Data dialog box appears.
5 Use the check boxes under Select Blades to select at least one blade
that the host will access.
6 Using the text boxes provided, provide the following required
information:
• In the Name text box, type a host device name.
• From the Type drop-down list, click the appropriate host type by
operating system.
• In the Port text box, type the host device port.
Note: The Port field can be used for any free-form text to help
better describe the connectivity. This field otherwise has no
configuration functionality.
• In the WWN text box, type the host device World Wide Name
(WWN).
7 Click OK.
Modifying an FC Host
1 With the host selected in the FC Host dialog box, click Modify. The
Host Configuration dialog box appears.
206
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
2 As necessary, change the information in the Name and Port text
boxes, and then click the appropriate host type by operating system
from the Type drop-down list. You cannot change the World Wide
Name (WWN).
Caution: You also must make the necessary physical changes to
the name, operating system, or port connection.
3 Click OK.
Deleting an FC Host
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Blades > Access > FC Host. The FC Host dialog box
appears.
Note: FC hosts can be reconfigured without powering down the
system.
Click the host from the list, and then click Delete. A message
appears that asks you whether you want to delete the host.
Note: The Delete button is unavailable if the host is online.
4 Click Yes. A message appears that indicates a successful deletion.
5 Click OK.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
207
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
Channel Zoning
Channel zoning, also called port zoning, is an optional feature that
configures access to an entire Fibre Channel and all the LUNs on that
channel for the exclusive use of a host or group of hosts on a single
port. Channel zoning enables you to control access between specific
target Fibre Channel (FC) ports and initiator channels on an I/O blade in
your library. If you make changes to the channel zoning settings, you
must reboot the I/O blade for the new settings to take effect.
Caution: If you change channel zoning after host computers or
applications have already discovered devices, you must
make sure that device discovery occurs again. Device
discovery could occur automatically when you reboot the
library. Some host computers have plug and play capability,
which can discover devices automatically. Host applications
might discover devices automatically.
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Blades > Access > Channel Zoning. The Channel
Zoning dialog box appears.
4 Click the I/O blade you want to configure to highlight it.
The same I/O blade may appear multiple times in the list depending
on the number of hosts assigned to the I/O blade. You only need to
select one instance of the blade to zone the entire blade.
208
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
5 Click Configure. The Channel Zoning Settings dialog box appears
for the selected I/O blade. By default, all FC ports have access to all
channels.
6 If you want to permit access, select the check box in the cell where
the target port and the initiator channel meet. If you want to
restrict access, clear the check box in the cell where the target port
and the initiator channel meet.
If an FC port is set to target and initiator mode, the port appears in
both the horizontal row and vertical column. To prevent ghosting,
the FC port is not allowed access to itself. Ghosting is a condition
where hosts can see storage in two places.
Caution: When you select a check box in the cell, the entire
channel is zoned. This zoning affects any host that
might being accessing the I/O blade. Channel zoning
settings supersede any host LUN mapping on the I/O
blade.
7 To continue, click OK.
8 You must reboot the I/O blade for the new configuration settings to
take effect. In the Attention dialog box, click Yes to proceed. If you
do not want to continue with the configuration, click No.
9 After you complete your configuration changes, click Close.
FC Host LUN Mapping
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Use the FC Host LUN Mapping dialog box to give a selected host access
to partitions and drives.
209
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
Configuring LUN Mapping
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 To ensure you are working from the physical library, from the main
console, select View and click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Blades > Access > FC Host. The FC Host dialog box
appears.
4 Select a host on the FC Host dialog box, click LUN Mapping. The FC
Host LUN Mapping dialog box appears in its default view.
This dialog box displays all partitions and drives connected to the
blade to which the host is attached.
Note: If you delete a partition that is currently displayed on the
FC Host LUN Mapping dialog box, the internal LUN and
any external LUN mappings for the partition will no longer
appear on the dialog box.
210
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
Note: If a partition is already presented via Control Path it will
not show up in the list of internal LUN devices.
5 Compare the default view with the Show Details view shown in the
following figure. To change from the default view to the detailed
view, see Setting the View for the FC Host Device Column on
page 215.
In this figure, the Internal LUN column has been scrolled down. The
Show Details view for partitions shows the partition name, product
ID, vendor ID, and the serial number of the partition. For drives, the
LMC displays the device LUN, connection type, port connection,
vendor ID, serial number, and the associated partition.
The following table describes the descriptors that appear in the
Show Details view for partitions.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
211
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
Table 29 Show Details
Descriptor
Description
Partition Name
Name assigned during partition creation process.
Product ID
The Product ID setting controls the product ID string that is returned in a
standard SCSI INQUIRY response. The library can report that it is a Scalar i500,
Scalar i2000, or Scalar i6000. This feature can enable the library to be used
with host applications that do not yet include the Scalar i6000 in a list of
recognized devices. In addition, the various Microsoft Windows operating
systems maintain a list of recognized devices. If the Scalar i6000 is not in an
operating system’s list of recognized devices, the library will appear as an
“unknown” device in device lists. You might prevent the library from being
listed as “unknown” by setting Product ID to a library other than Scalar i6000.
This setting does not cause any library operational changes other than the SCSI
INQUIRY response.
Vendor ID
ADIC or QUANTUM (default is QUANTUM).
This information is used in the SCSI Inquiry command. Some backup
applications may only support or be configured for ADIC libraries, so if you
configure a logical library using the vendor ID of QUANTUM, the backup
application would not work with the library.
Serial Number
Partition ID, as shown by Monitor > System > Components tab.
The following table describes the descriptors that appear in the Show
Details view for drives.
Table 30 Descriptors
Descriptor
Description
[Number] [Connection
Type] [Port
Connection]
[LUN] [Fibre or SCSI] [Port Number].
Vendor ID
Drive manufacturer.
Serial Number
Drive serial number.
Partition
Name of the partition with which the drive is associated.
212
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
In the default view, only the names of available partitions and the
names of the devices (drives) are shown. LUN spaces from 0-255 are
available. In the Show Details view, a partition that has not yet
been manually reassigned to a new map position appears in heavy
black type in the Internal LUN column. Partitions are treated by the
system as devices. You must assign a partition to the LUN/External
LUN column for the LMC to manage it and its media. In this
example, the control LUN has already been remapped as shown in
heavy black type in the LUN/External LUN column.
6 If you are working from the local touch screen, you must select an
internal device LUN, select the left arrow, and then select the desired
external LUN. If you are working from the remote client, you can use
the select method or you can drag and drop the devices from the
Internal LUN column to the appropriate LUN assignment in the
LUN/External LUN column. Always use LUN 0 for command and
control.
In the following figure, all devices have been mapped manually.
The new map locations appear in heavy black type in the LUN/
External LUN column. The previous (default) device map position of
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
213
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
a remapped device is shown in gray type in the Internal LUN
column.
7 To save the mapping, click OK. The FC host map is automatically
saved as part of the configuration.
For more information about device numbering in a SAN context, see the
Online Help.
Modifying FC Host Mapping
When a device has been mapped, it is still listed, though unavailable, in
the Internal LUN column.
In the following figure, the LUNs are not currently available for mapping
because they have already been mapped into the LUN/External LUN
column.
The device that was formerly found at assigned LUN 4 is now found at
assigned LUN 2. Drag it back into the Internal LUN column to make it
available for re-mapping. If you are working from the local touch
screen, select an external device LUN, and then select the right arrow.
214
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
Setting the View for the FC Host Device Column
Click View at the top of the FC Host LUN Mapping dialog box. If you
want to see product details, select the Show Details check box. If you
want to see only the names of the devices available for mapping, clear
the Show Details check box to toggle the display back to the default
view.
Using the LUN Mapping Wizard
LUN mapping is required to give hosts access to partitions and devices.
You can also make devices appear to the host as if they were at lower
LUNs in order to optimize library performance.
The LUN Mapping Wizard guides you through the setup of LUN
mapping for your Fibre Channel hosts.
Note: If you want to manually assign a target LUN, or want to add/
modify/delete the host, select Setup > Blades > Access > FC
Host on the menu bar. For more information, see FC Host on
page 204.
The LUN Mapping Wizard automatically assigns sequential numbers for
the external LUN of each mapped device, without any gaps between
them per blade. When using the LUN Mapping Wizard, the LUN for
some devices may change even if you did not specify the changes. If a
control LUN is mapped, it is always assigned LUN 0.
Depending upon host operating system constraints, it may be necessary
to reboot or reconfigure the host as a result of device map changes
resulting from the use of the LUN Mapping Wizard.
1 Click Setup > Blades > Access > LUN Mapping Wizard. The LUN
Mapping Wizard – Overview dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
215
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
2 Review the LUN Mapping Wizard Overview, then click Next to
continue. The LUN Mapping Wizard – Select Host dialog box
appears. All available hosts are listed on this dialog box.
3 Select a host to configure and then click Next to continue. All
available partitions on the selected host are listed on this dialog
box. The LUN Mapping Wizard – Select Partition dialog box
appears.
4 Select a partition to configure and then click Next to continue. All
available blades on the selected partition are listed on this dialog
box. The LUN Mapping Wizard – Select Blade dialog box appears.
216
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
5 Select a blade to configure and then click Next to continue. The LUN
Mapping Wizard – Map/Unmap Devices dialog box appears.
6 Select the check box to map a device or clear the check box to
unmap a device, then click Next to continue. The LUN Mapping
Wizard – What Next? dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
217
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
7 Select one of the following and click Next to continue:
• Map another blade – this allows you to map another blade on
the same partition.
• Map another partition – this allows you to map another
partition on the same host.
• Map another host – this allows you to map another host.
• Continue and preview all the changes – this allows you to
view an online printout of the change report which presents a
preview of all changes, showing whether you added, modified
or deleted any devices.
8 If your configurations are complete, select Continue and preview
all changes. The LUN Mapping Wizard – Preview All Changes
dialog box appears.
218
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
9 Prior to finishing and saving your LUN mapping configuration
changes, review your newly mapped or unmapped devices in this
dialog box.
• If you would like to create a report of your changes, click View
Change Report.
• If you are satisfied with your LUN mapping changes and want
complete the wizard process, click Finish. Your LUN mapping
changes are finalized, and then you have the option of viewing
the LUN Mapping Report.
The LUN Mapping Change Preview Report – Print Preview dialog
box appears. This dialog box displays what types of changes were
made to all devices.
The changes on the report include:
• Added Mapping – (A)
• Removed Mapping – (R)
• LUN Modified – (M)
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
219
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
10 On the LUN Mapping Change Preview Report – Print Preview
dialog box, you can select the following:
• To save the report as a PDF file, click PDF. Specify a file path and
file name, and then click Confirm.
• To print the report, click Print. Specify print options, and then
click OK.
• To navigate through the pages of the report, click Back or Next.
• To increase or decrease the magnification of the report, click
Zoom In or Zoom Out.
• To access the Online Help, click Help.
11 After you have reviewed the LUN Mapping Change Preview
Report, click Close to return to the LUN Mapping Wizard –
Preview All Changes dialog box.
220
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
12 If you are satisfied with your LUN mapping changes and want to
complete the wizard process, click Finish. Your LUN mapping
changes are finalized
You have the option of viewing the LUN Mapping Report.
Generating the LUN
Mapping Report
The LUN Mapping Report lets you view the current LUN configuration
settings for the library. The report displays information about tape
drives and other devices in the library, such as WWN (world wide name),
LUN (logical unit number), and serial number.
When generating the LUN Mapping Report, you can choose to group
devices by the associated host or by the associated partition.
Viewing the LUN Mapping Report
To view the LUN Mapping report, first choose a grouping criteria, then
view the report.
1 On the menu bar, click Tools > Reports > LUN Mapping. The Report
Criteria dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
221
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
2 Under Specify Report Criteria, click a grouping option.
• Group by Host — The report lists the devices associated with
each host.
• Group by Partition — The report lists the devices associated
with each partition.
3 Click View. The Print Preview dialog box appears. Figure 41 on
page 223 shows an example of a LUN Mapping Report grouped
by host.
222
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
Figure 41 LUN Mapping
Report grouped by host
preview
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
223
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Fibre Channel I/O Blades
Figure 42 on page 224 shows an example of a LUN Mapping
Report grouped by partition.
Figure 42 LUN Mapping
Report grouped by partition
preview
4 Do one or more of the following:
• To navigate through the pages of the report, click Back or Next.
• To increase or decrease the magnification of the report, click
Zoom In or Zoom Out.
• To print the report, click Print. Specify print options, and then
click OK.
• To save the report as a PDF file, click PDF. Specify a file path and
file name, and then click Confirm.
224
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Generating the Library Configuration Report
Note: You cannot print reports or save them to a PDF file using
the touch screen.
5 When you are finished working with the Print Preview dialog box,
click Close.
6 To close the Report Criteria dialog box, click Cancel.
Exporting a Report to an E-mail or a Text File
Instead of viewing or printing the report on the Print Preview dialog
box, you can e-mail the report data to an e-mail address. Or export the
report data to a comma delimited text file (*.csv) for use in other
programs.
1 On the menu bar, click Tools > Reports > LUN Mapping. The Report
Criteria dialog box appears.
2 Under Specify Report Criteria, click a grouping option.
• Group by Host — The report lists the devices associated with
each host.
• Group by Partition — The report lists the devices associated
with each partition.
3 Click Export. The Export Raw Data dialog box appears.
4 Do one of the following:
• To send the report data to an e-mail address, click Email. Type or
select the e-mail address, type an optional comment in the
Comment box, and then click OK.
• To save the report data to a comma delimited text file, click
Save. Specify a file path and file name, and then click OK.
5 To close the Report Criteria dialog box, click Cancel.
Generating the Library Configuration Report
The Library Configuration report lets you view the number of I/E
stations, drives, and storage slots in the library that are currently
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
225
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Generating the Library Configuration Report
assigned to each logical partition. Generate the Library Configuration
report to help make sure you are using library resources effectively.
1 On the menu bar, click Tools > Reports > Library Configuration.
The Library Configuration - Print Preview dialog box appears.
2 Do one or more of the following:
• To navigate through the pages of the report, click Back or Next.
• To increase or decrease the magnification of the report, click
Zoom In or Zoom Out.
• To print the report, click Print. Specify print options, and then
click OK.
• To save the report as a PDF file, click PDF. Specify a file path and
file name, and then click Confirm.
226
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Drive Cleaning
Note: You cannot print reports or save them to a PDF file using
the touch screen.
3 When you are finished working with the Library Configuration Print Preview dialog box, click Close.
Configuring Drive Cleaning
When you create or modify a partition, you can specify that tape drives
in that partition be cleaned each time the library requests a cleaning
operation.
For drive cleaning to function, you must configure it for the library. To
configure drive cleaning, first assign cleaning magazines, and then
import cleaning media. Designated cleaning media can also be used
when manually cleaning drives. (Cleaning magazines and media are not
part of any logical partition, and so are not visible to the host
application).
If cleaning magazines are no longer needed, you can unassign them. In
addition, you can export expired cleaning media to remove it from the
library.
Note: Slots configured for drive cleaning affect the number of
licensed COD slots.
Note: Drive cleaning should be enabled for partitions only if the host
application does not support the coordination of drive
cleaning. If drive cleaning functionality is enabled on the host
application, do not enable drive cleaning for any partitions in
the library.
For more information about enabling automatic drive cleaning
for a partition, see Working With Partitions on page 128 on
page 171. For more information about manually cleaning
drives, see Cleaning a Drive on page 566.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
227
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Drive Cleaning
Note: For information about cleaning media, see Using Cleaning
Cartridges on page 696.
Assigning Cleaning
Magazines
To configure the library for drive cleaning, you must first assign one or
more magazines as cleaning magazines, and then import cleaning
media (see Importing Cleaning Media on page 230).
Note: At least one magazine must be assigned for cleaning before
you can import cleaning media. Also, only magazines that do
not belong to a partition can be assigned for cleaning.
1 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, select the name of the physical library.
2 On the menu bar, select Setup > Cleaning Slots. The Cleaning Slot
Configuration window displays.
228
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Drive Cleaning
Figure 43 Cleaning Slot
Configuration window
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
229
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Drive Cleaning
3 Click a magazine slot or tape cartridge to select it.
Details about the selected slot or media appear under Information,
including the type of media, barcode number, location, and the
number of times the media has been mounted in a drive.
4 If the library has more than one module, click the arrow buttons to
display the next or previous module.
5 To assign a magazine for cleaning, click any slot in the magazine to
select it. Click Menu, and then select Assign magazine for
cleaning. The magazine is assigned for cleaning.
Repeat this step to assign additional cleaning magazines.
Note: You can also right click any slot in the magazine to assign it
for cleaning.
Importing Cleaning
Media
1 To import cleaning media, select Operations > Import Cleaning
Media....The Import Cleaning Media window displays.
2 Click the check box in the Select column next to the cleaning tape
you want to import.
3 Click OK. The Working... dialog box displays.
230
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Drive Cleaning
4 When complete, a dialog displays indicating if the import was
successful.
The cleaning media are moved to an available cleaning magazine,
and can be used for drive cleaning.
5 Click OK. On the Import Cleaning Media window, the cleaning
tape will be highlighted green.
6 Click Cancel to close the Import Cleaning Media window.
Note: If you are working on the remote LMC, you can right-click a
magazine slot or a piece of cleaning media to see a menu of
available options.
Exporting Cleaning
Media
Cleaning media can be used a limited number of times. If a cleaning
tape is expired, export it and remove it from the library. There are two
ways to export cleaning media:
• From the Cleaning Slots dialog, or
• From the Export Cleaning Media... dialog
Exporting Cleaning Media from the Cleaning Slots dialog
1 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
2 Select Setup > Cleaning Slots. The Cleaning Slot Configuration
dialog box appears. If the library has more than one module, click
the arrow buttons to display the next or previous module.
Note: To determine the number of cleanings the cleaning media
has performed, click the media to select it, and then check
the Mount Count value under Information.
3 Click the cleaning media in a cleaning magazine to select it, and
then do one of the following:
• To export only the selected piece of media, click Menu, and then
click Export cleaning media <barcode number>.
• To export all media in the selected magazine, click Menu, and
then click Export all cleaning media in magazine.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
231
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Drive Cleaning
The cleaning media are moved to an available I/E station magazine.
Note: You can also right click the piece of media and select
Export cleaning media <barcode number> or in the
magazine and select Export all cleaning media in
magazine.
4 Click Close to close the Drive Cleaning Configuration dialog box.
Exporting Cleaning Media from Export Cleaning Media dialog
1 Select Operations > Export Cleaning Media....The Export
Cleaning Media dialog box displays.
2 Click the check box in the Select column next to the cleaning tape
you want to export.
3 Click OK. The Working... dialog box displays.
4 When complete, a dialog displays indicating if the export was
successful.
The cleaning media are removed to an available slot in the I/E
station.
5 Click OK. On the Export Cleaning Media window, the exported
cleaning tape will be highlighted green.
232
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Registering SNMP Traps
6 Click Cancel to close the Export Cleaning Media window.
Unassigning a Cleaning
Magazine
If a magazine is no longer needed for holding cleaning media, first
export all cleaning media from the magazine, and then unassign it.
1 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, select the name of the physical library.
2 On the menu bar, select Setup > Cleaning Slot. The Cleaning Slot
Configuration dialog box appears. If the library has more than one
module, click the arrow buttons to display the next or previous
module.
3 If the magazine you want to unassign contains cleaning media,
export all cleaning media to the I/E station.
For more information on exporting cleaning media, see Exporting
Cleaning Media on page 231.
4 Click any slot in the cleaning magazine to select it.
5 Click Menu, and then click Unassign magazine for cleaning. The
magazine is no longer assigned for cleaning.
Note: You can also right click in any slot in the cleaning magazine
and then select Unassign magazine for cleaning.
6 Click Close to close the Cleaning Slot Configuration dialog box.
Note: You cannot unassign a cleaning magazine that contains valid
cleaning media. You must first export the cleaning media and
then unassign the cleaning magazine.
Registering SNMP Traps
Because the library ignores all SNMP SET operations, external
management applications cannot register themselves to receive SNMP
traps from the library. The Trap Registration dialog box enables you to
manually register external applications.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
233
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Registering SNMP Traps
Registering an
Application
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Notifications > Trap Registration. The Trap
Registration dialog box appears.
4 In the Host/IP text box, type the iPv4 or iPv6 address or host name
of the host client running of the external application.
5 In the Port text box, type the number of the User Datagram Protocol
(UDP) port that you want to associate with the IP address or host
name.
6 Click Create.
The host application's IP address or name and UDP port number
appear in the table to indicate that the application is registered to
receive SNMP traps from the library.
234
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Library Security
Removing an
Application’s Trap
Registration
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Notifications > Trap Registration. The Trap
Registration dialog box appears.
4 Click the IP address of the application for which you want to remove
trap registration to highlight it.
5 Click Delete.
Configuring Library Security
You can change the library’s security settings, including enabling or
disabling network services, enabling or disabling remote access to the
library, setting up firewall access for server callbacks to remote clients,
and enabling or disabling SNMP or SMI-S access. You can configure the
library’s security while viewing either the physical library or a partition.
Note: Changing security configuration settings using the remote
client might cause a loss of connectivity. If this happens, use
the local touch panel to reset the security configuration
settings and restore remote connectivity.
Accessing the Security
Configuration Dialog
Box
The Security Configuration dialog box enables you to restrict external
users and various remote services from accessing the library through the
Ethernet port on the MCB.
1 Log on as an admin user.
2 Click Setup > Security. The Security Configuration dialog box
appears with the Services tab displayed.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
235
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Library Security
Configuring Access for
Network Services
The Services tab on the Security Configuration dialog box enables you
to entirely prevent all external access to the library or allow access
according to other security settings on the Security Configuration
dialog box. It also enables you to allow or prevent access by SSH, SSHv1,
and to allow or prevent external attempts to discover the library by
pinging it.
1 Click the Services tab on the Security Configuration dialog box.
2 You can change the security settings for any of the following items:
• Network Interface — To entirely prevent all external access to
the library through the MCB Ethernet port, regardless of other
settings on the Security Configuration dialog box, select
Disable. To allow external access to the library in accordance
with other security settings on the Security Configuration
dialog box, select Enable. (The Network Interface option is
unavailable when accessing the LMC remotely.)
• ICMP — To prevent external attempts to discover the library by
pinging it (by means of Internet Control Message Protocol
[ICMP] Echo packets), select Disable. Using this setting can
prevent denial-of-service (DoS) attacks, which can flood the
236
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Library Security
library with pings and cause loss of network connectivity and
services.
• SSH — To prevent Secure Shell access to the library, select
Disable. To allow SSH to access the library, select Enable.
• SSHv1 — To prevent Secure Shell version 1 protocol from
running on the library, select Disable. To allow SSHv1 to run on
the library, select Enable. SSHv1 is enabled by default. If you
choose to disable SSHv1, only SSHv2 will connect to the library.
• CLI — To access the library using a command line interface,
select Enable. For more information, see Chapter 14, Using the
Command Line Interface.
Note: Access is gained via SSH. Therefore, to use the CLI to
access the library, you must also enable SSH (see
above).
• HTTP — To prevent access to the library using the Web browser
client, select Disable. If you choose to disable HTTP, access to the
library is limited to the library’s operator panel or the LMC
application. To permit access to the library GUI using a Web
browser client, select Enable. (The HTTP option is unavailable
when accessing the LMC remotely.)
• XML Interface — If Quantum Vision software is monitoring the
library, you need to enable the XML interface so Vision can get
the information it needs. In order to select XML Interface, the
HTTP option must also be enabled.
If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled for your
library on the Network Configuration dialog box (Setup >
Network Configuration), you also should enable ICMP. This ensures
that the DHCP server can determine whether the IP address that is
assigned to the MCB is still valid. (ICMP is enabled by default.)
3 If you want to apply the changes, but you do not want to close the
dialog box, click Apply. Otherwise, click OK to apply the changes
and close the dialog box.
Configuring Access for
Remote LMC Clients
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
You can use the LMC tab on the Security Configuration dialog box to
configure the following options:
237
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Library Security
• To allow or prevent remote LMC client access to the library
• To set up firewall access for server callbacks to remote clients
• To enable or disable service login
• To set up the length of time before a session timeout
1 Click the LMC tab on the Security Configuration dialog box.
2 Change the security settings for any of the following items:
• Remote Access — To prevent all remote LMC clients from
accessing the library, select Disable. To allow them to access the
library, select Enable.
• Select Use SSL to enable secure communication between the
LMC client and the library.
Note: Enabling SSL can impact the network performance of
remote operations (for example, downloading new
library software).
• Callback Port Range — To configure firewall access for server
callbacks to remote clients, type the first port number of a
238
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Library Security
range of ports that you want to be used for callbacks in the
Starting text box, and then type the last port number in the
Ending text box. Valid port ranges must fit within the range
1024 to 65535. Remote client service ports must be within the
range of ports specified here. Otherwise, callbacks fail because
the library’s firewall blocks outbound packets designated for
out-of-range ports.
• Service Login — To allow service login, select Enable. To
prevent service login, select Disable. The Admin user can enable
or disable the service user login on both the front panel access
and the remote client access.
Note: The default service login through the service port is still
available for use. For security purposes, the service port
can be physically locked down by locking the back door
of the Scalar i6000.
• Session — To configure the length of the session’s timeout,
type or use the arrow buttons to specify the length of a session
before it times out. Valid session timeouts are 1 – 1440 minutes
(1 minute to 24 hours). The default is 30 minutes.
Note: The Service login timeout is set to 4 hrs and cannot be
modified.
3 If you want to apply the changes, but you do not want to close the
dialog box, click Apply. Otherwise, click OK to apply the changes
and close the dialog box.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
239
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Library Security
Configuring Access for
SNMP and SMI-S
The SNMP/SMI-S tab on the Security Configuration dialog box allows
you to enable or prevent SNMP or SMI-S traffic across the MCB Ethernet
port.
1 Click the SNMP/SMI-S tab on the Security Configuration dialog
box.
2 You can change the security settings for any of the following items:
• SMI-S — To allow SMI-S traffic (port 5988), select the Enable
SMI-S check box. To allow encryption of SMI-S traffic (SSL, port
5989), select the Enable Secure SMI-S check box.
Note: Port 427 is used for Service Location Protocol (SLP),
which is used along with the Common Information
Model (CIM) server.
• SNMP — To prevent all SNMP traffic across the MCB Ethernet
port, select Disable. To allow SNMP Get operations, select
Enable.
If SNMP traffic is allowed, then SNMP v3 is always available. If
you want to permit less secure SNMP access, select Enable
SNMP v1 and v2. If you decide you do not want to use SNMP
v1 and v2, clear the Enable SNMP v1 and v2 check box.
240
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Using LDAP
You can also change the community string from the default.
The library ignores all remotely issued SNMP SET operations
under any circumstance, which means that external applications
cannot register themselves to receive SNMP traps from the
library. However, the Trap Registration dialog box (Setup >
Notifications > Trap Registration) enables you to perform this
registration yourself by entering the necessary IP and port
information. For more information about the Trap Registration
dialog box, see Registering SNMP Traps on page 233.
3 If you want to apply the changes, but you do not want to close the
dialog box, click Apply. Otherwise, click OK to apply the changes
and close the dialog box.
Using LDAP
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is the industry standard
Internet protocol that provides centralized user account management.
The library supports LDAP Directory servers based on Microsoft Active
Directory and Novell eDirectory. For information on how to configure
library LDAP settings, see Configuring LDAP on page 242.
You can configure the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
settings any time after the initial library configuration. Once you enable
and configure LDAP, you can view your current LDAP settings using the
LDAP menu.
Note: Active Directory no longer requires Windows Services for Unix
2.5.
LDAP Server Guidelines
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Enabling LDAP allows existing user accounts residing on an LDAP server
to be integrated into the library’s current user account management
subsystem. User account information is centralized and shared by
different applications, simplifying user account management tasks. For
more information about local user accounts, see Creating Local User
Accounts on page 478.
241
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Using LDAP
The remote client and operator panel do not allow you to create,
modify, or delete user account information on an LDAP server. This must
be done by the directory service provider.
User and Group Access
For LDAP accounts with user privileges, access to library partitions is
determined by group assignment on the LDAP server. Groups must be
created on the LDAP server with names that correspond to the library
partition names. User and library groups must reside in or below the
group context. Users without administrator privileges must be members
of both the user group defined in the LDAP server interface AND part of
a group with an identical name as the partition(s) on the library (RDN
[Relative Distinguished Name] only) in order to have access to the
corresponding partitions on the library. LDAP accounts with
administrator privileges have access to all partitions and administrative
functions and do not need to be assigned to partition-related groups on
the LDAP server.
Note: Usernames and group objects must be in LDAP Distinguished
Names formats.
OpenLDAP 2.4
You must install and run OpenLDAP 2.4 or later. The supported Objects
in OpenLDAP 2.4 and later are of type “Person” or derived objects, and
the group Objects must be of type “GroupOfNames.”
OpenLDAP must be compiled with Overlay Support and requires the
installation of “memberOf” overlay. More information can be found in
the man pages of OpenLDAP with the “man slapo-member of”
command.
Configuring LDAP
You can configure the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
settings any time after the initial library configuration.
1 From the LMC, select Setup > User Configuration > LDAP. The
LDAP Configuration dialog box displays with the General tab
displayed.
242
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Using LDAP
2 In the General tab, configure the following items:
• Enable LDAP:
• To enable LDAP, select Enable LDAP.
• To disable LDAP, clear the Enable LDAP check box.
Note: If you disable LDAP, single sign-on functionality will
not be available on the library.
• Server Configuration section:
• Primary: You must provide a primary IP address or DNS
name.
• Alternate: An alternate IP address or DNS name is optional.
• Secure: Use this check box to enable the setup options to
access a secure LDAP server, which can be done using any
port except 389. The default secure port is 636. If you
enable this option, you must retrieve the trusted root
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
243
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Using LDAP
certificate from the LDAP servers. If you use secure LDAP,
both LDAP servers specified above MUST use the same
trusted root.
• Port: Enter the appropriate port in this field.
• Retrieve TR: Use this function to retrieve the trusted root
certificate from the primary LDAP server. An MD5 and SHA1
hash is shown to verify the LDAP’s server identity.
Note: The first time you use Retrieve TR, the process can
take 5 to 10 minutes. To connect to a secure LDAP
server, you must complete the retrieval process.
Note: This button is only enabled if the Secure check box
is selected. Some directory servers (for example,
Novell eDirectoryTM) are secure only by default.
• Search Information section:
• Administrative user rights are not required, but the user
must have the right to search for all needed user names in
the LDAP directory.
244
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Using LDAP
3 Click the Access tab. Use this tab to configure LDAP authentication.
• Context Information section:
• User Context: The User Context is a fully qualified LDAP DN
and is used as the base to search for the login users. You
can search for a user in the context specified and all
contexts below it.
• Group Context: Use this field to search and discover what
groups a users is a member of. Only groups which are in the
group context or below are considered for library access.
• Library Access Groups section:
• User: The group associated with the library. A user that
belongs to the library user access group is granted user level
permission to access the library. For a user to manage a
partition, that user must also be a member of a user group
with the same name as the library partition in question.
• Admin: The group associated with the library administrator,
equivalent to the local administrative user privilege level.
Any member of this group has administrative privileges.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
245
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Using LDAP
Note: Non-admin library users also need to be members of
the groups that match the partition names for which
they are granted access. These group names do not
need to be specifically listed anywhere in the LDAP
setup on the library. When user logins are validated
during login, their group memberships for partition
access are validated automatically.
4 Test the LDAP configuration.
If you have administrative rights, you can use the Test functionality
to simulate an LDAP login for a specific user and quickly discover
what access rights the user has and to what partitions the user has
access.
Note: If help from support is needed, it is important to run this
test. More information is logged using the Test option than
using the normal login.
Note: The search filter for LDAP is
"(&(|(objectclass=User)(objectclass=person)(objectClass=p
osixAccount)(objectclass=inetOrgPerson))(|(cn=%USER%)(
uid=%USER%)(sAMAccountName=%USER%)))
This means that the objects the LDAP authentication looks
for are:
- User
- Person
- posixAccount
- inetOrgPerson
where the
- cn or
- uid or
- sAMAccountName
attributes match the actual username.
To test the LDAP configuration, do the following:
a Click the Test tab.
b Fill in the Test User section:
246
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Using LDAP
• User: Type the appropriate user name.
• Password: Type the user password.
c After you have entered all the LDAP configurations you wish,
click Test to verify the LDAP connection.
A message box displays indicating the success or failure of the
LDAP connection.
• If the connection failed, the error message contains
information that you can use to resolve the issue. Click OK
to return to the LDAP Configuration dialog box.
• If the connection succeeded, click OK.
5 To accept and save the library configuration, in the LDAP
Configuration dialog box, click OK.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
247
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Screen Saver Preferences
Configuring Screen Saver Preferences
Use the Screen Saver preferences tab to customize the images that
display on the LMC screen when the library is not in use. The screen
saver starts automatically if the library is idle for a specified amount of
time.
Note: Screen saver preferences can only be configured remotely, not
using the touch panel.
1 From the menu bar, click Setup > System Settings > Preferences.
The Preferences dialog box appears with the Screen Saver tab
displayed.
2 Do one of the following:
• Select Default to use the default Quantum screen saver with
standard settings.
248
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring Screen Saver Preferences
• Select Custom to change screen saver settings such as
activation, movement, or images.
• Select Off to disable the screen saver. (The current settings are
cleared.)
If you selected Custom, go to Step 3. Otherwise, go to Step 6.
3 Under Activation, enter a value in the Wait box to specify how
much idle time must pass before the screen saver is activated.
The activation wait time can be 1 – 120 minutes.
4 Under Movement, specify the position and the motion of the
screen saver image on the screen.
• Select Random to display the screen saver image in a variety of
positions.
• Select Stationary to display a static screen saver image that
does not move.
• Select Linear to display the screen saver image as a floating
image.
• Enter values in the horizontal and vertical boxes to specify the
movement of the screen saver image in pixels.
• Enter a value in the Motion Delay box to specify the movement
speed of the screen saver image.
5 Under Images, specify the image files to display for normal
functions, warning notices, and failure notices. You must select
image files for all three functions.
• To specify an image file, click Browse. Select the image file and
then click Open. The image file must be in GIF, JPEG, or PNG
format, and cannot be larger than 1 MB. In addition, image
resolution is limited to 600 x 800 pixels.
• Click Preview to preview an image file.
6 Click OK to save the settings and close the Preferences dialog box.
Or click Apply to save the settings without closing the Preferences
dialog box.
7 Because you made system configuration changes, you are prompted
to save the configuration changes. For more information, see Saving
and Restoring Library Configuration on page 601.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
249
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Data Path Conditioning
Working With Data Path Conditioning
The Scalar i6000 provides an automatic means of verifying, monitoring,
and protecting data path integrity between hosts and library drives. This
feature is referred to as data path conditioning. Using this feature,
administrators can proactively detect and resolve data path problems
before they affect backup, restore, and other data transfer operations.
Data path conditioning ensures that data transmissions are optimized
and reliable, resulting in improved system availability.
The FC I/O blade manages data path conditioning along the path
between itself and the library drives. Data path monitoring
automatically occurs at regular, configurable intervals. The I/O blade
generates a RAS ticket if monitoring tests fail for two intervals. This
indicates either loss of connectivity or drive failure. The FC I/O blades
include the data path conditioning feature, and administrators can
configure it using the LMC.
Configuring Datapath
Conditioning
For the library, target-side data path monitoring is performed
automatically and proactively. The Datapath Conditioning dialog box
allows you to set the level at which the data path is monitored between
an I/O blade and the drive(s) connected to it. You also can set the time
interval between monitoring checks (up to 48 hours).
Note: I/O blades must be present to access the Datapath
Conditioning dialog box.
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > Blades > Connectivity > Datapath Conditioning.
The Datapath Conditioning dialog box appears, showing all the I/O
blades found in the library. Each blade is identified by name and by
geographic location.
250
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working With Data Path Conditioning
4 Click a blade to highlight it, and then click Configure. The
Datapath Conditioning Setting dialog box appears.
5 In the Level area, select the appropriate level. The default level is
Interface Test. To enable data path monitoring tickets, set the level
to Device Datapath Test.
The following table describes the functionality for each data path
monitoring level.
Level Name
Functionality Description
Interface Test
Performs tests to verify that Fibre Channel controllers on I/O blades are responsive
to commands.
Device Datapath
Test
Performs tests at the Interface Test level, and also performs a device inquiry on
each target device.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
251
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
About the Configuration Record
6 In the Enter new Interval text box, type the amount of time that
should elapse between automatic monitoring checks. The interval
can range from 1 to 2,880 minutes (48 hours). The default interval is
60 minutes.
Note: The data path from I/O blade to the drive must experience
problems for two period intervals before a problem is
detected and a ticket is generated.
7 To save your configuration and return to the Datapath
Conditioning dialog box, click OK.
About the Configuration Record
The configuration record contains details about the library’s
configuration and can be sent to a specified e-mail address or saved as
a.txt file.
Information in the configuration record includes:
• Product information — Product name and version, MCB and RCU
versions, serial number, and modules/drives/partitions
configuration
• License information — License descriptions, quantities, and
installation dates
• Network information — Hostname, DHCP status, IP address, and IP,
Netmask, and Gateway addresses
• Partition information — Serial numbers, online/offline statuses, and
numbers of slots, drives, and I/E slots
• Drive information, for each drive — Location, partition, SCSI
element address, online/offline status, vendor, model, serial number,
logical serial number, firmware version, drive type, and interface
type:
• SCSI tape drives — SCSI ID
• Fibre Channel (FC) tape drives — World Wide Name (WWN) and
loop ID, speed, and connection type
252
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Setting Aisle Lights
Note: If the FC tape drive is attached to an FC I/O blade, the
WWN indicates the WWN of the I/O blade, not the tape
drive.
• I/O blade information — Blade type, location, firmware version,
serial number, WWN, and CC LUN
Before you can e-mail the configuration record, the library e-mail
account must be configured. For information on configuring the library
e-mail account, see Configuring E-mail on page 187.
For instructions on how to e-mail or save the configuration record, see
Mailing or Saving the Configuration Record on page 550.
Setting Aisle Lights
Aisle lights are optional on each module, and are mounted to the roof
of each module to illuminate the inside of the library.
To set the duration for aisle lighting:
1 From the main console, select Setup > System Settings > Aisle
Lights. The Aisle Light Settings dialog box appears.
2 Select a duration for the light to illuminate: 30 minutes, 1 hour, or
Always Off.
3 Click OK.
Note: Regardless of the selected setting, the aisle lights will turn off
automatically during all inventory and teach operations. At the
completion of these events the lights are automatically turned
back on if they were on prior to these operations.
Note: For the time limited settings, if the lights were on before the
operation, the timer starts over when the lights are
automatically turned on.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
253
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Configuring a Webcam For Your Library
Note: For time limited aisle light settings, user interaction, such as
using the touch panel or opening an I/E station or aisle door,
causes the timer to reset. The lights will automatically turn on if
they are not already.
Note: The default setting is Always Off.
Configuring a Webcam For Your Library
If desired, you can install a webcam in your library to monitor activity.
As of version 10.2, if you install a webcam in your library, the library
aisle lights turn on when the webcam is operating and then turn off
when it is stopped. In order to enable the library to control when the
aisle lights should be switched on and off in synchronization with
webcam usage, you must enter the webcam’s IP address.
To enter the webcam's IP address:
1 From the main console, select Setup > System Settings > Camera
Host/IP. The Camera Host/IP dialog box appears.
2 Specify the host name or IP address of the webcam that's connected
to your intranet.
3 Click OK.
254
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working with Towers
Note: As always, the aisle lights will continue to turn off
automatically during all inventory and teach operations. At the
completion of these events the lights are automatically turned
back on if they were on prior to these operations. For the timelimited settings, if the lights were on before the operation, the
timer starts over when the lights are automatically turned on.
So even if the webcam is off, the aisle lights will turn on during
these operations.
Additional Information
For more information about purchasing a webcam for your library,
contact your Quantum sales representative.
For webcam installation instructions, refer to the Scalar i6000
Installation Guide.
After you install the webcam, you can learn about its operation by
referring to the documentation that came with the webcam, or by
downloading the user’s guide from www.axis.com. Webcam model
#5014.
Note: If the webcam timestamp is inaccurate, this may indicate that
the battery needs to be replaced. Refer to the webcam
documentation for instructions to replace the battery.
Working with Towers
New to the i6000 library are high-density expansion modules (HDEM) or
towers. These modules have larger storage capacities making them ideal
for libraries where space is an issue.
If your library has a tower installed, you can manage, monitor and
maintain it.
1 From the Tools menu, select Towers. The Towers dialog box
displays.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
255
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working with Towers
The Towers dialog box displays all the towers currently installed in
the library and gives details about them, including:
• Tower # — The index of the tower in the library.
Note: The Tower # column shows the physical addressing of
the tower (i.e. Frame 2, Rack 1) but also the index
number of the tower(s) in the library. Libraries with
multiple towers will see them listed in the Tower #
column as only odd numbers, 1, 3, 5, etc. This is to
accommodate future tower expansion.
• Status — If the tower is available.
• Mode — If the tower is online or offline. When a user sets the
tower to Offline mode, the tower will not be accessible to a host
but can be used for UI operations, such as move media.
• Scanner — Status of the barcode scanner:
• Unknown - scanner is present but not working properly
• Not Present - scanner is not installed
• Removed - scanner has been taken out of the tower
• Failed - scanner is not working properly
256
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working with Towers
• Ready - scanner is installed and working properly
• State — Whether the tower is varied on or off. Varying Off a
tower allows a user to open the rear access door to perform any
necessary tower access or maintenance. If a tower is not Varied
Off before the rear access door is opened, the tower will
automatically go to a Varied Off state and the library will issue a
ticket. When a user Varies Off a tower it will no longer be
accessible to a host or UI operations.
• Door Status - Whether the rear access door is open or closed.
2 In the Control section of the Towers dialog box, you can click the
following buttons:
• Identify — This identifies the tower by setting the Tower
Enable button to blink a pattern for a minute before returning
it to its original state. For more details on the blinking patterns
for the Tower, see Interpreting HDEM Tower Enable Button
Blinking Pattern on page 114.
• Offline/Online — Takes the tower offline or online depending
on what is displayed in the Mode column.
• Vary Off/On — Varies the tower either on or off depending
what is displayed in the State column.
• Reset — Resets the HDC in the selected tower. The selected
tower must be Varied Off.
• Cancel — Closes the Towers dialog box.
• Refresh — Refreshes the Towers dialog so it displays the most
current information.
• Help — Displays the i6000 online help page referencing the
tower.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
257
Chapter 3: Configuring Your Library
Working with Towers
258
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 4
Active Vault
The Active Vault feature allows you to keep tape cartridges vaulted
within a physical library, rather than having to move them to other
onsite or offsite locations. These cartridges are stored in an “Active
Vault” partition that is not managed by a host and contains no tape
drives. You can configure policies on standard partitions to redirect SSCI
host initiated tape cartridge export MOVE operations directly to an
Active Vault partition, or you can configure a plug-in to query an
external application where the export move operation is intended for an
Active Vault partition. Additionally, Active Vault partitions can be
enabled for EDLM policies that provide for regularly timed media scan
operations.
This chapter covers:
• About Active Vault on page 260
• Configure Active Vault on page 260
• Create Active Vault Partitions on page 261
• Configure Access to External Applications on page 262
• Configure Active Vault Policies on Partitions on page 262
• View Active Vault Partition Policies on page 266
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
259
Chapter 4: Active Vault
About Active Vault
About Active Vault
• The Active Vault feature requires an Active Vault license (see
Enabling Licenses on page 125).
• You can move tapes between Active Vault partitions and standard
partitions via the library user interface without exporting and
importing the tapes (for more information, see Moving Media
Between Active Vault or AMP and Standard Partitions on page 704).
Note: Manual movement between library managed partitions and
standard partitions will require inventory reconciliation with
the backup application managing the standard partition. SCSI
Unit Attention 6/2800 and 6/2801 inform host applications of
the need to refresh element status.
• Active Vault partitions are library managed partitions. They are not
accessible to hosts.
• Active Vault partitions are composed of unlicensed slots. If the size
of the Active Vault partition exceeds the number of available
unlicensed slots, then the partition will be composed of both
unlicensed and licensed slots, or use all licensed slots.
• Active Vault partitions may configure I/E station slots.
• Active Vault partitions do not contain drives.
• You may have multiple Active Vault partitions. However, the total
number of standard and library managed partitions cannot exceed
the maximum of 16 partitions.
• Library managed Active Vault partitions can be configured with
EDLM policies (see Chapter 9, Extended Data Lifecycle
Management).
Configure Active Vault
Active Vault policies are configured on standard partitions. The policies
intercept host commands that export tape cartridges to library
260
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 4: Active Vault
Configure Active Vault
managed Active Vault partitions. Configuring Active Vault involves the
following:
• Create Active Vault Partitions on page 261
• Configure Access to External Applications on page 262 (optional)
• Configure Active Vault Policies on Partitions on page 262
• View Active Vault Partition Policies on page 266
Note: Manual movement between library managed partitions and
standard partitions will require inventory reconciliation with
the backup application managing the standard partition. SCSI
Unit Authentication G/2800 and G/2801 is for host applications
with the need to refresh element status.
Create Active Vault
Partitions
Create one or more Active Vault partitions as follows:
1 Make sure you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, select the name of the physical library.
2 Make sure the Active Vault license is installed on the library (see
Enabling Licenses on page 125).
3 Use Expert Mode to create one or more library managed Active
Vault partitions. Follow the instructions in Using Expert Mode on
page 141. When you get to the screen named Partitions - Step 2:
Choose Partition Properties, select Library Managed (Vault) from
the Partition Type drop-down menu.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
261
Chapter 4: Active Vault
Configure Active Vault
Configure Access to
External Applications
This is optional. You only need to do it if you want to use the library to
determine if the external application has a vault name that matches the
name of an active vault partition in the library.
If you want to use an external application to direct media to Active Vault
partitions you first need to configure the library for external application
access. Follow the steps in Chapter 11, Configuring Access to StorNext,
and then return here. You will then be able to select external application
policies in the next step.
Configure Active Vault
Policies on Partitions
You can only configure an Active Vault Policy on standard partitions (not
library managed partitions). This policy redirects SCSI host initiated tape
cartridge export MOVE operations to an Active Vault.
1 Click Setup > Partitions > Policies > Active Vault Configuration.
The Active Vault Configuration Wizard appears.
262
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 4: Active Vault
Configure Active Vault
2 Click Next. The Select the Active Vault Configuration Option
screen appears.
3 Create, modify, or remove policies on a standard partition by doing
one of the following:
To...
Do this...
Enable Active Vault policy
1 Select Enable.
2 Select a partition from the table that has Active Vault policies
disabled.
3 Proceed to Step 4.
Modify existing Active Vault
policy
1 Select Modify.
2 Select a partition from the table that has Active Vault policies
enabled.
3 Proceed to Step 4.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
263
Chapter 4: Active Vault
Configure Active Vault
To...
Do this...
Disable Active Vault policy
1 Select Disable.
2 Select a partition from the table that has Active Vault policies
enabled.
3 Click Finish.
A confirmation dialog box appears asking you to confirm you
want to disable the Active Vault policies on the partition.
4 Click Yes to confirm.
A “success” dialog box appears.
5 Click OK to close the dialog box.
Process is complete.
4 Click Next. The Active Vault Policies screen appears.
5 Choose one of these redirect options:
264
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 4: Active Vault
Configure Active Vault
Policy
Description
Redirect exports to specific Active Vault.
If you select this option, you must select an Active Vault
partition from the drop-down list.
All host-initiated export requests to move tapes from this
partition will redirect the tapes to the specified Active
Vault partition instead of the I/E station.
If desired, you can specify which media to move by typing
a value in the Filter Media field. For example, entering a
value of *123L4 will cause all media with barcodes
ending with 123L4 to be vaulted. Entering a value of
123* will cause all media with barcode starting with 123
to be vaulted.
Note: Only host-initiated export operations will be
redirected to the Active Vault. UI-initiated export
operations will still move tape cartridges to an I/E
element.
Redirect exports to application-defined
Active Vault.
If you select this option, you must select an external
application plug-in from the drop-down list.
When a host-initiated export operation occurs, the library
queries the selected external application for the name of
the vault that may be associated with the export
operation. If the name of the application-tracked vault
matches the name of one of the Active Vault partitions in
the library, the export request is re-directed to that Active
Vault partition. If the name of the application-tracked
vault does not match the name of an Active Vault
partition in the library, the export request will be directed
to the I/E element as specified by the host command.
Note: Only host-initiated export operations will be
redirected to the Active Vault. UI-initiated export
operations will still move tape cartridges to an I/E
element.
6 Click Finish. A confirmation dialog appears.
7 Click OK to close the dialog.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
265
Chapter 4: Active Vault
Configure Active Vault
View Active Vault
Partition Policies
266
To review the policies you configured, you can go back through the
Wizard, or you can click Monitor > Partitions > Policies. See
Monitoring Partition Policies on page 544 for more information.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 5
Advanced Reporting
Advanced Reporting is a licensed features that gives you access to the
following reports:
• Drive Utilization Report (see Viewing the Drive Resource Utilization
Reports on page 610)
• Media Integrity (see Viewing Tape Alerts and Generating Media
Integrity Analysis Reports on page 68)
• Media Security Notifications (see Setting Up Media Security
Notifications on page 196 and Viewing the Media Security Events
Report on page 198)
• Media Usage (see Media Usage Report on page 268).
• Advanced Reporting Options (see Setting Up Advanced Reporting
Options on page 616
The Advanced Reporting reports can be found under the Tools >
Reports menu along with other library reports that do not require the
Advanced Reporting license.
In addition, Advanced Reporting feature allows you to schedule certain
library reports to be automatically generated and e-mailed to
designated recipients (Tools > Reports > Reporting Options). See
Setting Up Advanced Reporting Options on page 616.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
267
Chapter 5: Advanced Reporting
Media Usage Report
Media Usage Report
The Media Usage Report collects information on all media that have
ever been in the library, including media that is no longer in the library.
Lifetime media usage metrics are associated with the cartridge and are
kept on the embedded chip. The report reflects what the drive reports
from the media chip whenever the media is unloaded, and lists any
associated errors.
When the log reaches maximum size, old information is deleted as new
information is added.
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 From the main menu, select Tools > Reports > Media > Usage.
The Media Usage Report dialog box is displayed.
The report provides the following information:
268
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 5: Advanced Reporting
Media Usage Report
Field
Description
Barcode
Media cartridge barcode label.
Serial Number
Media cartridge serial number.
Manufacturer
Media cartridge manufacturer.
Type
Media type (L1, L2, L3 L4, L5, L6, L7, LR,
LS, LT, LU, LV, LW, LX)
Manufacturer Date
Media cartridge manufacturing date
(format: YYYYMMDD)
Thread Count
Number of times the tape has been
mounted and threaded on the drive
MB Read
Cartridge lifetime MB read.
MB Written
Cartridge lifetime MB written.
Recovered Write Errors
Errors in writing data where an attempt
to re-write the data was successful.
Recovered Read Errors
Errors in reading data where an attempt
to re-write the data was successful.
Unrecovered Write Errors
Errors where all re-write attempts failed
and the data could not be successfully
written to the tape
Unrecovered Read Errors
Errors where all re-read attempts failed
and the data could not be successfully
read from the tape
Encryption
Cartridge Encryption Status
(U=Unknown, E=Encrypted, N=Not
Encrypted)
3 To send the report to your e-mail, click Send.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
269
Chapter 5: Advanced Reporting
Viewing Cross-Partition Media Moves
Viewing Cross-Partition Media Moves
The library creates a report for media moved across partitions which you
can view, save or e-mail.
To view cross-partition media moves
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Click Tools > Reports/Media/Moves. The Cross Partition Media
Moves report appears.
3 If desired, filter the report output by selecting a single source
partition and/or a single target partition from the Source Partition
and Target Partition fields respectively. Click Filter to apply your
selections and update the report.
270
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 5: Advanced Reporting
Viewing Cross-Partition Media Moves
The Cross Partition Media Moves report provides the following
information pertaining to media moves across partitions:
Field
Description
Barcode
The barcode label number for the tape
cartridge moved across partitions
Source Partition
The partition in which the moved tape
cartridge originally resided
Source Element Addr.
The element address in the source
partition
Target Partition
The target partition to which the tape
cartridge was moved
Target Element Addr.
The element address in the target
partition
Date
The date on which the tape cartridge
move occurred
4 Click Send to display the Print/Save/Email dialog box.
5 Do one of the following:
• Click Email and specify an e-mail recipient for the report. Click
OK.
• Click Save and navigate to the location where you want to save
the report. Click OK.
• Click Print to print the report. Click OK.
• Click Cancel to return to the report screen
6 When you are finished with the report, click Close.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
271
Chapter 5: Advanced Reporting
Viewing Cross-Partition Media Moves
272
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 6
Automated Media Pool
The Automated Media Pool (AMP) feature allows you to pool media,
such as scratch tapes, within a library managed partition to facilitate
selective tape cartridge assignments from the media pool to standard
partitions without the need for operator intervention to physically load/
import additional tape cartridges into standard partitions. Instead of
requiring physical import operations to each partition, the Automated
Media Pool can contain a number of tape cartridges that can be moved
or assigned to a partition via a user-interface-initiated media move or
magazine assignment selection at any time.
In addition, the AMP feature allows for the creation of standard
partition AMP extensions such that a standard partition gets created
with a specified number of actual and accessible storage elements as
well as logical, inaccessible element extensions. As a standard partition
requires additional accessible storage elements, logical elements can be
associated with physical magazines from the AMP such that the logical
element extension becomes an actual physical storage element that can
now report an accessible status to a host.
Benefits include:
• You can easily move and reassign tapes from the AMP to standard
partitions and from standard partitions to the AMP. This allows you
to adjust the amount of media within a partition as needed without
performing import/export operations (for more information, see
Moving Media Between Active Vault or AMP and Standard Partitions
on page 704).
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
273
Chapter 6: Automated Media Pool
• The AMP can provide a “staging area” for scratch tapes and tapes
that are no longer needed for backup. When a tape is needed by a
partition, it can be moved from the AMP instead of having to be
physically imported into the library partition.
• The number of partition accessible storage units can be expanded or
reduced as needed without having to reconfigure the library,
partition or host application.
• .
• Tapes can be auto-imported from an AMP partition to standard
partitions based on filters set up to associate tapes with standard
partitions by barcode range.
• Tapes can be auto-exported to an AMP partition via policies to
redirect standard partition export MOVE requests.
Note: Manual movement between library managed partitions and
standard partitions will require inventory reconciliation with
the backup application managing the standard partition. SCSI
Unit Attention 6/2800 and 6/2801 inform host applications of
the need to refresh element status.
This chapter includes:
• Requirements for Automated Media Pool on page 275
• Configure Automated Media Pool on page 275
• Create an AMP Partition on page 275
• Create Magazine Extensions in Standard Partitions on page 276
• Configure AMP Import Policies on page 277
• Configure AMP Auto Export Policies on page 277
• Use an Automated Media Pool on page 278
• Assign Storage Magazines to/from the AMP on page 279
• Move Media to/from the AMP on page 281
• Auto Import Media on page 283
274
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 6: Automated Media Pool
Requirements for Automated Media Pool
Requirements for Automated Media Pool
• The AMP feature requires a Partition license (see Enabling Licenses
on page 125).
• Multiple automated media pool partitions can exist. Since they are
library managed partitions, an AMP exists solely within the library
and is not accessible to hosts.
• You may have multiple AMP partitions. However, the total number
of standard and library managed partitions cannot exceed the
maximum of 16 partitions.
• All storage slots in the AMP partition must be licensed (via COD).
• AMP partitions do not contain drives.
Configure Automated Media Pool
To configure an AMP, you need to set up one or more AMP partitions
from which to draw media and optional magazine assignments. If you
want to use magazine assignments, you must also configure magazine
extensions in one or more standard partitions.
• Create an AMP Partition on page 275
• Create Magazine Extensions in Standard Partitions on page 276
• Configure AMP Import Policies on page 277
• Configure AMP Auto Export Policies on page 277
Create an AMP Partition
1 Use Expert Mode to create one or more AMP library managed
partitions. Follow the instructions in Using Expert Mode on
page 141.
When you get to the screen named Partitions - Step 2: Choose
Partition Properties, select AMP from the Partition Type dropdown menu.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
275
Chapter 6: Automated Media Pool
Configure Automated Media Pool
Create Magazine
Extensions in Standard
Partitions
Magazine extensions are logical storage slot extensions of a standard
partition. You need at least one AMP partition to take advantage of
actually assigning storage element extensions, so you must create
magazine extensions in one or more standard partitions. You can use
magazines from an AMP partition to provide additional storage slots as
needed.
If the standard partition you want to use with the AMP partition doesn’t
have extensions defined, you must modify the standard partition (see
Modifying Partitions on page 147).
Note: You can only create magazine extensions in standard partitions
(not library managed partitions).
276
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 6: Automated Media Pool
Configure Automated Media Pool
Configure AMP Import
Policies
You can only configure import AMP policies on standard partitions (not
library managed partitions).
1 Click Setup > Partitions > Policies > Auto Import Configuration.
The Auto Import Configuration dialog appears.
2 For a specific partition, enter a range of barcode numbers in the
Enter Import Filter field. Multiple filters can be listed but must be
separated by a semi-colon.
3 Click OK.
Note: Import filters will be applied to the barcode label only. The
filters will not consider any media ID (e.g. L4, L5, etc) on the
barcode.
Configure AMP Auto
Export Policies
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
You can only configure export AMP policies on standard partitions (not
library managed partitions). However, this export function cannot be
performed from the user interface. Instead, any SCSI MOVE commands
performed on the standard partition to an assigned I/E elements will
277
Chapter 6: Automated Media Pool
Use an Automated Media Pool
have the media redirected to the designated AMP partition. See Step 5
on page 264 in Chapter 4, Active Vault for redirect options.
1 Click Setup > Partitions > Policies > Auto Export Configuration.
The Auto Export Configuration dialog appears.
2 Select the partition for which you want to enable, modify or disable
the policy by clicking the check box in the Select column.
3 From the Destination drop-down menu, select the AMP partition to
which you want the tapes exported.
4 Click OK.
Use an Automated Media Pool
An AMP has two functions:
• Assign Storage Magazines to/from the AMP on page 279 — Assigns
storage elements from the AMP to a standard partition, or from a
278
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 6: Automated Media Pool
Use an Automated Media Pool
standard partition to the AMP. This allows you to control access to
partition storage elements without requiring partition
reconfiguration for host applications.
• Move Media to/from the AMP on page 281 — Physically moves
media from the AMP to a standard partition, or from a standard
partition to the AMP. The media then belongs to the partition into
which it was moved.
Assign Storage
Magazines to/from the
AMP
If a standard partition has used all of its physical slots and needs more
storage elements, you can assign more slots from the storage pool in
the AMP to the partition’s logical element extension address range. The
host will then recognize these slots as accessible and begin using them.
Similarly, if a partition no longer needs all of its storage slots, you can
assign storage elements (magazines) back to the AMP so that these
magazines can be assigned and used by other standard partitions.
The following rules apply when assigning storage elements:
• The AMP must have slots (at least one magazine) available.
• The number of slots you want to reassign are referenced in
magazine increments.
• The standard partition must have sufficient “magazine extensions”
configured to allow magazine assignments.
• Magazines can be reassigned whether or not they contain tape
cartridges. Any cartridges in the magazines will be reassigned to the
new partition along with the magazines, so be careful when
reassigning magazines.
• Operations to reassign magazines will not take standard partitions
offline since the slots were already configured and known to the
host.
To reassign storage:
1 Make sure you are viewing the physical library (from the View
menu, select the name of the physical library).
2 Make sure that the standard partition has sufficient “magazine
extensions” configured (see Create Magazine Extensions in Standard
Partitions on page 276.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
279
Chapter 6: Automated Media Pool
Use an Automated Media Pool
3 Click Setup > Partitions > Automated Media Pool > Assign
Magazines. The Assign Magazines: Select Partitions screen
appears.
4 Select the partition from which you wish to remove magazines from
the Remove From list.
5 Select the partition to which you wish to assign magazines from the
Assign To list.
Note: The Empty Slots column displays both storage and IE slots.
6 Click OK. The Select Segments screen appears.
280
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 6: Automated Media Pool
Use an Automated Media Pool
7 Select the module(s) and rack(s) from the Select Location column.
8 Select the magazine segment(s) from the Select Segments column.
9 Click OK. The magazines are reassigned.
Move Media to/from
the AMP
Moving media from an AMP to a standard partition and vice versa
physically moves the media into the target partition and reassigns the
media to that partition.
Note: You can also accomplish this by following the instructions in
Moving Media Between Active Vault or AMP and Standard
Partitions on page 704.
1 Make sure you are viewing the physical library (from the View
menu, select the name of the physical library).
2 Click Setup > Partitions > Automated Media Pool > Assign
Media. The Assign Media: Select Partitions screen appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
281
Chapter 6: Automated Media Pool
Use an Automated Media Pool
3 From the Remove From section, select a partition from which to
move media. From the Assign To section, select a partition into
which to move media.
4 Click OK. The Assign Media from Automated Media Pool screen
appears.
282
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 6: Automated Media Pool
Use an Automated Media Pool
5 From the Select Media Slot Type to move drop-down list, select
the area from which you want to move the media (Storage Slots or
I/E Slots).
6 From the Select Media list, select the tape(s) you want to move.
7 Click OK.
Auto Import Media
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
1 From the View menu, select the AMP partition from which you
want to import tapes.
283
Chapter 6: Automated Media Pool
Use an Automated Media Pool
2 Select Operations > Auto Import...The Auto Import Media dialog
box displays.
3 Click Import. The library will begin importing the media to their
respective destinations based on the configured barcode filters.
When complete, the Results column will display the new location,
in coordinates, of the media.
4 Click Refresh to refresh the Auto Import Media dialog box to
ensure the media was imported.
5 Click Close.
284
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 7
Capacity on Demand
The library is initially licensed for a default configuration of 100 storage
slots.
Capacity on Demand allows you to purchase capacity for your library as
needed. As your storage needs change, you can add storage in blocks of
100. Scalar i6000 licensing begins at 100 cartridges and can be
increased to as many as 7,146 LTO cartridges (for a single-robot library)
or 7,224 LTO cartridges (for a dual-robot library).
Note: Maximum numbers assume only one drive and one 24-slot I/E
station in the control module.
Note: Cleaning slots do not count against the libraries available COD
account.
To gain the use of additional storage slots, you must purchase a
Capacity on Demand license for the desired number of slots.
The library also accommodates the use of unlicensed slots in the
following circumstances:
• Your library ships with enough modules to meet your Capacity on
Demand needs. If you require additional physical capacity to be
physically prepared for non-disruptive future expansion, you can
order one or more Unlicensed Expansion Modules.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
285
Chapter 7: Capacity on Demand
• You can also use Unlicensed Expansion Modules to accommodate
the Active Vault and Extended Data Lifecycle Management (EDLM)
features, which do not require the use of licensed slots.
286
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8
Encryption Key
Management
This chapter covers:
• Encryption Key Management Systems on page 287
• KMIP-compliant Encryption Key Management on page 289
• FIPS-Certified Encryption Solution on page 289
• Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000 on page 293
• Using EKM Path Diagnostics on page 311
• Monitoring EKM Server Status on page 313
• Using Q-EKM on page 315
• Using SKM on page 316
Encryption Key Management Systems
Encryption key management systems generate, protect, store, and
manage encryption keys. These keys are used by their respective tape
drives to encrypt information being written to tape, and decrypt
information being read from tape media.
Encryption Key Management (EKM) is a licensable feature. You must
have an EKM license installed on your library in order to use the
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
287
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Encryption Key Management Systems
Encryption Key Management features described in this chapter. For
more information on licensing, see Enabling Licenses on page 125 or
Step 1 — Installing the EKM License Key on page 293.
The Scalar i6000 supports four encryption key management systems:
Encryption System
Supported Tape Drives
Supported Media
Quantum Encryption Key Manager (QEKM)
IBM LTO-4 Fibre Channel
IBM LTO-4, LTO-5, and
LTO-6
IBM LTO-5 Fibre Channel
IBM LTO-6 Fibre Channel
Scalar Key Manager (SKM)
HP LTO-4 Fibre Channel
HP LTO-5 Fibre Channel
HP LTO-6 Fibre Channel
IBM LTO-5 Fibre Channel
HP LTO-4, LTO-5 and
LTO-6
IBM LTO-5, and LTO-6
LTO-7
IBM LTO-6 Fibre Channel
IBM LTO-7 Fibre Channel
KMIP-compliant key management (see
KMIP-compliant Encryption Key
Management on page 289).
HP LTO-4 Fibre Channel
HP LTO-5 Fibre Channel
HP LTO-6 Fibre Channel
IBM LTO-5 Fibre Channel
HP LTO-4, LTO-5, and
LTO-6
IBM LTO-5, LTO-6 and
LTO-7
IBM LTO-6 Fibre Channel
IBM LTO-7 Fibre Channel
Note: The library does not support using more than one encryption
key management system on a single library.
Encryption on the Scalar i6000 tape library is enabled by partition only.
The default setting for encryption-capable drives permits external
application-managed encryption support on all encryption-capable tape
drives and media within a partition.
You cannot select individual drives for encryption; you must select an
entire partition to be encrypted. If you encrypt a partition, all
encryption-capable tape drives are enabled for encryption, and all data
written to supported media is encrypted. Non encryption-capable tape
drives will not be enabled for encryption, and non-supported media will
not be encrypted.
288
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
KMIP-compliant Encryption Key Management
You can only configure the encryption settings through the Setup >
Encryption > Partition Configuration functionality.
KMIP-compliant Encryption Key Management
The Key Management Interoperability Protocol (KMIP) is a specification
developed by OASIS®. Its function is to standardize communication
between enterprise key management systems and encryption systems.
With version i8.2.1, the Scalar i6000 provides a KMIP version 1.0
compliant encryption solution.
KMIP is only supported in certain environments. Contact your Quantum
representative for details.
Details about the Scalar i6000 KMIP-compliant implementation include:
• As with other encryption systems supported by the library, in order
to use KMIP-compliant encryption systems with the Scalar i6000,
you must have an Encryption Key Management license installed on
the library.
• A minimum of two KMIP-compliant encryption servers are required
for failover purposes. A total of 10 KMIP-compliant encryption
servers are allowed, for increased failover capability.
See Encryption Key Management Systems on page 287 for instructions
on how to configure KMIP-compliant encryption systems on the library.
FIPS-Certified Encryption Solution
FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standard) 140-2 is a U.S.
government standard relating to computer security and encryption.
The Quantum Scalar i6000 now offers a FIPS 140-2 Level 1 certified
encryption solution composed of the Scalar Key Manager and HP LTO-5
and laterFibre Channel tape drives in a Scalar i6000 library. FIPS mode
can be enabled on the HP LTO-5 and later tape drives via the library user
interface. Once in FIPS mode, all encryption key communication
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
289
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
FIPS-Certified Encryption Solution
between the tape drive and the library controller is authenticated and
encrypted.
Details about configuring FIPS mode include:
• Library firmware must be at version 630Q or later.
• HP LTO-5 and later tape drive firmware must be at the latest version
qualified with the Scalar i6000 library (see the Scalar i6000 Release
Notes for qualified firmware levels).
• An Encryption Key Management license must be installed on the
library sufficient to cover the tape drive(s) on which you want to
enable FIPS mode.
• A Storage Networking license must be installed on the library.
Note: Use of FIPS on a drive does not count against the Storage
Networking license drive count. FIPS is not considered a
“Storage Networking feature;” however, the SNW license is
still required on the library.
• FIPS mode is configured by partition. FIPS partitions must contain
only HP LTO-5 or later FC tape drives.
• The partition encryption method must be set to Enable Library
Managed in order to set FIPS mode.
• FIPS mode is disabled by default.
• The library must be connected to Scalar Key Manager (SKM). SKM
software must be at version 2.0 or later in order to be FIPS certified.
FIPS currently only works with SKM.
• Ethernet connectivity is required for the tape drives on which you
want to enable FIPS mode. This means that every HP LTO-5 or later
FC drive in the partition must be connected to an Ethernet
Expansion blade installed in the library.
Caution: If the Ethernet Expansion blade fails and the attached
tape drives have FIPS mode enabled, all encryption
operations (encrypting, decrypting, key requests) on
the attached tape drives will fail. If this happens,
contact Quantum Support for a replacement Ethernet
Expansion blade as soon as possible.
290
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
FIPS-Certified Encryption Solution
Enabling and Disabling
FIPS Mode on HP LTO-5
or Later Tape Drives
To operate your HP LTO-5 or later Fibre Channel tape drives to be
compliant with FIPS, you must enable “FIPS mode.” FIPS mode is
enabled by partition. You enable FIPS mode on a partition, which
enables FIPS mode on all of the tape drives in the partition.
To change FIPS mode for a partition, do the following:
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure you are viewing the physical library (from the View
menu, select the name of the physical library).
3 Select Setup > Encryption > Partition Configuration. The EKM
Partition Configuration dialog box displays (see Figure 44).
4 Change the Encryption Method of a partition to Enable Library
Managed.
5 Select the FIPS check box to enable FIPS mode for the partition.
Clear the FIPS check box to disable FIPS mode for the partition.
6 Click OK.
Figure 44 Enabling FIPS Mode
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
291
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
FIPS-Certified Encryption Solution
Viewing FIPS Status on
the Library
To view FIPS status on partitions, do either of the following:
• The Partition Configuration dialog box (Setup > Encryption >
Partition Configuration) shows which partitions are enabled for
FIPS. All tape drives in FIPS partitions are enabled. See Figure 44 on
page 291.
• The Partitions Status report (Monitor > Partitions > Status) lists
FIPS in the Encryption column if FIPS is configured on the partition.
292
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
Step 1 — Installing the
EKM License Key
1 Click Setup > Licenses. The Licenses dialog box appears.
This dialog box lists the licensed features for your library, plus
Status, Expiration, and Quantity. Quantity refers to the number
drives licensed to use this feature.
2 In the Enter License Key box, type the appropriate license key.
• License keys are not case sensitive and are all-inclusive. For
example, J2BGL-22622-52C22 can be entered as j2bgl-2262252c22.
• If you are using the library’s touch screen, enter the library key
from the lowercase keyboard, which gives you access to the
dash (-) character.
• If you cannot locate the license keys shipped with the library,
you can obtain them by contacting technical support or, if you
are an end user, by contacting your inside sales representative.
3 Click OK.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
293
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
Step 2 — Preparing
Partitions for Librarymanaged Encryption
1 If not already installed, install tape drives that are supported by the
encryption system you are using (see Supported Tape Drives on
page 288).
2 Ensure that the partition you are configuring for library-managed
encryption contains only tape drives that are supported by the
encryption system you are using.
3 On the tape drives, install the latest version of firmware that is
qualified for the library firmware installed on your library. Refer to
the library release notes for the correct version of tape drive
firmware.
Step 3 — Installing TLS
Communication
Certificates on the
Library
294
Transport Layer Security (TLS) communication certificates are unique
certificates that must be installed on the library in order for the library
to communicate securely with attached EKM servers.
Take one the following actions, according to what encryption System
you are using.
Encryption System
Action
Quantum Encryption
Key Manager (QEKM) or Tivoli Key
Lifecycle Manager
(TKLM) or Secure Key
Lifecycle Manager
(SKLM)
Only one TLS certificate (the Root certificate)
is required. Libraries with code versions
600A.GS23201 and higher generate a selfsigned certificate when first booting up, and
regenerate the certificate if it expires. You do
not need to take any action unless you want
to install your own Root certificate to
supersede the existing certificate. If want to
install your own certificate, then follow the
instructions in Installing User-Provided
Certificates on page 299.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
Encryption System
Action
Scalar Key Manager
(SKM)
TLS certificates may already be pre-loaded on
the library.
1 Check to see if certificates are loaded. See
Checking for Current Certificates on
page 296.
Note: If certificates have already been preloaded by Quantum, you can replace
them by installing your own
certificates, if desired.
2 If needed, install certificates following the
appropriate set of instructions:
• Installing SKM Library TLS Certificates
from Quantum CD on page 297, or
• Installing User-Provided Certificates on
page 299.
KMIP-compliant key
management
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
TLS certificates will be provided by your KMIP
server administrator. Install certificates per
Installing User-Provided Certificates on
page 299.
295
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
Checking for Current Certificates
Follow the steps below to see what certificates are already loaded on
your library.
1 From the Tools menu, select EKM Management > Import
Communication Certificates. The Communication Certificate
Import dialog box appears.
Note: The Current Certificates section of the screen lists the
certificates currently loaded on the library. If you install
new certificates, they will overwrite the current certificates.
2 Confirm which certificates are appropriate for your installation.
296
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
3 Install certificates if needed, following the instructions in the
following table for your encryption system.
Encryption
System
Action
Q-EKM or TKLM/
SKLM
If you wish to install your own Root certificate to
supersede the existing self-generated certificate
on the library, follow the instructions in Installing
User-Provided Certificates on page 299.
SKM
For SKM, you can either:
• Install from the Quantum certificate bundle on
CD. Refer to Installing SKM Library TLS
Certificates from Quantum CD on page 297.
• Install your own certificates. Refer to Installing
User-Provided Certificates on page 299.
KMIP-compliant
key
management
You must use certificates provided by the KMIP
server administrator. Refer to Installing UserProvided Certificates on page 299.
Installing SKM Library TLS Certificates from Quantum CD
Note: The Quantum certificate bundle can be used only with SKM.
Quantum TLS certificates for use with SKM may already be preloaded on your library. Check if these exist before adding new
TLS certificates for SKM. Refer to Checking for Current
Certificates on page 296.
1 Insert the CD into the CD ROM drive of your computer.
2 Either copy the file to a known location on your computer or use the
CD as the location from which you will retrieve the file.
3 From the Tools menu, select EKM Management > Import
Communication Certificates. The Communication Certificate
Import dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
297
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
4 In the Select Certificates section, select SKM from the Key Server
Type drop-down list.
5 Select the Use Quantum Certificate Bundle check box, and then
click Browse to locate the Quantum Bundle File.
Note: If you have installed certificates, they are listed in the
Current Certificates section.
6 Click OK.
Note: Whenever the Compact Flash (CF) is replaced, SKM certificates
must be reinstalled.
298
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
Installing User-Provided Certificates
Follow these instructions to install your own TLS certificates, or when
installing TLS certificates for KMIP. When providing your own
certificates, it is assumed you understand the concepts of PKI and can
access the tools or third-party resources needed to generate or obtain
certificates.
Note: If you are using SKM, you must be running SKM 1.1 or higher
on your SKM servers in order to install your own TLS
certificates.
Note: If you are using RSA or KMIP, your server provider will provide
TLS communication certificates.
You need to provide the following certificates:
Encryption
System
Certificates Required
Q-EKM or TKLM/
SKLM
• Root Certificate (also called the CA certificate,
or Certificate Authority Certificate)
SKM
• Root Certificate (also called the CA certificate,
or Certificate Authority Certificate)
• Client Certificate
• Admin Certificate
KMIP-compliant
key
management
• Root Certificate (also called the CA certificate,
or Certificate Authority Certificate)
• Client Certificate
These files must be in the proper format, as follows. If any of the
following requirements is not met, none of the certificates will be
imported.
• The Root Certificate must be 2048 bits.
• The Root Certificate must be in PEM format.
• The Admin and Client certificates must be in pkcs12 (.p12) format,
with a separate certificate and private key contained in each.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
299
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
Note: The .p12 format combines the public/private key pair files
in .pem file format and password protects access to such
.pem certificate files.
• The Admin and Client certificates must be 1024 bits.
• The Admin and Client certificates must be signed by the Root
Certificate.
• Certificates must have the Organization name (O) set in their Issuer
and Subject info.
• The Admin certificate must have its Organizational Unit name (OU)
set as “akm_admin” in its Subject Info. (Only applies to SKM).
• The same Root Certificate must be installed on the encryption key
servers and the library.
• All the certificates must have a valid validity period according to the
date and time settings on the encryption key server.
Follow the steps below to install your own certificates.
1 Place the certificate files in an accessible location on your computer.
2 From the Tools menu, select EKM Management > Import
Communication Certificates. The Communication Certificate
Import dialog box appears.
300
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
3 In the Select Certificates section, select the appropriate Key Server
Type from the drop-down list.
Depending on your selection, certain fields are enabled.
4 Take the following actions, depending on which Key Server Type you
selected:
For Q-EKM or TKLM/SKLM
• Click Browse to retrieve the Root Certificate File.
For SKM
• Click Browse to retrieve the Root Certificate File.
• Click Browse to retrieve the Admin Certificate File.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
301
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
• In the Admin Certificate Password field, type the password
used when you generated the certificate files.
• Click Browse to retrieve the Client Certificate File.
• In the Client Certificate Password field, type the password
used when you generated the certificate files.
• If you used the same password for the client and admin
certificates, you can select the Use Admin’s Password check
box.
For KMIP-compliant key managers
• Click Browse to retrieve the Root Certificate File.
• Click Browse to retrieve the Client Certificate File.
• In the Client Certificate Password field, type the password
used when generating the certificate files.
5 Click OK.
Step 4 — Configuring
the EKM Server
1 From the menu bar, click Setup > Encryption > Server
Configuration. The EKM Server Configuration dialog box appears.
2 From the Key Server Type drop-down list, select the server type.
302
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
3 Fill in the rest of the fields as described in the sections below for
each server type: Q-EKM on page 303, TKLM/SKLM on page 304,
SKM on page 304, or KMIP Key Manager on page 305 of this
document.
For primary and secondary servers, you can enter the following:
• IPv4 address
• IPv6 address — if IPv6 is configured
• DNS name — if DNS is configured on the LMC (Setup >
Network Configuration > DNS Configuration)
Q-EKM
a Enable SSL - Select the check box if SSL communications should
be enabled between the library and encryption server(s).
b Primary EKM Server - Type the IP address or DNS name of the
primary Q-EKM server.
c Primary port number - If SSL is enabled, the default port
number is 443. If SSL is not enabled, the default port number is
3801. You can change the port number on the library, but, if
you do, you must also change the port number on the key
server to match or Q-EKM will not work properly. See the
Quantum Encryption Key Manager User’s Guide for information
on setting the port number on the Q-EKM key server.
d Secondary EKM Server - Type the IP address or DNS name of
the optional secondary Q-EKM server.
Note: If you do not plan to use a secondary server, you may
type a zero IP address, 0.0.0.0, into the Secondary EKM
Server text box, or you may leave this text box blank.
e Secondary port number - If SSL is enabled, the default port
number is 443. If SSL is not enabled, the default port number is
3801.
Note: If you are using a secondary key server, then the port
numbers for both the primary and secondary key
servers must be set to the same value. If they are not,
synchronization and failover will not occur.
f Key Class - This field is not applicable for Q-EKM.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
303
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
g EKM Path Diagnostics - Not supported for Q-EKM. The Test
button is disabled.
TKLM/SKLM
a Enable SSL - Check the box if SSL communications should be
enabled between the library and encryption server(s).
b Primary EKM Server -Type the IP address or DNS name of the
primary TKLM/SKLM server.
c Primary port number - If SSL is enabled, the default port
number is 443. If SSL is not enabled, the default port number is
3801. You can change the port number on the library, but, if
you do, you must also change the port number on the key
server to match or TKLM/SKLM will not work properly.
d Secondary EKM Server - Type the IP address or DNS name of
the optional secondary TKLM/SKLM server. If you do not plan to
use a secondary server, you may type a zero IP address, 0.0.0.0,
into the Secondary EKM Server text box, or you may leave this
text box blank.
e Secondary port number - If SSL is enabled, the default port
number is 443. If SSL is not enabled, the default port number is
3801. If you are using a secondary key server, then the port
numbers for both the primary and secondary key servers must
be set to the same value. If they are not, synchronization and
failover will not occur.
f Key Class - This field is not applicable for TKLM/SKLM.
g EKM Path Diagnostics - This Test button not supported, and
therefore disabled.
SKM
a Enable SSL - Check box is checked automatically and field is
disabled.
b Primary EKM Server - Type the IP address or DNS name of the
primary SKM server.
c Primary port number - Field is disabled, and port number
defaults to 6000 automatically.
d Secondary EKM Server - Type the IP address or DNS name of
the secondary SKM server.
304
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
e Secondary port number - Field is disabled, and port number
defaults to 6000 automatically.
f Key Class - This field is not applicable for SKM.
g EKM Path Diagnostics - To test the configuration, click Test.
The Path Diagnostic Results dialog box appears. For more
information on EKM Path Diagnostics, see Using EKM Path
Diagnostics on page 311.
KMIP Key Manager
Note: KMIP Key Manager requires at least two (2) servers and can
have up to ten (10) servers for increased failover capacity.
Assign your key servers on this screen in the order in which
you want failover to occur.
For an initial key request, the library tries server #1 (the
primary server) first. If server #1 is not available to perform
a key request, the library tries server #2. If server #2 is not
available, the library will try server #3, and so on, in order.
Once the library identifies a server that can perform the
request, this server remains the active server until it fails a
key request or the library is rebooted. At that point, the
library starts over and uses server #1 for key requests.
a Enable SSL - Check box is checked automatically and the field is
disabled.
b Server 1 - Type the IP address or DNS name of the primary KMIP
key manager server.
c Port for Server 1 - Type the applicable port number. The port
number must match the configured port number on the
primary KMIP key manager server. A typical port number used
for communication between the KMIP key manager server and
the library is port 9003.
d Server 2 - Type the IP address or DNS name of the secondary
KMIP key manager server.
e Port for Server 2 - Type the applicable port number. The port
number must match the configured port number on the
secondary KMIP key manager server. A typical port number used
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
305
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
for communication between the KMIP key manager server and
the library is port 9003.
f Repeat Step d and Step e for up to eight additional KMIP key
manager servers, in the order in which you would like failover to
occur. The port number listed in each Port field must match the
port number used on that KMIP key manager server.
g Key Class - This field is not applicable.
h EKM Path Diagnostics - To test the configuration, click Test.
The Path Diagnostic Results dialog box appears. For more
information on EKM Path Diagnostics, see Using EKM Path
Diagnostics on page 311.
i Reorder Servers - After you have configured at least two KMIP
servers, you have the option of clicking the Reorder Servers
button to change the order in which servers are used. If failover
occurs, the servers will be used in the new order specified.
4 Click Close.
5 Click OK. An Operation in Progress dialog box appears, indicating
the settings are being modified. Upon successful completion, the
system returns to the main console.
Note: If using SKM, key generation begins in the background. Key
generation can take one hour or more. Once SKM
encryption keys have been generated, make sure to back
up both SKM servers before using any encryption keys.
Refer to the Scalar Key Manager User’s Guide.
6 Ensure all ports corresponding to the EKM servers are open on your
firewall to allow the library to connect to the servers. For SKM, ports
80, 6000, and 6001 must be open.
Step 5 — Configuring
Partitions for Librarymanaged Encryption
Encryption on the Scalar i6000 library is enabled by partition only. You
cannot select individual drives for encryption; you must select an entire
partition for encryption. Only partitions that are encryption-capable are
displayed on the configuration screen.
Use the Partition Configuration dialog box to change the encryption
method used by a partition. You can modify only one partition at a time.
306
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
Encryption Methods, Details, and Restrictions
The following encryption methods are available on the library:
• Application Managed (default)— Allows your host application to
provide encryption support on all encryption-capable tape drives
and media within the partition. This is the default setting if the
partition contains encryption-capable tape drives. If you select this
option, the library will not communicate with the key server on this
partition. If you want an application to manage encryption, you
must specifically configure the application to do so. The library will
not participate in performing encryption. See your host
documentation for further details.
• Library Managed — Select check box to enable. Permits library
managed encryption support via a connected key manager server—
either Quantum Encryption Key Manager (Q-EKM), Scalar Key
Manager (SKM), Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager (TKLM), Secure Key
Lifecycle Manager (SKLM) or KMIP-compliant key server—for all tape
drives and encryption-capable media assigned to the partition.
Details and restrictions for using library managed encryption
include:
• You must have an EKM license installed on the library (Step 1 —
Installing the EKM License Key on page 293) before you can
select this option. Ensure the EKM license contains the
appropriate quantity of drives to match or exceed what is
currently installed in the library.
• Your encryption key servers must be installed, operational, and
configured on the library (Setup > Encryption > Server
Configuration), before you can enable a partition for library
managed encryption (Setup > Encryption > Partition
Configuration).
• Only HP and IBM LTO-4 and later tape cartridges will be
encrypted in library managed encryption partitions, unless they
contain unencrypted data already, and data is appended. The
partition may contain LTO-2 and LTO-3 tape cartridges, but they
will not be encrypted.
• Encrypted data will never be appended to unencrypted data on
tape, and unencrypted data will never be appended to
encrypted data on tape.
• For data to be encrypted via library managed encryption, the
media must be blank or have been written to using library
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
307
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
managed encryption at the first write operation at the
beginning of tape (BOT). If the media was previously written in
a non-encrypted format, all data subsequently written to it will
continue to be non-encrypted.
• Data stored on tape cartridges will not be encrypted with more
than one encryption key.
• Q-EKM supports encryption for data cartridges using IBM LTO-4
or later Fibre Channel tape drives. If you are using Q-EKM and
want to enable library managed encryption for a partition, all of
the tape drives in that partition must be IBM LTO-4 and/or later
Fibre Channel tape drives.
Generating Encryption Keys for Q-EKM: Encryption keys are
generated during the Q-EKM installation and configuration
process.
• SKM supports encryption for data cartridges using HP LTO-4,
and later as well as IBM LTO-5 and later Fibre Channel drives. If
you are using SKM and want to enable library managed
encryption for a partition, all of the tape drives in that partition
must be either HP LTO-4 and/or later or IBM LTO-5 and/or later
Fibre Channel tape drives.
Generating Encryption Keys for SKM: The library
automatically generates keys as soon as you configure the SKM
server. Note that you cannot change a partition to library
managed encryption until after key generation is complete.
Caution: Once encryption keys have been generated, make
sure to back up both SKM servers before using any
encryption keys. Refer to the Scalar Key Manager
User’s Guide.
• TKLM/SKLM supports encryption for data cartridges using IBM
LTO-4 or later Fibre Channel tape drives. If you are using TKLM/
SKLM and want to enable library managed encryption for a
partition, all of the tape drives in that partition must be IBM
LTO-4 and/or later Fibre Channel tape drives.
• Generating Encryption Keys for TKLM/SKLM: Encryption keys
are generated during the TKLM/SKLM installation and
configuration process.
308
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
• KMIP-compliant key management (SafeNet) supports
encryption for data cartridges using HP LTO-4 or later as well as
IBM LTO-5 or later Fibre Channel drives. If you are using KMIPcompliant key servers and want to enable library managed
encryption for a partition, all of the tape drives in that partition
must be either HP LTO-4 and/or later or IBM LTO-5 and/or later
Fibre Channel tape drives.
Generating Encryption Keys for KMIP-compliant key servers:
Encryption keys are generated one at a time, as needed, upon
request.
Changing the Encryption Method
1 If you are not already viewing the physical library, click View and
select the name of the physical library.
2 Click Setup > Encryption > Partition Configuration. The EKM
Partition Configuration dialog box appears. Each partition’s
current encryption method is defaulted to Application Managed
unless the check box is selected in the Library Managed column.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
309
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Setting up EKM on the Scalar i6000
Note: If you want to change a partition’s encryption method,
make sure that the tape drives in that partition do not have
cartridges loaded. If there are cartridges in the tape drives,
you cannot change the encryption method.
3 Select the partition whose encryption method you want to change.
4 Change the encryption method by selecting or deselecting the
Library Managed check box. The supported methods include:
Method
Description
Application
Managed (default)
This is the default setting if you have
encryption-capable tape drives in the
partition. This option should be used unless
you are connecting the library to an external
EKM server.
This option allows an external backup
application to provide encryption support to
all encryption-capable tape drives and media
within the partition.
Note: If you want an application to manage
encryption, you must specifically configure
the application to do so.
Library Managed
Enables encryption support via connected
EKM servers to the partition. Choose this
option for SKM, Q-EKM, TKLM, SKLM or
SafeNet key servers.
Note: When you change a partition from Library Managed to
Application Managed, any encrypted data that was written
to the tapes while the partition was configured for library
managed encryption can no longer be read, until you
change the partition back to Library Managed.
5 To enable FIPS mode on all tape drives in the partition, click the FIPS
check box.
Note: There are specific requirements for FIPS. See FIPS-Certified
Encryption Solution on page 289 for details.
310
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Using EKM Path Diagnostics
6 Click the Reuse Keys check box if you want the partition to reuse
encryption keys.
Note: IBM drives do not support key reuse if the Key Type is Key
per Media.
7 Select a value from the Key Type drop-down menu. The options
include:
• Key per Media (default) - provides a unique key for each piece of
media requesting a key in the partition.
• Key per Partition - provides a single, common key for any media
requesting a key within the partition. Selecting this option
automatically selects the Key Reuse check box.
• Key per Library - provides a single, common key for any media
requesting a key, in any partition, within the library.
8 Click OK. The dialog box is closed and you are returned to the main
console.
If the partition encryption settings were not successfully configured,
follow the screen instructions to resolve any issues.
Step 6 — Saving the
Library Configuration
When you are finished configuring the library, save the library
configuration (Tools > Save/Restore).
Using EKM Path Diagnostics
EKM Path Diagnostics is a series of short tests performed by the library
to determine whether the EKM servers are connected and operating
properly.
Note: This feature is not available for Q-EKM.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
311
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Using EKM Path Diagnostics
You can perform EKM Path Diagnostics tests manually at any time, or
automatically in the background at regular intervals:
• Manual — You can perform manual EKM Path Diagnostics at any
time by clicking the Test button on the EKM server setup screen
(Setup > Encryption > Server Configuration).
• Background — You can configure the library to automatically
perform background EKM Path Diagnostics tests at regularly
scheduled intervals and notify you via RAS tickets if any problems
arise. To do this, go to Setup > System Settings > Physical
Library. Under EKM Path Diagnostics, select the Enable check box.
Note: This feature is enabled by default. You can disable it for
SKM but you cannot disable it for KMIP key managers.
Unless directed by Quantum Support to disable this
feature, the background EKM Path Diagnostics should
always be enabled so the library can monitor SKM server
status and report issues as soon as they arise.
The tests performed are:
• Ping — Verifies the Ethernet communication between the library
and the key servers.
• Path — Verifies that SKM/KMIP services are running on the key
servers.
• Config — Verifies that the key servers are capable of serving
encryption keys.
Troubleshooting EKM
Path Diagnostics
Problems
If this occurs...
Do this...
The Ping test fails
Either the referenced server is not
running, or the server address may
not have been entered correctly.
The Ping test passes, but the
Path test fails
Check the key server to make sure all
required services are running.
Also, there may be an issue with the
communication certificates required
for exchanging keys.
312
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Monitoring EKM Server Status
If this occurs...
Do this...
The Ping and Path tests pass,
but the Config test fails
One of the following may have
occurred:
• For SKM, a database inconsistency
has been detected. Contact
Quantum Support.
Monitoring EKM Server Status
You can monitor all configured EKM servers using the EKM Server Status
dialog box.
1 From the View menu, select the name of the physical library or
partition that communicates with the EKM servers you want to
monitor.
2 On the menu bar, click Monitor > EKM Servers. The EKM Server
Status dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
313
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Monitoring EKM Server Status
For each server, the EKM Server Status dialog box displays the following
information:
Element
Description
Type
The encryption server type (Q-EKM, SKM, or KMIP)
Status
The current status of the server:
Note: “Active” status indicates that this server will receive the next key request.
Q-EKM — Active, Standby or Not Configured
SKM — Active Running, Standby Running or Down, or Not Configured
KMIP — Active Running or Down, Standby Running or Down, or Not
Configured
IP Address/Name
The IP address or host name of the server
Port
The server port number:
Q-EKM — Default 3801 for non-SSL and 443 for SSL
SKM — 6000 (fixed)
KMIP — No default
State
Q-EKM, SKM — Whether the server is Primary or Secondary.
KMIP — Order of failover. Server 1 is primary, Server 2 is secondary, and so on.
Key Generation
Applies to SKM only:
Yes — encryption key generation in progress.
No —encryption key generation not in progress.
Version
Applies to SKM only:
Software version number
Serial Number
Applies to SKM only:
Server serial number
You can mail, save, or print status information by using the Send
button.
314
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Using Q-EKM
Using Q-EKM
Note: For Q-EKM to work properly, you must upgrade both your
library and tape drive firmware to the latest released versions.
For instructions on performing the firmware upgrades, see
Updating Library Software on page 579 and Updating Drive
Firmware on page 592.
Note: Q-EKM encryption is not available for LTO-7 drives. Any
partitions that contain LTO-7 drives will not be able to encrypt
using Q-EKM.
Using Q-EKM to Manage Encryption
Q-EKM is an optional, licensed Java software program that generates,
protects, stores, and manages the encryption keys. These keys are used
by the LTO-4, LTO-5 or LTO-6 tape drives to encrypt the information
being written to tape media and read from tape media. Policy control
and keys pass through the library-to-drive interface; therefore
encryption is transparent. Q-EKM was designed to generate and
communicate encryption keys for LTO-4, LTO-5 or LTO-6 drives in
Quantum libraries across the customer’s environment.
If you choose to purchase and use the licensed Q-EKM application, you
must supply a server on which to install EKM. Professional Q-EKM
integration must be performed by Quantum or Quantum authorized
service personnel. For more information, contact the Quantum Technical
Assistance Center at www.quantum.com/support.
Note: Prior to configuring Q-EKM on the Scalar i6000 library,
Quantum recommends installing and configuring the Q-EKM
server or servers first.
For more information about installing and configuring the Q-EKM server
and Q-EKM best practices, see the Quantum Encryption Key Manager
User’s Guide (6-01847-xx).
Q-EKM on the Scalar i6000 library supports encrypting LTO-4 or higher
tape media using IBM LTO-4 or higher Fibre Channel drives only. All IBM
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
315
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Using SKM
LTO-4, LTO-5 or LTO-6 FC drives are encryption-capable, but to use the
Q-EKM software application, you must purchase an Encryption Key
Management license and provide a server or servers on which to install
Q-EKM. Q-EKM does not currently support encryption on other tape
drive types or manufacturer brands, even if they are assigned to a
partition selected for encryption.
Note: You must be running Q-EKM version 2.0 (or higher) to support
IBM LTO-5 or LTO-6 tape drives.
The encryption keys pass through the library, so that encryption is
“transparent” to the applications. If you purchase Q-EKM, Quantum's
Service department will schedule an appointment to install the
application onto your server(s).
Using SKM
If you purchase SKM, you will receive the software application, two
servers (optional beginning with SKM 1.1), and installation and
configuration instructions. This chapter describes how to configure your
encryption key management (EKM) solution (Q-EKM or SKM) on the
library.
SKM Management
Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges
If you are using SKM, you can use the library to facilitate sharing
encrypted tapes with other companies and individuals who also use
SKM for managing encryption keys.
Each SKM server provides a unique encryption key for each tape
cartridge that is encrypted. To read an encrypted tape in a library that is
attached to a SKM server that is different than the one that originally
provided the encryption key, the encryption key from the originating
(i.e., source) SKM server needs to be shared with the receiving (i.e.,
destination) SKM server.
The key (or list of keys, if there is more than one tape) is exported from
the source SKM server to a file, which is sent to the destination
316
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Using SKM
recipient. Each key contained in the file is encrypted using the public key
of the destination SKM server. The destination SKM server provides its
public key to the source SKM server as part of an Encryption Key
Certificate, which the source SKM server uses to wrap (encrypt) the
encryption keys for transport. Upon arrival, the file containing the
wrapped encryption keys can only be unwrapped by the corresponding
private key, which resides on the destination SKM server and is never
shared.
The process is as follows:
1 The destination administrator exports the Encryption Key Certificate
that belongs to the destination SKM server. The Encryption
Certificate is saved as a file to a location specified by the
administrator on a computer (see Exporting Encryption Certificates
on page 318).
2 The destination administrator e-mails the Encryption Key Certificate
file to the source administrator.
3 The source administrator saves the Encryption Key Certificate file to
a location on a computer, and then imports the Encryption Key
Certificate onto the source SKM server (see Importing Encryption
Certificates on page 317).
4 The source administrator exports the Encryption Keys, assigning the
same Encryption Key Certificate noted above to wrap the keys. The
file containing the wrapped encryption keys is saved to a location
on a computer specified by the source administrator. See Exporting
Encryption Keys on page 320.
5 The source administrator e-mails the file containing the wrapped
encryption keys to the destination administrator.
6 The destination administrator saves the file containing the wrapped
encryption keys to a location on a computer, and then imports the
keys onto the destination SKM server (see Importing Encryption
Keys).
7 The destination library can now read the encrypted tapes.
Importing Encryption Certificates
The encryption certificate contains a public key that is used to wrap
(encrypt) encryption keys prior to transporting them to another SKM
server. When sharing tape cartridges, or when performing a backup in
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
317
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Using SKM
the event of SKM server failure, you need to import the encryption key
certificate of the destination SKM server.
Note: This function is available to users with administrator-level
privileges and only applies to SKM servers. Both SKM servers
must be connected and operational in order to import
encryption key certificates.
Before starting this process, read and follow the sequence of steps
outlined in Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges on page 316.
1 Receive the encryption key certificate file from the destination SKM
server administrator and save it to a known location on your
computer.
.
2 From the Tools menu, select EKM Management > Encryption
Certificate > Import. The SKM Encryption Certificate Import
dialog box appears.
3 Click Browse to locate the saved encryption key certificate file.
4 Highlight the file and click Open.
5 Click OK to import the certificate onto your SKM server. The dialog
box closes and you are returned to the main console.
Exporting Encryption Certificates
Before you can receive encryption keys from another SKM server, you
must first send your native encryption key certificate to that server. You
can use the Export functionality to export the native certificate to a file
318
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Using SKM
that can be imported into another SKM server. The public key contained
in the certificate will be used to wrap (encrypt) the encryption keys to
protect them during transport to you.
NOTE: This function is available to users with Administrator-level
privileges and only applies to SKM servers. Both SKM servers must be
connected and operational in order to export encryption key certificates.
To export an encryption key certificate:
1 Before starting this process, read and follow the sequence of steps
outlined in Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges on page 316.
2 From the Tools menu, select EKM Management > Encryption
Certificate > Export. The SKM Certificate Export dialog box
appears.
3 Click Browse to locate the saved encryption key certificate file.
4 Highlight the file and click Open.
5 Click OK to export the file. The dialog box closes and you are
returned to the main console.
Importing Encryption Keys
Each SKM server provides a unique encryption key for each tape
cartridge that is encrypted. In order to read tapes encrypted by a
different (i.e., source) SKM server, you need to import the encryption
keys used to encrypt those tapes onto your SKM server.
You may also use this function to import a backup of your own SKM
server encryption keys in case of a catastrophic SKM server failure.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
319
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Using SKM
Note: This function is available to users with Administrator-level
privileges and only applies to SKM servers. Both SKM servers
must be connected and operational in order to export
encryption key certificates.
1 Before starting this process, read and follow the sequence of steps
outlined in Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges on page 316.
2 Receive the file of encryption keys from the source SKM server and
save it in a known location on your computer.
3 From the Tools menu, select EKM Management > Encryption Key
> Import.
4 Click Browse to locate the saved file of encryption keys.
5 Highlight the file and click Open.
6 Click OK to import the keys onto your SKM server.
After a successful import, a message is displayed recommending
you backup your encryption keys to protect against a catastrophic
EKM server failure. Consult your EKM server documentation for
details on how to perform an EKM backup.
The dialog box closes and you are returned to the main console.
Exporting Encryption Keys
Each SKM server provides a unique encryption key for each tape
cartridge that is encrypted. In order for another (i.e., destination) SKM
server to read tapes encrypted by your SKM server, you need to export
the encryption keys used to encrypt those tapes and send them to the
destination server.
You may also use this function to create a backup of your SKM server
encryption keys in case of a catastrophic SKM server failure.
Note: This function is available to users with Administrator-level
privileges and only applies to SKM servers. Both SKM servers
must be connected and operational in order to export
encryption key certificates.
1 Before starting this process, read and follow the sequence of steps
outlined in Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges on page 316.
320
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Using SKM
2 From the Tools menu, select EKM Management > Encryption Key
> Export. The Scalar Key Manager Encryption Key Export screen
appears.
3 In Save As field, click Browse to save the encryption key file to a
location on your computer.
4 In the Select Certificate drop-down list, assign the encryption key
certificate with which you will “wrap” the keys.
The drop-down list contains all of the encryption key certificates
that you have ever imported onto your SKM server (indicated by the
word “imported” in the list).
The list also contains the native encryption key certificate for your
SKM servers, indicated with the word “Native” in the name.
If destination server is:
• Someone else’s SKM server — The destination administrator
should have sent you the encryption key certificate previously
and you should have imported it onto your SKM server (see
Importing Encryption Certificates on page 317). It should
appear on the list for you to select.
• Your SKM server — If you are sending your encryption key
certificate to someone else to use to wrap encryption keys,
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
321
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Using SKM
select your “native” certificate. You might also need to export
your “native” certificate for disaster recovery in the event that
one of your SKM servers failed and you needed to re-import all
of your keys onto a new SKM server.
5 Select which SKM encryption keys to export from the following
options:
• Export Used — Exports all the keys that have ever been used to
encrypt tape cartridges on the library.
• Export Current — Exports only keys for tape cartridges
currently present in the library.
• Export Selective — Exports the keys that are associated with a
string of characters that you type into the text box. Each key is
associated with its encrypted tape cartridge, identified by the
tape cartridge barcode. You can type in all or part of a tape
cartridge barcode, and any keys that are associated with that
string will be exported. This is helpful if you only want to export
a single key associated with a particular tape cartridge.
6 Click OK.
Each key is wrapped (encrypted) using the destination public key
contained on the selected destination encryption certificate. All the
selected keys are saved to a single file.
Retrieving SKM Server Logs
The SKM Server Logs contain information on activity that has occurred
on the SKM servers. You can save the logs to a location on a computer,
or e-mail the logs to a recipient. The logs downloaded from the servers
are stored in the form of tar files.
To access the file, you will have to untar the file first.
To retrieve these logs, you must have Library Managed Encryption
licensed on the library and be running a SKM server or servers.
Note: This function is available to users with administrator-level
privileges only.
322
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Using SKM
1 From the Tools menu, select EKM Management > Retrieve SKM
Logs.
2 Select which log you want to retrieve. If a server is down or not
connected, you will not be able to select it.
• Primary SKM Server Logs
• Secondary SKM Server Logs
• SKM Encryption Key Import Warning Log
Contains a list of keys that failed import. If you have only partial
success when importing a file of encryption keys (meaning,
some keys import successfully but some keys do not), the library
generates an “import warning” message as well as a RAS ticket
that directs you to view this log to see which keys did not get
imported. This log is only available if you are running SKM and
have encryption key management licensed on the library. When
the log file reaches its maximum size, the oldest information is
replaced as new information is added.
3 Click Send to save, e-mail, or print the information. The Email,
Save, or Print dialog box appears.
Generating EKM Audit Reports
The EKM Audit Report option allows you to view or print library
information, encryption method activity and media encryption status. If
desired, you can save, print or email the generated information.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
323
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Using SKM
Note: This function is available to users with administrator-level
privileges only.
1 From the Tools menu, select EKM Management > EKM Audit
Report. The EKM Audit Report screen appears.
2 If desired, click the Start and End buttons in the Date Range
section to specify starting and ending dates for the report. Click
Filter to apply your entries.
3 Click Send to save, e-mail, or print the information. The Email,
Save, or Print dialog box appears.
324
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Using SKM
4 When you save or email the report, a zip file containing the
following three files is created:
• encryptionMethodChanges.csv
• mediaEncryptionStatus.csv
• libraryInfo.txt
These three files contain the same information that is displayed on
the EKM Audit Report screen.
5 Click Close when you are finished with the EKM Audit Report.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
325
Chapter 8: Encryption Key Management
Using SKM
326
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 9
Extended Data Lifecycle
Management
Extended Data Lifecycle Management (EDLM) provides data protection
and integrity checking by scanning your tape cartridges, providing
results, and allowing StorNext Storage Manager to migrate data off of
bad or suspect tapes. EDLM allows you to run manual scans on any tape
cartridge in the library at any time, and performs automatic scans
according to schedules and policies that you set up.
To use EDLM, you set up an EDLM library managed partition into which
tapes are moved for scanning. Scanning takes place using “EDLM
scanning drives.” You can use EDLM for manual scans at any time and
also set up automatic scanning policies.
EDLM is typically used to check the health of data on cartridges in longterm retention (archive or disaster recovery) that are no longer used in
normal operations. (Conversely, health information for active cartridges
is presented in the Media Integrity and Media Usage reports, which are
part of the Advanced Reporting feature.).
This section covers the following topics:
• About EDLM on page 328
• Configuring EDLM on page 330
• Step 1: Creating the EDLM Library Managed Partition on
page 330
• Step 2: Configuring Access to StorNext on page 332 (optional)
• Step 3: Configuring EDLM Policies on Partitions on page 332
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
327
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
About EDLM
• Step 4: Viewing EDLM Partition Policies on page 342
• Running Manual EDLM Tests on page 342
• Viewing EDLM Test Sessions and Report Details on page 348
• Diagnosing a Suspect EDLM Drive on page 356
About EDLM
• The EDLM feature requires an Extended Data Lifecycle Management
license (see Enabling Licenses on page 125). One license covers the
entire library.
• EDLM expands upon and replaces the Media Data Integrity Analysis
(MeDIA) feature previously used on the library. The MeDIA feature
only included manual media scans. If you previously installed a
Media Data Integrity License on the library, you will notice that the
name of the license changes to Extended Data Lifecycle
Management when you upgrade to version 612Q or later code, and
the additional features of EDLM are added. The Scalar i6000 User’s
Guide section “Running MeDIA Test Reports” will be replaced by
Running Manual EDLM Tests on page 342 and Viewing EDLM Test
Sessions and Report Details on page 348.
• One library managed partition is required for the media scans. This
library managed partition is accessible only by a library
administrator. It is not presented to any other applications. The
library managed partition is assigned its own dedicated resources
and EDLM scanning is executed in the background with no impact
to normal tape operations. Cartridges are moved into the EDLM
library managed partition and scanned using EDLM-scanning drives
residing in the EDLM library managed partition. After being
scanned, cartridges are returned to their original locations. See Step
1: Creating the EDLM Library Managed Partition on page 330.
• Automatic media scanning policies are configured by partition. Each
partition can have its own unique set of media scanning and action
policies. See Step 3: Configuring EDLM Policies on Partitions on
page 332.
328
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
About EDLM
• You can also scan cartridges manually at any time. See Running
Manual EDLM Tests on page 342.
• You need Administrator privileges to use EDLM.
• All types of tape cartridges (data, cleaning, diagnostic, and
firmware update tapes) can be scanned manually. However, only
data cartridges can be scanned automatically.
• Media scan requests are performed as they are received. If there are
not enough drives to scan all requests concurrently, the scans are
queued based on the priority you select (high, medium, low).
Manual scans can be initiated to scan immediately, superseding
previously queued scans. Queued tests are reported as “Not
Completed” in the test report (see Viewing EDLM Test Sessions and
Report Details on page 348).
• You may optionally use StorNext Storage Manager to trigger media
scans and automatically copy data off of suspect or failed tapes. To
use StorNext you must separately install an API client plug-in. See
Step 2: Configuring Access to StorNext on page 332.
• If a cartridge is being scanned and the host initiates a move request,
the scan is aborted and the library performs the host-requested
move. The scan is not rescheduled, but the cartridge will be scanned
at the next scheduled time according to the policy. The EDLM report
indicates the interruption or cancellation. This ensures that normal
operations are not affected by EDLM scanning.
• You can move tapes between EDLM library managed partitions and
standard partitions via the library user interface without exporting
and importing the tapes (for more information, see Moving Media
Between Active Vault or AMP and Standard Partitions on page 704).
Note: Manual movement between library managed partitions and
standard partitions will require inventory reconciliation with
the backup application managing the standard partition.
• EDLM drives and blades must be separate from other blades in the
library.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
329
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Configuring EDLM
Configuring EDLM
Step 1: Creating the
EDLM Library Managed
Partition
The EDLM library managed partition is a dedicated partition that you set
up in the library for scanning media with EDLM. This partition exists
solely for media scanning purposes and is not accessible to hosts or
other applications. Tape cartridges are moved into the EDLM library
managed partition and scanned using the tape drives residing in the
EDLM library managed partition. When the scan is complete, the
cartridges are returned to their original partitions.
Details about the EDLM library managed partition include:
• There can be only one EDLM library managed partition in the library.
• All tape drives in the EDLM library managed partition must be
“EDLM-scanning drives” (not standard tape drives) which must be
purchased from Quantum. Previously purchased “MeDIA drives” are
the same thing and are now known as “EDLM-scanning drives.”
These EDLM-scanning drives are HP LTO-4or higher Fibre Channel
tape drives. You can have LTO-4 or higher EDLM-scanning drives in
the EDLM library managed partition.
• The EDLM library managed partition can support any number of
EDLM-scanning drives (within the normal support of the physical
library).
• All of the EDLM scanning drives in the EDLM library managed
partition can be connected to either a 7404 Fibre Channel I/O blade
or an Ethernet Expansion Blade (EEB). The FC I/O blade must not be
connected to a host, nor may it be shared with drives located in
another partition. Each FC I/O blade supports up to 4 tape drives
while an EEB supports up to 6 tape drives. You can use multiple FC
blades and EEBs to support the EDLM-scanning drives.
• Tape drives in the EDLM library managed partition will only be used
for EDLM scanning purposes.
• The EDLM library managed partition is composed of unlicensed
slots. If the size of the EDLM partition exceeds the number of
unlicensed slots, then the partition will be composed of both
unlicensed and licensed slots, or all licensed slots.
• The normal library tape drive cleaning policies apply to the tape
drives in the library managed partition.
330
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Configuring EDLM
• You can set up EDLM scanning policies on the EDLM library
managed partition.
To create the EDLM library managed partition, do the following:
1 Install EDLM-scanning drives in the library.
2 Connect each EDLM-scanning drive to one of the four initiator ports
in a dedicated 7404 Fibre Channel I/O blade. Make sure that this
Fibre Channel I/O blade is not be connected to a host, and that it
only has EDLM-scanning drives connected to it. If you have more
than four EDLM-scanning drives, you will need to use more than
one dedicated Fibre Channel I/O blade.
3 Log on as an administrator.
4 From the View menu, select the physical library.
5 Install the Extended Data Lifecycle Management license on the
library.
Note: If you already have the MeDIA license installed, it will
automatically become the Extended Data Lifecycle
Management license.
6 Use Expert Mode to create the EDLM library managed partition.
Follow the instructions in Using Expert Mode on page 141. When
you get to the screen named Partitions - Step 2: Choose Partition
Properties, select Library Managed (EDLM) from the Partition
Type drop-down menu.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
331
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Configuring EDLM
Step 2: Configuring
Access to StorNext
This step is optional. If StorNext Storage Manager is managing your
partition, you can use StorNext with EDLM to automatically copy data
off of bad or suspect tapes or to trigger media scans.
In order to use StorNext for these purposes, you first need to configure
the library for StorNext access. Follow the steps in Chapter 11,
Configuring Access to StorNext, and then return here. You will then be
able to select StorNext policies in the next step.
Step 3: Configuring
EDLM Policies on
Partitions
332
Automatic scanning and other EDLM policies are enabled by partition.
You can set up EDLM policies on as many standard and Active Vault
partitions as you want, as well as an EDLM library managed partition.
(Some policies are not available on the EDLM and other library managed
partitions; namely, those that require external access to a host
application.) You can configure the following types of policies:
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Configuring EDLM
Media Scan Candidate
Policies
Specifies when to perform automatic scans
on media in the partition. See Step 5 on
page 336.
Media Scan Type
Policies
Specifies which type of automatic scans to
perform (quick, normal, or full). See Step 7
on page 339.
Media Scan Results
Action Policies
Specifies what actions to take on suspect or
failed media. These policies apply to all
media in the partition, whether they were
scanned manually or automatically. See
Step 11 on page 341.
This section describes how to create, modify, and remove EDLM policies
on partitions.
Note: Cartridges that are not capable of being read by at least one of
the tape drives in the EDLM library managed partition are
excluded from all scans. (For example, if the EDLM library
managed partition contains only LTO-5 tape drives, then LTO-1
and LTO-2 cartridges will not be scanned.)
1 Select Setup > Partitions > Policies > EDLM Configuration. The
Extended Data Life Management Configuration Wizard appears.
2 Click Next. The Select the EDLM Configuration Option screen
appears. All of the library’s partitions are displayed in a table. The
EDLM Policy column indicates whether EDLM policies are enabled
or disabled on the partition.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
333
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Configuring EDLM
3 Create, modify, or remove policies on a partition by doing one of
the following:
To...
Do this...
Enable EDLM policies on a
partition
1 Select the Enable radio button.
2 Select the check box of a partition in the table that has EDLM
policies disabled.
3 Proceed to Step 4.
Modify existing EDLM policies
on a partition
1 Select the Modify radio button.
2 Select the check box of a partition in the table that has EDLM
policies enabled.
3 Proceed to Step 4.
334
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Configuring EDLM
To...
Do this...
Disable EDLM policies on a
partition
1 Select the Disable radio button.
2 Select the check box of a partition in the table that has EDLM
policies enabled.
3 Click Finish.
A confirmation dialog box appears asking you to confirm you
want to disable the EDLM policies on the partition.
4 Click Yes to confirm.
A “success” dialog box appears.
5 Click OK to close the dialog box.
Process is complete.
4 Click Next. The EDLM Media Scan Candidate Policies screen
appears.
Note: Depending on the type of partition you are setting policies
for, some of the choices shown below may not appear. For
example, library managed partitions cannot be configured
for external application support.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
335
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Configuring EDLM
5 Select as many media scan candidate policies as you wish. The
policies apply to all tape cartridges in the partition. Depending on
your library and partition configuration, some of the options listed
below may not be available.
Note: You may select zero scan candidate policies by clearing all
of the check boxes. This means no automatic scans will be
performed on this partition. You might wish to do this to
temporarily halt automatic scans on media in the partition
but keep your policy drop-down list selections intact so
that you can re-enable them later. You can still perform
manual scans on tapes residing in the partition, and media
scan action results policies (Step 11 on page 341) will
remain in effect.
336
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Configuring EDLM
Media Scan Candidate
Policy
Enable External
Application support
Description
Allows you to use a supported external application to perform corrective
action and trigger media scans. Once you enable this policy, you will be
able to configure the following options:
• Perform scans based on External Application suspect count. on
page 338
• Request Media Copy by External Application on page 342
In order to select this policy, access to an external application must be
configured (see Step 2: Configuring Access to StorNext on page 332).
Choose the desired external application from the drop-down list.
This policy is disabled by default. This policy is not available on library
managed partitions.
Perform scans based on
the number of Tape
Alerts reported for a
piece of media.
Scans a tape if the number of Tape Alerts reported for that cartridge
exceeds the specified value. From the drop-down list, select the number
of Tape Alerts.
The Tape Alerts included in the count are:
• 01h (1) – Read Warning
• 03h (3) – Hard Error
• 04h (4) – Media
• 05h (5) – Read Failure
• 06h (6) – Write Failure
• 12h (18) – Tape Directory Corrupted on Load
• 33h (51) – Tape Directory Invalid on Unload
• 34h (52) – Tape System Area Write Error
• 35h (53) – Tape System Area Read Error
• 37h (55) – Loading Failure
• 3Bh (59) – WORM Medium Integrity Check Failed
This policy is disabled by default. The default number of Tape Alerts is 3.
This policy is not available on the library managed partitions.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
337
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Configuring EDLM
Media Scan Candidate
Policy
Description
Perform scans based on
time interval since last
scan.
Scans a tape if the time interval since the last scan was performed has
been exceeded. In the text box, type a time interval (in days) after which
a scan will be performed.
Note: When deciding on the interval, consider the number of tapes to
be scanned in the entire library, as well as the type of scan to be
performed. Full scans can take more than 2 hours on full tapes.
Over-scheduling can cause delays or tapes not to be scanned as
intended.
This policy is disabled by default. The default interval is 180 days. To
change the interval, type a new value in the interval text box.
Perform scans based on
External Application
suspect count.
A suspect count is a means by which an external application determines
when to stop writing data to tape.
If you select this policy, a tape will be queued for EDLM testing when its
suspect count threshold is reached. If the EDLM test indicates the tape is
good, you can reset the suspect count on the external application and
continue to use the tape. For more information on suspect counts and
resetting suspect counts, refer to your external application’s
documentation.
This policy is disabled by default. You can only select this policy if Enable
External Application support is also selected (see Enable External
Application support on page 337), and if the external application
supports suspect counts.
Perform scans
immediately when media
is imported into the
library.
338
Scans a tape cartridge as soon as it is imported into the partition.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Configuring EDLM
6 Click Next. The EDLM Media Scan Type Policies screen appears.
7 Select a media scan type policy.
Note: When deciding on a scan type policy, consider how the
tapes are being used. Depending on the number of EDLM
drives and the scan type policy you choose, scans can take
a very long time to complete, and may overlap the next
scheduled scan.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
339
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Configuring EDLM
Media Scan
Type Policy
Description
Quick Scan
Does not scan the tape. Evaluates data from the cartridge memory (CM) only.
A quick scan takes less than one minute per tape.
Examples of when to use a quick scan:
• When you first import previously used scratch tapes into the library.
• When you import data cartridges that have been used in other backup and
archival environments and need to do a quick check to determine whether the
tape cartridge is nearing end of life, at end of life, or may have had issues
reading or writing.
Normal Scan
(default)
Evaluates the cartridge memory (CM) and scans selected portions of the tape,
focusing on areas most likely to indicate problems.
A normal scan can take 20 minutes per tape.
Examples of when to use a normal scan:
• For tapes in frequent use within the library, with scanning triggered by drivereported media Tape Alert events.
• For tapes in frequent use within the library, with scanning being performed at
regular time intervals.
Full Scan
Evaluates the cartridge memory (CM) and scans the entire tape.
A full scan can take more than 2 hours on a full tape.
Example of when to use a full scan:
• When tape cartridges are accessed infrequently and are used primarily for onsite or off-site long-term data retention.
• When tape cartridges with valuable data are introduced into the library and the
state and condition of the tapes are unknown.
8 Select a scan priority from the Policy Scan Priority drop-down list
(Low, Medium, or High). The default is medium. The priority is used
to queue scans when there are too many to be performed
concurrently.
9 Select the maximum number of concurrent scans allowed from the
Concurrent Scans drop-down list. The maximum allowed (default)
is the number of scanning drives in the EDLM partition.
10 Click Next. The EDLM Media Scan Results Action Policies screen
appears.
340
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Configuring EDLM
11 Select one or more of the following media scan results action
policies to be performed when media is bad or suspect.
Note: These action policies apply to all tapes scanned in this
partition, whether they are scanned manually or
automatically.
Media Scan Results Action Policy
Description
Disable RAS ticket generation and
notifications of bad or suspect media.
Select this option if you do not wish to receive RAS
tickets and e-mail notifications of bad or suspect media.
RAS ticket generation is disabled by default.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
341
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Running Manual EDLM Tests
Media Scan Results Action Policy
Description
Request Media Copy by External
Application
Automatically requests a supported external application
to copy all data from a bad and/or suspect tape to
another tape. Once you enable this policy, you can select
whether to copy bad tapes, suspect tapes, or both.
• Copy if tape is bad (default)
• Copy if tape is suspect
• Copy if tape is bad or suspect
A RAS ticket will be generated for each request to copy
data indicating whether the request succeeds or fails.
You can only select this option if a supported external
application is enabled for use with EDLM on this
partition (see Enable External Application support on
page 337).
In order for this policy to work, the partition must
contain at least two tape drives (one for the bad/suspect
tape from which you are copying data and one for the
good tape to which you are copying data).
12 Click Next. The EDLM Configuration Summary screen appears.The
screen displays all of your choices.
13 Click Finish to apply your settings, or use the Back button to make
changes. A “success” dialog box appears.
14 Click OK to close the dialog box.
Step 4: Viewing EDLM
Partition Policies
To review the policies you configured, you can go back through the
Wizard, or you can click Monitor > Partitions > Policies. See
Monitoring Partition Policies on page 544 for more information.
Running Manual EDLM Tests
You may wish to evaluate media outside of the EDLM automatic
scanning policies. You can manually scan tape cartridges in the library at
any time. Manual EDLM scans can be run on any tape in the library, as
long the following conditions are met:
• An EDLM license must be installed on the library.
342
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Running Manual EDLM Tests
• The EDLM library managed partition must be configured on the
library (see Step 1: Creating the EDLM Library Managed Partition on
page 330).
• The cartridge you want to scan must be capable of being read by a
tape drive in the EDLM library managed partition.
• The cartridge can be located in any partition, including the EDLM
library managed partition.
• The cartridge must be located in a storage slot, not in a drive or I/E
station.
To run a manual EDLM test, do the following:
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 From the View menu, select the physical library or a partition on
which EDLM policies are enabled.
3 From the main menu, select Tools > EDLM > Test Selection. The
EDLM Test screen appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
343
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Running Manual EDLM Tests
The media selection table contains the following information:
Item
Description
Media ID
The media barcode.
Coordinate
Where the cartridge is located within the library.
Scan
Scan type, described in Step 7 on page 346.
Priority
The order in which scans are performed, described in Step 9 on
page 347.
344
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Running Manual EDLM Tests
Item
Description
Tested
Indicates whether the media has already been tested (Yes/No),
or if the media is currently part of a test session that has not yet
completed (Pending; cell is highlighted in yellow).
Last Tested
The date the media was last tested.
Test Result
The last test result for the media. Test results include the
following:
• Good — The tape is good.
• Bad — The tape is bad.
• Suspect — The tape is possibly unreliable or defective.
• Untested — The tape could not be fully scanned, for various
reasons, including: incompatible or unknown media type;
tape could not be loaded; tape is encrypted but the data
encryption key could not be obtained; drive not
communicating with I/O blade, test was stopped.
Note: Untested media do not initiate RAS tickets or EDLM
media action policies (such as copying data from a bad
or suspect tape).
• Not Completed — The test has not completed yet.
Supported
Indicates whether the media is a supported media type (Yes/No)
(meaning, it can be read by at least one of the drives in the
EDLM library managed partition). For example, an LTO-1 tape
cannot be read by an LTO-4 drive. Unsupported media cannot
be selected for testing.
4 From the Select Partition drop-down list, select the partition that
contains the media you want to test.
5 To filter the displayed list of media, in the Filter Media field, type
the desired Media ID (barcode label), or a portion of a Media ID, and
click Filter. If you choose not to filter the list, skip this step.
6 From the media table, select the check box for each tape you want
to scan. To select all media listed, select the Select All Media check
box.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
345
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Running Manual EDLM Tests
Note: You can sort the media list by Media ID, Coordinate,
Tested, and Result by clicking the column header. An
arrow appears in the column header indicating whether
the column is sorted in ascending or descending order.
Click the column header again to toggle between
ascending and descending order.
Note: You cannot select unsupported media.
7 For each selected tape, choose a scan type from the drop-down list
in the Scan column. To select the same type of scan for all selected
tapes, choose a scan type from the Select All Scan Type drop-down
list. The scan types are described in the following table.
Note: When deciding on the type of test to run, consider how the
tapes are being used. Depending on the number of EDLM
drives and the test type you choose, scans can take a very
long time to complete.
Type of Scan
Description
Quick
Does not scan the tape. Evaluates data from the cartridge memory (CM) only.
A quick scan takes less than one minute per tape.
Examples of when to use a quick scan:
• When you first import previously used scratch tapes into the library.
• When you import data cartridges that have been used in other backup and
archival environments and need to do a quick check to determine whether the
tape cartridge is nearing end of life, at end of life, or may have had issues
reading or writing.
Normal (default)
Evaluates the cartridge memory (CM) and scans selected portions of the tape,
focusing on areas most likely to indicate problems.
A normal scan can take 20 minutes per tape.
Examples of when to use a normal scan:
• For tapes in frequent use within the library, with scanning triggered by drivereported media Tape Alert events.
• For tapes in frequent use within the library, with scanning being performed at
regular time intervals.
346
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Running Manual EDLM Tests
Type of Scan
Description
Full
Evaluates the cartridge memory (CM) and scans the entire tape.
A full scan can take more than 2 hours on a full tape.
Example of when to use a full scan:
• When tape cartridges are accessed infrequently and are used primarily for onsite or off-site long-term data retention.
• When tape cartridges with valuable data are introduced into the library and the
state and condition of the tapes are unknown.
8 If desired, select the Continue On Error check box. You can select
this check box for a Normal Scan or Full Scan. If this option is
selected, the test scans the tape even if the cartridge memory (CM)
test fails. If this check box is not selected, the test will not scan the
tape if the CM test fails.
9 For each selected tape, choose a priority from the drop-down list in
the Priority column. To select the same priority for all selected
tapes, choose a priority from the Select All Priority drop-down list.
The scans are queued along with all other queued EDLM scans in
order of priority. The priority types are described in the following
table.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Priority
Description
Immediate
Scanned immediately. If an EDLM scanning drive
is busy scanning tapes in a queue, it finishes
scanning the current tape and then scans the
“immediate” tape before accepting another tape
from the queue. If you select multiple drives with
“immediate” priority, they will all be scanned
before tapes with lower priorities are scanned.
High
Placed in the queue behind existing queued tapes
with “high” priority.
Medium
Placed in the queue behind existing queued tapes
with “medium” priority.
Low
Placed in the queue behind existing queued tapes
with “low” priority.
347
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Viewing EDLM Test Sessions and Report Details
10 Click OK to start the scan. The message EDLM Tests have started
successfully... appears.
11 Click OK to close the message.
12 To retrieve results, go to Tools > EDLM Tests > Test Results. See
Viewing EDLM Test Sessions and Report Details on page 348.
Viewing EDLM Test Sessions and Report Details
You can view the status of all your EDLM test sessions, including
sessions that are queued but not started yet, in the EDLM Test Sessions
List screen. You can stop, pause, resume, or delete test sessions. See
Working with the EDLM Test Sessions List on page 348.
Each entry in the EDLM Test Sessions List screen presents an overview of
a single EDLM test session. A test session includes all tapes in the library
that were scheduled to be scanned at a particular point in time. Thus, a
test session can include multiple tapes from different partitions.
• Example 1: You select 10 tapes on which to perform a manual scan.
The test session includes 10 tapes.
• Example 2: Partition A has an automatic scan policy to scan tapes
on import. You import a tape. Meanwhile, Partition B has an
automatic scan policy to scan every 180 days. Ten tapes in that
partition have reached the 180-day mark at the same time that you
import the tape into Partition A. Because these automatic scans
occur at the same time, the test session includes all 11 tapes from
both partitions.
Within each test session, you view details about each tape that was
scanned (see Viewing EDLM Session Report Details on page 351).
Working with the EDLM
Test Sessions List
To view the status of EDLM test sessions (both automatic and manual),
do the following:
1 From the menu, select Tools > EDLM > Test Results. The EDLM
Test Sessions List dialog box appears.
348
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Viewing EDLM Test Sessions and Report Details
The EDLM Test Sessions List displays the set of media tests that
have run based on the time range selected. Each row in the table
presents an overview of a single EDLM test session.
You can sort the list by clicking any of the column headers. An arrow
appears in the column header indicating whether the column is
sorted in ascending or descending order. Click the column header
again to toggle between ascending and descending order.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
349
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Viewing EDLM Test Sessions and Report Details
Table 31 displays the following information about the test sessions:
Table 31 EDLM Test Sessions
Item
Description
Session ID
The session identifier, a unique number assigned to each test session that was
run.
Start Time
The date and time the test session was started.
Finish Time
The date and time the test session completed. If the test session has not yet
completed, “In Progress” displays. If the test session was paused, “Paused”
displays.
Results
A summary of results for all media tested in the session. The reported values
include the number of tapes scanned (in parentheses) for each result obtained.
Note: To view results for individual tapes in the session, click a test session row
to highlight it, and then click the Details button.
Results are the following:
• Good — The tape is good.
• Bad — The tape is bad.
• Suspect — The tape is possibly unreliable or defective.
• Untested — The tape could not be fully scanned, for various reasons,
including: incompatible or unknown media type; tape could not be loaded;
tape is encrypted but the data encryption key could not be obtained; drive
not communicating with I/O blade, test was stopped.
Note: Untested media do not initiate RAS tickets or EDLM media action
policies (such as copying data from a bad or suspect tape).
• Not Completed — The test has not completed yet.
2 In the Select Time Range field, select the range of time for test
sessions that you want displayed. The time range is based on the
start time of the test session. Choose one of the following:
• Last Week — Test sessions that were run in the last seven days.
• Last Month — Test sessions that were run in the last month.
• Last 3 Months — Test sessions that were run in the last three
months.
350
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Viewing EDLM Test Sessions and Report Details
• Last 6 Months — Test sessions that were run in the last six
months.
• All — Includes all test sessions that were run on the library. The
storage limit is 50,000 media scans. When the limit is reached,
old scan results are deleted as new scan results are added.
3 To work with a session, click the test session row to highlight it, and
then click your desired option:
Viewing EDLM Session
Report Details
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Option
Description
Stop
Stops a currently running test session. Once stopped,
you cannot restart the test. Any test results collected
so far are listed. Tapes that did not complete testing
as a result of being stopped show a test result of
Untested.
Pause
Pauses a currently running test session. The tape that
is being tested stays in the scanning drive. Tapes in
the test session that have not been tested yet will
remain queued.
Resume
Resumes a paused test session. Queued tapes are
mounted and scanned.
Details
Displays the test report for the selected test session in
a new window. See Viewing EDLM Session Report
Details on page 351.
Delete
Deletes the selected test session from the list. Once
deleted, you cannot retrieve the information again.
Refresh
Refreshes the test session list so that the latest
information about the tests is displayed.
To view details about a specific EDLM test session, do the following:
1 From the EDLM Test Sessions List (Tools > EDLM > Test Results),
click on a row to highlight it, and then click the Details button. The
test results display in a new window called EDLM Session Report
351
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Viewing EDLM Test Sessions and Report Details
(Session ID X), where X is the session ID displayed in the EDLM Test
Sessions List.
You can sort the list by clicking any of the column headers. An arrow
appears in the column header indicating whether the column is
sorted in ascending or descending order. Click the column header
again to toggle between ascending and descending order.
352
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Viewing EDLM Test Sessions and Report Details
The Select Media for Details section of the screen lists each tape in
the test session. The following information is reported:
Item
Description
Barcode
The media barcode identifier.
Test Result
The test result displays as one of the following:
• Good — The tape is good.
• Bad — The tape is bad.
• Suspect — The tape is possibly unreliable or
defective.
• Untested — The tape could not be fully scanned, for
various reasons, including: incompatible or unknown
media type; tape could not be loaded; tape is
encrypted but the data encryption key could not be
obtained; drive not communicating with I/O blade,
test was stopped.
Note: Untested media do not initiate RAS tickets or
EDLM media action policies (such as copying
data from a bad or suspect tape).
• Not Completed — Test has not completed yet.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Drive ID
The serial number of the tape drive that tested the tape.
State
The current test status: Pending, In Progress,
Completed, Stopped or Paused.
Completed
The date and time the test completed.
Type
The type of test that was run: Quick Scan, Normal Scan
or Full Scan.
353
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Viewing EDLM Test Sessions and Report Details
2 To view test details for a specific tape, click on a row in the Select
Media for Details section to highlight it. Details about the test
display in the Details section below. The following details display:
Item
Description
CM Scan Status
One of the following:
• Test completed — Test is finished; however, the
result may not be “good.” You can also get this
if the test was stopped.
• Test paused.
• Test pending.
• Test in progress.
• Test not run — Media was removed from
library before it could be tested, or there were
no drives available to test the media.
CM Scan
Analysis
Summary of the cartridge memory scan (either
“good” or an explanation of the result).
Tape Scan Status
One of the following:
• Test completed — Test is finished; however, the
result may not be “good.”
• Test paused.
• Test pending.
• Test in progress.
• Test not run — Media was removed from
library before it could be tested, or there were
no drives available to test the media.
• Test not configured — You requested a Quick
Scan only so the tape was not scanned.
Tape Scan
Analysis
Summary of the tape scan (either “good” or an
explanation of the result).
3 To send a copy of the test session report via e-mail, click Send. To
update the dialog with the current status, click Refresh.
354
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Viewing EDLM Test Sessions and Report Details
Viewing the EDLM
Queue
To see what EDLM scans are currently in the queue:
1 Select Tools > EDLM > Status. The EDLM Task Status screen
opens. The screen lists each tape, its barcode, location, partition,
scan type, test status (pending or in progress), priority, and start
time. You can sort the list by ID or Start Time by clicking the column
headers.
2 To refresh the list, click Refresh.
3 To delete a scan from the queue, select its check box and click
Delete. Scans that are currently in progress cannot be deleted.
4 To close the screen, click Cancel.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
355
Chapter 9: Extended Data Lifecycle Management
Diagnosing a Suspect EDLM Drive
Diagnosing a Suspect EDLM Drive
It is possible that any tape errors could be the result of a bad EDLM
drive. A ticket will be generated indicating a possible bad EDLM drive.
To diagnose a suspect EDLM drive, it is recommended that users either
create a ‘known good tape’ or use a tape that has verifiable, accurate
data.
If there is no ‘known good tape’ available and users are not confident
that a tape is providing accurate data, they can contact Quantum
Service and ask if an EDLM Diagnostic Tape is available to test their
suspect EDLM drive.
356
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10
Path Failover
Path Failover (formerly known as Native Storage Networking (nSNW)) is
a licensable feature that allows you to take advantage of control and
data path failover, as well as host access configuration features of IBM
and HP LTO-5 and later tape drives, without those drives being
connected to a Fibre Channel I/O blade and instead connected to an
Ethernet Expansion Blade (EEB)
Note: If an SNW license is applied to a drive that has dual ports, both
ports will be active. If there is no SNW license, only one of the
ports will be active.
This chapter covers:
• Use the Storage Networking Wizard on page 358
• License Drives for Path Failover on page 359
• Configure Control Path on page 361
• Configuring Data Path Failover on page 376
• Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and
Partitions on page 383
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
357
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Use the Storage Networking Wizard
Use the Storage Networking Wizard
The SNW wizard groups all the path failover features together in a
single place. To access the SNW wizard:
1 Select Setup > SNW Wizard. The Storage Networking
Configuration Wizard welcome screen appears.
2 Click Next. The Select Storage Networking Option screen appears.
358
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
License Drives for Path Failover
3 Select an option and click Next.
All of the options and their instructions are described in the sections
below:
• License Drives for Path Failover on page 359
• Configure Control Path on page 361
• Configuring Data Path Failover on page 376
• Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and
Partitions on page 383
License Drives for Path Failover
Before you can use a drive for any of the storage networking features,
you must assign it to the SNW license. Your SNW license covers a
specific number of drives. Any drive you use for an SNW feature
consumes one license count. A drive consumes only one license count
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
359
Chapter 10: Path Failover
License Drives for Path Failover
even if you use it for multiple SNW features. The type of features
available to be configured for SNW include:
• Host Access Control
• Data Path Failover (Basic and Advanced)
• Control Path Failover (Basic and Advanced)
• FIPS
To assign drives to a SNW license:
1 Access the SNW Wizard options screen (select Setup > SNW
Wizard and click Next).
2 From the Select Storage Networking Options screen, select
Storage Networking Drive Licenses.
3 Click Next. The Select the drive(s) to license screen appears. The
screen contains a list of all eligible drives. Drives with their selection
boxes checked are currently licensed as SNW drives.
4 Select the check boxes belonging to drives you want to license. Click
the Select All Drives check box to select all check boxes.
5 Clear the check boxes of drives you no longer want to license. Any
changes you make are indicated by colors filling the row.
• Green — indicates you are adding the drive to the SNW count.
360
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configure Control Path
• Yellow — indicates you are removing the drive from the SNW
count.
• White — indicates no change.
6 Click Finish. If you are adding drives, a dialog warns you that host
connectivity may be affected.
7 Click OK. A Success dialog appears.
8 Click OK.
Configure Control Path
There are five types of control path configurations:
Control Path: This configuration options does not require an SNW
license and can use any EEB attached IBM or HP LTO drive. For more
information, see Configuring Control Paths on page 156.
Multi Control Path: This configuration option requires an SNW license
and allows you to assign multiple IBM and/or HP LTO-5 or higher drives
as possible control paths.
Basic Control Path Failover (BCPF): This configuration provides
support for only HP LTO-5 and later path failover licensed drives for
basic control path failover. When BCPF is used, one drive is assigned as
the primary control path and another drive as the control path failover
(secondary) drive. The control path failover drive is used whenever the
primary control path drive fails, becomes inoperable, or loses
connectivity.
Functionality exists to manually “fail over” and “failback” among the
configured control path drives to allow control path and drive
diagnostics (see Manual Failover Between Drives on page 368).
Advanced Control Path Failover (ACPF): This configuration provides
support for only HP LTO-6 and later, path failover licensed drives for
advanced control path failover. When ACPF is used, one drive is
configured as the primary control path and one or more drives are
selected as failover drives.
This configuration requires an Advanced Path Failover (APF) device
driver installed on an attached host. This driver will determine and
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
361
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configure Control Path
handle all configured partition control paths, select the active control
path and initiate a control path failover operation in the event the
currently selected control path fails.
Note: The library issues a ticket when control path failover occurs. In
addition, the library monitors the standby port and issues a
ticket if the standby port does not report a good Fibre Channel
link status.
Advanced Control Path: This configuration provides support for only
IBM LTO-5 and later drives and requires an SNW license. When
Advanced Control Path is used, multiple IBM drives can be designated as
control path drives with a device driver installed on an attached host.
This driver will determine which drive is used as the primary control path
and will choose a new control path drive in the event the primary
control path fails.
Multi Control Path
Requirements
To configure drives for multi control path, you need the following:
• A Storage Networking (SNW) License must be installed on the
library (see Enabling Licenses on page 125).
• All drives must be licensed for SNW (see License Drives for Path
Failover on page 359).
• The tape drives must be either IBM and/or HP LTO-5 or later Fibre
Channel drives.
• The tape drives must be connected to an Ethernet Expansion Blade.
• The tape drives must NOT be connected to an FC I/O blade.
• The tape drive topology must be set to Point-to-Point (see
Configuring Fibre Channel Drive Speed, Topology, and Loop ID on
page 202).
Multi Control Path Configuration
1 Access the appropriate screen in one of two ways:
362
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configure Control Path
• From the SNW Wizard: Select Setup > SNW Wizard. Click Next.
From the Select Storage Networking Option screen, select
Control Path and click Next.
• Select Setup > Partitions > Control Path from the main
console.
The Storage Networking Partitions dialog box appears, displaying
all partitions that contain drives eligible to be a control path.
2 Select the partition whose control path settings you want to
configure.
3 Click Next. The Control Path Configuration dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
363
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configure Control Path
4 From the Control Path (CP) Type drop-down list, select Multi
Control Path (HP/IBM).
5 Select the drives you want to be control paths in the CP column. You
can select all drives listed as long as they have an SNW license.
Note: If you select the checkbox in the CPF column you will
receive an error. Failover is not available for the Multi
Control Path option.
6 Click Finish. An Operation in Progress dialog box appears.
Basic Control Path
Failover
Requirements
To configure drives for basic control path failover, you need the
following:
• A path failover license must be installed on the library (see Enabling
Licenses on page 125).
364
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configure Control Path
• Both control path failover drives must be licensed for path failover
(see License Drives for Path Failover on page 359).
• The tape drives must be HP LTO-5 or later Fibre Channel drives.
• The tape drives must be connected to an Ethernet Expansion Blade.
• The tape drives must be connected to the same Fibre Channel
switch that supports N-port ID Virtualization (NPIV).
• The tape drives must NOT be connected to an FC I/O blade.
• The tape drive topology must be set to Point-to-Point (see
Configuring Fibre Channel Drive Speed, Topology, and Loop ID on
page 202).
• Two (2) or more HP LTO-5 or later drives must be in the same
partition.
Configuration Guidelines
When a logical library partition’s media changer control path is
configured via a control path drive, the library control path is hosted by
the drive’s physical FC port and uses the same World Wide Port Name
(WWPN) associated with the selected tape drive. While the tape drive
(SSC device) responds as LUN 0 at the WWPN, the partition media
changer (SMC device) responds as LUN 1 at the WWPN.
For example, consider such a drive configured to host the library control
path. A switch could detect the tape drive as LUN 0 with WWPN
500308c0:9e2c3001 and detect the media changer as LUN 1 with
WWPN 500308c0:9e2c3001 also via switch port 1:
[11:0:0:0]
0x010100
tape
[11:0:1:1]
0x010101
mediumx
fc:0x500308c09e2c3001,
/dev/sg3
/dev/st0
fc:0x500308c09e2c3001,
/dev/sg2
If the logical library partition configures two drives for basic library
control path failover functionality, then the library control path will be
able to fail over to the configured redundant failover drive. In this type
of configuration, the library control path is not hosted by a drive’s
physical FC port, but via a virtual port with a unique WWPN, reporting
the SMC device also as LUN 0, not LUN 1.
Virtual port WWPNs are based on the library’s WWNN and are identified
by the WWPN’s last 12 bits. A partition’s control path configured via a
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
365
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configure Control Path
virtual port would end in 0x7FF for the first partition, 0x7FE for the
second partition, 0x7FD for the third partition and so on. The partition's
virtual port is presented by only one of the configured failover drives. If
the active path to the media changer fails due to a FC cable issue, a
drive failure or even a drive removal, the library control path will switch
to the secondary drive and appear to the SAN via the same WWPN.
For example, consider two drives configured for control path failover
configured within the first partition. A switch could detect the two tape
drives as LUN 0 with WWPNs 500308c0:9e2c3001 and
500308c0:9e2c3005 at switch ports 1 and 2, and detect the media
changer also as LUN 0 with WWPN 500308c0:9e2c37ff via switch port
1:
[11:0:0:0]
0x010100
tape
[11:0:1:0]
0x010101
mediumx
fc:0x500308c09e2c37ff,
/dev/sg3
[11:0:2:0]
0x010200
tape
/dev/st0
/dev/st1
fc:0x500308c09e2c3001,
/dev/sg2
fc:0x500308c09e2c3004,
/dev/sg4
If the drive hosting the library control path fails, or the link from switch
port 1 to the hosting drive fails, the control path failover drive would
take over and the switch would detect the media changer device no
longer on port 1, but port 2:
[11:0:1:0]
0x010201
mediumx
fc:0x500308c09e2c37ff,
/dev/sg3
[11:0:2:0]
0x010200
tape
/dev/st1
fc:0x500308c09e2c3004,
/dev/sg
Note: When switching a standard control path drive to BCPF
functionality, the host needs to be reconfigured to support the
new partition WWNN (world wide node name) as well as the
WWPN (world wide port name) and LUN mappings.
BCPF Configuration
1 Access the appropriate screen in one of two ways:
• From the SNW Wizard: Select Setup > SNW Wizard. Click Next.
From the Select Storage Networking Option screen, select
366
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configure Control Path
Control Path and click Next. See Use the Storage Networking
Wizard on page 358.
• Select Setup > Partitions > Control Path from the main
console.
The Control Path Configuration dialog box appears, displaying all
partitions that contain drives eligible to be a control path.
2 Select the partition whose control path settings you want to
configure.
3 Click OK. The Control Path Configuration dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
367
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configure Control Path
4 From the Control Path (CP) Type drop-down list, select Basic
Control Path Failover (HP).
5 Select the primary control path drive from the CP column.
6 Select another drive from the CPF column. This drive will be the
failover drive.
7 Click Finish. An Operation in Progress dialog box appears.
8 The control path and control path failover drives are configured.
Manual Failover Between Drives
If maintenance needs to be carried out on the currently active control
path drive, you can force that drive to fail over to the non-active control
path drive.
1 Access the appropriate screen as described above in Step 1 through
Step 3 above. The Control Path dialog box appears, with the
control path drive highlighted, and the control path failover drive
checked.
368
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configure Control Path
2 Click the Failover button.
3 A warning message appears informing that switching the active
control path drive could cause temporary loss of communication to
the host application.
4 If you still want to perform this operation, click Yes to continue. The
new active control path drive is configured.
5 Click OK.
Advanced Control Path
Failover
Requirements
To configure drives for advanced control path failover, you need the
following:
• A Storage Networking (SNW) License must be installed on the
library (see Enabling Licenses on page 125).
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
369
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configure Control Path
• All control path failover drives must be licensed for SNW (see
License Drives for Path Failover on page 359).
• The tape drives must be HP LTO-6 or later Fibre Channel drives.
• The tape drives must be connected to an Ethernet Expansion blade.
• The tape drives can be connected to the same or different Fibre
Channel switch.
• The tape drives must NOT be connected to an FC I/O blade.
• The tape drive topology must be set to Point-to-Point (see
Configuring Fibre Channel Drive Speed, Topology, and Loop ID on
page 202).
• The APFO driver must be installed on the host(s).
Configuration Guidelines
When a logical library partition’s media changer control path is
configured via a control path drive, the library control path is hosted by
the drive’s physical FC port and uses the same World Wide Port Name
(WWPN) associated with the selected tape drive. While the tape drive
(SSC device) responds as LUN 0 at the WWPN, the partition media
changer (SMC device) responds as LUN 1 at the WWPN.
For example, consider such a drive configured to host the library control
path. A switch could detect the tape drive as LUN 0 with WWPN
500308c0:9e2c3001 and detect the media changer as LUN 1 with
WWPN 500308c0:9e2c3001 also via switch port 1:
[11:0:0:0]
0x010100
tape
[11:0:1:1]
0x010101
mediumx
fc:0x500308c09e2c3001,
/dev/sg3
/dev/st0
fc:0x500308c09e2c3001,
/dev/sg2
If the logical library partition is configured for advanced control path
failover functionality, the managing APF device driver will select a
redundant path and request that the library enable the redundant path
as the active control path. In this case, the current path is disabled and
the new path is enabled, resulting in the existing LUN 1 for the current
active path to disappear and a LUN 1 activating the selected redundant
device.
370
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configure Control Path
Table 32 Example Path List
SAN
Addressed Logical
Unit
Port
Example SCSI
Address
Example Logical Unit
Worldwide Identifiers
1
Tape drive 1
A
ID 1 LUN 0
50:01:10:a0:00:00:00:01
1
Library Controller
A
ID 1 LUN 1
50:01:10:a0:00:00:00:02
2
Tape drive 1
B
ID 2 LUN 0
50:01:10:a0:00:00:00:01
2
Library Controller
B
ID 2 LUN 1
50:01:10:a0:00:00:00:02
1
Tape drive 2
A
ID 3 LUN 0
50:01:10:a0:00:00:00:03
1
Library Controller
A
ID 3 LUN 1
50:01:10:a0:00:00:00:02
2
Tape drive 2
B
ID 4 LUN 0
50:01:10:a0:00:00:00:03
2
Library Controller
B
ID 4 LUN 1
50:01:10:a0:00:00:00:02
ACPF Configuration
1 Access the appropriate screen in one of two ways:
• From the SNW Wizard: Select Setup > SNW Wizard. Click Next.
From the Select Storage Networking Option screen, select
Control Path and click Next. See Use the Storage Networking
Wizard on page 358.
• Select Setup > Partitions > Control Path from the main
console.
The Control Path Configuration dialog box appears, displaying all
partitions that contain drives eligible to be a control path.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
371
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configure Control Path
2 Select the partition whose control path settings you want to
configure.
3 Click OK. The Control Path dialog box appears.
372
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configure Control Path
4 From the Control Path (CP) Type drop-down list, select Advanced
Control Path Failover (HP).
5 Select the primary control path drive from the CP column.
6 Select one or more drives from the CPF column. These drives will be
the failover drives.
7 Click Finish. An Operation in Progress dialog box appears.
8 The control path and control path failover drives are configured.
Advanced Control Path
Requirements
To configure drives for advanced control path, you need the following:
• A Storage Networking (SNW) License must be installed on the
library (see Enabling Licenses on page 125).
• All drives must be licensed for SNW (see License Drives for Path
Failover on page 359).
• The drives must be IBM LTO-5 or later Fibre Channel drives.
• The tape drives must be connected to an Ethernet Expansion Blade.
• The tape drives must NOT be connected to an FC I/O blade.
• The tape drive topology must be set to Point-to-Point (see
Configuring Fibre Channel Drive Speed, Topology, and Loop ID on
page 202).
• The driver supplied by IBM must be installed on the host(s).
Configuration Guidelines
When a logical library partition’s media changer control path is
configured via a control path drive, the library control path is hosted by
the drive’s physical FC port and uses the same World Wide Port Name
(WWPN) associated with the selected tape drive. While the tape drive
(SSC device) responds as LUN 0 at the WWPN, the partition media
changer (SMC device) responds as LUN 1 at the WWPN.
For example, consider such a drive configured to host the library control
path. A switch could detect the tape drive as LUN 0 with WWPN
500308c0:9e2c3001 and detect the media changer as LUN 1 with
WWPN 500308c0:9e2c3001 also via switch port 1:
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
373
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configure Control Path
[11:0:0:0]
0x010100
tape
[11:0:1:1]
0x010101
mediumx
fc:0x500308c09e2c3001,
/dev/sg3
/dev/st0
fc:0x500308c09e2c3001,
/dev/sg2
If the logical library partition is configured for advanced control path
failover functionality, the managing APF device driver will select a
redundant path and request that the library enable the redundant path
as the active control path. In this case, the current path is disabled and
the new path is enabled, resulting in the existing LUN 1 for the current
active path to disappear and a LUN 1 activating the selected redundant
device.
Table 33 Example Path List
SAN
Addressed Logical
Unit
Port
Example SCSI
Address
Example Logical Unit
Worldwide Identifiers
1
Tape drive 1
A
ID 1 LUN 0
50:01:10:a0:00:00:00:01
1
Library Controller
A
ID 1 LUN 1
50:01:10:a0:00:00:00:02
2
Tape drive 1
B
ID 2 LUN 0
50:01:10:a0:00:00:00:01
2
Library Controller
B
ID 2 LUN 1
50:01:10:a0:00:00:00:02
1
Tape drive 2
A
ID 3 LUN 0
50:01:10:a0:00:00:00:03
1
Library Controller
A
ID 3 LUN 1
50:01:10:a0:00:00:00:02
2
Tape drive 2
B
ID 4 LUN 0
50:01:10:a0:00:00:00:03
2
Library Controller
B
ID 4 LUN 1
50:01:10:a0:00:00:00:02
Advanced Control Path Configuration
1 Access the appropriate screen in one of two ways:
• From the SNW Wizard: Select Setup > SNW Wizard. Click Next.
From the Select Storage Networking Option screen, select
Control Path and click Next.
• Select Setup > Partitions > Control Path from the main
console.
374
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configure Control Path
The Storage Networking Partitions dialog box appears, displaying
all partitions that contain drives eligible to be a control path.
2 Select the partition whose control path settings you want to
configure.
3 Click Next. The Control Path Configuration dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
375
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Data Path Failover
4 From the Control Path (CP) Type drop-down list, select Advanced
Control Path (IBM).
5 Select the drives you want to be control paths in the CP column. You
can select all drives listed as long as they have an SNW license.
Note: If you select the checkbox in the CPF column you will
receive an error. Failover is not available for the Advanced
Control Path option.
6 Click Finish. An Operation in Progress dialog box appears.
Configuring Data Path Failover
There are two types of data path failover: basic and advanced.
Basic Data Path Failover (BDPF): Basic Data Path Failover is a feature
provided as part of the Storage Networking license and applies to HP
LTO-5 and later Fibre Channel tape drives only. It provides an alternate
data path when a preferred data path fails. If you previously installed a
Storage Networking license, you can use this feature once you upgrade
library firmware to the appropriate version. Verify firmware version
requirements in the Scalar i6000 Release Notes.
The HP LTO-5 and later Fibre Channel tape drives have two Fibre Channel
ports. If you enable Data Path Failover on the tape drive, one port is
used as the “active port” for data transmission, and the other port
stands by for use if the active port fails. If the tape drive loses its Fibre
Channel link with the active port, it will automatically “fail over” and use
the standby port to continue drive operations.
376
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Data Path Failover
Port 1 status LED
Port 1 – default data path
Port 2 status LED
Port 2 – default failover port
Note: The library issues a RAS ticket when automatic data path
failover occurs. In addition, the library monitors the standby
port and issues a RAS ticket if the standby port does not report
a good Fibre Channel link status.
The library uses Port 1 for data path transmission unless a failover
occurs. Once failover occurs, the library uses Port 2 until failover occurs
again or the library is rebooted. Similarly, if a tape drive configured for
data path failover is the control path for a partition, the host uses Port 1
for media changer commands unless a failover occurs. Once failover
occurs, the host uses Port 2 until failover occurs again or the library is
rebooted.
Note: Performing a drive reset operation is another way to make Port
1 the active port again.
A tape drive can be configured for both data path failover and control
path failover. If both are configured, the control path will not fail over to
another tape drive unless both ports on the control path tape drive fail.
Advanced Data Path Failover (ADPF): Advanced Data Path Failover is a
feature provided as part of the Storage Networking license and applies
only to HP LTO-6 and later Fibre Channel tape drives. It provides an
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
377
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Data Path Failover
alternate data path when a preferred data path fails. If you previously
installed a Storage Networking license, you can use this feature once
you upgrade library firmware to the appropriate version. Verify
firmware version requirements in the Scalar i6000 Release Notes.
The HP LTO-6 and later Fibre Channel tape drives have two Fibre Channel
ports. If you enable Advanced Data Path Failover on the tape drive, both
ports are available but the driver chooses one port to be “active” and
used for data transmission, while the other port stands by for use if the
“active” port fails. If the tape drive loses its Fibre Channel link with the
“active” port, it will fail over and use the standby port to continue drive
operations.
Port 1 status LED
Port 1 – default data path
Port 2 status LED
Port 2 – default failover port
Note: The library issues a RAS ticket when a data path failover occurs.
In addition, the library monitors the standby port and issues a
RAS ticket if the standby port does not report a good Fibre
Channel link status.
The library utilizes a driver installed on the host to manage path failover.
It uses Port 1 for data path transmission unless a failover occurs. Once
failover occurs, the driver uses Port 2 until failover occurs again or the
library is rebooted. Similarly, if a tape drive configured for advanced
data path failover is the control path for a partition, the host uses Port 1
378
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Data Path Failover
for media changer commands unless a failover occurs. Once failover
occurs, the host uses Port 2 until failover occurs again or the library is
rebooted.
A tape drive can be configured for both advanced data path failover and
advanced control path failover. If both are configured, the control path
will not fail over to another tape drive unless both ports on the control
path tape drive fail.
Basic Data Path Failover
Requirements
To configure a tape drive for basic data path failover, you need the
following:
• The library must have a Storage Networking license installed.
• The tape drive to be configured for data path failover must be
licensed for storage networking (see License Drives for Path Failover
on page 359.
• The tape drive must be an LTO-5 or higher Fibre Channel tape drive.
• The tape drive must be connected to an Ethernet Expansion Blade
(EEB) via an Ethernet cable.
• Both tape drive fibre ports MUST be connected to the same FC
switch.
• Neither FC port on the drive may be connected to a FC I/O blade.
• The tape drive topology settings must be set to Point to Point (see
Configuring Fibre Channel Drive Speed, Topology, and Loop ID on
page 202).
Enabling/Disabling BDPF
To enable or disable data path failover functionality:
1 From the main console, select Setup > Drives > Access > Data
Path Failover. Or, via the SNW Wizard: Select Setup > SNW
Wizard. Click Next. From the options screen, select Data Path
Failover and click Next.
The Data Path Failover (DPF) dialog box appears. Drives with BDPF
configured have check marks in the BDPF column.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
379
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Data Path Failover
2 In the BDPF column, select the drive(s) you want to enable or
disable Basic Data Path Failover.
Your choices are indicated by the following colors:
• Green - Added
• Yellow - Removed
• Teal - Changed
• White - Unchanged
3 Click OK. An Operation in Progress dialog box appears.
4 When Basic Data Path Failover configuration is complete, click OK.
380
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Data Path Failover
Advanced Data Path
Failover (ADPF)
Requirements
To configure a tape drive for advanced data path failover, you need the
following:
• The library must have a Storage Networking license installed.
• The tape drive to be configured for data path failover must be
licensed for storage networking (see License Drives for Path Failover
on page 359.
• The tape drive must be an LTO-6 or later Fibre Channel tape drive.
• The tape drive must be connected to an Ethernet Expansion Blade
(EEB) via an Ethernet cable.
• Neither FC port on the drive may be connected to a FC I/O blade.
• The tape drive topology settings must be set to Point to Point (see
Configuring Fibre Channel Drive Speed, Topology, and Loop ID on
page 202).
• APFO driver must be installed on the host(s).
Enabling/Disabling ADPF
To enable or disable advanced data path failover functionality:
1 From the main console, select Setup > Drives > Access > Data
Path Failover. Or, via the SNW Wizard: Select Setup > SNW
Wizard.
2 Click Next.
3 From the options screen, select Data Path Failover and click Next.
The Data Path Failover (DPF) dialog box appears. Drives with ADPF
configured have check marks in the ADPF column.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
381
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Data Path Failover
4 In the ADPF column, click the check box of the drive(s) on which you
want to enable or disable Advanced Data Path Failover.
Your choices are indicated by the following colors:
• Green - Added
• Yellow - Removed
• Teal - Changed
• White - Unchanged
5 Click OK. An Operation in Progress dialog box appears.
6 When Advanced Data Path Failover configuration is complete, click
OK.
Note: Unless a drive is configured for control path failover, drives can
enable either BDPF or ADPF within the same partition.
382
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives
and Partitions
Note: Host access is available on all drives while host access controls
are only available on HP LTO-6 and LTO-7 drives.
The SNW Host Access feature provides a way to limit host access to
specific SNW tape drives and partitions via the library interface.
Note: This section describes host access for storage networking drives
and partitions only. For information about FC I/O blade LUN
mapping, see FC Host on page 204.
This section covers:
• Viewing All Access Groups on page 417 on page 383
• Requirements for Host Access on page 384
• Configuring Hosts on page 384
• Creating, Modifying, and Deleting Host Access Groups on
page 396
• Viewing All Access Groups on page 417
Without host access restrictions, all hosts can view all drives connected
to the SAN and all partitions to which there is a library control path.
Host access gives you the ability to deny/restrict access to specific hosts.
Details about host access include:
• If a control path drive has an SNW license applied to it, it will not be
seen by external applications until you create an access group and
add the host and partition to the access group.
• Access is granted using “access groups.” An access group is made
up of partitions, drives, and hosts. Drives and partitions can be in
multiple access groups, but each host can only be in one access
group.
• A partition can be assigned to a host access group if its control path
is through an SNW-licensed tape drive.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
383
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
• Drives must be licensed for SNW before they can be added to access
groups. Once a drive has been licensed for SNW, it is inaccessible to
hosts until they are granted access via the host access feature. See
License Drives for Path Failover on page 359.
• Tape drives that are licensed for SNW can only be accessed by hosts
that are in the same host access group as the drives.
• Tape drives that are not licensed for SNW can be accessed by any
hosts that are zoned to the drives WWPN.
• If the control path and any control path failover tape drives for a
partition are licensed for SNW, then only the hosts in the same
access group as that partition will be able to send medium changer
commands to that partition. Hosts not in the same access group as
a partition will not be able to send medium changer commands to
that partition. However, hosts that are not in the same access group
as a partition do still have access and can send commands to any
non-SNW-enabled tape drives in that partition.
• Host access to a partition means the host can issue media changer
commands to the partition.
• Host access to a drive means the host can issue SCSI commands to
the drive.
Requirements for Host
Access
To use host access, you need the following:
• A Storage Networking license on the library (see Enabling Licenses
on page 125)
• Drives licensed for Storage Networking (see License Drives for Path
Failover on page 359).
• To add a partition to a host access group, the partition must have its
control path via a SNW drive (see Configuring an IBM or HP LTO-5 or
later Drive as the Control Path on page 159).
• Hosts configured (see Configuring Hosts on page 384).
• Host access groups configured (see Viewing All Access Groups on
page 417).
Configuring Hosts
384
All hosts that are zoned or directly connected to the drives are available
to be assigned to host access groups. You may wish to modify existing
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
hosts to make their names more “user friendly” for when you add them
to access groups. You may wish to delete hosts that are not connected
to the SAN. Using the host configuration option, you can do the
following:
• Create Host — You can add hosts that are not currently connected
to the SAN (i.e., “prep” your library for a future host). These are
hosts that you plan to add to the SAN later, but want to preconfigure in host access groups now. If you don’t eventually add the
hosts to the SAN, they will not be able to access the drives/partitions
you choose. In most cases, you will not need to create hosts in this
way.
• Modify Host — You can modify the name, type, port, or WWPN of a
visible host. Unmodified hosts that are connected to the drive(s)
have no predefined name and are named “Unknown” by default.
You may wish to change the name to a more “user friendly” name
to distinguish one host from another.
• Delete Host — You can delete hosts that are no longer connected to
the SAN. You can only delete hosts whose state is offline (i.e., not
connected to the SAN). Any time you delete a host you remove all
host mappings configured for that host.
Create Host
To create a host:
1 Select Setup > SNW Wizard to display the SNW Wizard.
2 Click Next to display the Select Storage Networking Option
screen.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
385
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
386
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
3 Select Host Access and click Next to display the Select Host Access
Options screen.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
387
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
4 Select Host Configuration and click Next to display the Select Hosts
Configuration Options screen.
388
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
5 Select Create Host and click Next to display the Create New Host
dialog box.
6 Type an appropriate value into the Name field.
7 Select the operating system of the host from the Type field pulldown menu.
8 Type the port number into the Port field.
9 Type the world wide port name into the WWPN field.
The string must be 8 hexadecimal numbers, a colon (:), and 8
hexadecimal numbers (########:########).
10 Click Finish to create the host.
11 Click OK in the The Host was created successfully dialog box.
Modify Host
To modify an existing host:
1 Select Setup > SNW Wizard to display the SNW Wizard.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
389
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
2 Click Next to display the Select Storage Networking Option
screen.
390
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
3 Select Host Access and click Next to display the Select Host Access
Options screen.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
391
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
4 Select Host Configuration and click Next to display the Select
Hosts Configuration Options screen.
5 Select Modify Host.
6 Click the appropriate box in the Select column to select the host to
modify.
392
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
7 Click Next to access the Modify Existing Host dialog box, which
displays current information for the host.
8 Correct the information in the Name, Type, Port, and WWPN fields.
9 Click Finish to save the modifications.
10 Click OK in the The Host was modified successfully dialog box.
Delete Host
To delete an existing host:
1 Select Setup > SNW Wizard to display the SNW Wizard.
2 Click Next to display the Select Storage Networking Option
screen.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
393
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
394
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
3 Select Host Access and click Next to display the Select Host Access
Options screen.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
395
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
4 Select Host Configuration and click Next to display the Select
Hosts Configuration Options screen.
5 Select Delete Host.
6 Click the appropriate box in the Select column to select the host to
delete.
7 Click Finish to delete the host. A warning message appears letting
you know that deleting the host will remove all host mappings
configured for the host.
8 Click Yes to continue.
9 Click OK in the The Host was deleted successfully dialog box.
10 If necessary, click Cancel then Yes to exit the dialog box.
Creating, Modifying,
and Deleting Host
Access Groups
If necessary, you can make the following modifications to host access
groups:
• Creating Host Access Groups on page 397
• Changing an Access Group Name on page 403
396
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
• Deleting a Host Access Group on page 405
• Adding a Host to an Access Group on page 406
• Removing a Host from an Access Group on page 408
• Host Access Configuration – Modifying Drives/Partitions and
Viewing Host Access Groups on page 411
Creating Host Access Groups
A host access group is composed of at least one host and one drive.
Each host in the access group can send read/write commands to the
drives in the group, and can send move commands to the partitions in
the group. A host can only be in one access group. Drives and partitions
can be in multiple access groups.
To create host access groups:
1 Select Setup > SNW Wizard to display the SNW Wizard.
2 Click Next to display the Select Storage Networking Option
screen.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
397
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
3 Select Host Access and click Next to display the Select Host Access
Options screen.
4 Select Access Group Configuration and click Next to display the
Host Access Group Configuration Wizard.
398
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
5 Click Next to display the Select Group Access Option screen.
6 Select the Create New Host Access Group radio button and click
Next to display the Select Group Access Name dialog box.
7 Type a name into the Group Name field.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
399
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
8 Click Next to display the Select Group Access Hosts dialog box. All
the hosts visible on the SAN are displayed.
9 Select one or more check boxes in the Select column to indicate
which host or hosts to include in the access group, or select the
Select All Hosts check box to include all of the hosts in the group.
400
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
10 Click Next to display the Select the drives for host access dialog
box.
11 To add drives to the host access group, select their check boxes in
the Select column.
Caution: If control path failover is configured for a partition you
are planning to add to this host access group, make
sure you assign both the control path drive and the
control path failover drive to this host access group. If
you do not, then if the control path fails over, you will
lose host access to the partition.
12 For each drive selected, make sure to select either Port 1 or Port 2
for processing drive commands (the default is Port 1). Both drive
ports are active and have different WWPNs, so the port you choose
must be physically connected to a host or switch or the host will not
see it. Exception: If the drive is configured for Data Path Failover,
you should only select Port 1(if the data path fails over to Port 2, the
host will still be able to access it because DPF is configured).
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
401
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
13 Click Next to display the Select the partitions for host access
dialog box. In order for a partition to appear on the list, both the
following conditions must apply:
• the partition has its control path configured via control path
bridging (meaning, the control path is via an HP LTO-5 or later
drive connected to an Ethernet Expansion blade); and
• the control path drive has an SNW license applied to it.
14 To add partitions to the host access group, select their check boxes
in the Select column.
For each partition selected, make sure to select either Port 1 or Port
2 for processing host medium changer commands (the default is
Port 1). Both drive ports are active and have different WWPNs, so
the port you choose must be physically connected to a host or
switch or the host will not see it. The port you choose depends on
which ports on the control path drive are physically cabled.
15 Click Finish to create the new access group.
16 Click OK in the The Host Access was updated successfully dialog
box.
402
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
Changing an Access Group Name
1 Display the Host Access Group Configuration Wizard by
performing Step 1 through Step 5 of Viewing All Access Groups on
page 417.
2 Select the Change Access Group name radio button.
3 Click Next to display the Select Group Access dialog box.
4 Select the Expand Tree check box to list all items in the Access
Group Hosts and Devices section of the dialog box.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
403
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
5 Select the box corresponding to the access group whose name you
want to change.Click Next to display the Select Group Access
Name dialog box.
404
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
6 Type the new name into the Group Name field.
7 Click Finish.
Deleting a Host Access Group
Caution: When you delete a host access group, all host mappings
for this group are deleted.
To delete a host access group:
1 Display the Host Access Group Configuration Wizard by
performing Step 1 through Step 5 of Viewing All Access Groups on
page 417.
2 Select the Delete Host Access Group radio button.
3 Click Next to display the Select Group Access dialog box.
4 Select the Expand Tree box to list all items in the Access Group
Hosts and Devices section of the dialog box.
5 Select the box corresponding to the access group to delete.
6 Click Finish to display the Warning dialog box.
7 Click Yes to delete the access group.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
405
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
8 Click OK in the The Group Access was deleted successfully dialog
box.
Adding a Host to an Access Group
To add a host or hosts to a host access group:
1 Display the Host Access Group Configuration Wizard by
performing Step 1 through Step 5 of Viewing All Access Groups on
page 417.
2 Select the Add Host to Group radio button.
3 Click Next to display the Select Group Access dialog box.
406
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
4 Select the Expand Tree box to list all items in the Access Group
Hosts and Devices section of the dialog box.
5 Select the box corresponding to the access group to modify.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
407
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
6 Click Next to display the Select Group Access Hosts to Add dialog
box.
7 Select the box in the Select column to indicate which host or hosts
to add to the group, or select the Select All Hosts box to add all of
the hosts in the group.
8 Click Finish to save the modification.
9 Click OK in the The Group Access was updated successfully dialog
box.
Removing a Host from an Access Group
Caution: Deleting a host from an access group will remove all host
mappings configured for the host.
To remove a host from a host access group:
1 Display the Host Access Group Configuration Wizard by
performing Step 1 through Step 5 of Viewing All Access Groups on
page 417.
408
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
2 Select the Remove Host from Group radio button.
3 Click Next to display the Select Group Access dialog box.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
409
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
4 Select the Expand Tree box to list all items in the Access Group
Hosts and Devices section of the dialog box.
5 Select the box corresponding to the access group from which to
remove a host.
6 Click Next to display the Select Group Access Hosts to Remove
dialog box.
410
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
7 Select the box in the Select column to indicate which host or hosts
to remove from the group, or select the Select All Hosts box to
remove all of the hosts from the group.
8 Click Finish to save the modification.
9 Click Yes in the Warning dialog box.
10 Click OK in the The Group Access was updated successfully dialog
box.
Host Access
Configuration –
Modifying Drives/
Partitions and Viewing
Host Access Groups
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
The Host Access Configuration option allow you to do the following:
• Adding and Removing Drives and Partitions to/from Host Access
Groups on page 412
• Viewing All Access Groups on page 417
411
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
Adding and Removing Drives and Partitions to/from Host
Access Groups
To add devices to or remove devices from an existing group, or to select
which ports the hosts will use to access devices, use the Host Access
Configuration option. To do so:
1 Select Setup > SNW Wizard to display the SNW Wizard.
2 Click Next to display the Select Storage Networking Option
screen.
412
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
3 Select Host Access and click Next to display the Select Host Access
Options screen.
4 Select the Host Access Configuration radio button.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
413
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
5 Click Next to display the Select the Group to modify screen.
6 Select the Expand Tree box to list all items in the Access Group
Hosts and Devices section of the dialog box.
414
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
7 Select the box corresponding to the access group you want to
modify.
8 Click Next to display the Select the drives for host access dialog
box which shows the current settings.
9 Select or clear boxes in the Select column to indicate which drive or
drives to include in the host access group. You do not have to
include drives in the host access group.
Caution: If control path failover is configured for a partition you
are planning to add to this host access group, make
sure you assign both the control path drive and the
control path failover drive to this host access group. If
you do not, then if the control path fails over, you will
lose host access to the partition.
10 For each drive selected, make sure to select either Port 1 or Port 2
for processing drive commands (the default is Port 1). Both drive
ports are active and have different WWPNs, so the port you choose
must be physically connected to a host or switch or the host will not
see it. Exception: If the drive is configured for Data Path Failover,
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
415
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
you should only select Port 1(if the data path fails over to Port 2, the
host will still be able to access it because DPF is configured).
11 Click Next to display the Select the partitions for host access
dialog box. In order for a partition to appear on the list, both the
following conditions must apply:
• The partition has its control path configured via control path
bridging (meaning, the control path is via an IBM or HP LTO-5 or
later drive connected to an Ethernet Expansion blade); and
• The control path drive has an SNW license applied to it.
12 Select or clear boxes in the Select column to indicate which
partitions to include in the host access group.
13 For each partition selected, make sure to select either Port 1 or Port
2 for processing host medium changer commands (the default is
Port 1). Both drive ports are active and have different WWPNs, so
the port you choose must be physically connected to a host or
switch or the host will not see it. The port you choose depends on
which ports on the control path drive are physically cabled.
14 Click Finish to update host access.
416
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
15 Click OK in the The Host Access was updated successfully dialog
box.
Viewing All Access Groups
If you want to see all of the access groups you configured:
1 Select Setup > SNW Wizard to display the SNW Wizard.
2 Click Next.
3 Select the Host Access radio button and click Next.
4 Select the Host Access Configuration radio button.
5 Click Next to display the Select the Group to configure screen.
6 Select the Expand Tree box to list all items in the Access Group
Hosts and Devices section of the dialog box.
7 Click Cancel to exit.
8 Click Yes.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
417
Chapter 10: Path Failover
Configuring Host Access to Storage Networking Drives and Partitions
418
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 11
Configuring Access to
StorNext
Certain licensed features (EDLM and Active Vault) can use an external
application to perform partition policies. To configure access to an
external application, you must first install an application programming
interface (API) client plug-in, and then configure the library to
communicate with the external application.
The API client plug-in is a Quantum-provided plug-in that allows the
library to communicate with a supported external application (such as
StorNext Storage Manager). The API client plug-in must be installed
before you can configure library access to the external application.
You can install as many API client plug-ins as necessary.
The same API client plug-in may be used for multiple features.
This chapter covers:
• Step 1: Confirming the External Application is Supported on
page 420
• Step 2: Installing/Removing the Scalar i6000 API Client Plug-in on
page 420
• Step 3: Configuring External Access on page 422
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
419
Chapter 11: Configuring Access to StorNext
Step 1: Confirming the
External Application is
Supported
Confirm that the external application managing your partition is
supported by EDLM.
Step 2: Installing/
Removing the Scalar
i6000 API Client Plug-in
Installing a StorNext API Client Plug-in
For a list of supported external applications and their corresponding
plug-ins, see the Scalar i6000 Release Notes.
Install the plug-in as follows:
Note: If you install an API client plug-in that has the same NameVersion of an already installed plug-in but is at a different
Revision, the newly installed plug-in will replace the existing
plug-in. The screen shot in Step 9 on page 422 shows the
difference between version and revision.
1 See the release notes for a list of supported API client plug-ins and
their corresponding external applications. Currently the library
supports only StorNext API (SNAPI) Client Plug-in version 2.0.1.
2 Download the correct API client plug-in bundle as follows:
a Go to the following Web site.
http://www.quantum.com/ServiceandSupport/
SoftwareandDocumentationDownloads/S6K/Index.aspx
b Click the Drivers tab to view the available plug-ins.
c Click the Download button for the plug-in you want to install.
The plug-in bundle is a .zip file containing the following files:
• Client plug-in
• End User/Open Source License Agreement
3 Extract the files from the .zip file.
4 Read the End User/Open Source License Agreement. Installation of
the plug-in implies acceptance of the license agreement.
5 Select Tools > Update Software > Plug-in. The Install/Remove
StorNext API Client Plug-in screen appears.
420
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 11: Configuring Access to StorNext
6 Select Install a new StorNext API Client Plug-in.
7 Click Browse to retrieve the plug-in file.
8 Click Finish. The plug-in is installed or removed. A “success” dialog
box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
421
Chapter 11: Configuring Access to StorNext
9 Click OK to close the dialog box. The installed plug-in appears on
the Install or Remove StorNext API Client Plug-in screen.
Removing an API Client Plug-in
To remove an installed plug-in, do the following:
Note: To remove an external application API client plug-in, it must not
currently be used by an existing EDLM partition policy.
1 Select Remove an existing External Application API Client Plugin.
2 Select the plug-in(s) to remove from the list displayed in the table.
3 Click Finish. A confirmation dialog box appears.
4 Click Yes to confirm you want to remove the plug-in.
Step 3: Configuring
External Access
422
1 Click Setup > Partitions > Policies > StorNext Access. The
StorNext Access Configuration Wizard appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 11: Configuring Access to StorNext
2 Click Next. The Select the StorNext Configuration Option screen
appears.
3 Do one of the following:
To...
Do this...
Add a new external
application
1 Select Create.
Modify an existing external
application
1 Select Modify.
2 Click Next.
2 Select the application you want to
modify from the table.
3 Click Next.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
423
Chapter 11: Configuring Access to StorNext
To...
Do this...
Delete an existing external
application
1 Select Delete.
2 Select the application you want to
delete from the table.
3 Click Finish.
A confirmation dialog appears.
4 Click Yes to confirm you want to
delete the application.
5 Click OK.
6 Process is complete.
If you are creating or modifying, the Configure StorNext Settings
screen appears.
4 If you are creating or modifying, configure the following the fields:
424
Field
Description
Name
Type a descriptive name you will use to
identify the external application.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 11: Configuring Access to StorNext
Field
Description
API Client Plug-in
Select the appropriate API client plug-in
from the drop-down list. The list contains
the API client plug-ins you installed in Step
2: Installing/Removing the Scalar i6000 API
Client Plug-in on page 420.
Application IP/Host
Name
Type the IP address or DNS host name (if
DNS is configured) of the external
application server.
Note: To use a host name, DNS must be
configured on the LMC (Setup >
Network Configuration > DNS
Configuration).
Application Port
Number
Accept the default or type an external
application host server port number.
5 Click Finish. A success dialog box appears.
Caution: If you get an error dialog box that says, “Failed to
validate the External Application,” this may mean that
the IP address or host name is incorrect, or the server is
not responding or not configured. The library will
accept the settings you entered, but you should
double-check that all the information is correct and
modify it if necessary. If any of the configured
information is incorrect, successful communication will
not occur.
6 Click OK to close the dialog box.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
425
Chapter 11: Configuring Access to StorNext
426
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 12
Partition Utilization
Reporting
Partition Utilization reporting allows you to optimize resource
assignments among host applications and partitions.
Details about Partition Utilization include:
• Partition Utilization is a licensable feature. A single license applies to
the entire library and you can use the feature on as many partitions
as you wish.
• The Partition Utilization license overrides your library’s current
Capacity on Demand (COD) license and Partition license and allows
you to use the maximum number of slots and partitions available on
the physical library. The library Licenses screen (Setup > Licenses)
will show a Capacity On Demand license with 6500 slots available,
and a Partition license with 16 partitions allowed.
• You can have the reports automatically e-mailed to recipients of
your choice on a regular basis.
• Partition Utilization reports are not included in library snapshots.
• The report contains the last 12 months of activity.
Viewing the Partition
Utilization Report
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
To view the on-screen Partition Utilization report:
1 If you are not already viewing the physical library, click View and
select the name of the physical library.
427
Chapter 12: Partition Utilization Reporting
2 Select Tools > Reports > Partition Utilization.
Interpreting the
Partition Utilization
Report
The Partition Utilization report is a single file containing data for the last
12 months. For each month, the report displays a High Water Marks
section and a Partition Activity section, which are described below.
To e-mail, save, or print the report, click Send.
To automatically send reports to recipients at scheduled intervals, see
Scheduling Partition Utilization Reports on page 429.
High Water Marks
The high water mark is the highest number of tape drives, storage slots,
or media present in a partition during a given month. The report
displays the following high water mark information for each partition:
• DWM — Drive high water mark. The highest number of tape drives
configured in the partition during the month.
• SWM — Storage high water mark. The highest number of storage
slots configured in the partition during the month.
• MWM — Media high water mark. The highest number of media
residing in the partition during the month.
• PN — Partition name.
If you pull a report in the middle of a month, the report displays high
water mark counts received so far.
If you delete a partition, that partition’s high water marks will be
reported for the period of time before the partition was deleted.
Partition Activity
Partition activity is defined as creating, modifying, and deleting
partitions, as well as physically adding media to and removing media
from partitions. This section lists each occurrence of partition activity
that took place during the month.
Each entry in this section includes the following information:
• Date and time the activity occurred.
• Partition name.
428
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 12: Partition Utilization Reporting
• Drive count when the activity completed.
• Slot count when the activity completed.
• Media count when the activity completed.
• Type of activity that occurred.
If no activity occurred on a partition during the month, there will be no
entry for that partition.
Scheduling Partition
Utilization Reports
You can automatically e-mail Partition Utilization reports to recipients at
regular intervals as follows.
Note: The Partition Utilization reports are monthly reports. You can
send them automatically more or less frequently, but the data
are still compiled and reported by month.
Note: Before you can set up the Partition Utilization reports, you
must configure e-mail properties on the library. If they are not
yet configured, an error message directs you to go to Setup >
Email Configuration and fill in the required fields.
1 Click Setup > Notifications > Partition Utilization. The Partition
Utilization Notification Settings screen appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
429
Chapter 12: Partition Utilization Reporting
2 Select the Enable Automatic Notifications check box.
3 Enter the proper address into the E-mail field.
4 Click Add. The account is added to the E-mail Address list.
5 To add more recipients to receive the report, type another recipient
e-mail address in the E-mail field and click Add. Repeat as
necessary.
Note: The total number of characters for all recipient e-mail
addresses listed in this section cannot exceed 512.
6 To delete a recipient, select the check box next to the recipient’s email address and click Remove.
7 Select how often recipients will receive reports from the Interval
drop-down list. If Quantum is doing the billing for this library, select
Monthly.
The interval choices are the following:
• Daily — Every day.
• Weekly — Every Monday.
• Monthly — The first day of every month.
430
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 12: Partition Utilization Reporting
• Quarterly — The first day of January, April, July, and October.
8 Click OK. Reports will be sent on the scheduled days.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
431
Chapter 12: Partition Utilization Reporting
432
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13
Running Your Library
This chapter includes the following sections, which explain how to
access and operate your library:
• Logging On and Off on page 434
• Logging On From a Web Browser (Remote Client) on page 436
• Connecting to Multiple Libraries on page 438
• Operator Panel on page 439
• Library Management Console (LMC) on page 442
• Understanding Location Coordinates on page 459
• Viewing the Library (Physical or Partition) on page 473
• Changing the Library’s State on page 475
• Online and Offline Functionality on page 476
• Working With Local User Accounts on page 477
• Viewing Local User Account Permissions on page 484
• Shutting Down/Rebooting the Library on page 485
• Powering Off the Library on page 487
• Powering On the Library on page 487
• Locking/Unlocking the I/E Station on page 488
• When Robotics Are Not Ready on page 490
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
433
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Logging On and Off
• Using the Library Access Feature on page 492
• Using the Library Access Feature on page 492
Logging On and Off
The Library Management Console (LMC) is the library user interface. You
can log on and off locally by using the library’s touch screen. Or you can
log on and off remotely by using a Web browser.
Logging On From the
Touch Screen (Local
Client)
1 If the Scalar i6000 Logon dialog box is not already displayed on the
library’s touch screen because the screen saver appears, tap the
touch screen. The Scalar i6000 Logon dialog box appears.
2 In the Name text box, type the name of the user or administrator
account with which you want to log on. If you want to log on with
the default administrator account, type admin.
434
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Logging On and Off
Note: While passwords are case-sensitive, user names are not
case-sensitive. Select the Shift key to display uppercase
letters and special characters. This enables you to type one
uppercase letter or special character before the Scalar
i6000 Logon dialog box returns to displaying lowercase
characters. To type more than one uppercase character or
special character, select the Caps key. The Caps key toggles
between displaying uppercase and lowercase characters.
Note: Only one administrator at any given time can be logged on
to the library.
Note: If you want to log on using the default administrator
account (admin), and you do not remember the password,
contact Quantum Support to reset the password.
Note: If the date and time have reset to January 1, 1970 or if the
year is set to a date earlier than 1970, a warning dialog will
display on login.
3 Position the cursor in the text box below the Name text box by
tapping it, and then type the password for the user or administrator
account.
Note: If you are logging on to the library for the first time using
the default administrator account (admin), type
password. After you log on, the library prompts you to
change the default admin password. You must enter and
confirm a new password. Passwords that are most secure
include a combination of letters, numbers, and nonalphanumeric characters. Passwords must be eight or more
characters in length. The word “password” is not available
for use.
4 After you type a user name and password, select OK.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
435
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Logging On and Off
Logging Off From the
Touch Screen (Local
Client)
1 Select Operations > Log Off or select the Log Off button on the
toolbar. A message appears that asks you whether you are sure that
you want to log off.
2 Select Yes. The Scalar i6000 Logon dialog box appears.
Logging On From a
Web Browser (Remote
Client)
You can access all features of the LMC from a host computer using a
standard Web browser. The host computer must have network access to
the library, and you must know the IP address of the library.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the library, log on to the
library using the touch screen. Click Setup > Network
Configuration, and then write down the value in the IP
Address field.
Software Requirements
Before logging on from the Web browser, make sure the host computer
meets the following software requirements:
• Web Browser – Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 or 8; Mozilla Firefox
1.0.6 or higher
• Java Plug-in – Java Plug-in 1.4 or higher
For information on downloading the Java Plug-in contact:
www.quantum.com/support
Accessing the Library via the Web Browser
After verifying that the host computer meets the software requirements
and has network access to the library:
1 On the host computer, point your Web browser to the IP address of
the library.
The first time you access the library, an LMC applet is downloaded
to the host computer. Downloading the applet can take several
minutes depending on the speed of the network. Once the applet is
downloaded, it is stored on the host computer and does not need
to be downloaded again.
436
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Logging On and Off
2 If a security warning appears asking if you are sure you want to run
the applet, click Run or Yes. The Scalar i6000 Logon dialog box
appears.
3 In the Name text box, type the name of the user or administrator
account with which you want to log on. If you want to log on with
the default administrator account, type admin.
Note: While passwords are case-sensitive, user names are not
case-sensitive.
Note: Only one administrator at any given time can be logged on
to the library.
Note: If you want to log on using the default administrator
account (admin), and you do not remember the password,
contact technical support to reset the password.
Note: If the date and time have reset to January 1, 1970 or if the
year is set to a date earlier than 1970, a warning dialog will
display on login.
4 In the Password text box, type the password for the user or
administrator account.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
437
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Connecting to Multiple Libraries
Note: If you are logging on to the library for the first time using
the default administrator account (admin), type
password. After you log on, the library prompts you to
change the default admin password. You must enter and
confirm a new password. Passwords that are most secure
include a combination of letters, numbers, and nonalphanumeric characters. Passwords must be eight or more
characters in length. The word “password” is not available
for use.
5 Click OK.
Note: After logging on, do not close the Web browser window or
use it to navigate to another URL. Doing so will close the
LMC applet but might leave the current session active.
Logging Off the Web
Browser (Remote
Client)
1 Click Operations > Log Off, or click the Log Off button on the
toolbar. A message appears asking if you are sure you want to log
off.
2 Click Yes. The Scalar i6000 Logon dialog box appears.
3 To close the LMC applet, click Cancel.
Connecting to Multiple Libraries
This feature allows you log in to multiple libraries, and switch from one
library console to another without logging off.
Note: This feature is available only if all libraries are at the same
firmware level.
1 From the LMC menu, click Connection > New. The Connect to
Library dialog box appears.
438
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Operator Panel
1 Type or select the library server name or library IP address, and click
OK. You can use either iPv4 or iPv6 addresses.
Once you have connected to additional libraries, you can choose any
of those libraries from the Connection drop-down list.
Note: To log off when connected to multiple libraries, first log off
from one of the connected libraries. To do this, select the
library on the Connection menu, click Operations > Log Off,
and then click Yes. When the Scalar i6000 Logon dialog box
appears, click Cancel. You can then repeat this process to log
off from additional libraries.
Operator Panel
The operator panel on the library includes an indicator panel and a
touch screen, as shown in Figure 45.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
439
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Operator Panel
Figure 45 Library Op Panel
indicator
panel
LMC
touch screen
The indicator panel includes a Robotics Enabled button with its
associated indicator, a Status indicator, and a Power button with its
associated indicator. The Library Management Console (LMC) appears
on the touch screen. For more information about indicator panel
functions, see Indicator Panel on page 440. For a brief overview of the
LMC, see Library Management Console (LMC) on page 442.
Indicator Panel
The Robotics Enabled indicator and the Power indicator each include a
button. The Status indicator is not a button. These indicators do not
report the status of communications with a host.
Note: The enabled state does not mean that robotics are
communicating with the host. It means that the robotics are
communicating with the library controller.
440
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Operator Panel
Robotics Enabled indicator
and button
Status indicator
Power button
and indicator
The following tables describe the indicators in detail.
Table 34 Robotics Enabled
Indicator
Indicator
State and Explanation
Green
Solid on — robotics are enabled and ready to process commands or are actively
processing commands from the library controller. No attention required. Do not open
the access door.
Blinking — a change of robotics state is pending, either from the enabled state to the
not enabled state or from the not enabled state to the enabled state. No attention
required. Do not open the access door.
No color
Solid off — either robotics are not ready, the doors might be open, or the library
might be powered off. Attention required. The operator should close the doors and
press the Robotics Enabled button to return robotics to the enabled state.
Table 35 Status Indicator
Indicator
State and Explanation
Green
Solid on — normal. No attention required.
Amber
Blinking or solid on — fault. Attention required. Monitor the system status buttons.
To determine whether the library has created any tickets, click Tools > Tickets.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
441
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Library Management Console (LMC)
Table 36 Power Indicator
Indicator
Operational Status
Green
Solid on — power on. No attention required.
No color
Solid off — power off. Attention required. To operate the library, you must turn on
the power. Press the Power button.
Library Management Console (LMC)
You can view the LMC from either the library’s touch screen or a remote
computer. If you use the touch screen, you do not need to install the
LMC because it is already installed on the library. To access the LMC
using a Web browser, see Logging On From a Web Browser (Remote
Client) on page 436.
Note: To manage your library from a remote client, you must set up
the library’s initial network configuration from the touch
screen. For more information, see Setting Up the Network
Configuration on page 162.
The main LMC display consists of five areas:
• The title bar on the touch screen view of the LMC displays the words
“Scalar i6000 Library Management Console.” The title bar appears
slightly differently on the remote client view of the LMC. Compare
Figure 46 to Figure .
• The menu bar provides access to all menu commands used to
manage library functions.
• The toolbar displays icons that represent the most commonly run
commands.
• The library information panel fills most of the main LMC display,
presenting operational data from the current library, whether
physical or partition.
• The system status buttons provide current status information for
the six subsystems of the physical library.
442
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Library Management Console (LMC)
Figure 46 Library Management
Console (LMC)
title bar
menu bar
toolbar
name
current activity
data transferred
status
current date and time
utilization summary
tape loads
configuration
summary
system status buttons
Menus
The following seven LMC menus organize commands into logical
groupings:
• The Operations menu consists of commands, such as changing the
library’s mode of operation, importing and exporting cartridges,
loading and unloading drives, moving media, performing inventory,
and logging off.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
443
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Library Management Console (LMC)
• The Monitor menu consists of commands that you can use to
obtain status information about various aspects of the library,
including system, drives, connectivity, I/E stations, storage slots,
media, sensors, and users.
• The Setup menu consists of commands that you can use to set up
and configure various aspects of the library, including partitions,
devices, connectivity, network, physical library, users, notifications,
date and time, licenses, e-mail, and SNMP trap registration.
• The Tools menu consists of commands that you can use to maintain
and troubleshoot the library. These tools enable you to work with
RAS tickets, drives, and connectivity. They also enable you to capture
snapshots, update software, teach the library, save and restore
library configurations, run verification tests, and obtain drive
resource utilization reports.
• The View menu enables you to select the library (either the physical
library or a partition) that you want currently displayed on the main
LMC display. Some LMC menu commands require you to be in either
a physical library or partition view to run them.
• The Connection menu enables you to log on to multiple libraries
and switch between consoles for different libraries without logging
off.
• The Help menu provides you with access to Online Help as well as
information about the library, such as copyright information, the
product version, firmware version, and build information for various
library components (LMC server, LMC client, MCB, CMB, and RCU).
Table 37 on page 445 summarizes all available commands, including
required user privilege levels and required library environments (touch
screen or remote client). The LMC prompts you to take the library offline
or to select either the physical library or a partition if the command you
request requires you to change library mode.
System status buttons are located at the bottom of the library
information panel. If the touch screen remains unused after a period of
time, the library screen saver appears. The color of the screen saver
image reflects the status of the library as indicated by the system status
buttons. For example, if system status buttons show a mix of green
(Good), yellow (Warning or Degraded), and red (Failed) states, the color
of the screen saver image will be red.
444
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Library Management Console (LMC)
Table 37 Menu Commands:
Privileges and Environments
Physical
Privilege Level
Library
View
Partition
View
Touch
Screen
Remote
Change Mode
Admin, User1
X
X
X2
X3
Import4
Admin, User1
X
X
X
Export4
Admin, User1
X
X
X
Drives4
Admin, User1
X
X
X
Load4
Admin, User1
X
X
X
Unload4
Admin, User1
X
X
X
Move Media
Admin, User1
X
X
X
Inventory
Admin, User1
X5
X4, 6
X
X
System Shutdown
Admin
X
Log Off
Admin, User, Guest
X
X
X
X
System
Admin, User1
X
X
X
X
Drives
Admin, User1
X
X
X
X
Connectivity
Admin, User1
X
X
X
IO Blade
Admin, User1
X
X
X
Menu Command
Operations menu:
Monitor menu:
1 Users can use this command only from partitions to which they have privileges. 2 Shutdown is available to
administrators only. 3 Affected partition must be offline. 4 Physical library must be offline. 5 Physical library
must be online. 6 Feature is configurable from the library’s touch screen only, but the configuration is
viewable from the touch screen or remote client. 7 Appears on the library’s touch screen only. 8 Depending
on operation, physical library or relevant partition must be offline. 9 Available only on libraries with I/O blades
installed. 11 Guest can view the main LMC display, but cannot obtain more details or perform operations.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
445
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Library Management Console (LMC)
Physical
Menu Command
(Continued)
Privilege Level
Library
View
Fibre Channel
Admin, User1
Ethernet Blade
Touch
Screen
Remote
X
X
X
Admin, User
X
X
X
IE Station
Admin, User1
X
X
X
Slots
Admin, User1
X
X
X
X
Media
Admin, User1
X
X
X
X
Sensors
Admin, User1
X
X
X
X
E-Mail Configuration Record
Admin, User1
X
X
X
Users
Admin, User1
X
X
X
X
Partitions...
Admin, User1
X
X
X
X
Status
Admin, User1
X
X
X
X
Policies
Admin
X
X
X
X
Admin, User
X
X
X
X
EKM Servers
Partition
View
1 Users can use this command only from partitions to which they have privileges. 2 Shutdown is available to
administrators only. 3 Affected partition must be offline. 4 Physical library must be offline. 5 Physical library
must be online. 6 Feature is configurable from the library’s touch screen only, but the configuration is
viewable from the touch screen or remote client. 7 Appears on the library’s touch screen only. 8 Depending
on operation, physical library or relevant partition must be offline. 9 Available only on libraries with I/O blades
installed. 11 Guest can view the main LMC display, but cannot obtain more details or perform operations.
446
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Library Management Console (LMC)
Physical
Menu Command
(Continued)
Privilege Level
Library
View
Setup Wizard
Admin
Partitions5
Partition
View
Touch
Screen
Remote
X
X
X
Admin
X
X
X
Configure
Admin
X
X
X
Control Path
Admin
X
X
X
Automated Media Pool
Admin
X
X
X
Assign Magazines
Admin
X
X
X
Assign Media
Admin
X
X
X
Admin
X
X
X
Admin, User1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Setup menu:
Policies
EDLM Configuration
Active Vault Configuration
StorNext Access
Drives
SCSI ID’s4
Admin, User1
FC Settings
Admin
Access
Admin
X
X
X
Data Path Failover
Admin
X
X
X
SNW Wizard
Admin
X
X
X
Blades
1 Users can use this command only from partitions to which they have privileges. 2 Shutdown is available to
administrators only. 3 Affected partition must be offline. 4 Physical library must be offline. 5 Physical library
must be online. 6 Feature is configurable from the library’s touch screen only, but the configuration is
viewable from the touch screen or remote client. 7 Appears on the library’s touch screen only. 8 Depending
on operation, physical library or relevant partition must be offline. 9 Available only on libraries with I/O blades
installed. 11 Guest can view the main LMC display, but cannot obtain more details or perform operations.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
447
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Library Management Console (LMC)
Physical
Menu Command
(Continued)
Privilege Level
Library
View
Channel Zoning
Admin
FC Host
LUN Mapping Wizard
Partition
View
Touch
Screen
Remote
X
X
X
Admin
X
X
X
Admin
X
X
X
Admin
X
X
X
Port Configuration
Admin
X
X
X
Datapath Conditioning
Admin
X
X
X
FC Host Port Failover
Admin
X
X
X
Network Configuration7
Admin
X
X
IPv4 Configuration
Admin
X
X
X
IPv6 Configuration
Admin
X
X
X
DNS Configuration...
Admin
X
X
X
Admin
X
X
X
Physical Library
Admin
X
X
X
Aisle Lights
Admin
X
X
X
Preferences
Admin
X
X
X
Health Check Intervals
Admin
X
X
X
Camera Host/IP...
Admin
X
X
X
User Configuration
Admin
X
X
X
Access
Connectivity
System Settings
1 Users can use this command only from partitions to which they have privileges. 2 Shutdown is available to
administrators only. 3 Affected partition must be offline. 4 Physical library must be offline. 5 Physical library
must be online. 6 Feature is configurable from the library’s touch screen only, but the configuration is
viewable from the touch screen or remote client. 7 Appears on the library’s touch screen only. 8 Depending
on operation, physical library or relevant partition must be offline. 9 Available only on libraries with I/O blades
installed. 11 Guest can view the main LMC display, but cannot obtain more details or perform operations.
448
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Library Management Console (LMC)
Physical
Menu Command
(Continued)
Privilege Level
Library
View
Local Users
Admin
LDAP
Touch
Screen
Remote
X
X
X
Admin
X
X
X
Admin
X
X
X
System Setup
Admin
X
X
X
Media Security
Admin
X
X
X
Partition Utilization
Admin
X
X
X
Trap Registration
Admin
X
X
X
Tickets Filter
Admin
X
X
X
Date and Time
Admin
X
X
X
Licenses
Admin
X
X
X
Email Configuration
Admin
X
X
X
Security8
Admin
X
X
Drive Cleaning
Admin
X
X
X
Encryption
Admin
X
X
X
Server Configuration
Admin
X
X
X
Partition Configuration
Admin
X
X
X
Notifications
Partition
View
1 Users can use this command only from partitions to which they have privileges. 2 Shutdown is available to
administrators only. 3 Affected partition must be offline. 4 Physical library must be offline. 5 Physical library
must be online. 6 Feature is configurable from the library’s touch screen only, but the configuration is
viewable from the touch screen or remote client. 7 Appears on the library’s touch screen only. 8 Depending
on operation, physical library or relevant partition must be offline. 9 Available only on libraries with I/O blades
installed. 11 Guest can view the main LMC display, but cannot obtain more details or perform operations.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
449
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Library Management Console (LMC)
Physical
Menu Command
(Continued)
Privilege Level
Library
View
Partition
View
Touch
Screen
Remote
Tickets
Admin
X
X
X
X
Drives5
Admin
X
X
X
Connectivity
Admin
X
X
X
Capture Snapshot
Admin
X
X
X
Update Software9
Admin
X
X
X
X
Library
Admin
X
X
X
X
Drives
Admin
X
X
X
X
Plug-in
Admin
X
X
X
X
Teach5
Admin
X
X
X
Save/Restore5
Admin
X
X
X
Verification Tests
Admin
X
X
X
Reports
Admin
X
X
X
X
Reporting Options
Admin
X
X
Drive Utilization
Admin
X
X
X
Tickets
Admin
X
X
X
LUN Mapping
Admin
X
X
X
Tools menu:
1 Users can use this command only from partitions to which they have privileges. 2 Shutdown is available to
administrators only. 3 Affected partition must be offline. 4 Physical library must be offline. 5 Physical library
must be online. 6 Feature is configurable from the library’s touch screen only, but the configuration is
viewable from the touch screen or remote client. 7 Appears on the library’s touch screen only. 8 Depending
on operation, physical library or relevant partition must be offline. 9 Available only on libraries with I/O blades
installed. 11 Guest can view the main LMC display, but cannot obtain more details or perform operations.
450
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Library Management Console (LMC)
Physical
Menu Command
(Continued)
Privilege Level
Library
View
Partition
View
Admin
X
X
X
Integrity Analysis
Admin
X
X
X
Usage
Admin
X
X
X
Security
Admin
X
X
X
Moves
Admin
X
X
X
Library Configuration
Admin
X
X
X
Partition Utilization
Admin
X
Library Explorer
Admin, User1
X
X
X
X
Command History Log
Admin
X
X
X
X
Media
IE Stations
X
Partitions Defragmentation
X
EKM Management
Touch
Screen
Remote
X
Admin
X
X
X
X
Import Communication
Certificates
Admin
X
X
X
X
Encryption Certificate
Admin
X
X
X
X
Import
Admin
X
X
X
X
Export
Admin
X
X
X
X
Admin
X
X
X
X
Import
Admin
X
X
X
X
Export
Admin
X
X
X
X
Encryption Key
1 Users can use this command only from partitions to which they have privileges. 2 Shutdown is available to
administrators only. 3 Affected partition must be offline. 4 Physical library must be offline. 5 Physical library
must be online. 6 Feature is configurable from the library’s touch screen only, but the configuration is
viewable from the touch screen or remote client. 7 Appears on the library’s touch screen only. 8 Depending
on operation, physical library or relevant partition must be offline. 9 Available only on libraries with I/O blades
installed. 11 Guest can view the main LMC display, but cannot obtain more details or perform operations.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
451
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Library Management Console (LMC)
Physical
Menu Command
(Continued)
Privilege Level
Library
View
Partition
View
Touch
Screen
Remote
Retrieve SKM Logs
Admin
X
X
X
X
EKM Audit Report
Admin
X
X
X
X
Admin
X
X
X
Test Selection
Admin
X
X
X
Test Reports
Admin
X
X
X
Status
Admin
X
X
X
Admin
X
X
X
X
Export...
Admin
X
X
X
X
Capture Report...
Admin
X
X
X
X
Retrieve MIBs
Admin
X
X
X
Library
Admin
X
X
X
X
Admin
X
X
X
X
Admin
X
X
X
X
[physical library name]
(Physical)
Admin, User, Guest11
X
X
X
X
[partition name] (Partition)
Admin, User, Guest11
X
X
X
X
Views...
Admin, User, Guest11
X
X
X
X
EDLM
Sift Sort
Robot State
Towers...
View menu:
1 Users can use this command only from partitions to which they have privileges. 2 Shutdown is available to
administrators only. 3 Affected partition must be offline. 4 Physical library must be offline. 5 Physical library
must be online. 6 Feature is configurable from the library’s touch screen only, but the configuration is
viewable from the touch screen or remote client. 7 Appears on the library’s touch screen only. 8 Depending
on operation, physical library or relevant partition must be offline. 9 Available only on libraries with I/O blades
installed. 11 Guest can view the main LMC display, but cannot obtain more details or perform operations.
452
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Library Management Console (LMC)
Physical
Menu Command
(Continued)
Privilege Level
Library
View
Partition
View
Touch
Screen
New
Admin, User, Guest
X
X
[library IP address]
Admin, User, Guest
X
X
Content
Admin, User
X
X
X
X
About
Admin, User, Guest
X
X
X
X
Remote
Connection menu:
Help menu:
1 Users can use this command only from partitions to which they have privileges. 2 Shutdown is available to
administrators only. 3 Affected partition must be offline. 4 Physical library must be offline. 5 Physical library
must be online. 6 Feature is configurable from the library’s touch screen only, but the configuration is
viewable from the touch screen or remote client. 7 Appears on the library’s touch screen only. 8 Depending
on operation, physical library or relevant partition must be offline. 9 Available only on libraries with I/O blades
installed. 11 Guest can view the main LMC display, but cannot obtain more details or perform operations.
Toolbar
The toolbar consists of icons that represent commonly used commands
that also are available on the menus.
The I/E button displays a table of the current contents of the I/E station.
You also can display the table by clicking Monitor > IE Station. For
more information, see Monitoring I/E Station Status on page 527.
The Import button launches the import of cartridges if the current
library is a partition. You also can request an import operation by
clicking Operations > Import. For more information, see Importing
Cartridges Into Partitions on page 697.
The Export button launches the export of cartridges if the current
library is a partition. You also can request an export operation by
clicking Operations > Export. For more information, see Exporting
Cartridges From Partitions on page 699.
The Tickets button displays tickets that the library created when it
detected issues within its subsystems. You also can display tickets by
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
453
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Library Management Console (LMC)
clicking Tools > Tickets. For more information, see Troubleshooting
Your Library on page 43.
The Explorer button provides a graphical presentation of all the drives,
cartridges, and slots in the library. The Library Explorer can display all
library elements according to physical location in any configuration,
from one module to eight modules, and one drive up to the maximum
number of 96 drives.
The Config button indicates whether you have saved the current library
configuration. For more information, see CONFIG Button Alerts on
page 603.
The System Status button displays a dialog box that has four (4) tabs:
Components, Robots, Drives and, if installed, Towers. Each tab indicates
the status of the elements and provides a graphical representation of
the general status of each area. The button will display a green check
mark if all system are online and running normally. It will display a red X
if any of the components are offline or failing.
The Log Off button logs off the current user after confirming the log off
request. You also can log off by clicking Operations > Log Off. For
more information, see Logging On and Off on page 434.
454
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Library Management Console (LMC)
Reading the Library
Information Panel
The library information panel, shown in Figure 47, occupies the central
portion of the main LMC display. It provides you with a significant
amount of dynamically updated status information.
Figure 47 Library Management
Console
Title bar
Menu bar
Tool bar
Current
library
current
Activity
Current time
and date
Data transfer
statistics
Media slot
usage
Mount
statistics
Configuration
summary
System status
buttons
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
455
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Library Management Console (LMC)
Table 38 describes the areas on the library information panel.
Table 38 Areas on the Library
Information Panel
Area
Description
Name
The name of the current library. This is the library that appears with a check mark
beside it in the View menu. First, the genre of library appears, i.e. physical or
partition. Then, after a colon, the name of the library appears.
IP Address
The IP address of the library.
Contact
The name of the customer contact identified in Setup > Notifications >
System Setup.
Activity
The current activity for the current library.
Status
Online/offline status of the library/partition being viewed.
Physical Serial #
Physical serial number of the library or partition being viewed.
Date
The current date and time. The date that appears reflects user settings, but the
system operates according to Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). The displayed time
reflects user settings, but the system operates on the GMT zone.
Data Transfer
The bar graph contrasts the amount of data read and written for the past 24
hours. The units being reported appear beside the graph.
Slots Utilized
This graph shows the percentage of occupied media slots in the library or
partition, depending on the current view. The number of used media slots
appears beneath the graph (occupied slots/total number of storage slots).
Mounts
The bar graph reports mount statistics compiled during the past 24 hours. The
library updates this information every five minutes.
456
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Library Management Console (LMC)
Area
Description
Configuration
Configuration summary information is presented textually. Data points reported
are:
• Number of tape drives
• Drive types: AIT, LTO or—for the physical library only—Mixed
• Total number of licensed storage slots (appears only in the physical library
view)
• Total number of storage slots in the physical library or partition, depending on
the current view
• Library type
• Number of robots (library view only).
Note: If the numbers shown are displayed in yellow or orange, then 80% of the
available resources are used. If the numbers are displayed in red, then
90% of the available resources are used.
System Status Buttons
System status buttons are located in the Overall System Status area at
the bottom of the LMC (see Figure 48).
Figure 48 System Status
Buttons in Good Status
Each button represents a subsystem. Table 53 shows the library
subsystems and some of the components that each subsystem
represents. Each field replaceable unit (FRU) in the library belongs to
one of the subsystems.
Table 39 Subsystems and Their
Components
Subsystem
Components
Drives
Drives, such as brick firmware, drive bricks, drive sleds
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
457
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Library Management Console (LMC)
Subsystem
Components
Robotics
Assemblies and processors involved in the movement and handling of library
media, such as the IEX board, I/E stations, the pivot and reach assemblies,
system barcode labels, doors, filters, the accessor, drive mounts, rails, towers,
and carriages
Connectivity
Host connectivity components, such as I/O management units, I/O blades, and
the chassis management blade (CMB)
Power
Power supplies and related hardware, such as the power distribution unit (PDU),
power chassis, and fuses
Control
Main processor cards and related hardware and software, such as system
firmware, the management control blade (MCB), the robotics control unit (RCU),
the library motor drive (LMD), and the operator panel
Media
Media components such as cartridges and magazines
Each button displays a status indicator that reveals a Good, Warning,
Degraded, or Failed state as follows:
Good (green)
The library system is in working
order; no problems or issues exist.
Warning or
Degraded (yellow)
There is a degraded or failed
component within this category that
requires action, but the overall
category still is functioning.
Failed (flashing red)
A component in this category has
failed.
For example, the buttons shown in Figure 48 on page 457 indicate that
all subsystems are functioning normally (Good), while those shown in
Figure 49 indicate that issues exist in the Media subsystem.
458
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Understanding Location Coordinates
Figure 49 Status Buttons Drives and Robotics Issues
indicates Warning or Degraded status
You can click system status buttons to display additional information
about the subsystems. The information that appears depends on the
status shown on the button:
• Good — Either a message appears informing you that no tickets
exist for the subsystem or a list of subsystem tickets appears that
are in Closed or Verified states.
• Warning, Degraded, or Failed — A list of open tickets for the
subsystem appears.
Tickets provide information about issues that the library has detected.
For more information, see Using System Status Buttons to Display Ticket
Lists on page 53.
Understanding Location Coordinates
This section describes the coordinate addressing system that the library
uses to indicate the location of cartridges, drives, and I/O blades in the
library.
You can use the Library Explorer feature to view a graphical
presentation of all the drives, cartridges, and slots in the library. The
Library Explorer can display all library elements according to physical
location in any configuration, from one module to eight modules, and
one drive up to the maximum number of 96 drives. For more
information on Library Explorer, see Using Library Explorer on
page 553.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
459
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Understanding Location Coordinates
Cartridge Locations
The library uses a coordinate addressing system that indicates the
location of cartridges using six coordinates. The coordinates are
represented by a comma-separated list.
For example:
1,1,1,1,2,1 = aisle 1, module 1, rack 1, section 1, column 2, row 1
The following list explains each location variable:
• Aisle — There is only one aisle in the library. This value is always 1.
• Module — There can be up to 12 modules in a Gen 1 singlerobotics library (control module plus up to 11 expansion modules.
For a Gen 2 single robotics library, there can be up to 12 modules as
well. However, these modules can be standard or high-density
expansion modules. For a Gen 2 dual-robotics library, there can be
up to 17 modules in (left parking module, control module, right
parking module, and up to 13 standard or high-density expansion
modules).
Modules are numbered from left to right as you look at the front of
the modules The control module is always module 1. In dualrobotics libraries, the left parking module, located to the left of the
control module, is module 0.
• Rack — There are two rack designations inside each module. These
will always be either 1 or 2, with 2 being the inside of the access
door.
• Section — There are 10 sections in a rack, numbered from top to
bottom as you face the rack.
• Column — There are four columns in a rack, numbered from left to
right as you face the rack. These are numbered between 1 and 4. For
an HDEM, there are ten (10) rotating columns.
• Row — This is equal to one cartridge slot. The number of rows per
section can vary depending on the size of the cartridge. The rows
are numbered between 1 and 6 for LTO cartridges.
Note: Tape drives that are installed in rack 1 of a control module or an
expansion module replace storage in columns 1 and 2. Because
drives are installed from the bottom of the rack to the top, you
lose the storage starting in section 10 first. You do not lose the
magazine in columns 1 and 2 of section 5.
460
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Understanding Location Coordinates
Note: Column 1 of a single-robotics control module never contains
storage. Column 1 of a dual-robotics control module can
contain storage.
Note: The cartridges in the 24-slot LTO I/E station are addressed as
part of column 3 and are in sections 1 through 4 (top to
bottom). When you have an I/E station installed on rack 2,
there are no cartridges in columns 3 and 4 of section 5. See
Figure 52 on page 463.
Note: In Figure 52 on page 463, the five magazines shown in column
4, sections 6-10 do not exist in a single-robot control module.
However, these magazines exist in expansion modules.
Figure 50 shows aisle, module, and rack numbering.
Figure 51 on page 462 shows section, column, and row numbering for
rack 1 of a library that contains LTO cartridges.
Figure 52 on page 463 shows the section, column, and row numbering
for rack 2 of a library that contains LTO cartridges.
Figure 53 on page 464 shows examples of location coordinates.
Figure 50 Aisle, Module, and
Rack Numbering Locations
back of modules
modules 1 through 4
(from left to right)
aisle value
is always 1
racks 1 and 2
front of modules
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
461
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Understanding Location Coordinates
Figure 51 Section, Column,
and Row Numbering for Rack 1
- LTO Cartridges
column
1
2
3
4
6 rows (individual slots)
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
section
4
5
7
X-axis rail counts as section 6
8
9
10
462
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Understanding Location Coordinates
Figure 52 Section, Column,
and Row Numbering for Rack 2
- LTO Cartridges
column
1
2
3
4
I/E station
1
2
3
cartridges in the I/E station
are addressed by the library as
part of column 3, sections 1
through 4
section
4
5
6
7
8
9
this column of magazines is
not present in a control module
10
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
463
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Understanding Location Coordinates
Figure 53 Example - Storage
Location Coordinates for Aisle
1, Module 1, and Rack 1
1
This example assumes that the linear storage is located in aisle 1,
module 1, and rack 1. That is why the first three numbers in the
coordinate value are 1,1,1. The last three numbers represent the address
on the linear storage assembly.
2
3
4
1
1,1,1,3,2,1
2
3
4
column 1 is
not available
in a control
module
5
7
8
1,1,1,7,3,2
9
10
464
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Understanding Location Coordinates
The LMC uses dialog boxes, like the one shown in Figure 54, that enable
you to specify cartridge locations. These coordinates are reported in
parenthetical format with each element separated by commas. In
parenthetical format, the location of cartridge 000002L2, shown in the
Load Drives dialog box below, is (1,1,1,1,3,1).
Figure 54 Coordinates in Load
Drives Dialog Box
Tape Drive Location
Coordinates
The location coordinates of a drive is based on the position of the drive
in the module and section. The location coordinates are: aisle, module,
rack, section, column, and row, defined the same as for other library
components (see Cartridge Locations on page 460).
• Tape drives are always in rack 1, column 1, of a particular module.
(Columns are numbered from left to right as you face the rack). See
Figure 56 on page 468.
• Drives may be installed in any module except high-density
expansion modules and the left parking module.
• Because all drives in the library are full-height drives, each drive is in
row 1 of the designated section.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
465
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Understanding Location Coordinates
• The library can accommodate two drive clusters per rack (an upper
and a lower). Each drive cluster contains up to six drives. Drives are
numbered from bottom to top. Drive location 1 is in the lowest
section of the lower drive cluster. Drive location 12 is the uppermost
section of the upper drive cluster.
Table 40 shows the possible drive location coordinate ranges.
Table 40 Possible Drive
Location Coordinate
Aisle
Module
Rack
Section
Column
Row
1
1 – 16
1
1 – 12
1
1
Figure 56 on page 468 shows the physical location of drive 9, which is
the last drive listed in the Move Media dialog box shown in Figure 55
on page 467.
466
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Understanding Location Coordinates
Figure 55 Example - Drive
Location Coordinates
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
467
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Understanding Location Coordinates
Figure 56 Drive Location
Coordinate Numbering and
Example in Module 1, Rack 1
module 1
rack 1 (back)
column 1
section 12
upper
drive
cluster
drive 9 (1,1,1,9,1,1)
section 7
section 6
lower
drive
cluster
section 1
I/O Blade Locations
I/O blades are located in the I/O management unit. The LMC displays I/O
blade locations in parenthetical format. The location coordinates are
aisle, module, rack, cluster, and bay, defined as follows:
• Aisle, Module, and Rack — The definitions the same as for other
library components (see Cartridge Locations on page 460).
• Cluster — Refers to the I/O management unit and is always 1.
468
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Understanding Location Coordinates
• Bay — The bays in the I/O management unit as viewed from the rear
of the library. There are eight bays in the I/O management unit. Bay
1 is on the lower left and is not populated. Bay 2 always contains
the control management blade (CMB). Bays 3 through 6 can contain
FC I/O blades and bays 7 and 8 can contains Ethernet Expansion
blades. See Figure 57.
Figure 57 I/O Management
Unit Bay Numbering
bay 6 (fourth FC I/O blade)
bay 8 (EEB), upper drive
cluster)
bay 7 (EEB, lower drive
cluster)
bay 4 (second FC I/O blade)
bay 3 (first FC I/O blade)
bay 5 (third FC I/O blade)
bay 2 (CMB)
bay 1 (not used)
cooling assembly
Table 41 lists the range of possible FC I/O blade or EEB location
coordinates.
Table 41 FC I/O Blade/EEB
Location Coordinates
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
1
1-16
1
1
3-8
Aisle
Module
Rack
Cluster
Bay
469
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Understanding Location Coordinates
Figure 58 shows an example of I/O blade location coordinates. The
location for the first I/O blade listed in the Connectivity dialog box is
reported as (1,1,1,1,3). This I/O blade is located in bay 3 of the left-most
module.
Figure 58 Example - I/O Blade
Location Coordinates
I/O blade location
coordinates
I/E Station Locations
The location coordinates of an I/E station is based on the position of the
module that contains the I/E station. I/E stations are also distinguished
by whether they are an I/E stations or a HiCap I/E station.
• Single I/E Station: Designated by stating the module that contains it
(see Figure 59 on page 471).
• HiCap I/E Station: Designated by the modules that contains it but
since there are two I/E station doors, further designated by an A
(left) and B (right) (see Figure 60 on page 472).
470
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Understanding Location Coordinates
Figure 59 I/E Station Location
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
471
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Understanding Location Coordinates
Figure 60 HiCap I/E Station
Location
Tower Locations
472
The location coordinates of a tower is based on the number of towers in
the library and it’s overall position in the library. The location
coordinates are: tower # (module and rack), as indicated in the Towers
dialog box (see Figure 61 on page 473).
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Viewing the Library (Physical or Partition)
Figure 61 Tower Location
Coordinates
Viewing the Library (Physical or Partition)
The View menu enables you to view details about the physical library or
a specific partition in the library information panel area of the main LMC
display. It also provides access to the Manage Views dialog box from
which you can quickly select between library views (physical or
individual partitions) and take the physical library or a partition online
or offline.
Note: Before you can begin many of the library operations that this
guide describes, you must first set the library view to either the
physical library or a partition.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
473
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Viewing the Library (Physical or Partition)
Displaying the Physical
Library or a Partition
From the View menu, click the name of the physical library or a
partition. The physical library is listed at the top of the View menu.
Individual partitions, if they exist, are listed below the physical library.
After you select a library view, the library information panel area of the
main LMC display shows status information and statistical details about
the physical library or partition.
Managing Library
Views
The Manage Views dialog box enables you to quickly select between
library views (physical or individual partitions) and take the physical
library or a partition online or offline. If you are using the LMC from a
remote client, you can keep this dialog box in view while you use the
LMC to perform other library operations.
1 Click View > Views. The Manage Views dialog box appears with
the physical library and any existing partitions listed. It also shows
the current online or offline mode of each.
It is recommended that you keep this dialog box displayed to
quickly manage library views and change online/offline modes as
required by many library operations.
2 To change the library view, click the button with the name of the
physical library or partition you want to view.
After you select a library view, the library information panel area of
the main LMC display shows status information and statistical
details about the physical library or partition.
To take the physical library or a partition online or offline, click the
button in the right column that corresponds with the physical
library or partition. The Change Library Mode dialog box appears.
474
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Changing the Library’s State
Note: You do not need to change the current library view to
change the online or offline state of the physical library or
a partition.
For more information about using this dialog box to change online or
offline mode, see Changing the Library’s State on page 475.
Changing the Library’s State
You can take the physical library or any of its partitions online or offline.
Some library functions require that the physical library or partitions be
in an online or offline state. You also can shut down the physical library
from the library’s touch screen.
Shutting down the library only prepares it to be powered off. You will
use the shutdown procedure in some circumstances to prepare the
library for remove and replace procedures. For more information about
shutting down the library, see Shutting Down/Rebooting the Library on
page 485.
Taking the Physical Library or a Partition Online or Offline
To take the physical library online or offline, change its mode.
1 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library or the partition
that you want to take online or offline. From the View menu, click
the name of the physical library or the appropriate partition.
2 Click Operations > Change Mode. The Change Library Mode
dialog box appears with the current state of the physical library or
partition shown.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
475
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Changing the Library’s State
• You can select the Online button to take either the physical
library or a partition, depending on the current view, to an
online state, which is the normal operating condition. In this
mode, the robotics are enabled and all host commands are
processed.
• You can select the Offline button to take either the physical
library or a partition, depending on the current view, to an
offline state. If only the physical library is taken offline, the
library’s partitions will not process robotics commands, even
though they are online. If only a partition is taken offline,
neither the physical library nor the other partitions are affected.
3 Select either Online or Offline, and then click OK.
4 If you selected Offline, a message appears that asks you whether
you want to continue. If you are sure that all backup applications
are not using the library, click Yes.
Online and Offline Functionality
Some library functions require the physical library or partitions to be in a
particular state (either online or offline) before they can be performed. If
you choose a function that requires the library or partition state to be
changed from its current state, you are prompted to do so.
Table 42 on page 477 summarizes the library functions that require the
physical library or partitions to be either online or offline.
476
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Working With Local User Accounts
Table 42 Library Functions
Requiring Online or Offline
State
Function
Physical Library
Partition
Operations > Import
Online
Offline
—
Offline
Offline
—
Operations > Export
Operations > Drives > Load
Operations > Drives > Unload
Operations > Move Media
Operations > Inventory (partition view)
Setup > Partitions (create, modify, or delete)
Setup > Device > IDs
Tools > Partitions Defragmentation
Operations > Inventory (physical library view)
Tools > Teach
Tools > Save/Restore (restore, revert, or rescue)
Tools > Verification Tests (start test)
Tools > Update Software (update or reinstall library software)
Service > Manual Diagnostics
Tools > Update Software (set up autoleveling or update drive
firmware)
Tools > Update Drive Firmware
(Offline)
Current view (library or partition)
must be offline
Working With Local User Accounts
You can set up three levels of user accounts: guest, user, and
administrator. Guests see only the main LMC display. Local Users can
operate a partition, but cannot run diagnostic tools, which require
access to the physical library. Administrators can access the entire
physical library and all of its partitions. For a summary of user privileges
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
477
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Working With Local User Accounts
defined by physical library, partition, and command menu, see Table 37
on page 445.
For information on user accounts that reside on a Lightweight Directory
Access Protocol (LDAP) server, see Using LDAP on page 241.
Creating Local User
Accounts
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > User Configuration > Local Users. The Local Users
dialog box appears.
4 To prevent guest login privileges on the library, you must click
Disable Guest Login. You can toggle between Disable Guest Login
and Enable Guest Login.
Note: For a list of commands that are available to users logging
on to the library as a guest, see Table 37 on page 445.
478
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Working With Local User Accounts
5 To create a user account, click Create.
The Local Users - User Account Type dialog box appears.
6 In the Enter User Name text box, type a user name.
Note: User accounts with the names guest, admin, and service
are reserved. You cannot use these names for user
accounts.
7 In the Enter Password text box, type a password.
Note: Passwords that are most secure include a combination of
letters, numbers, and non-alphanumeric characters.
Passwords must be eight or more characters in length. The
word password is not available for use.
8 In the Confirm Password text box, type the password again.
9 For Select Privilege, select a privilege level (Administrator or User).
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
479
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Working With Local User Accounts
Note: For a list of commands that are available to administrators
and users, see Table 37 on page 445.
10 Perform one of the following tasks:
• If you selected Administrator, the Finish button becomes available.
To register your user account selections, click Finish, and then skip
the remaining information in this procedure.
• If you selected User, click Next. The Local Users - User Account
Type - Assign Partitions dialog box appears.
11 On the Local Users - User Account Type - Assign Partitions dialog
box, select the check boxes to the left of the libraries to which you
want the user to have access, or select the Select All check box to
give the user access to all listed libraries.
12 To register your user account selections, click Finish.
Note: The Back button enables you to go back to a previous
dialog box and make changes to your selections.
480
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Working With Local User Accounts
Modifying Local User
Accounts
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > User Configuration > Local Users. The Local Users
dialog box appears.
Note: If you want to modify guest privileges, you can toggle
between Enable Guest Login and Disable Guest Login.
For a list of commands that are available to users logging
on to the library as a guest, see Table 37 on page 445.
4 Click the name of the account that you want to modify to highlight
it, and then click Modify. The following dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
481
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Working With Local User Accounts
5 If you want to change the user account password, type a new
password in both the Enter Password and Confirm Password text
boxes. Otherwise, proceed to the next step.
Note: Passwords that are most secure include a combination of
letters, numbers, and non-alphanumeric characters.
Passwords must be eight or more characters in length. The
word “password” is not available for use.
It is recommended that you change all account passwords
periodically.
6 If you want to change the privilege level of this user account, select
the appropriate privilege level (Administrator or User). Otherwise,
proceed to the next step.
Note: For a list of commands that are available to administrators
and users, see Table 37 on page 445.
7 Perform one of the following tasks:
482
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Working With Local User Accounts
• If Select Privilege is set to Administrator, the Finish button is
available. To register your user account changes, click Finish,
and then skip the remaining information in this procedure.
• If Select Privilege is set to User, click Next. The following dialog
box appears.
8 On this dialog box, select the check boxes to the left of the libraries
to which you want the user to have access, or select the Select All
check box to give the user access to all listed libraries.
9 To register your user account selections, click Finish.
Note: The Back button enables you to go back to a previous dialog
box and make changes to your selections.
Deleting Local User
Accounts
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
483
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Working With Local User Accounts
3 Click Setup > User Configuration > Local Users. The Local Users
dialog box appears.
4 Click the name of the account that you want to delete to highlight
it.
5 Click Delete. A message appears that asks you whether you are sure
that you want to delete the account.
6 Click Yes. The library deletes the user account.
Viewing Local User
Account Permissions
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Setup > User Configuration > Local Users. The Local Users
dialog box appears.
4 To view the permissions for all users, click Permissions. The Users
Permissions dialog box appears.
484
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Shutting Down/Rebooting the Library
5 Click Close to return to the Local Users dialog box.
Shutting Down/Rebooting the Library
Always perform the shutdown process before you remove power from
the library. Shutdown prepares the library’s operation system and
firmware for when you physically turn off power to the library.
Shutdown makes sure that the library finishes all active commands
received from the host and prevents the processing of any new
commands. It also shuts down all partitions.
Reboot shuts down and restarts the library’s operating system and
firmware. When performing a reboot, the library finishes all active
commands received from the host application and does not process any
new commands. The library shuts down all partitions and restarts them
during the reboot. In addition, if automatic inventory is enabled, the
library performs an inventory of cartridges, tape drives, and slots during
a reboot. For more information on automatic inventory, see Setting Up
Policies for the Physical Library on page 180.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
485
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Shutting Down/Rebooting the Library
Caution: Before shutting down or rebooting the library, make
certain there is no I/O activity on any of the partitions.
1 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, select the name of the physical library.
2 Select Operations > System Shutdown. The System Shutdown
dialog box appears with Shutdown selected as the default.
3 Select Shutdown to do a complete shutdown and power off of the
library, or select Reboot to do a reset of the library without
powering off. A message appears that asks you whether you want
to continue.
4
If you are sure that all I/O operations are finished, click OK.
When the shutdown process completes, the LMC displays a messaging
indicating that it is OK to power off the library. The library is now ready
to be powered off.
Note: To recover from a library shutdown, you must cycle power on
the library (power it off and then power it on). See Powering
Off the Library on page 487 and Powering On the Library on
page 487.
486
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Powering Off the Library
Powering Off the Library
Caution: Always perform the shutdown procedure before powering
off the library. Shutdown prepares the library’s operation
system and firmware for when you physically turn off
power to the library. If you do not perform library
shutdown before you power off the library, loss of data
could occur. See Shutting Down/Rebooting the Library on
page 485.
1 After starting the shutdown process, wait for the LMC to display a
messaging indicating that it is OK to power off the library.
2 To turn off power to the library, press the Power button on the
indicator panel.
3 On the power distribution unit(s), set the circuit breaker switch to
the down (O) position.
Powering On the Library
1 Make sure that you wait 15 seconds after powering off the library
before you power it on.
Caution: Waiting 15 seconds is important because the power
supply discharges for 10 seconds after you power off
the library. If you attempt to power on the library too
soon, the power supply will fault.
2 On the power distribution unit(s), set the circuit breaker switch to
the up (I) position.
3 To turn on power to the library, press the Power button on the
indicator panel.
The library begins to boot up. Within five minutes, the LMC display
appears on the library’s touch screen. A library with only a few
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
487
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Locking/Unlocking the I/E Station
drives usually will be fully powered on and ready for use within 10
minutes. However, if a library is large with a high number of drives,
it can take more than an hour for the library to fully power on,
complete its discovery process, and become ready for use. During
the power-on process, the Robotics Enabled indicator flashes.
When the library is fully up and ready to receive commands, the
Robotics Enabled indicator turns solid green.
Locking/Unlocking the I/E Station
The Scalar i6000 I/E stations have multiple open and close sensors.
When you are finished accessing the I/E station, make sure the station
door is fully closed.
There are two reasons the I/E station door locks:
• The library imports or exports a cartridge from the I/E station door.
While the library is attempting to import or export a tape from a
given I/E station slot, only the associated I/E station door is locked in
the closed position. All other I/E station doors remain accessible. On
a Get command from an I/E station slot, the associated I/E station
door remains locked until the media has been successfully moved to
its destination. This allows the media to be returned to the I/E
station slot in the event of a Put error.
• A user has requested that the I/E station door be locked.
• The application software has locked the I/E station as part of the
normal tape movement process.
Administrative users can lock or unlock the I/E station doors using an
option from the Tools menu.
1
488
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Locking/Unlocking the I/E Station
2 Click Tools > I/E Station. The I/E Stations dialog box appears.
Note: The IE Station # column lists the I/E station number for
each door. All single-door I/E stations are numbered
starting with 1at the control module. All double-door I/E
stations are numbered with a number and a letter. The
number is the module number (1 – 8) and the letter either
A (for the left I/E station) or B (for the right I/E station. For
example, I/E station number 2A means the left I/E station in
module 2.
3 To change the state of the I/E station doors, do one of the following:
• To lock an I/E station door, in the appropriate Action column,
click Lock.
• To unlock an I/E station door, in the appropriate Action column,
click Unlock.
4 To return to the main console, click Close.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
489
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
When Robotics Are Not Ready
When Robotics Are Not Ready
When the library robotics are not yet ready to accept commands,
aspects of the LMC are still available while other aspects are not. This
situation can occur during startup, reboot, or while the library is
running. During run time, for example, the robotics will become
unavailable if someone opens and closes an access door without then
pressing the Robotics Enabled button.
Whenever robotics become disabled, a message appears in the Activity
area on the main LMC display that states, “Warning: The Robotics are
not Enabled.” Users can log on locally or remotely while the robotics are
disabled.
Table 43 on page 490 lists the menu commands that are available when
the robotics become disabled either before system discovery can occur
or after system discovery has occurred. As the table shows, significantly
fewer menu commands are available when the library is started up or
rebooted and the robotics become disabled before system discovery
occurs.
Note: Menu commands not listed in the table are not available at all
when the robotics become disabled, regardless of when the
robotics become disabled. Unavailable menu commands are
grayed out on the LMC.
Table 43 Menu Commands
When Robotics are Disabled
Available Menu Commands When Robotics Become Disabled
After
Discovery
Before
Discovery
Operations > Change Mode (for shutdown only)
X
X
Operations > Log Off
X
X
Monitor > Drives
X
Monitor > Connectivity > IO Blade
X
Monitor > Connectivity > SCSI Channel
X
490
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
When Robotics Are Not Ready
Available Menu Commands When Robotics Become Disabled
After
Discovery
Monitor > Connectivity > Fibre Channel
X
Monitor > IE Station
X
Monitor > Slot
X
Monitor > Media
X
Monitor > Sensors
X
Monitor > Users
X
Setup > Setup Wizard
X
Setup > Partitions
X
Setup > Device > IDs
X
Setup > Device > Access > Channel Zoning
X
Setup > Device > Access > FC Host
X
Setup > Connectivity > Port Configuration
X
Setup > Connectivity > Datapath Conditioning
X
Setup > Connectivity > FC Host Port Failover
X
Setup > Network Configuration (from library’s touch screen only)
X
Setup > Physical Library
X
Setup > Users
X
Setup > Notification
X
Setup > Date and Time
X
Setup > Licenses
X
Setup > Email Configuration
X
Setup > Trap Registration
X
Setup > Security
X
X
Tools > Tickets
X
X
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Before
Discovery
X
X
491
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Using the Library Access Feature
Available Menu Commands When Robotics Become Disabled
After
Discovery
Before
Discovery
Tools > Drives
X
Tools > Connectivity
X
Tools > Capture Snapshot
X
Tools > Save/Restore
X
Tools > Verification Tests
X
X
Tools > Command History Log
X
X
View > [physical library name] (Physical)
X
X
View > [partition name] (Partition)
X
View > Views
X
X
Help > Index
X
X
Help > About
X
X
Using the Library Access Feature
The Library Access Wizard provides a 10-minute window for you to open
the library and perform maintenance activities while reporting a status
of “Becoming Ready” to hosts. (If you simply pressed the Robotics
Enabled button and opened an access door, the library would report
“Not Ready” to hosts).
The wizard includes a timer that counts down from 10 minutes. After 10
minutes, the library will go “Not Ready” and hosts will start failing jobs.
The 10-minute window includes the time it takes the library to finish the
current command, your time working in the library, and time for the
library to come ready after you have finished. Since it may take 3 to 4
minutes for the library to come ready, plan your time inside the library
to be as short as possible.
492
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Using the Library Access Feature
Note: The feature is available on the local operator panel only.
From this wizard, you can do the following two things:
• Aisle Access on page 493 — To gain access for inspection or
maintenance.
• Robot Access on page 496 — For replacement or re-installation of a
robot.
Aisle Access
1 From the local operator panel, select Tools > Library > Access to
access the wizard.
2 Click Next to open the Library Access Selection screen.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
493
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Using the Library Access Feature
3 Select Aisle Access and click Next to go to the Library Aisle Access
screen.
494
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Using the Library Access Feature
4 Click the Prepare button and wait until the screen notifies you that
it is safe to open the module door.
The library finishes the current command and begins to report
“Becoming Ready” status to hosts. Once this happens, a dialog box
appears on the screen stating that it is safe to open the door, and
the 10-minute timer starts counting down.
5 Click OK to close the dialog box. (The dialog box will close on its
own after 15 seconds.)
6 Open a module access door and perform your activity. Try to finish
within 6 to 7 minutes.
7 When finished, close the module door and press the Robotics
Enabled button.
8 Wait for the library to come ready (Library Status on the screen
says “Ready” and the Robotics Enabled button comes on solid).
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
495
Chapter 13: Running Your Library
Using the Library Access Feature
The timer stops counting down and a Close button becomes
available. The library is now ready for use.
9 Click Close.
Robot Access
496
Robot removal and installation must be performed by a qualified Service
technician only.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 14
Using the Command Line
Interface
Customers as well as Technical Support personnel can access the library
using a command line interface (CLI). The CLI is fairly rudimentary and
only covers a small portion of the commands available on the library
user interface. The CLI is not intended to replace the GUI, but, rather, to
be an additional tool that can be used if desired.
This chapter covers:
• Logging on to the CLI on page 498
• Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands on page 499
• Initial Path on page 499
• Navigating Paths on page 499
• Global Commands on page 500
• Path-specific Commands on page 502
• Issuing a Command from the Initial Prompt on page 503
• CLI Command List on page 503
Note: The CLI uses the term “mail slot” to mean I/E station slot.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
497
Chapter 14: Using the Command Line Interface
Logging on to the CLI
Logging on to the CLI
1 Enable CLI on the library:
a From the LMC, select Setup > Security.
b Under CLI, select the Enable radio button.
c Under SSH, select the Enable radio button.
Note: Both the CLI and SSH must be enabled in order to use
the command line interface.
d Click OK.
For more information on library security settings, see Configuring
Library Security on page 235.
2 Use SSH to access the CLI.
Note: When using Putty or Tera Term on Windows, enter the user
name and password in boxes.
When using Linux, log in as: ssh admin@library_<ip>
(where <ip> is the IP address of the library).
3 When prompted for the user name, type: admin.
Note: The only user name supported on the CLI is admin.
4 When prompted for the password, type the admin password
configured on the library. The main CLI screen appears.
Welcome to the XXX Library Command Line Interface.
Type 'help' at the prompt for context-sensitive help.
/>
498
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 14: Using the Command Line Interface
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands
Navigate through the CLI by typing names of paths or commands. Once
you reach an intended path, you can execute a command from that
path.The paths can be thought of as a tree with the Initial path as the
root.
Initial Path
The initial path is empty, and is displayed as in the following figure.
Welcome to the XXX Library Command Line Interface.
Type 'help' at the prompt for context-sensitive help.
/>
The initial path is displayed as a '/' character. The path is always followed
by a '>' character.
Navigating Paths
The user types in paths, and then presses enter on the keyboard to
navigate up and down paths. In the following example, the user typed
set. This action changed the prompt, allowing a different set of
commands and paths to become available. The user then typed drive.
The new path is now /set/drive.
Welcome to the XXX Library Command Line Interface.
Type 'help' at the prompt for context-sensitive help.
/> set
/set> drive
/set/drive>
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
499
Chapter 14: Using the Command Line Interface
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands
Global Commands
Global commands are available in all paths. The global commands are:
• Global Command: help on page 500
• Global Command: home on page 501
• Global Command: exit on page 501
• Global Command: up on page 501
Global Command: help
A user invokes this command to get a listing of available paths and
commands.
Welcome to the XXX Library Command Line Interface.
Type 'help' at the prompt for context-sensitive help.
/> help
Global Commands:
----------------------------help - list commands or get help for a specific
command
home - Go to the root level
exit - log out
up
- Go up one level
Paths currently available:
-----------------------------
Commands currently available:
-----------------------------
500
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 14: Using the Command Line Interface
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands
Global Command: home
This command takes the user back to the initial path.
Global Command: exit
This command closes the shell.
Global Command: up
This command moves the customer backwards in the path.
Welcome to the XXX Library Command Line Interface.
Type 'help' at the prompt for context-sensitive help.
/set/drive> up
/set>
/set> drive
/set/drive>
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
501
Chapter 14: Using the Command Line Interface
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands
Path-specific
Commands
Path specific commands are available from in a designated path. The
user must navigate to the correct path to execute the command or list
the entire path and command from the initial prompt.
Welcome to the XXX Library Command Line Interface.
Type 'help' at the prompt for context-sensitive help.
/> move
/move> help
Global Commands:
----------------------------help - list commands or get help for a specific command
home - Go to the root level
exit - log out
up
- Go up one level
Paths currently available:
----------------------------Commands currently available:
----------------------------media - Move between drive, slots, and mail slots
within a partition
502
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 14: Using the Command Line Interface
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands
Issuing a Command
from the Initial Prompt
Welcome to the XXX Library Command Line Interface.
Type 'help' at the prompt for context-sensitive help.
/> move media p1 s10 d1
/set> drive
/set/drive>
CLI Command List
The following commands are available. The commands and their usage
are described below.
• show media on page 504
• move media on page 505
• show firmware revisions on page 507
• show library status on page 508
• show network information on page 509
• set network ip on page 509
• show library configuration on page 510
• show partitions on page 511
• set partition online/offline on page 512
• reboot library on page 513
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
503
Chapter 14: Using the Command Line Interface
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands
show media
show media <partition> [options]
description: Shows media information for storage slots, drives, mail slots, or
all in a particular partition
The partition number is specified using a logical number. Note that using zero
implies the CLI will ignore logical partitions, and return media for the entire
physical library
options: one of the following options is required
all
- shows media information for all storage slots, drives, and
mail slots
slots
[range] - shows media information for all storage slots or those
within a range.
mail
[range] - shows media information for all mail slots or those within
a range.
drives [range] - shows media information for all drives or those within a
range.
The range must be two integers corresponding to the start and end.
1-based.
Ranges are
examples:
media p0 all
-Shows media info for all storage slots, drive, and mail
slots for the physical library
media p2 drives
-Shows media info for all drives in partition 2
media p4 slots 1 100
-Shows media info for storage slots 1 through 100
in partition 4
504
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 14: Using the Command Line Interface
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands
move media
move media <partition> <destination> <source> [force]
description: Moves media between drives, slots, and mail slots within a
partition.
The partition is specified using a number.
of the partition.
For instance:
Pn - Partition number "n" (range 1..16)
The media locations are specified using a media location type
code and the logical address of the location. For instance:
Dn - Drive at logical address "n" (range 1..96)
Mn - Mailslot at logical address "n" (range 1..240)
Sn - Storage slot at logical address "n" (range 1..9999)
force
- Force the partition to be set offline
examples:
media p1 S10 D1
- Moves media from storage slot 10 to drive 1
media p2 D1 M1
- Moves media from drive 1 to mail slot 1
media p3 M1 S10
- Moves media from mail slot 1 to storage slot 10
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
505
Chapter 14: Using the Command Line Interface
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands
example of move media with error:
/>mov med p1 m1 s1
Partition 'Logical Library 01' must be taken offline prior to performing the
operation.
Changing the partition mode to offline will cause robotics actions against
this partition to fail, please ensure all backup applications are not
currently using this partition.
Enter 'y' to continue or 'n' to skip [default='n']: y
Partition 'Logical Library 01' is going to be taken offline.
Moving '000038L3' from Mailbox slot 1 to Storage slot 1
ERROR: Robot is not ready.
Partition 'Logical Library 01' set back online!
506
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 14: Using the Command Line Interface
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands
show firmware revisions
show firmware revisions description: Shows all of the firmware revisions for a
ny valid component.
examples:
show firmware revisions
/>sho fir rev
Current Firmware Revisions
Tape Library Firmware Revision
: 630Q.GS20601
Tape Drive firmware revisions:
Phys. Log
Drive #
Part
Drive Name
----- ----- ----- ---------------1
1
1
Ultrium 5-SCSI
2
2
1
Ultrium 5-SCSI
3
3
1
Ultrium 5-SCSI
.
.
.
94
94
1
Ultrium 5-SCSI
95
95
1
Ultrium 5-SCSI
96
96
1
Ultrium 5-SCSI
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Firmware Revision
----------------I3FW
I3FW
I3FW
I3FW
I3FW
I3FW
507
Chapter 14: Using the Command Line Interface
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands
show library status
show library
description:
This command
whether each
examples:
status
Shows the current library state and status of each component.
should show whether the library is online, offline, or inventorying.
drive is loaded or not.
show library status
It should also show
/>sho lib stat
Component
-----------------------System Health
Control
Event: 106
interface) has failed
Status
------Red
Red
Red
Description
------------------------------------------------------Failed
Failed; Active events: 1
Chassis Management Blade(CMB) circuit card at [1,1,1,1,2](CMB ethernet
Connectivity
Green
Operational
Power
Green
Operational
Cooling
Event: 1
Warning Range
Event: 2
Warning Range
Event: 3
Critical Range
Event: 4
Critical Range
Event: 5
Critical Range
Red
Red
Failed; Active events: 5
Network Chassis fan in [1,8,1,1](CMB fan 1 speed sensor) is in the Low
Red
Network Chassis fan in [1,1,1,1](CMB fan 1 speed sensor) is in the Low
Red
Network Chassis fan in [1,7,1,1](CMB fan 1 speed sensor) is in the Low
Red
Network Chassis fan in [1,4,1,1](CMB fan 1 speed sensor) is in the Low
Red
Network Chassis fan in [1,3,1,1](CMB fan 1 speed sensor) is in the Low
Robotics
Event: 107
Robot# 1
Yellow
Yellow
Red
Warning; Active events: 1
Front door switch hardware in Module 1 is open
Not Ready; Manual Intervention Required
Drives
Drive#
Drive#
Drive#
.
.
.
Drive#
Drive#
Drive#
1 (P1 D1)
2 (P1 D2)
3 (P1 D3)
Green
Green
Green
Green
Operational
Online; Drive Empty
Online; Drive Empty
Online; Drive Empty
94 (P1 D94)
95 (P1 D95)
96 (P1 D96)
Green
Green
Green
Online; Drive Empty
Online; Drive Empty
Online; Drive Empty
508
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 14: Using the Command Line Interface
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands
show network information
show network info
description: Shows the current library network configuration.
This command should show the library IPv4 and IPv6 configuration, current
addresses, etc.
examples:
show network information
/>show net info
- Hostname: dvt20-ms.hw.quantum.com
- Domain Name: N/A
- IP versions(s) enabled: IPv4 enabled, IPv6 disabled
- DHCPv4: disabled
- IPv4 addr/mask/gtwy: 10.20.171.25 / 255.255.248.0 / 10.20.168.1/>
set network ip
set network ip
description: Allows the user to set the basic IPv4 static address information.
examples:
set network ip
/>set net ip 10.0.0.3 255.255.255.0 10.0.0.1
/>
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
509
Chapter 14: Using the Command Line Interface
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands
show library configuration
/>sho lib con
Tape library product ID: Scalar i6000
Tape library serial number: 273190052
Tape library firmware Revision: 630Q.GS20601
Number of frames: 12
Number of Drives (installed/assigned): 96/96
Number of Storage slots (licensed/installed/assigned): 100/4608/102
Number of Mailbox slots (installed/assigned): 24/24
Partitions: Logical Library 01
Active Licenses: Partition (1 units)
Capacity On Demand (100 units)
510
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 14: Using the Command Line Interface
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands
show partitions
show partitions
description: Prints the partition number and name
examples:
show partitions
/>sho par
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Num
State
Partition Name
----
-------
--------------------------------
P1
Online
LL0
P2
Online
LL1
P3
Online
LL2
P4
Online
LL3
P5
Online
LL4
P6
Online
LL5
P7
Online
LL6
P8
Online
LL7
P9
Online
LL8
P10
Online
LL9
P11
Online
LL10
P12
Online
LL11
P13
Online
LL12
P14
Online
LL13
P15
Online
LL14
P16
Online
LL15
511
Chapter 14: Using the Command Line Interface
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands
set partition online/offline
set partition online|offline <partition> [force]
Invalid number of arguments: 0 (1 to 2 expected)
set partition online|offline <partition> [force]
description: Sets the partition state to online or offline for the specified partition.
The partition number is specified using a logical number, and is 1-based.
example:
online p1
-Sets partition 1 to online - unless the robot is offline (door open)
offline p2
-Shows a prompt about the fact that the host will no longer be able to control the partition.
and sets the partition offline.
offline p2 force
-Forces partition p2 offline.
examples:
>set partition offline p2
Partition 'HP LTO5' is going to be taken offline.
Changing the partition mode to offline will cause robotics actions against this partition to
fail, please ensure all backup applications are not currently using this partition.
Enter 'y' to continue or 'n' to skip [default='n']:
/>set partition offline p2 force
Setting logical partition 'HP LTO5' offline!
/>set partition online p1
Partition p1: 'HP LTO4' is already online.
/>set partition online p2
Partition 'HP LTO5' is going to be taken back online.
Changing the partition mode to online will allow robotics actions against this partition to
complete, and inform the backup applications of any changes.
Enter 'y' to continue or 'n' to skip [default='n']:
512
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 14: Using the Command Line Interface
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands
reboot library
Note: The library performs the same rebooting actions whether you
reboot from the CLI or from the GUI.
Reboot library
description: Allows the user to reboot the library
controller in a graceful manner
examples:
reboot library
/>reboot lib
Are you sure you want to reboot the library (Y/N):
:y
Rebooting library controller….
/>
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
513
Chapter 14: Using the Command Line Interface
Command Line Interface (CLI) Commands
514
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15
Maintaining Your Library
The library includes advanced system monitoring and alerting
mechanisms that inform you of library status and issues. It provides you
with status information about various library subsystems and
components. It also notifies you of issues it detects and guides you
through diagnosing and correcting issues before problems interfere
with backups.
This chapter describes commands that you can select from the Monitor
and Tools menus to monitor the library, configure and test drives, work
with connectivity, capture snapshots, update library software and drive
firmware, run the Teach feature to calibrate and configure the robot,
save and restore library configurations, and run tests to verify successful
FRU removals and replacements and verify successful library installations
and configurations.
Note: The Tickets command on the Tools menu displays tickets that
the library created when it detected issues within its
subsystems. For more information about tickets, see
Troubleshooting Your Library on page 43.
This chapter consists of the following sections:
• Monitoring the Library on page 516
• Maintenance Actions on page 552
• Is the Access Door Closed? on page 552
• Is a Cartridge Old? on page 552
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
515
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
• Using Library Explorer on page 553
• Drives on page 559
• Re-enable Robot Remotely on page 569
• Working With Connectivity on page 570
• Capturing Snapshots on page 572
• Updating Library Software on page 579
• Updating Drive Firmware on page 592
• Teaching the Library (Configuration and Calibration) on
page 599
• Saving and Restoring Library Configuration on page 601
• Viewing the Drive Resource Utilization Reports on page 610
• Setting Up Advanced Reporting Options on page 616
• Working With Verification Tests on page 622
• Using the Partitions Defragmentation Tool on page 674
• Removing Lodged Cartridges on page 677
• Using Sift Sort on page 678
• Retrieving MIBs on page 682
• Maintaining Air Filters on page 683
• Robot, Tower and Power Rail Health Checks on page 687
Monitoring the Library
The library can provide detailed information about the status of the
library and its various components. You also can access statistics about
the library and other helpful information, such as library and
component serial numbers, port numbers, World Wide Names (WWNs),
IDs, and firmware versions.
This section explains how to use Monitor menu commands to display
status information for the following general areas:
516
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
• System
• Drives
• Connectivity
• I/E stations
• Extended I/E Slots
• Slots
• Media
• Sensors
• Email Configuration Record
• Users
• Partitions
• EKM Servers
Monitoring System
Status
The System Status dialog box displays status information for various
library entities (hardware or system metrics). You can perform this
procedure while viewing either the physical library or a partition.
1 Click Monitor > System or click the System Status button. The
System Status dialog box appears, displaying four (4) tabs,
Components Tab, Robots Tab, Drives Tab and, if installed, Towers
Tab. These are explained in detail below.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
517
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
2 From the System Status dialog box, you can perform the following
tasks:
• Change the sorting of system items in the status list (for
example, by item or ID) by clicking the column heading by
which you want the system items sorted. Repeatedly clicking a
column heading toggles between ascending and descending
order.
• Mail, save, or print status information by using the Send button
(see Mailing, Saving, and Printing Status Information on
page 548).
Components Tab
The Components tab displays the following information about the
library/partition being viewed:
Name
ID
Status Description
Version
Library/partition
The library/partition
serial number
The status of the library (Online or
Offline).
Current Firmware
Version
MCB version
The MCB serial
number
The current status of the MCB
(Good, Degraded, or Failed).
Current Firmware
Version
518
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
Name
ID
Status Description
Version
RCU version
The RCU serial
number
The current status of the RCU
(Good, Degraded, or Failed).
.
Current Firmware
Version
CMB version
The CMB serial
number
For each CMB that is present, the
current status of the CMB (Good,
Degraded, or Failed).
Current Firmware
Version
Library UpTime
The library serial
number
The amount of time that the
library has been up (in days,
hours, minutes, and seconds).
N/A
Robots Tab
The Robots tab displays the following information for each robot in the
library:
• Name — Left or Right (if only one robot, this will be Left).
• Status — Unknown, Good, Not Installed, Initializing, Failed and N/A.
• State — Varied On or Varied Off.
• Serial number — Robot serial number.
• Version — Robot firmware version.
• Generation — Hardware generation (Gen 1 or Gen 2).
• Parked — Indicates whether robot is in its parking space (Yes or
No). If the robot is Gen 1, this will display as N/A.
• V Motion — Total number of meters of vertical motion traveled by
this robot.
• H Motion — Total number of meters of horizontal motion traveled
by this robot.
• Media Moves — Total number of media move operations
performed by this robot.
Drives Tab
The Drives tab displays the following information about the library/
partition being viewed:
• Serial Number — The serial number of the drive
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
519
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
• Location — The coordinates of the drive within the library
• State — Whether the drive is varied on or off
• Partition — Which partition the drive is assigned to
Towers Tab
The Towers tab only displays if a tower (HDEM) is installed in the library
and details the following information:
• Tower # — The location of the tower in the library
• Status — If the tower is available
• Mode — If the tower is online or offline
• Scanner — If a barcode scanner is installed or not
• State — Whether the tower is varied on or off
• Door Status - Whether the rear access door is open or closed
Monitoring Drive Status
The Drive Status dialog box displays status information for tape drives
in the currently selected partition. If you are viewing the physical library,
status information for all drives appears. You can perform this
procedure while viewing either the physical library or a partition.
1 Click Monitor > Drives. The Drive Status dialog box appears.
520
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
Figure 62 Left view of Drive
Status dialog box
Figure 63 Right view of Drive
Status dialog box
The following table describes the elements on the Drive Status
dialog box.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
521
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
.
Element
Description
Type
The type of drive.
WWN
For a Fibre drive only, the World Wide Name of the drive.
WWPN Port 1
For a Fibre Channel drive only, the World Wide Port Name of the drive’s port 1.
WWPN Port 2
For a Fibre Channel drive only, the World Wide Port Name of the drive’s port 2.
Link Status P1
The status of port 1 on the Fibre Channel drive.
Link Status P2
The status of port 2 on the Fibre Channel drive.
SCSI ID
For a SCSI drive only, the SCSI ID of the drive.
RAS
The status of the drive as reported by the RAS system (for example, Good or
Failed).
Firmware level
The firmware level of the drive.
Media ID
The barcode of the loaded cartridge.
Location
The drive coordinate location within the library. For information about location
coordinates, see Understanding Location Coordinates on page 459.
Physical SN
The serial number of the particular drive.
Logical SN
The logical serial number that the library assigns to a drive in a specific
location. This is not the serial number of the particular drive (see Physical SN in
this table). If a drive is replaced by another drive in the same library location,
the logical serial number remains the same. From the host’s perspective, the
replacement drive is the same as the original one. If the logical serial number
addressing feature is disabled for the library, Disabled appears in this field.
Vendor
The name of the drive vendor.
IO Blade
The location of the I/O blade to which the drive is attached. Locations are
indicated by means of a coordinate system. For information about location
coordinates, see Understanding Location Coordinates on page 459.
EEB
Indicates whether or not the drive is connected to an EEB (Ethernet Expansion
blade).
Only HP LTO-5 or later drives can be connected to an EEB.
Note: A drive can be connected to either an I/O Blade or an EEB, not both.
522
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
Element
Description
Control Path
Reports if a drive is a primary (CP) or a secondary (CPF) drive. The values are
Primary, Secondary, or None. It also reports which drive is currently the active
drive by displaying “(Active)”, example “Primary (Active)”.”
Data Path
Failover
Indicates whether data path failover is enabled or disabled.
Encryption
Indicates whether or not encryption is set up as Application Managed or
Library Managed.
Partition Name
The name of the partition to which the drive is assigned.
Usage Type
Indicates whether the drive is configured as a Standard drive (used for data
read/write) or as aEDLM drive (part of a Library Managed partition for testing
media integrity).
Only LTO-5 or later drives can be configured as MeDIA drives.
2 From the Drive Status dialog box, you can perform the following
tasks:
• Change the sorting of drives in the status list (for example, by
type or location) by clicking the column heading by which you
want the drives sorted. Repeatedly clicking a column heading
toggles between ascending and descending order.
• Mail, save, or print status information by using the Send button
(see Mailing, Saving, and Printing Status Information on
page 548).
Monitoring
Connectivity Status
The following dialog boxes display status information about
connectivity:
• The IO Blade Status dialog box displays information about the I/O
blades.
Note: If the library does not detect at least one chassis
management blade (CMB) in the library, the IO Blade
selection does not appear on the menu.
• The Fibre Channel Status dialog box displays information about
the FC connections on the MCB and the I/O blades (if any exist).
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
523
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
• The Ethernet Blade Status dialog box displays information about
the Ethernet Expansion Blade (EEB) connection.
You must perform the following procedures while viewing the physical
library.
Viewing I/O Blade Status Information
1 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
2 Click Monitor > Connectivity > IO Blade. The IO Blade Status
dialog box appears.
See the following table for descriptions of the elements on the IO
Blade Status dialog box.
Element
Description
Type
The type of I/O blade (“FC IOB” indicates an I/O blade).
Location
The location of the blade (see I/O Blade Locations on page 468).
Firmware Version
The firmware version of the blade.
Serial Number
The serial number of the blade.
WWN
The World Wide Name of the blade.
CC LUN
The Command and Control LUN (typically, the CC LUN is mapped to LUN 0).
3 From the IO Blade Status dialog box, you can perform the
following tasks:
• Change the sorting of I/O blades in the status list (for example,
by type or location) by clicking the column heading by which
524
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
you want the I/O blades sorted. Repeatedly clicking a column
heading toggles between ascending and descending order.
• Mail, save, or print status information by using the Send button
(see Mailing, Saving, and Printing Status Information on
page 548.
Viewing Fibre Channel Status Information
1 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
2 Click Monitor > Connectivity > Fibre Channel. The Fibre Channel
Status dialog box appears.
The following table describes the elements on the Fibre Channel
Status dialog box.
Element
Description
Port Index
The port number.
Location
The location of the port (for example, MCB).
Port Mode
The mode of the port (Target or Initiator).
Status
The status of the Fibre Channel (Operational, Lost Sync).
WWPN
The World Wide Port Name.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
525
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
Element
Description
Loop ID
For arbitrated loops only, the loop ID. “-1” indicates that Soft is selected on the
Fibre Channel Parameters dialog box (see Port Configuration on page 173).
Connection
The type of connection (Loop, Point to Point, Loop Preferred).
Speed
The speed in gigabits per second (1 Gb/s, 2 Gb/s, 4 Gb/s, or Auto). “Unknown”
appears in this field when the Fibre Channel link is not up and ready (“Lost
Sync” status).
3 From the Fibre Channel Status dialog box, you can perform the
following tasks:
• Change the sorting of Fibre Channel connections in the status
list (for example, by type or location) by clicking the column
heading by which you want the connections sorted. Repeatedly
clicking a column heading toggles between ascending and
descending order.
• Mail, save, or print status information by using the Send button
(see Mailing, Saving, and Printing Status Information on
page 548).
Viewing Ethernet Blade Status Information
1 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
2 Click Monitor > Connectivity > Ethernet Blade. The Ethernet
Blade Status dialog box appears.
526
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
See the following table for descriptions of the elements on the
Ethernet Blade Status dialog box.
Element
Description
Type
The type of blade.
Location
The location of the blade by means of a coordinate system. For information
about location coordinates, see Understanding Location Coordinates on
page 459.
Firmware Version
The firmware level of the blade.
Serial Number
The serial number of the blade.
3 From the Ethernet Blade Status dialog box, you can Mail, save, or
print status information by using the Send button (see Mailing,
Saving, and Printing Status Information on page 548.
Monitoring I/E Station
Status
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
The I/E Station Status dialog box displays detailed information about
the magazine slots in the I/E stations within the currently selected
partition. If you are working in the physical library, status information
527
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
appears for all magazine slots in all I/E stations. You can perform this
procedure while viewing either the physical library or a partition.
1 Click Monitor > I/E Station or use the I/E toolbar button. The I/E
Station Status dialog box appears.
The following table describes the elements on the I/E Station Status
dialog box.
Element
Description
IE Station #
All single door I/E stations are numbered starting with 1 at the control
module.
All double door I/E stations are numbered with a number and a letter - for
example 2A and 2B--the frame number (1-16), with A as the left I/E
station and B the right.
Magazine #
528
The number of the I/E station magazine (numbered from top to bottom in
the I/E station).
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
Element
Description
Media ID
The cartridge barcode or the word EMPTY.
Slot Type
The media type (for example, LTO).
Partition Name
The name of the partition to which the I/E station is assigned.
2 From the IE Station Status dialog box, you can perform the
following tasks:
• Change the sorting of magazine slots in the status list (for
example, by I/E station number or partition name) by clicking
the column heading by which you want the magazine slots
sorted. Repeatedly clicking a column heading toggles between
ascending and descending order.
• Mail, save, or print status information by using the Send button
(see Mailing, Saving, and Printing Status Information on
page 548).
Monitoring Slot and
Extended I/E Slot Status
Note: To view slot status for Extended I/E slots, use the procedure
below.
The Slots Status dialog box displays detailed information about the
slots in the currently selected partition. If you are working in the
physical library, you can view status information for all slots. Because
the number of slots in a physical or partition can be quite large, you can
select a subset of the available slots. You can perform this procedure
while viewing either the physical library or a partition.
1 Click Monitor > Slots. The Slots Status dialog box appears.
Note: For Extended I/E, click Monitor > Extended I/E Slots.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
529
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
The following table describes the elements on the Slots Status
dialog box.
Element
Description
In the Filter area:
Location: Aisle
The location of slots by aisle number.
Location:
Module
The location of slots by module number.
Location: Rack
The location of slots by rack number.
Location:
Section
The location of slots by section number.
Location:
Column
The location of slots by column number.
Location: Row
The location of slots by row number.
530
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
Element
Description
In the status list area:
Media ID
The slot barcode.
Location
The location of the slot (see Understanding Location Coordinates on
page 459).
Slot Type
The type of slot media (for example, LTO).
# Puts
The number of puts during the library’s history.
Partition Name
The name of the partition to which the slot is assigned.
2 From the Slots Status dialog box, you can perform the following
tasks:
• Change the sorting of slots in the status list (for example, by
location or slot type) by clicking the column heading by which
you want the slots sorted. Repeatedly clicking a column heading
toggles between ascending and descending order.
• Use filtering criteria to select the slots that you want to appear
in the status list on the dialog box (see Filtering Slots From the
Status List on page 531).
• Mail, save, or print status information by using the Send button
(see Mailing, Saving, and Printing Status Information on
page 548).
Filtering Slots From the Status List
You can specify the slots that you want to appear in the status list by
selecting location, slot type, and state criteria from the Filter area of the
Slots Status dialog box.
1 Use one or more of the following drop-down lists to specify the
slots that you want to appear in the status list:
• To specify slots by location, click the appropriate option from
each of the Location drop-down lists: Aisle, Module, Rack,
Section, Column, and Row. The defaults are set to All unless a
drop-down list does not have more than one option. For
example, the Aisle drop-down list is always set to 1 by default
because only one aisle exists in the library. Therefore, the dropQuantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
531
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
down list also is grayed out and selections cannot be made from
it.
These selections correspond to location coordinates for the
physical library. For example, to select all slots in the drive-side
rack of the control module, click 1 for module, 1 for rack, All for
section, All for column, and All for row. For more information
about location coordinates, see Understanding Location
Coordinates on page 459.
• To specify slots by media type, click All or a specific media type,
such as LTO, from the Slot Type drop-down list. Only media
types that are currently used in the library appear in the dropdown list. The default is set to All.
• To specify slots by slot state, click All, Occupied, or Empty from
the State drop-down list. The default is set to All.
2 Click Show.
Monitoring Media
Status
The Media Status dialog box displays detailed information about the
media in the currently selected partition. If you are working in the
physical library, you can view status information for all media. Because
the number of media in a physical or partition can be quite large, you
can select a subset of the available slots. You can perform this procedure
while viewing either the physical library or a partition.
1 Click Monitor > Media. The Media Status dialog box appears.
532
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
The following table describes the elements on the Media Status
dialog box.
Element
Description
In the Filter area:
Media ID
The cartridge barcode (allows the asterisk [*] wildcard character).
Media Type
The type of cartridge (for example, LTO).
In the status list area:
Media ID
The cartridge barcode.
Media Type
The type of cartridge (for example, LTO).
Location
The location of the cartridge (seeUnderstanding Location Coordinates on
page 459).
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
533
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
Element
Description
# Mounts
The number of mounts within the history of the library.
Encryption
Reports whether the media is encrypted. The values are Encrypted, Not
Encrypted or Unknown.
Partition Name
The name of the partition to which the cartridge is assigned.
Note: When viewed from a Active Vault partition, this column is named
Source Partition and reports the partition from which the media came.
Source Partition
This column appears when the library view is set to an Active Vault partition. It
reports the partition from which the media came.
2 From the Media Status dialog box, you can perform the following
tasks:
• Change the sorting of media in the status list (for example, by
location or media type) by clicking the column heading by
which you want the media sorted. Repeatedly clicking a column
heading toggles between ascending and descending order.
• Use filtering criteria to select the media that you want to appear
in the status list on the dialog box (see Filtering Media From the
Status List on page 534).
• Mail, save, or print status information by using the Send button
(see Mailing, Saving, and Printing Status Information on
page 548).
Filtering Media From the Status List
You can specify the media that you want to appear in the status list by
selecting media ID and media type criteria from the Filter area of the
Media Status dialog box.
1 Use one or both of the following elements to specify the media that
you want to appear in the status list:
• To specify a media item by media ID, type the exact barcode that
is associated with a particular cartridge in the Media ID text
box. You also can use the asterisk (*) as a wild card character to
represent one or more characters in the media ID. This will list
all media for IDs that match the designated pattern. For
534
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
example, if you set the Media ID value to “J00*”, any media
with IDs that start with “J00” will appear in the status list.
• To specify media by media type, click All or a specific media
type, such as LTO, from the Slot Type drop-down list. Only
media types that are currently used in the library appear in the
drop-down list. The default is set to All.
2 Click Show.
Monitoring Sensor
Status
The Sensor Status dialog box displays detailed information about the
library’s power and cooling systems, such as operational statuses,
temperatures, voltages or wattages, and fan speeds in rotations per
minute (RPM). You can perform the following procedures while viewing
either the physical library or a partition.
Accessing the Sensor Status Dialog Box
Click Monitor > Sensors. The Sensor Status dialog box appears with
the Cooling Fan tab displayed.
Displaying Cooling Fan Information
1 To display detailed information about the library’s cooling fans, click
the Cooling Fan tab on the Sensor Status dialog box.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
535
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
The following table describes the elements on the Cooling Fan tab.
Element
Description
Name
The name of the cooling fan sensor.
Status
The status of the cooling fan. If the fan speed is within normal operating
limits, the status is nominal. Otherwise, a warning or alarm is indicated.
RPM
The current speed of the fan in rotations per minute (RPM).
Location
The location of the cooling fan within the library. Locations of cooling fans
for control management blades (CMBs) are indicated by means of a
coordinate system. For information about location coordinates, see
Understanding Location Coordinates on page 459.
2 To view current information, click Refresh.
Displaying Power Supply Information
1 To display detailed information about the library’s power supplies,
click the Power Supply tab on the Sensor Status dialog box.
Table 44 on page 537 describes the elements on the Power Supply
tab.
536
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
Table 44 Power Supply tab
Element
Description
Name
The name of the power supply sensor.
Wattage
The amount of power in watts.
Type
The type of power (AC or DC).
Location
The location of the power supply within the library.
2 To view current information, click Refresh.
Displaying Temperature Information
1 To display temperature status information for various library
components, click the Temperature tab on the Sensor Status
dialog box.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
537
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
Table 45 on page 538 describes the elements on the Temperature
tab.
Table 45 Temperature tab
Element
Description
Name
The name of the temperature sensor.
Status
The temperature status in the vicinity of the sensor. If the temperature is
within normal operational limits, the status is nominal. Otherwise, a warning
or alarm is indicated.
Celsius
The sensor’s temperature reading in degrees Celsius.
Location
The location of the temperature sensor within the library. Control
management blade (CMB) locations are indicated by means of a coordinate
system. For information about location coordinates, see Understanding
Location Coordinates on page 459.
2 To view current information, click Refresh.
Displaying Voltage Information
1 To display voltage status information for various library
components, click the Voltage tab on the Sensor Status dialog box.
538
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
Table 46 on page 539 describes the elements on the Voltage tab.
Table 46 Voltage tab
Element
Description
Name
The name of the voltage sensor.
Status
The voltage status at the location of the sensor. If the voltage is within
normal operational limits, the status is nominal. Otherwise, a warning or
alarm is indicated.
Millivolts
The sensor’s voltage reading in millivolts.
Type
The type of power at the location of the sensor (AC or DC).
Location
The location of the voltage sensor within the library. Control management
blade (CMB) locations are indicated by means of a coordinate system. For
information about location coordinates, see Understanding Location
Coordinates on page 459.
2 To view current information, click Refresh.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
539
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
Displaying Humidity Information
Gen 2 libraries display humidity information. A humidity sensor is
attached to each robot.
1 To display humidity status information for various library
components, click the Humidity tab on the Sensor Status dialog
box.
Table 47 on page 540 describes the elements on the Humidity tab.
Table 47 Humidity tab
Element
Description
Robot
Which robot (left or right) the humidity sensor is attached to. If the library
has only one robot, this column displays “Left.”
Status
Robot’s online or offline status.
Humidity
The humidity of the interior of the library at the location of the sensor.
2 To view current information, click Refresh.
Monitoring Users
Status
The Users Status dialog box displays detailed information about users
who are currently logged on to the library. You can perform this
procedure while viewing either the physical library or a partition.
1 Click Monitor > Users. The Users Status dialog box appears.
540
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
Table 48 on page 541 describes the elements on the Users Status
dialog box.
Table 48 User Status
Element
Description
Name
The name of the user who is currently logged on to the library.
Role
The type of user (for example, User or Admin).
Host
The name of the host computer from which the user is connected to the
library.
IP
The IP address of the host computer.
OS
The host computer’s operating system.
OS User
The name of the user who is currently logged on to the host computer.
2 To view current information, click Refresh.
Monitoring Partition
Status
If you want to see settings and information for a partition but do not
need to make changes, you can view partition status and partition
details. Unlike modifying a partition, viewing the status and details does
not require you to take a partition offline.
1 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
541
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
2 On the menu bar, click Monitor > Partitions > Status. The
Partitions Status dialog box appears with a list of all logical
partitions in the library and information about each partition.
Figure 64 Partitions Status
Dialog box
Left side of dialog box
Right side of dialog box
542
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
Table 49 on page 543 describes the elements on the Partitions
Status dialog box.
Table 49 Partition Status
Element
Description
Name
The name of the partition.
Status
The status of the partition (Online or Offline).
Media Type
The type of media used in the partition (LTO-1, LTO-2, LTO-3, LTO-4, LTO-5,
LTO-6 or LTO-7).
Interface
The type of interface used to connect to the host (FC).
#Drives
The number of tapes drives in the partition.
#Storage Slots
The number of storage slots in the partition.
#I/E Slots
The number of I/E station slots in the partition.
Media Type Checking
The current setting for media type checking (Required, Not Required, or
Disabled).
Media Identifier
The current setting for return media identifier (Suffix, Pass Through, Prefix,
or Disabled).
Drive Autolevel
The current setting for drive firmware autoleveling (Enabled or Disabled).
Auto Drive Clean
The current setting for automatic drive cleaning (Enabled or Disabled) as
well as the number of motion hours set for each drive cleaning.
Encryption
Defines the encryption method for the partition. The values are Not
Supported, Application Managed, or Library Managed. If the partition is
enabled for FIPS, “FIPS” appears in parentheses.
LCP WWPN
The Library Control Path (LCP) World Wide Port Name (WWPN) for a
partition. A WWPN will only be listed if control path or control path
failover is used to present the partition to the SAN.
Library Type
Logical library/partition type - either Standard or Library Managed. If
library managed, the type of library managed partition is listed in
parentheses (for example, AMP, EDLM, or VAULT).
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
543
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
3 To see additional details for a partition, click the partition in the list,
and then click Details. The Partition Details dialog box appears. It
shows additional information about the partition, such as vendor,
product ID, and serial number.
4 Click Close to close the Partition Details dialog box.
5 Click Close to return to the Partitions Status dialog box.
Monitoring Partition
Policies
544
To view EDLM or Active Vault policies configured on partitions, click
Monitor > Partitions > Policies from the LMC.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
The Partition Policy Configuration screen appears. You can click the
items in the Policy Tree section to expand them, or view the information
in the Policies sections below. The Policies sections contain tables with
information about EDLM and Active Vault policies, as well as external
application and API client plug-in information.
You can click and drag the horizontal divider bar below the Policy Tree
section to create more or less viewing space for the Policy Tree section if
desired. You can also click the up/down arrows on the left side of the
divider bar to hide or display the Policies sections.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
545
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
Divider bar
Monitoring EKM Server
Status
For each server configured, you can monitor the server using the EKM
Server Status dialog box.
1 From the View menu, click the name of the physical library or
partition.
546
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
2 On the menu bar, click Monitor > EKM Servers. The EKM Server
Status dialog box appears.
For each server, the EKM Server Status dialog box displays the
following information - the table describes the elements on the EKM
Server Status dialog box.
.
Element
Description
Type
The encryption server type (Q-EKM, SKM, KMIP).
Status
The current status of the server:
Note: Note: When the server indicates a “Running” status, this
server will receive the next key request.
Q-EKM — Active, Standby or Not Configured
SKM — Active Running, Standby Running or Down, or Not
Configured
KMIP — Active Running, Standby Running or Down, or Not
Configured
IP Address/Name
The IP or host name of the server.
Port
The server port number:
Q-EKM— Default 3801 for non-SSL and 443 for SSL
SKM — default 6000
KMIP — 5696
State
Whether the server is Primary or Secondary.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
547
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
Element (Continued)
Description
Key Generation
For SKM only:
Yes — encryption key generation in progress
No — encryption key generation not in progress.
Q-EKM, KMIP — n/a
Version
For SKM only: Software version number
Serial Number
For SKM only: Server serial number
3 You can mail, save, or print status information by using the Send
button (see Mailing, Saving, and Printing Status Information on
page 548).
Mailing, Saving, and
Printing Status
Information
The Send button on each of the following status dialog boxes enables
you to send status information to e-mail addresses:
• System Status
• Drive Status
• IO Blade Status
• SCSI Channel Status
• Fibre Channel Status
• Ethernet Blade Status
• I/E Station Status
• Slots Status
• Media Status
If you are accessing the LMC from a remote client, Send also enables
you to save the information to a file or print it.
Note: You can mail, save, or print status information from a remote
client. However, you cannot save or print the information from
the library’s touch screen.
The information that is sent will be the same as what the status dialog
box appears at the time that you click Send.
548
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
Note: Before you perform the following procedure, you must make
sure that e-mail is appropriately configured in the LMC so that
the library can send information to the recipient. See
Configuring E-mail on page 187.
1 Make sure that the status dialog box displays the status information
that you want to send.
2 Click Send. The Email, Save or Print Table dialog box appears.
3 Perform one of the following tasks:
• To indicate that you want to send the information as an e-mail
message to a recipient, select Email, and then either type an email address in the Email text box or select an existing address
from the drop-down list. You can type a comment in the
Comment text box to send with the information.
• To indicate that you want to save the information, select Save,
and then either type in the Save text box a path and a file name
to which you want the information saved or click Browse to
specify a location and a file name.
Note: The Save option is available to remote client users only.
It appears grayed out on the touch screen.
• To indicate that you want to send the information to a printer,
select Print.
Note: The Print option is available to remote client users only.
It appears grayed out on the touch screen.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
549
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
4 To send, click OK.
Mailing or Saving the
Configuration Record
Use the Email Configuration Record dialog to:
•
Send the configuration record to a selected e-mail address
•
Save the configuration record to a specified .txt file
For information about the configuration record, see About the
Configuration Record on page 252.
Before you can e-mail the configuration record, the library e-mail
account must be configured. For information on configuring the library
e-mail account, see Configuring E-mail on page 187.
Note: Only users with administrative privileges can e-mail or save the
configuration record.
Mailing the Configuration Record
To e-mail the configuration record:
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 From the menu bar, click Monitor > Email Configuration Record.
The Email Configuration Record dialog box appears.
3 Click Email and select the destination e-mail address.
550
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Monitoring the Library
Note: You can only specify one e-mail address. If you need to
send the configuration record to multiple destinations,
repeat this procedure for each e-mail address.
4 Use the Comment box to type any additional information you want
to include in the e-mail message.
5 Click OK to send the configuration record and your comment text to
the specified e-mail address and close the Email Configuration
Record dialog box.
The e-mail message includes both the configuration record information
and your comments as embedded text with “Library Configuration
Information” as the subject.
Saving the Configuration Record
To save the configuration record:
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 From the menu bar, click Monitor > Email Configuration Record.
The Email Configuration Record dialog box appears.
3 Click Save and use the Browse function to specify the file name and
location.
4 Click OK to save the configuration record to the specified location
and close the Email Configuration Record dialog box.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
551
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Maintenance Actions
If you are experiencing system problems, make a quick check of
subsystems and components before looking for a service ticket or
contacting technical support. Your service representative might ask you
to check these things or, if you are an administrator, you might be asked
to run a diagnostic procedure or upload new firmware.
Administrative users have access to the all the commands on the Tools
menu. Use this menu to test the drives, as well as to capture a snapshot,
to update firmware, and to use the Teach tool. The Tickets command
on the Tools menu displays tickets that the library creates when it
detects issues within its subsystems. For more information about the
Tickets command, see Troubleshooting Your Library on page 43. For a
summary of user privileges defined by physical library, partition, and
command menu, see Table 37 on page 445.
Is the Access Door
Closed?
Library operations are put into a Not Ready state when the access door
is opened. If library operations have stopped, check whether the access
door is shut and the Robotics Enabled indicator is solid green.
Is a Cartridge Old?
Cartridges can become old and less dependable. If you experience
problems reading, writing, or otherwise using a cartridge, try the
following courses of action:
• Use the Monitor > Media command to determine the number of
mounts for the cartridge, and then compare that number to other
cartridges in the system. If the cartridge has been used excessively,
replace it with a new cartridge.
• Ask an administrator to put the cartridge in a different drive, and
then use the Tools > Drives command to check the error count. If
the error count continues to increase, replace the old cartridge with
a new cartridge.
• If you have received a message about read/write failures, first copy
the data from the failing cartridge, and then replace it with a new
cartridge.
552
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Using Library Explorer
You can use the Library Explorer feature to view a graphical
presentation of all the drives, cartridges, and slots in the library. The
Library Explorer can display all library elements according to physical
location in any configuration, from one to seventeen modules, and one
drive up to the maximum number of 192 drives.
You can access the Library Explorer when viewing either the physical
library or an individual partition (from the View menu). When viewing
from a partition, you only see the elements belonging to that partition
in the graphical display.
The Library Explorer features are available to administrator and service
users, along with non-administrative users who have limited access to
library functions. Users who do not have administrative privileges can
perform all Operations options available to non-administrative users
directly from the Library Explorer dialog boxes.
You can use the Library Explorer to directly perform the following tasks:
• Locate an element by entering its address
• Locate a cartridge by entering the media barcode
• Load and unload drives
• Move cartridges
• Perform inventory
• Import and export
• View drive details
• Perform all drive related functions
• View partition resources
• View the location of cleaning tapes
To use the Library Explorer:
1 From the Tools menu, click Library Explorer. The Library Explorer
dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
553
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
2 You can display library data using either the Select Filter options or
clicking on a particular module in the Select Module area. In
addition, there is a button toward the bottom of the screen called
Partition View. If you click on this button, the displayed
information is color-coded according to partition so it is easy to see
where all the elements in each partitions are located.
• In the Select Filter area, you can search for and display specific
criteria according to device type and location coordinates, or by
Media ID.
• Select the Device Type filter, and then from the Type dropdown list, click the appropriate device type: Storage, IE (I/E
Station), or Drive. Click Show.
The Control Module dialog box displays a graphical view of
the library elements according to your Type filter choices.
554
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
• To search for a specific cartridge according to the cartridge's
barcode, select the Media ID filter, type the barcode in the
Media ID field, and then click Show.
The Module dialog box displays the specific cartridge
highlighted in red within the module where it is located.
• To search for a specific cartridge according to the element
address, select the Element Address filter, type the element
address in the field, then click Show. You must be in
partition view to filter using the Element Address.
• In the Select Module area, you can select a specific module in
your library to view. On a multi-module library, all modules are
represented.
• In the Select Module area, click on the module you want to
view. The Module dialog box displays the current
configuration of Rack one and Rack two (Door - Inside view)
according to the module you chose.
Note: The Rack two (Door - Inside view) view is MIRROR
image of the outside view, so I/E station B is on the
left, and I/E station A is on the right.
• If you click the Partition View button, the graphical display
opens at the left-most module. The upper portion of the screen
displays a legend showing which colors represent each
partition. You can use the right/left arrows at the bottom of the
screen to scroll through all library modules.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
555
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
556
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
3 If you chose to search for an element by its address, or chose to
locate a cartridge by its media barcode, your search result appears
in red in the Control Module dialog box.
4 To return to the Library Explorer dialog box, click Close. The
Library Explorer dialog box appears.
Understanding the Graphical Display
You can access Library Explorer Control Module from both the physical
and partition views. If you are in a partition view, you can view slots and
drives pertaining to that particular partition.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
557
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
• The Library Explorer Module dialog box displays the current
configuration of Rack One and Rack Two (Door - Inside view)
according to the module you chose.
• The Rack Two (Door - Inside view) view is MIRROR image of the
outside view, so I/E station B is on the left, and I/E station A is on the
right.
• Slots containing cartridges are blue. Empty slots are black. Your
search result appears in red.
• Details concerning the particular cartridge, drive, or slot appear in
the Information area.
The Information area displays the following details:
• Type
• Location
• Element
• Partition
• Media ID
• Barcode numbers appear on slots containing cartridges. If you do
not want to view the barcode information, clear the Show check
box.
• If you click on a specific slot or drive, that slot or drive is highlighted
in red, and details about the slot or drive appear in the Information
area.
• If you hover your mouse over a specific segment in the module a
tool tip appears, displaying the coordinates of that particular
segment.
• To move from one module to another, click on the arrows at the
bottom of the dialog box.
Accessing Library Operations
To access available library operations for a specific drive or slot, you can
either click on Menu or right click on the drive or slot. You can perform
the following operations, depending on what library view you are using.
From the View menu, click the name of the physical library or partition.
• Drive Details
558
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
• Inventory
• Loading Drives
• Unloading Drives
• Move Media
• Importing Cartridges
• Exporting Cartridges
Drives
The Drives dialog box enables you to do the following:
• Cycle power to drives
• Reset drives
• Identify drives
• Run a pass/fail test for LTO-type drives
• Eject tape cartridges from drives
• Clean drives
• Send the logs by e-mail or save drive logs
• Take drive online or offline
• Vary drives on or off
• Remove drive reservations
Drive information on this dialog box is automatically refreshed
whenever a drive is added or removed.
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Tools > Drives. The Drives dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
559
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
The following table describes the elements on the Drives dialog
box.
Element
Description
In the Drive(s) area:
Drive Type
drop-down list
Enables you to select the type of drives you want to list on the Drives dialog box
(for example, LTO1 for LTO-1 tape drives). All lists every drive in the library.
State
The state of the drive (Varied On, Varied Off, or Pending [if in transition]).
Drive Type
The type of drive (for example, LTO2 - FC).
Mode
The mode the drive is in: Online or Offline.
Online indicates all SCSI and host commands are accessible.
Offline indicates any move command is disabled.
Location
560
The location of the drive by means of a coordinate system. For information
about location coordinates, see Understanding Location Coordinates on
page 459.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Element
Description
RAS
The status of the drive as reported by the RAS system (for example, Good or
Failed).
WWN/SCSI ID
Indicates either:
• For Fibre drives only, the World Wide Name of the drive, or
• For SCSI drives only, the SCSI ID of the drive
Volser
If a cartridge is loaded in the specified drive, the volume serial number of the
cartridge.
Partition Name
The name of the partition to which the drive is assigned.
Serial #
The tape drive’s serial number.
Firmware Version
Tape version of firmware on the tape drive.
In the Control area:
Power Cycle
Cycles power to the specified drive by removing the power and then restoring it.
In general, you should try to reset drives before you cycle power to them.
Reset Drive
Resets the specified drive without cycling the power.
Identify
Causes status LEDs on the back of the specified drive to blink rapidly so that you
can identify it.
When you click Identify, a message appears that informs you that you can now
identify the drive by the rapidly blinking LED on the back of it. After you find the
drive, click OK to stop the rapid blinking.
Self Test
For LTO-type drives only, runs a pass/fail test on the specified drive. This button
is available only when you select an LTO-type drive.
Eject
Ejects any currently loaded tape from the specified drive.
Clean
Enables the drive cleaning process (see Cleaning a Drive on page 566).
Get Drive Log
Enables you to mail or save the log of a Fibre drive that is attached to an I/O
blade (see Mailing, Saving, and Printing Test Logs on page 656). This button is
available only for I/O blade-attached Fibre drives that are properly connected
and configured. If the button is not available for a Fibre drive, verify that it is
properly connected to the I/O blade and that communication is established
between them.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
561
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Element
Description
Replace/Vary Off
or Activate/Vary
On
Powers off or on the specified tape drive within the drive sled. The label of the
button toggles between Replace/Vary Off and Activate/Vary On. Each use of
this button updates the drive information in the Drive(s) area. Use this button
when you replace drives.
Remove IT Nexus
Allows the library to clear drive reservations and media removal preventions.
View Logs
View any saved drive logs.
The Details button displays the Drive Details dialog box. For more
information, see Viewing Drive Details on page 562.
4 In the Drive(s) area, click the appropriate drive row to highlight it.
5 Perform operations in either the Fibre Channel Parameters area or
the Control area of the Drives dialog box.
Viewing Drive Details
1 On the Drives dialog box in the Drive(s) area, click the appropriate
drive row to highlight it.
2 Click Details. The Drive Details dialog box appears.
562
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
The Drive Details area of the Drive Details dialog box displays detailed
information about the selected drive.
The following table describes the elements that appear in this area. For
descriptions of elements in the Fibre Channel Parameters and Control
areas, see Drives on page 559.
Element
Description
Drive Model
The brand name of the drive model.
Vendor
The drive vendor.
Firmware Level
The firmware version that is currently installed on the drive.
Physical SN
The serial number of the particular drive.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
563
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Element
Description
Logical SN
The logical serial number that the library assigns to a drive in a specific
location. This is not the serial number of the particular drive (see Physical SN
in this table). If a drive is replaced by another drive in the same library
location, the logical serial number remains the same. From the host’s
perspective, the replacement drive is the same as the original one. If the
logical serial number addressing feature is disabled for the library, Disabled
appears in this field.
Location
The location of the drive by means of a coordinate system. Refer to
Understanding Location Coordinates on page 459.
Media Type
The type of drive (for example, LTO2 for LTO-2 tape drives).
Interface Type
The type of interface (FC or SCSI).
WWN
For Fibre drives only, the World Wide Name of the drive. This field does not
appear for SCSI drives.
Mode
The drive Online/Offline mode.
Assigned LUN
The assigned logical unit number.
State
The tape drive vary off (ready for replacement) and vary on (tape drive
activation) state.
Drive Error Code
The tape drive error code.
RAS Status
The status of the drive as reported by the RAS sub-system (for example, Good
or Failed).
Fibre Channel
Loop ID
For Fibre drives only, the loop ID assigned to the drive.
Fibre Channel
Loop ID Mode
For Fibre drives only, the way in which the loop ID is assigned to the drive
(Hard or Soft).
Number of Loads
The number of loads during the drive’s history.
Read Errors
The number of read errors that have occurred during the drive’s history.
Write Errors
The number of write errors that have occurred during the drive’s history.
Megabytes Read
The amount of data in megabytes that the drive has read during its history.
Megabytes
Written
The amount of data in megabytes that the drive has written during its
history.
564
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
3 To return to the Drives dialog box, click Cancel.
Mailing and Saving Drive Logs
The Get Drive Log button on the Drives dialog box enables you to send
drive logs to e-mail addresses. If you are accessing the LMC from a
remote client, Get Drive Log also enables you to save the information
to a ZIP file.
Note: You can mail or save logs from a remote client. However, you
cannot save logs from the library’s touch screen.
Before you perform the following procedure, you must make
sure that e-mail is appropriately configured in the LMC so that
the library can send logs to the recipient. For more information
about configuring e-mail, see Configuring E-mail on page 187.
1 From the Drives dialog box, click Get Drive Log. The Email or Save
Drive Log dialog box appears.
2 Perform one of the following tasks:
• To indicate that you want to send the log as an e-mail message
to a recipient, select Email, and then either type an e-mail
address in the Email text box or select an existing address from
the drop-down list. You can type a comment in the Comment
text box to send with the log.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
565
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
• To indicate that you want to save the log, select Save, and then
either type in the Save text box a path and a file name to which
you want the information saved or click Browse to specify a
location and a file name.
Note: The Save option is available to remote client users only.
It appears grayed out on the touch screen.
3 To send, click OK.
Cleaning a Drive
Use the Drives dialog box to manually initiate a drive cleaning
operation. When cleaning a drive, you can use cleaning media inserted
in the I/E station or media in an assigned cleaning magazine.
Note: If the host application coordinates drive cleaning, or if periodic
drive cleaning is enabled for the partition, you do not need to
manually initiate a drive cleaning operation to perform routine
cleaning tasks. In these cases, routine cleaning is handled by
the host application or the library, and you should manually
initiate a drive cleaning operation only as part of a
troubleshooting procedure.
Before you manually initiate a drive cleaning operation, you must add
cleaning media to the library. The cleaning media must be appropriate
for the type of drive being cleaned.
There are two ways to add cleaning media to the library:
• Insert cleaning media into the I/E station and close the I/E station
door.
• Configure drive cleaning by assigning cleaning magazines and
importing cleaning media. For more information on configuring
drive cleaning, see Configuring Drive Cleaning on page 227.
After adding cleaning media to the library, manually initiate a drive
cleaning operation.
1 Select Tools > Drives to display the Drives dialog box.
2 Select a drive in the list, and then click Clean. The Clean Drive
dialog box appears.
566
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
3 Under Cleaning Source, select an option:
• To use cleaning media inserted in the I/E station, click Use
Media in IE Station, and then click a piece of cleaning media in
the list.
• To use cleaning media in an assigned cleaning magazine, click
Use Media in Cleaning Slots.
4 Click OK.
The drive cleaning operation is initiated, and the Clean Drive dialog
box closes. Once the cleaning operation completes, the cleaning
media is returned to the I/E station or assigned cleaning magazine.
Note: The system does not display a message when the cleaning
operation is completed.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
567
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Remove Drive Reservations
When a tape drive is setup for advanced path failover and a host is lost
or locked up such that it cannot remove host or application applied
reservations and/or media removal preventions for a tape drive, the
reservation must be manually removed. This frees up the drive to be
available by other hosts or applications.
The Remove IT Nexus button allows the User or Admin to remove all
host reservations applied to any tape drive.
Note: The Remove IT Nexus button applies for HP LTO-5 or later
drives and is used only when a host is not able to remove or
clear reservations.
Use the Drives dialog box to manually remove all drive reservations,
persistent and non-persistent. To remove a drive reservation:
1 Select Tools > Drives to display the Drives dialog box.
2 Select a drive in the list, and then click Remove IT Nexus. A warning
dialog box displays stating that removing the reservation may cause
a loss of data.
3 Click Yes.
4 A dialog box displays indicating that the operation was a success.
5 Click OK.
Force Eject a Tape
When a tape is not responding to an Eject command and/or the drive is
not accessible for a manual eject, you can use a set of commands to
force eject the tape.
1 Select Tools > Drives to display the Drives dialog box.
2 Select a drive in the list, and then click Power Cycle. A warning
dialog box displays stating power cycling the drive may cause a loss
of data.
Caution: Make sure that the drive is not being used by the host
and/or performing any I/O to the drive.
568
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
3 Click Yes. A dialog box displays indicating that the operation was
successful.
4 Make sure the same drive is selected and click the Eject button. A
warning dialog box displays stating ejecting a tape may cause a loss
of data.
5 Click Yes. When the status dialog box disappears, the tape has been
successfully ejected from the drive.
6 Now you can move the tape to a storage or I/E slot. See Moving
Media Within a Partition on page 703 for details.
Re-enable Robot
Remotely
Instead of having to be physically at the library to re-enable the robot(s),
you can now use the GUI to perform this function remotely.
1 Select Tools > Library > Robot State. The Robot State dialog
displays.
2 Select the robot you want to enable and press Enable Robotics. A
dialog will display ensuring you want to re-enable robotics.
3 Click Yes.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
569
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Working With
Connectivity
The Connectivity dialog box enables you to do the following:
• Reset an I/O blade
• Reset the Fibre Channel port on an I/O blade
• Power cycle an EEB or I/O blade
• Visually locate a specific EEB or I/O blade in the library
To reset or identify port/blade connectivity:
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Tools > Connectivity. The Connectivity dialog box appears
with the EEB and all I/O blades in the library listed.
Note: If the physical library is not offline, you receive a message that
asks you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
4 To display the ports for a specific blade, click the name of the blade
(EEB or I/O blade). For information about location coordinates, see
Understanding Location Coordinates on page 459.
570
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
5 Perform one of the following tasks:
• To reset either an entire I/O blade, an individual Fibre Channel
port on an I/O blade, or an EEB, select the blade or port and
click Reset.
• To power cycle an I/O blade or EEB, select the blade and click
Power Cycle.
• To cause the LEDs on an EEB or I/O blade to blink rapidly so that
you can find it in the library, select the blade, and then click
Identify. After you locate the I/O blade, click Turn Off LED.
When you click Identify, the following dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
571
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
6 After you find the I/O blade, click Turn Off LED.
Capturing Snapshots
The Capture Snapshot command enables you to capture detailed
information about the entire library in a single file and save it to disk or
mail it to technical support. The captured information consists of
configuration data, status information, and trace logs for library
components, including the LMC, the MCB, the CMB, the robotics control
subsystem (RCS), and the I/O blades.
Trace logs collect problem data for up to 72 hours of continuous library
operation. They provide Quantum engineering personnel with vital
library information for troubleshooting and solving problems. You
should capture snapshots when technical support requests them.
Details about capturing snapshots include:
• Because the snapshot requires analysis by trained Quantum
personnel, send captured snapshots to www.quantum.com/osr
when Quantum requests them.
• Depending on the library configuration, capturing a snapshot can
take as long as 30 minutes and the resulting file size can be large.
Firewall file size limitations could prohibit you from mailing it. In
addition, other library communications may be delayed up to 6
minutes during a snapshot capture.
• You can e-mail or save snapshots from a remote client. However,
you cannot save snapshots from the library’s touch screen but you
572
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
can e-mail them. You cannot print snapshots from either the remote
client or the touch screen.
• Because snapshots do not contain binary data, secure sites allow
them to be sent offsite.
• If you want to mail snapshots to e-mail addresses, you must make
sure that e-mail is appropriately configured in the LMC before you
perform the following procedure so that the library can send
snapshots to the recipient. See Configuring E-mail on page 187.
To capture a snapshot:
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that applications are not attempting to access the library.
3 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
4 Click Tools > Capture Snapshot. The following message appears:
5 If you want to continue, click Yes. The Capture Snapshot dialog
box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
573
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
The Standard option captures information about all library
components. The Extended option captures a greater amount of
historical event logging information.
6 Select Standard or Extended, and then click Send. The Email, Save
or Print Table dialog box appears.
7 Perform one of the following tasks:
• To indicate that you want to send the snapshot as an e-mail
message to a recipient, select Email, and then either type an email address in the Email text box or select an existing e-mail
address from the Email drop-down list. You can type a
comment in the Comment text box to send with the snapshot.
Note: Typically, you will send the snapshot to Quantum
Support when requested to do so.
574
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
• To indicate that you want to save the snapshot, select Save, and
then either type in the Save text box a path and a file name to
which you want the snapshot saved or click Browse to specify a
location and a file name.
Note: The Save option is available to remote client users only.
It appears grayed out on the touch screen.
8 To send, click OK.
Capture a Network
Trace
The Capture Network Trace functionality is used for troubleshooting
issues with the network connectivity of the library, for example issues
with the Email server.
Start a Network Trace Manually
Start a Network Trace on Library Startup
Download a Network Trace
Delete Network Trace Files
You can use the Capture Network Trace screen to do the following:
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
575
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
• Save a trace file - Users can access completed trace files and
download them to workstations for analysis.
• Set configuration options - Users can select an interface used to
capture traffic as well as set the size - in MBs - of the completed
trace file. Interface options include:
• External
• Internal
• Loopback
• All
• Start, stop and delete a trace
Start a Network Trace Manually
1 From the menu bar, click Tools > Capture Network Trace. The
Capture Network Trace screen appears.
2 From the Configuration Options area, select the type of network
trace you want to perform:
• External — configures the trace tool to capture all traffic
between the library and the outside world. As most networks
are now switched, this should not cause any traffic to be
captured from other workstations on the same segment, except
for some broadcast packets.
• Internal — configures the trace tool to capture all traffic
internal on the library backbone. This has to be traffic
originating, or passing through the MCB. Traffic between the
RCU and the PRPs for example will NOT be captured.
• Loopback — a virtual interface on the MCB. This will ONLY
capture traffic which uses this specific interface for daemons
and other processes internally to the MCB.
• All — captures all traffic on all interfaces combined.
3 Enter a value in the Max File Size (MB) field from 0 to 1000MB. The
trace will automatically stop when the value in the Max File Size
field is reached.
576
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Note: Entering 0 means the trace is kept running until the Stop
button is selected or a shutdown is performed, whichever
is earlier. An entry of 0 also means the trace will store the
max file size of 1000MB.
4 Click Start. The network trace starts collecting data based on your
configuration options.
5 Click Stop after a time to end the network trace.
Start a Network Trace on Library Startup
1 From the menu bar, click Tools > Capture Network Trace. The
Capture Network Trace screen displays.
2 From the Configuration Options area, select the type of network
trace you want to perform:
• External — configures the trace tool to capture all traffic
between the library and the outside world. As most networks
are now switched, this should not cause any traffic to be
captured from other workstations on the same segment, except
for some broadcast packets.
• Internal — configures the trace tool to capture all traffic
internal on the library backbone. This has to be traffic
originating, or passing through the MCB. Traffic between the
RCU and the PRPs for example will NOT be captured.
• Loopback — a virtual interface on the MCB. This will ONLY
capture traffic which uses this specific interface for daemons
and other processes internally to the MCB.
• All — captures all traffic on all interfaces combined.
3 Enter a value in the Max File Size (MB) field.
Note: When the network trace gets to the max file size, it will
start saving over previously recorded trace information. The
trace will NOT stop when it reaches the max file size. You
must stop it manually.
4 Select the Start on Boot check box. This starts the network trace
automatically the next time the library is restarted.
5 Click Ok.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
577
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Download a Network Trace
1 From the menu bar, click Tools > Capture Network Trace. The
Capture Network Trace screen displays.
2 From the Save Trace File area, select a network trace file from the
Trace Files drop-down box. The format of the trace file is as follows:
Wireshark_[Library_SN]_[Date]_[Time]_[Interface].tar.
The abbreviations in the [Interface] value are:
• LO - Loopback
• EXT1 - External Interface 1
• EXT2 - External Interface 2
• INT - Internal Network
• ALL - All interfaces combined
3 Click the Browse button. A dialog box appears allowing you to
navigate to the place you want to save the trace file to.
Note: The filename cannot be changed. However, you can create
a directory to help differentiate the downloaded traces.
4 Click Save. The dialog box closes.
5 Click Save from the Save Trace File area to complete the download
of the network trace file.
Delete Network Trace Files
1 From the menu bar, click Tools > Capture Network Trace. The
Capture Network Trace screen displays.
2 From the Trace Control Area, click Delete. A warning dialog box
displays asking if you are sure you want to delete all network trace
files from the library.
3 Click Yes.
578
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Updating Library
Software
To download library software to the library and perform various update
operations, you can use the Update Software command to access the
Update Software Wizard.
Note: This process may take 30 to 45 minutes.
Library software update files contain updates for one or more of the
following library components:
• Management control blade (MCB)
• Robotics control unit (RCU)
• Robot(s)
• Tower(s)
• Control management blade (CMB)
• I/O blades
• Ethernet Control blade (EEB)
• Power and control subsystem (PIP) for blades
• Drive sleds
Individual drive firmware image files contain updates for specific
types of drives. Before you can update the library with a library
software update file, you must use the Update Software Wizard to
download the file to the MCB. You can use the Update Software
Wizard to perform the following operations:
• Install new library software (including downloading and installing
software)
• Reinstall the currently installed library software package
• Roll back library software to a previously installed package
You can perform all update operations while viewing the physical
library. However, if you are viewing a partition, the only operations that
are available to you is updating drive firmware (by using either firmware
images or update tapes) for drives within the partition.
You can perform update operations from either the library’s touch
screen or a remote client on a remote host computer, with one
exception. You cannot download images from the local touch screen.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
579
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
During the software update process, the MCB distributes the various
parts of the software package to the proper library components. The
MCB also keeps track of the software components it updates so that
you can roll those components back to a previous version.
After the library finishes installing new library software or rolling back
library software to a previously installed level, the library automatically
restarts. Any necessary autoleveling of library components begins after
the library powers up and discovers library components.
Caution: As a result of restore, rescue, or revert operations, the
library shuts down. You must have physical access to the
library to bring the library back up. If you are performing a
restore, rescue, or revert operation using remote access,
the library will remain shut down until the library is directly
powered back on.
If you choose to reinstall the currently installed software package, the
robotics control unit (RCU), picker, and drive sleds are updated.
Therefore, the library does not restart after the re-installation process
completes. The re-installation procedure should be run only under
specific circumstances. For more information, see Rolling Back to the
Previous Build Package on page 590.
Note: Rollback and re-installation of current package options are
viable recovery steps during a failed firmware upgrade,
however these features should not be used as troubleshooting
tools.
Accessing the Update Software Wizard
The Update Software Wizard gives you access to all of the library’s
software update operations.
Note: Before performing a software upgrade, we recommend that
you shut down and restart the library.
1 Log on as service.
2 You can access the Update Software Wizard while viewing either
the physical library or a partition. From the View menu, click the
name of the physical library or the appropriate partition.
580
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Click Tools > Update Software > Library. The Update Software
Wizard dialog box appears.
Note: Each firmware release has specific upgrade instructions
included with the release. These specific upgrade
instructions need to be followed to ensure that the
firmware upgrade will be successful. Contact Quantum
Support to obtain specific drive firmware upgrade
instructions.
This dialog box explains the operations you can perform by using
the Update Software Wizard.
3 If you are ready to proceed, click Next. If you are not ready to
proceed, click Cancel. The Select Library Software Package for
Installation dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
581
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
The remaining procedures in this section start with the Library System
Software Update dialog box.
Installing New Library Software
To update your library software, you must download a new library
software package to the library’s management control blade (MCB)
from the remote client’s file system, and then install the downloaded
software. You can perform the library software update from either the
library’s touch screen or a remote client, but you must perform the
software download to the MCB from a remote client.
582
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Note: If you are accessing the LMC using the remote client
application, be aware that after you update the library
software and the library restarts, you will not be able to view
the LMC from the remote client application. You must update
the client software to match the version of software you
installed on the library.
Downloading a New Library Software Package
Before you install a new library software package, you must download
the package to the library’s MCB from the remote client’s file system.
You must perform the download from a remote client.
Note: Before you begin the following procedure, make sure that you
have obtained the new library software package from
Quantum and placed it in an accessible location on your
laptop.
Caution: As a result of restore, rescue, or revert operations, the
library shuts down. You must have physical access to the
library to bring the library back up. If you are performing a
restore, rescue, or revert operation using remote access,
the library will remain shut down until the library is directly
powered back on.
1 On the Library System Software Update dialog box, click
Download New Package. The Software Update dialog box
appears.
Note: If you are running the i8 software version, the library
software file has a suffix of .pkg (for example,
300A.TS01701.pkg) shown in figure below. For software
versions prior to i8, the filename suffix is .rpm.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
583
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
2 Navigate to the location of the software file (with a .pkg extension)
you want to download, click the file to highlight it, and then click
Open. The Operation in Progress screen appears displaying the
progress of the download.
The download process copies the software file from the remote file
system to the library’s MCB. When the download process
completes, the Library System Software Update dialog box
appears again with the Install downloaded package option
automatically selected.
584
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
The version number of the software package appears at the end of
the Install downloaded package option.
Installing a New Library Software Package
After you download the new library software package, you are ready to
install it from either the library’s touch screen or a remote client. This
procedure assumes that you are working from a remote client.
1 On the Library System Software Update dialog box, select Install
downloaded package.
Note: If you downloaded a software package and then began this
procedure without closing the Update Software Wizard Library System Software Update dialog box, Install
downloaded package is already selected.
2 Click Next.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
585
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
The estimated time for the installation is displayed.
3 Click Install. A warning message appears asking you to take the
library offline.
4 Click Yes.
Note: The library automatically logs off other users so that they
cannot perform library operations while the library
software update operation is in progress.
The Update Software Summary window appears asking if you
want to continue.
5 Click Yes. The Software Update Progress screen appears displaying
the progress of the installation.
586
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Real-time progress information appears under Progress Summary
in the Description and Status columns.
Once 100% success has been achieved for all components, the
library is shutdown. This process could take several minutes.
6 Once complete, the Software Update Progress screen appears,
click OK. The Attention message appears informing you that the
software update was successful, the library will be rebooting, and
that you have been automatically logged off from the system.
Note: If the software update was not successful, a RAS ticket is
generates. Resolve all RAS tickets and begin the software
update process again.
7 Click OK. The message Library is being shutdown... appears. This
action may take a few minutes. The Operation in Progress screen
appears.
8 Log off close the browser.
9 Launch the browser and log in again after the library has completed
it’s reboot process.
10 Click Help > About. Validate that the components reflect the
correct firmware version.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
587
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Reinstalling Current Library Software
The reinstall feature enables you to re-establish the installation of the
library software that is currently active on the MCB to the various
remote devices, such as the RCU, I/O blades, and the CMB. Perform this
procedure if the RCU has been replaced and you want to bring it to the
level that is on the MCB.
1 On the Library System Software Update dialog box, select
Reinstall current package.
2 Click Next. The Update Software Wizard dialog box appears.
Click Install. The Software Update Progress dialog box appears.
588
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Note: If the physical library is not offline, you receive a message
that asks you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
The library automatically logs off other users so that they
cannot perform library operations while the library
software update operation is in progress.
Real-time progress information appears under Progress Summary
in the Description and Status columns.
Note: The components that already have the correct version
loaded will transition to a “Success” status quickly during
the reinstall process.
3 After the update process completes, click OK. Within approximately
a minute after completing the update process, the RCU restarts.
Caution: Do not perform any library operations until the RCU is
completely restarted.
Note: Before the RCU is restarted, the main menu Activity panel
displays the message WARNING: The Robotics is not
Enabled. This message indicates that the RCU is not yet
ready. When the RCU is ready, the message disappears.
4 Bring the physical library online.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
589
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
a From the LMC, click Operations > Change Mode.
b Select Online, and then click OK.
5 Click Help > About. Validate that the components reflect the
correct firmware version.
Rolling Back to the Previous Build Package
1 On the Library System Software Update dialog box, select
Rollback to package.
Note: Rolling back the firmware should NOT be used as a
recovery tool for a failed firmware upgrade. If the firmware
upgrade process has failed, capture the snapshot and
escalate the issue.
2 Click Next. The Update Software Wizard dialog box appears.
3 Click Finish. The Software Update Progress dialog box appears.
590
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Note: If the physical library is not offline, you receive a message
that asks you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
The library automatically logs off other users so that they
cannot perform library operations while the library
software update operation is in progress.
Real-time progress information appears under Progress Summary
in the Description and Status columns.
4 After the update process completes, click OK.
Within approximately a minute after completing the update
process, the library will reinitialize.
Caution: Do not perform any library operations until the RCU is
completely restarted.
5 Bring the physical library online.
a From the LMC, click Operations > Change Mode.
b Select Online, and then click OK.
6 Click Help > About. Validate that the components reflect the
correct firmware version.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
591
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Updating Drive
Firmware
Before you install a new drive firmware image, you must download it to
the library’s MCB from the remote client’s file system. You must perform
the download from a remote client.
It is important to make sure that the library is running the appropriate
level of drive firmware, compatible with the drive type. To determine the
appropriate drive firmware, see the library’s Release Notes or contact
Quantum technical support. If you want to update drive firmware by
using I/O blades or Ethernet Expansion Blades (EEB), perform the
procedure in this section. Drives that are not attached to I/O blades or
Ethernet Expansion Blades must be updated by using update tapes.
You can perform drive firmware updates from either the library’s touch
screen or a remote client, but you must perform drive firmware
downloads from a remote client.
Note: If you are viewing a partition, you can only set up update drive
firmware for drives within the partition.
Note: Before you begin the following procedure, make sure that you
have obtained the new drive firmware image from Quantum
and placed it in an accessible location on your laptop.
Select Tools > Update Software > Drives to update drive brick
firmware on one or more drives by using either update tapes or drive
firmware images that you have downloaded to the library. This section
includes the following subsections:
• Download Drive Firmware on page 592
• Updating Drive Firmware Using Firmware Images on page 595
• Updating Drive Firmware Using Update Tapes on page 597
Download Drive Firmware
Note: Before performing a firmware upgrade, we recommend that
you shut down and restart the library.
1 Log on as service.
2 You can access the Update Drive Firmware dialog box while
viewing either the physical library or a partition. From the View
592
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
menu, click the name of the physical library or the appropriate
partition.
Caution: If you are viewing a partition, drive firmware update
operations affect drives that are within the partition
only.
3 Click Tools > Update Software > Drives. The Update Drive
Firmware dialog box appears.
From the Update Drive Firmware dialog box, you can update drive
firmware by using either update tapes or drive firmware images that
you have downloaded to the library. The table lists all drives in the
library or, if you are currently viewing a partition, all drives in the
partition. The Manage Images button enables you to download new
drive firmware images to the library or delete drive firmware images
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
593
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
that the library currently stores. Drive images that are currently stored
on the library are listed in the drop-down list in the Select Firmware
File area.
4 On the Update Drive Firmware dialog box, click Manage Images.
The Manage Drive Firmware Images dialog box appears.
The library has enough space for 50 MB (with a maximum of 8
images) of drive firmware images.
If the In Use check box for a drive firmware image is clear, you can
delete the image by clicking it to highlight it, and then clicking
Delete.
The In Use check box indicates that the firmware image is set to
auto-level all the drives to that firmware image in a specific
partition.
5 To download a new drive firmware image, click Download. The
Select firmware image file to download dialog box appears.
594
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
6 Navigate to the location of the drive firmware image file (with either
a .drv, .fmr, .frmz, .img, .E, or .ro extension) you want to
download, and then click the image file to highlight it.
7 Click Open.
The download process copies the drive firmware image from the
remote file system to the MCB. After the download process finishes,
the drive firmware image file is added to the list on the Manage
Drive Firmware Images dialog box.
8 On the Manage Drive Firmware Images dialog box, click Close.
The Update Drive Firmware dialog box appears again.
To update drive firmware by using downloaded firmware images,
proceed to Updating Drive Firmware Using Firmware Images on
page 595. To update drive firmware by using update tapes, proceed to
Updating Drive Firmware Using Update Tapes on page 597.
Updating Drive Firmware Using Firmware Images
Caution: If you are viewing a partition, drive firmware update
operations affect drives that are within the partition only.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
595
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Caution: Before you update drive firmware during this procedure,
make sure that tapes are not mounted in any of the drives.
If tapes are mounted in drives during the update process,
the library loses knowledge of the cartridge home cell in
storage, resulting in library and host inventory issues.
If you load a firmware image onto a drive that is the same
version that is currently running on the drive, the upgrade
will fail.
If host reservations exist on drives, it will fail the upgrade.
1 On the Update Drive Firmware dialog box, select Firmware Image.
596
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Note: Drives that are not connected to I/O Blades or EEBs are
listed, since drives not connected to I/O Blades can be
updated using FMR Tapes. Refer to Updating Drive
Firmware Using Update Tapes on page 597.
2 In the left-most column of the table under the Update Method
area, select one or more check boxes that correspond to drives that
you want to update with the same drive firmware image. Use the
following rules to select drives:
• Do not select drives that are currently loaded.
• If you select more than one drive, make sure that they are all of
the same drive type.
• Click Select All to select all drives. All drives must be of the
same drive type.
Note: You can only perform firmware update for drives of the
same product, such as HP or IBM, and type, for example
LTO-4 or LTO-5.
3 From the drop-down list in the Select Firmware File area, click the
drive firmware image you want to use to update the drives you
selected.
Caution: The drop-down list includes all drive firmware images
that are currently stored on the library, regardless of
drive type. Be careful to select a drive firmware image
that is compatible with the type of drive that you want
to update. See the library’s Release Notes for
compatibility information or contact Quantum
technical support.
4 Click Start. The library updates the firmware on each selected drive.
Updating Drive Firmware Using Update Tapes
It is important to verify that the library firmware version is compatible
with the new drive firmware version. To determine the appropriate drive
firmware, see the library’s Release Notes or contact Quantum technical
support. If you need to update drive firmware by using update tapes,
perform the following procedure.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
597
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Note: If you are viewing a partition, drive firmware update operations
affect drives that are within the partition only, and uses the I/E
slots within the partition. If you are viewing the physical library,
drive firmware update operations affect all drives.
1 Write down the barcode number on the tape before inserting it into
the I/E Station.
2 From the Physical Library view, insert the firmware tape(s) into any
I/E station slots in the library.
Note: If you are in the Logical Library view, insert the firmware
tape(s) into I/E slots belonging to the partition of the
current Logical Library view.
3 On the Update Drive Firmware dialog box, select FMR Tape. The
Select Firmware Tapes dialog box appears.
4 Select the tape cartridges you want to use for the firmware update
by checking the check boxes in the media table, and click OK.
Note: You can perform a firmware update only for drives of the
same product (such as HP or IBM), and type (such as LTO-4
or LTO-5).
598
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
5 Click Start. A message Updating do not power cycle the drive is
displayed above the drive table in red. The Status column in the
drive table displays the status of the update.
Caution: The drive firmware image must be compatible with the
drives that you will update with it. For more
information, see the Customer Service Web site.
Teaching the Library
(Configuration and
Calibration)
The Teach command enables you to update the library’s stored
configuration and calibration information. Use this command after you
replace a library component or whenever you need to assess the
library’s physical configuration (such as the number of modules and I/E
stations, the locations of storage magazines and drives, and the types of
media used in the library) or the position and alignment of library
components.
Running Configuration Teach
Starting the configuration teach process causes the library to assess its
contents, gathering information as follows:
• Number of modules
• Types of media
• Storage magazine locations
• Number of I/E stations and magazine type
• Types of drives
• Drive locations
If you change the library’s physical configuration in any of these areas,
you should initiate the configuration teach process (for example, when
you add or remove storage or remove storage to add another
component. The library will automatically perform a configuration
teach, calibration teach, and inventory when an expansion module is
added.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
599
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Note: During the configuration teach process, the library runs the
calibration teach process. Afterwards, it automatically performs
an inventory.
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Tools > Teach. The Teach dialog box appears.
Note: If the physical library is not offline, you receive a message
that asks you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
Configure is already selected by default.
4 Click Start.
During the configuration teach process, the picker moves to each
storage magazine, I/E magazine, and drive in the library and stores
information about them. Teach results appear in the Results text
box when the process completes.
Running Calibration Teach
Starting the calibration teach process causes the library to assess the
position and alignment of various library components through the use
of calibration targets. Use this process to avoid cartridge-handling
problems caused by rack, drive, or I/E station misalignments.
Rack alignment calibration targets are tabs that are located on special
magazines. I/E station targets are small square holes that are located at
the top and bottom of the I/E station. Whenever you perform work on
the library that could affect the position of rack, drive, or I/E station
600
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
calibration targets, even slightly, you should initiate the calibration
teach process.
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Tools > Teach. The Teach dialog box appears with Configure
selected by default.
Note: If the physical library is not offline, you receive a message
that asks you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
4 Select Calibrate.
5 Click Start.
During the calibration teach process, the picker moves to the home
position, which is X-Y coordinate position 0,0. Then, for each rack of
each module, the picker moves to a magazine at the top and one at
the bottom and stores those positions in coordinates relative to the
0,0 position. Teach results appear in the Results area when the
process completes.
Note: Use the Physical Library command on the Setup menu to
disable or enable automatic inventory after a calibration
teach. For more information about this command, see
Setting Up Policies for the Physical Library on page 180.
Saving and Restoring
Library Configuration
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
The library’s save and restore capabilities enable you to save a remote or
local copy of configuration settings for the library’s drives, I/O blades,
and partitions, including the allocation of drives, storage magazines,
601
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
and I/E station magazines to each partition. If the library’s current
configuration becomes lost or unstable, you can use the LMC to apply
the locally or remotely saved configuration image, which eliminates the
need to reconfigure the entire library to bring it back to its original
state.
Caution: You cannot apply an older firmware configuration to a new
firmware library (i.e., i11.1.1 to i11.2.3).
The Save and Restore Library Configuration dialog box enables you
to:
• Save a library’s configuration settings as a remotely or locally stored
image
• Restore, revert, or rescue the library by applying a remotely or
locally stored image of a library’s configuration settings.
Caution: As a result of restore, rescue, or revert operations, the
library shuts down. You must have physical access to
the library to bring the library back up. If you are
performing a restore, rescue, or revert operation using
remote access, the library will remain shut down until
the library is directly powered back on.
Types of Configuration Image Files
There are three types of configuration images that correspond to the
Restore, Rescue, and Revert commands:
• The restore image is stored on a remote file system and is created
any time you use the Save command. You might restore the library’s
configuration, for example, if the library’s locally saved
configuration is lost because the Management Control Blade (MCB)
is replaced. Because of the image's remote location, the Save and
Restore commands are available only through the remote client.
• The rescue image is stored locally on the library’s file system and is
created any time you use the Save Rescue command. You might
rescue the library’s configuration, for example, if the library
becomes unstable due to a configuration change and you want to
roll back the library’s configuration settings to a previous state. The
602
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Save Rescue and Rescue commands are available from both the
remote client and the library’s touch screen.
• The revert image is automatically created and stored locally as the
first step of any restore or rescue operation. The purpose of the
Revert process is to revert to the last configuration that was used
before a restore image was applied. If an incorrect restore image
was applied, the Revert feature allows the MCB to revert back to its
prior configuration.
The Revert command is available from both the remote client and
the local touch screen.
When to Save the Library Configuration
You should save the library configuration any time you make changes to
the library hardware, software, or configuration. You can save the
library configuration at any time.
Caution: It is the customer’s responsibility to properly save the
library configuration. If an MCB fails and needs to be
replaced and the configuration was not saved properly, the
library will need to be completely reconfigured manually.
CONFIG Button Alerts
To help you remember to save the configuration, the CONFIG button on
the LMC main console toolbar indicates whether you have saved the
current library configuration.
• Green Check Mark — Good. The current configuration has been
saved. This can mean you saved the configuration locally on the
library or to a remote location.
• Yellow Exclamation Point — Warning. The current configuration
has not been saved.
Note: If you have never saved the configuration, then the icon will
always show green/good, even if you change the configuration.
You can click the CONFIG button on the LMC toolbar to access the Save
and Restore Library Configuration dialog box.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
603
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Figure 65 CONFIG Button Good/Saved
Figure 66 CONFIG Button Warning/Unsaved
Saving a Remote Restore Image
Use the Save command to save a library configuration restore image on
a remote file system. To make sure that the image captures all library
configuration changes, save the image often.
1 Log on as an administrator from the remote client. The Save
command is not available from the library’s touch screen.
Click the CONFIG button on the LMC toolbar. The Save and Restore
Library Configuration dialog box appears.
Alternatively, make sure that you are viewing the physical library
(from the View menu, click the name of the physical library), then
click Tools > Save/Restore.
2 Click Save.
604
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
3 Using the file chooser dialog box, specify a path to a directory on
your remote file system in which to save the restore image. You only
need to specify the path because the MCB determines the image file
name.
4 To proceed, click Open. The library prompts you to decide whether
you want to override the current rescue image that is stored locally
on the library.
5 Click Yes.
The rescue image timestamp that appears on the Save and Restore
Library Configuration dialog box will be updated to indicate that
the file has changed.
If no rescue image exists, the library prompts you to decide if you
want to generate one.
If the save operation succeeds, a message appears that indicates the
name of the image file that was saved to the remote file system. If
the save operation does not succeed, a message appears that
describes the error that occurred.
Saving a Local Rescue Image
Use the Save Rescue command to save a library configuration rescue
image locally on the library’s file system. To make sure that the image
captures all library configuration changes, you should save the image
often.
1 Log on as an administrator from the remote client or from the
library’s touch screen. Click the CONFIG button on the LMC toolbar.
The Save and Restore Library Configuration dialog box appears.
Alternatively, make sure that you are viewing the physical library
(from the View menu, click the name of the physical library), then
click Tools > Save/Restore.
2 Click Save Rescue. The save rescue operation starts.
If the save rescue image operation succeeds, a message appears
that indicates that the rescue image file was saved to the library file
system. The rescue image timestamp displayed on the Save and
Restore Library Configuration dialog box will be updated to
indicate that the file has changed.
If the save rescue operation does not succeed, a message appears
that describes the error that occurred.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
605
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Restoring Library Configuration
Use the Restore command to restore a library using a configuration
image that is saved on a remote file system.
If library configuration has occurred since the last time the image was
saved, those changes will be lost when the older configuration is
restored. The restore operation will succeed, but you will then need to
reconfigure the library, including the partitions and mappings.
Therefore, it is important to save the local rescue and/or remote restore
image periodically, especially following hardware configuration
changes.
Caution: Be cautious if you plan to use a saved library configuration
image that is out of date. You might restore configuration
information that you do not want, such as former
passwords, partitions, mappings, and hardware
configurations.
1 Log on as an administrator from the remote client. The Restore
command is not available from the library’s touch screen. Click the
CONFIG button on the LMC toolbar. The Save and Restore Library
Configuration dialog box appears.
Alternatively, make sure that you are viewing the physical library
(from the View menu, click the name of the physical library), then
click Tools > Save/Restore.
2 Click Restore.
Note: If the library is not offline, you receive a message that asks
you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
606
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
3 Using the file chooser dialog box, locate the restore image file on
the remote file system.
4 When you have located the file and are ready to proceed, click
Open.
Note: Because the management control blade (MCB) determines
the name of the restore image file, you might not know the
file name when you are searching for it on the remote file
system. The file name always includes the library serial
number, date stamp, and time stamp, in that order and
separated by underscores.
An example file name might look like this:
213100020_2004-02-18_13.23.47.tar.gz
The serial number encoded in the image file must match
the library serial number. A serial number mismatch will
result in an message and the operation will not continue.
When image file compatibility has been established, the library
reboots itself and continues with restoring the configuration. The
reset operation could take minutes to complete. If you are near the
library and can see the library’s touch screen, normal behavior is
when two “working” messages appear and the touch screen goes
dark when the LMC server restarts. From the remote client, a
message appears that indicates that the LMC server is reconnecting
to the client. After it reconnects, the LMC server performs a
discovery.
If the restore operation succeeds, a message appears that indicates
that the operation succeeded.
If the restore operation fails at any point, the library generates a RAS
ticket that contains details about the failure. Perform a revert or
rescue operation to return the library to a stable configuration.
5 After the restore operation has completed on the library, close and
restart the remote client.
6 If you have not done so already, make sure that the robotics are
enabled and bring the library back online so that data input and
output can continue.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
607
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Rescuing Library Configuration
Use the Rescue command to restore a library using the configuration
rescue image that is saved locally on the library’s file system.
Caution: Be cautious if you plan to use a saved library configuration
image that is out of date. You might restore configuration
information that you do not want, such as former
passwords, partitions, mappings, and hardware
configurations.
If library configuration has occurred since the last time the image was
saved, those changes will be lost when the older configuration is
restored. The restore operation will succeed, but you will then need to
reconfigure the library, including the partitions and mappings.
Therefore, it is important to save the local rescue and/or remote restore
image periodically, especially following hardware configuration
changes.
1 Log on as an administrator from the remote client. The Restore
command is not available from the library’s touch screen. Click the
CONFIG button on the LMC toolbar. The Save and Restore Library
Configuration dialog box appears.
Alternatively, make sure that you are viewing the physical library
(from the View menu, click the name of the physical library), then
click Tools > Save/Restore.
2 Click Rescue.
Note: If the library is not offline, you receive a message that asks
you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
608
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
3 At the prompt, make sure that all data input and output has
stopped. Click Yes to continue.
When the system determines that it can reconfigure the library
using the saved image, a message dialog box appears that informs
you that the library will reboot itself. The reset could take minutes to
complete. If you are near the library and can see the library’s touch
screen, normal behavior is when two “working” messages appear
and the touch screen goes dark when the LMC server restarts. From
the remote client, a message appears that indicates that the LMC
server is reconnecting to the client. After it reconnects, the LMC
server performs a discovery.
As the MCB reboots, the I/O blades, MCB, LMC server, and robotics
control unit (RCU) change to the configuration settings stored in the
rescue image. Each I/O blade is also reset.
When the LMC has restarted, reconnected, and completed its
discovery operation, a message appears that indicates that the
library has been restored to its previous configuration.
If the operation succeeds, a message appears that indicates that the
operation completed successfully.
If the operation fails at any point, the library generates a RAS ticket
that contains details about the failure. Perform a revert or rescue
operation to return the library to a stable configuration.
4 If you have not done so already, make sure that the robotics are
enabled and bring the library back online so that data input and
output can recommence.
Reverting Library Configuration
If a restore or rescue operation fails before completion, it can cause the
library to become unstable. The Revert command allows you to roll back
the partial configuration changes that occurred during the attempted
restore or rescue. The Revert command will only be available if a revert
image has been saved. A Revert image is saved the first time a restore or
rescue operation is attempted.
1 Log on as an administrator from the remote client or from the
library’s touch screen. Click the CONFIG button on the LMC toolbar.
The Save and Restore Library Configuration dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
609
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Alternatively, make sure that you are viewing the physical library
(from the View menu, click the name of the physical library), then
click Tools > Save/Restore.
2 Click Revert.
Note: If the library is not offline, you receive a message that asks
you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
3 At the prompt, check whether all library data input and output has
stopped. To continue, click Yes.
When the system determines that it can reconfigure the library
using the saved image, a message dialog box appears that informs
you that the library will reboot itself. The reset could take minutes to
complete. If you are near the library and can see the library’s touch
screen, normal behavior is when two “working” messages appear
and the touch screen goes dark when the LMC server restarts.
As the MCB reboots, the I/O blades, MCB, LMC server, and robotics
control unit (RCU) change to the configuration settings stored in the
rescue image. Each I/O blade is also reset.
When the LMC has restarted, reconnected, and completed its
discovery operation, a message appears that indicates that the
library has been restored to its previous configuration.
If the operation succeeds, a message appears that indicates that the
library has been restored to its previous configuration.
If the operation fails at any point, the library generates a RAS ticket
that provides that contains details about the failure. Perform a
revert or rescue to return the library to a stable configuration.
4 If you have not done so already, make sure that the robotics are
enabled and bring the library back online so that data input and
output can recommence.
Viewing the Drive
Resource Utilization
Reports
610
The Drive Resource Utilization Reporting (DRUR) feature enables you to
view and manage your tape drive resources. The data provided through
DRUR can help you determine the proper work load distribution
between the drives in your library. DRUR provides you with up to twelve
months of historical data for each SN drive installed, and includes MB
read and written, mounts, and media motion time.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Note: The DRUR feature requires a license key to use. For more
information, see Enabling Licenses on page 125.
You can view the DRUR data in summary reports and graphs, which you
can then export from the library into a PDF document. You also can
export and save the data as comma delimited text files (.csv). A .csv file
is a plain text file that stores basic database-style information in a simple
format, with one record on each line, and each field within that record
separated by a comma.
DRUR data is based on the actual drive serial number (SN), not the
logical drive serial number. The data tracked and reported through the
DRUR feature is data that has been accumulated while the drive SN has
been installed in the library.
Note: You can e-mail, save, or print reports from a remote client.
However, you cannot save or print reports from the library’s
touch screen.
1 Log on as administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 From the Tools menu, click Reports > Drive Utilization. The Drive
Utilization Report dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
611
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
4 In the Specify Report Criteria section, you can use the following
criteria filters to view and export specific data:
• Range
• Current Month
• Last Month
• Last 3 Months
• Last 6 Months
• Last 12 months
• Grouping
612
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
• All Drives by Coordinate: Presents the sum total of all
attributes for all drives in the library.
• All Drives by Physical SN: Presents the sum total of all
attributes for all drives according to the physical drive SN.
• All Partitions: Presents a comparison of all drives grouped
by partition in the physical library.
• Selected Drive by Coordinate: Graph is based on an
individual drive according to the library system coordinates.
For example, 1,1,1,1,1,1.
• Selected Drive by Physical SN: Graph is based on an
individual physical drive SN.
• Selected Partition: Graph is based on an individual
partition in the physical library.
• All Media: Presents all media for all drives.
• Select Media: Presents selected media by media ID.
• Attribute
• Data Written/Read
• Mount Count
• Media Motion Time
• Total Read and Write
• Type
• Rollup: A device x-axis for the display of attributes by drive
or library.
• Trend: A time scale x-axis for the display of the trend of the
particular attribute.
• Chart: Choose from the following charts to visually display your
data:
• Bar
• Bar 3D
• Line
• Stacked Area
• Stacked Bar
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
613
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
• Stacked Bar 3D
• Pie
• Pie 3D
5 To directly send or save the data, click Export.
• To export data, in the Export Raw Data dialog box, select Email to send the data in .csv file format.
• To save the data, select Save. In the Save text box, type the path
and file name, or click Browse to select a save location.
6 Optionally, save the report criteria as a template. Refer to Saving a
Report Template on page 615
7 To view a report according to the criteria selected, click View, and
then click Preview. The report appears graphically according to the
type of chart you selected.
8 To view the next page of the report, click the Next icon on the
toolbar.
614
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
9 In the report viewer, you can perform the following tasks:
a To save the report as an Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF)
file, click the Adobe PDF icon on the toolbar.
b In the Saving Report to PDF dialog box, enter the appropriate
information, and then click Confirm to convert the report into a
PDF file.
c To print the report, click the Print icon on the toolbar.
Saving a Report Template
If you frequently generate the Drive Resource Utilization Report with the
same set of report criteria, save the criteria as a template. Loading the
template recalls the saved report criteria and lets you quickly generate a
report based on the saved criteria.
1 On the menu bar, click Tools > Reports > Drive Utilization. The
Drive Utilization Report dialog box appears.
2 Under Specify Report Criteria, click criteria options in the lists to
customize the content and appearance.
3 Under Templates, click Save.
4 Type a name for the template, and click OK. The template appears in
the list under Templates.
5 To load the saved report criteria at a later time, click the template in
the list, and then click View to generate the report.
6 To close the Drive Utilization Report dialog box, click Cancel.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
615
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Setting Up Advanced
Reporting Options
Reports let you see information about your library at a glance, and help
you identify trends and changes over time. You can manually generate
reports as needed. In addition, if the advanced reporting options
feature is licensed for your library, the LMC can automatically generate
reports and e-mail them to designated recipients at specified times.
Note: The Advanced Reporting feature is available via remote access
only.
The LMC can automatically generate and e-mail the following reports:
• Drive Utilization Report
• Tickets Report
• LUN Mapping Report
• Media Reports
• Integrity Analysis
• Usage
• Security
• Moves
• Library Configuration Report
• Partition Utilization Report
To automatically generate reports, set up one or more scheduled jobs
using advanced reporting options. You can specify when and how often
the report is generated, what report templates are used, and which
e-mail recipients receive the report. You can also edit and delete
scheduled jobs.
Note: To automatically send reports to recipients, the library must be
configured for sending e-mail. For more information, see
Configuring E-mail on page 187.
Saving Report Criteria Templates
To schedule a job for a report, that report must have at least one
template. A template is a saved set of report criteria that customize the
content and appearance of a report.
616
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Before setting up advanced reporting options, use the Report Criteria
dialog box to save one or more templates for each report you want to
automatically generate.
1 On the menu bar, click Tools > Reports, and then click Drive
Utilization, Tickets, LUN Mapping, Media (Integrity Analysis,
Usage, Security or Moves), Library Configuration or Partition
Utilization. The appropriate report criteria dialog box appears.
2 Under Specify Report Criteria, click criteria options in the lists to
customize the content and appearance of the report.
For more information about choosing report criteria, see Generating
Media Integrity Analysis Reports on page 71, Generating the Tickets
Report on page 84, or Viewing the Drive Resource Utilization
Reports on page 610.
3 Under Templates, click Save.
4 Type a name for the template, and then click OK. The template
appears in the list under Templates.
5 To close the report criteria dialog box, click Cancel.
Scheduling a New Job
To set up a report to be automatically generated, first schedule a new
job, and then set job options.
1 On the menu bar, click Tools > Reports > Reporting Options. The
Reporting Options dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
617
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
2 Click New. The Create New Job dialog box appears with the
Calendar tab selected.
3 Specify time and recurrence options:
• Under Start Date, click the day, month, and year when you
want the report to be generated for the first time. The current
date is selected by default.
• Under Specify the Hour to Run, click the value that
corresponds to the time of day when you want the report to be
generated. The values in the list correspond to a 24-hour clock.
For example, 0 is midnight, 10 is 10:00 a.m., and 20 is 8:00 p.m.
• (Optional) Select the Recurring Job check box, and then under
Frequency click how often you want the report to be
generated.
618
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
4 Click the Reports tab, and then add one or more reports to the job.
• To add a report, click a report in the reports list, and then click a
template in the templates list. Click Add to add the report to the
job. You can add more than one report to a job.
• If you need to remove a report from a job, click the report, and
then click Remove.
• If there are no templates available for the report you choose,
you need to save a template for the report before you can
schedule a job. For more information on saving a template, see
Saving Report Criteria Templates on page 616.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
619
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
5 Click the Recipients tab, and then add one or more e-mail recipients
to the job.
• To add a recipient, type an e-mail address in the box, and then
click Add. You can add more than one recipient to a job.
• If you need to remove a recipient from a job, click the recipient,
and then click Remove.
6 Click OK. The new job appears in the list of scheduled jobs. The LMC
will generate the report at the specified time and send it to the
designated e-mail recipients.
620
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Note: If a yellow caution icon appears next to a scheduled job on
the Reporting Options dialog box, it means there is a
problem with the job. For example, the date for the job
might be in the past. To correct the problem, edit the job to
change job options. For more information about editing
scheduled jobs, see Editing Scheduled Jobs on page 621.
7 Click Close to close the Reporting Options dialog box.
Editing Scheduled Jobs
If you need to make changes to a scheduled job, edit it to change job
options. You can change any job options, such as the date, time, report
template, or e-mail recipients.
1 On the menu bar, click Tools > Reports > Reporting Options. The
Reporting Options dialog box appears.
2 Under Scheduled Jobs, click the job you want to change, and then
click Edit. The Edit Job dialog box appears.
3 Change job options as needed on the Calendar, Reports, and
Recipients tabs.
4 Click OK.
5 Click Close to close the Reporting Options dialog box.
Note: If the start date for a scheduled job is in the past, and it is
not a recurring job, the report will not be generated. To
correct this problem, edit the scheduled job and choose a
start date that is in the future.
Deleting Scheduled Jobs
If you no longer need a scheduled job, delete it.
1 On the menu bar, click Tools > Reports > Reporting Options. The
Reporting Options dialog box appears.
2 Under Scheduled Jobs, click the job you want to delete, and then
click Delete. A dialog box appears asking if you are sure you want to
delete the selected job.
3 Click Yes. The job is deleted from the list of scheduled jobs.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
621
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
4 Click Close to close the Reporting Options dialog box.
Working With
Verification Tests
A collection of verification tests are available to assist you or a customer
service engineer (CSE) in determining whether the library is properly
installed, configured, and operational. Running the tests is an important
part of ensuring that the system is working correctly.
Note: Because resolving an issue often involves complex technical
procedures, such as removing and replacing FRUs, and because
verification tests often require preparation and trained
interpretation of results, it is recommended that a CSE perform
the tests.
There are four types of verification test that help diagnose problems
with the library:
• Install Test on page 623
• Smaller library configuration requires about 1 hour and the larger
configurations require as long as 6 hours to run the Install Test.
Partial Test on page 623
• FRU Test on page 623
• Custom Test on page 624
These verification tests provide the following:
• Fully automated tests
• Tests to determine problems with installation
• Detailed problem analysis
• Full system tests or individual field replaceable unit (FRU) tests
• Logs of installation and configuration tests
• Graphical reports showing passed and failed results
• No affect to integrity of data
To perform these tests, the accessor assembly must be ready and
functional, and the library must be powered on. In addition, the library
must be in an offline state, and at least one scratch tape must be
inserted in the I/E station.
622
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Test Descriptions
This section describes the verification tests and their associated subtests that are available.
Note: Refer to Sub-test Descriptions on page 624 for descriptions of
each sub-test.
Install Test
The Install Test enables you to verify that the library’s installation and
configuration is complete and functioning correctly. The Install Test
automatically runs the following individual sub-tests:
• Library alignment test
• Picker assembly test
• I/E station assembly test
• Get/Put test
• Scanner fiducial test
Smaller library configuration requires about 1 hour and the larger
configurations require as long as 6 hours to run the Install Test. Partial
Test
The Partial Test performs the selected sub-tests to test an area or range
of the library configuration. The available sub-tests include:
• Frame test - This test includes the same individual tests as the Install
Test, but enables you to specify a range of modules rather than
testing all modules.
• Configuration test - This test includes the picker assembly and
scanner fiducial tests.
Both tests enable you to select a range of modules and racks to test. For
example, if you have a four-module library, you can select to test only
modules 3 and 4. The Frame test performs the same operations as the
installation verification test, except there are frame and rack range
parameters available.
FRU Test
The FRU test enables you to verify the replacement of a FRU. When the
FRU test is selected, you can select any of the following sub-tests:
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
623
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
• Accessor Assembly
• Picker Assembly
• Drive Sled Assembly
• IE Assembly
• Scan Barcode
When one of the sub-tests is selected, you may be prompted to enter
additional information. For example, the Select FRU dialog box has tabs
along the top to select individual drives, I/E stations, and scratch tapes.
Custom Test
The Custom test enables you to run the Library Alignment sub-test on a
per-rack basis.
Sub-test Descriptions
Use the Verification Tests dialog box to select the test and sub-test, to
start the test, and view results. Figure 67 shows the parts of the
Verification Tests dialog box. To display the dialog box, click Tools >
Verification Tests.
624
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Figure 67 Verification Tests
Dialog Box
selected sub-test
test results area
selected test
drive inventory
library inventory
blade inventory
test report output
display test logs
close window
refresh window
start/stop test
view Help window
Library Alignment Test
The library alignment test performs the following tasks:
• Performs accessor X-axis and Y-axis travel test (also calls the FRU
accessor assembly test)
• Calibrates library and checks calibration offsets by comparing them
to the default values for the drives and I/E stations
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
625
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
• Checks magazine offsets
• Checks collected offset alignments for magazines, I/E stations, and
drive sleds
• Checks joint alignment quality
Get/Put Test
The Get/Put test performs the following tasks:
• Performs a Get/Put of a scratch tape in the top and bottom slots of
each magazine that supports the scratch tape’s media
• Performs a Get/Put of existing media if no scratch tape is found or if
the top or bottom is occupied
• Moves a scratch tape to one row in each frame to test cross-frame
alignment
• Uses a scratch tape to perform a Get/Put in each compatible drive
Accessor Assembly Test
The accessor assembly test performs the following tasks:
• Checks for the module terminator (the terminator on the LBX board
in the last expansion module)
• Checks the joint alignment (makes sure all the joints on the X-axis
are flush)
• Performs two passes around the library to ensure the X-axis and Yaxis encoders are reading correctly and the belts are not slipping
• Tests the calibration sensor
• Checks the alignment of the accessor to the control module
Picker Assembly Test
The picker assembly test performs the following tasks:
• Performs pivot left and right check
• Performs reach and retract five times
• If the LMC gets its side done, performs a Get/Put of the selected cell
• Scans the control module serial number to make sure the scanner is
reading properly
626
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Drive Sled Assembly Test
The drive sled assembly test performs the following tasks:
• Calibrates the drive sled
• Checks the quality of the sled’s fiducial
• Performs Get/Put to the drive
Scan Barcode Test
The scan barcode test performs the following tasks:
• Moves to selected cell coordinate and scans the barcode label
• Checks to ensure the label reads the same from top to bottom
• Verifies the quality of the barcode labels and checks to make sure
barcode labels are in a readable position
I/E Station Assembly Test
The I/E station assembly test performs the following tasks:
• Locks and unlocks the I/E station
• Calibrates the I/E station and check offsets collected
• Checks each magazine’s fiducial in the I/E station
• Performs Get/Put tests on all the I/E station cells
Scanner Fiducial Test
The scanner fiducial test performs the following tasks:
• Scans and checks each magazine fiducial
• Scans and checks each drive sled fiducial
• Tests the calibration sensor
• Calibrates and checks repeatability, up to three times for failed
calibration targets
Understanding the Verification Test Inventory
The verification tests generate inventory lists that provide specific
information about the library's configurations. Inventory lists for the
library, drives, and blades are available. On the Verification Test dialog
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
627
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
box, select the type of inventory list that you want to see (Library,
Drive, or Blade).
Library Inventory
This inventory list provides the following statistics and information:
• Library serial number
• Library firmware version
• Library WWN base
• Count for frame, tower, drives, I/E magazine, storage magazine,
LGR, IEX, LMD, CMB, EEB, LSC, MCB, and FCB
• Serial number for frame, tower, power supply, LMD, EEB, IEX, FCB,
CMB, MCB, and LSC
• Application firmware version for EEB, FCB, CMB, MCB, KGR, and LSC
• Boot firmware version for CMB, MCB, LGR, and LSC
• Pip firmware version for CMB and MCB
• Number of cartridges, I/E stations, frames, towers, drives, and aisles
Note: If an inventory is performed that includes a varied off tower,
you will receive a warning message allowing you to continue
with the inventory or cancel the request so the tower can be
varied on. If you continue, the tower will not be included in the
results of the inventory.
Drive Inventory
This inventory list provides the following information about each drive:
• Drive type
• Type of interface
• Physical serial number
• Logical serial number
• Firmware version
• Sled serial number
• Sled application firmware version
• Sled boot firmware version
628
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Blade Inventory
This inventory list provides the following information about each Fibre
Channel I/O blade:
• Location of each blade
• Serial number
• Firmware version
Test Results
The results of all subtests appear on the Verification Tests dialog box
after each individual test is completed. See Table 50 for an explanation
of test results.
Table 50 Test Results
Test Results
Explanation
PASSED
Completed the test without reported errors.
FAILED
An error has been found and needs to be corrected. A fatal error, or an error that
causes a part of the system to become disabled, will halt the test.
INCOMPLETE
This portion of a test was incomplete due to an interruption or a portion of the
test was run (for example, no scratch tape was used so must only use existing
tapes). An incomplete will occur when the door is opened, an abort command is
issued, or when the Robotics Enable button is pressed.
SKIPPED
This portion of the test was skipped. The cause is that either a scratch tape was
not present or the library was not configured for the test.
WARNING
A warning is additional information about the test that the user should know.
For example, if a calibration failed, but the stored offsets are analyzed, a warning
should be posted that states that the offset check might not be accurate.
STOPPED
The test was interrupted. The log will show the result to provide a record of test
interruption.
Note: A single problem in the library can cause failed results in
multiple tests. After taking action to correct a failed result, run
tests that yielded failed results again.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
629
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Verification Test Graphical Reports
Some verification tests produce graphical reports that let you easily see
if the test generated passed or failed results. Each result is shown in a
different color:
• P - passed (green)
• F - failed (red)
There are eight types of graphical reports. Each individual test generates
two or more graphical reports (except for the scan barcode test, which
does not generate graphical reports). The following sections show an
example of each type of graphical report and actions to take to correct a
failed result.
To view the graphical reports for a test, click Reports on the
Verification Tests dialog box. Figure 68 on page 631 shows the parts of
the report window.
630
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Figure 68 Report Window
click to see results
for the next frame
click to save a copy of
the results in PDF format
click to see results
for the next test
click to view Online
Help
click to display results
for a previously run test
(results for the last five
tests are retained)
click to close the report
window
click to view the text log
graphic showing P
(passed), and F (failed)
results
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
631
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Joint Alignments
The Joint Alignments graphical report shows the results for tests of
alignment between frames. It also shows the results for tests of accessor
travel to all corners of the library.
• If the graphical report shows one or more failed results for joint
alignment, realign the middle X-axis rail and check the alignment of
the top and bottom X-axis rails at the location of the failure.
• If all the joints passed testing but accessor movement failed,
manually move the accessor down the aisle in each direction to
locate any places where motion of the accessor is not smooth or is
restricted. Then realign the middle X-axis rail and check the
alignment of the top and bottom X-axis rails at the location of the
failure.
See Figure 69 on page 633.
632
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Figure 69 Joint Alignments
Graphical Report
Vertical Alignments
The Vertical Alignments graphical report shows the results for test of
vertical alignment of tape magazines on the drive-side and door-side of
each frame, and for vertical alignment of each I/E station.
• If the graphical report shows a failed result for the drive-side or
door-side, make sure that all tape magazines are installed properly
on that side and that the calibration targets are correctly snapped
on to the magazines.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
633
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
• If the graphical report shows a failed result for the I/E station, make
sure the I/E station and front door are completely shut.
• If running the test again still generates failed results, realign the
middle X-axis rail and check the alignment of the top and bottom Xaxis rails at the location of the failure.
See Figure 70 on page 634.
Figure 70 Vertical Alignments
Graphical Report
634
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Horizontal Alignments
The Horizontal Alignments graphical report shows the results for tests
of horizontal alignment of tape magazines on the drive-side and doorside across frames, and for horizontal alignment of I/E stations across
frames.
Note: This graphical report is not generated for libraries with only
one frame.
• If the graphical report shows a failed result for the drive-side or
door-side, make sure that all tape magazines are installed properly
on that side and that the calibration targets are correctly snapped
on to the magazines.
• If the graphical report shows a failed result for the I/E station, make
sure the I/E station and front door are completely shut.
• If running the test again still generates failed results, realign the
middle X-axis rail and check the alignment of the top and bottom Xaxis rails at the location of the failure.
See Figure 71 on page 636.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
635
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Figure 71 Horizontal
Alignments Graphical Report
Calibration Offsets
The Calibration Offsets graphical report shows the results for tests of
tape magazine, drive sled, and I/E station offsets compared to
predefined tolerances. Reports are generated for drive-side and doorside for all frames.
• If the graphical report shows a failed result for one or more tape
magazines, make sure the magazines at the location of the failure
636
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
are installed properly and that the calibration targets are correctly
snapped on to the magazines.
• If the graphical report shows a failed result for the I/E station, make
sure the I/E station and front door are completely shut.
• If running the test again still generates failed results, realign the
middle X-axis rail and check the alignment of the top and bottom Xaxis rails at the location of the failure.
See Figure 72 on page 637.
Figure 72 Calibration Offsets
Graphical Report
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
637
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Boundary/Accessibility
The Boundary/Accessibility graphical report shows the results for tests of
the accessor while performing Get, Put, and Scan functions for all tape
magazines and drive sleds. (This tests whether magazines and sleds are
within the maximum allowable movement range of the accessor.)
• If the graphical report shows a failed result for one or more tape
magazines, make sure the magazines at the location of the failure
are installed properly and that the calibration targets are correctly
snapped on to the magazines.
• If the graphical report shows a failed result for the I/E station, make
sure the I/E station and front door are completely shut.
• If running the test again still generates failed results, realign the
middle X-axis rail and check the alignment of the top and bottom Xaxis rails at the location of the failure.
See Figure 73 on page 639.
638
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Figure 73 Boundary/
Accessibility Graphical Report
Get/Put
The Get/Put graphical report shows the results for tests of the picker
assembly while performing one Get and one Put function for each tape
magazine. The picker will use the selected scratch tape or the existing
tape if it finds one at the target.
• If the graphical report shows a failed result for one or more tape
magazines, make sure the magazines at the location of the failure
are installed properly.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
639
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
• If there are multiple failed results in an area, review the area to
make sure it is not prone to problems. Also run the library
alignment test (part of the installation verification or partial frame
test) to make sure the library is level.
• If there are a large number of issues, use rubbing alcohol to clean
the picker fingers and the detents in the side of the tapes.
• If the problems persist, you may need to replace the picker
assembly.
See Figure 74 on page 641.
640
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Figure 74 Get/Put Graphical
Report
Scan Fiducials
The Scan Fiducials graphical report shows the results for tests of the
fiducial barcode on each tape magazine and drive sled, including the
width, expected Y position (shift), and the number of hits the scanner
receives while traveling up and down. (Only known magazines are
tested.)
• If the graphical report shows a failed result for one or more tape
magazines, replace the affected magazines.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
641
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
• If there are multiple failed results, run the library alignment test
(part of the installation verification or partial frame test) to make
sure the library is level.
• If the library is level and there are multiple failed results, the scanner
should be inspected and replaced if necessary.
See Figure 75 on page 642.
Figure 75 Scan Fiducials
Graphical Report
642
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Picker Pivot/Reach
The Picker Pivot/Reach graphical report shows the results for tests of the
picker while performing rotation and reach/retract actions.
• If the graphical report shows one or more failed results, inspect the
picker. It should rotate easily by hand, and the fingers should spring
into a clamped position. Make sure both rotation axis belts are free
of debris. Also make sure that the storage is correctly seated in the I/
E station and that the I/E station and front door are completely shut.
• If the problems persist, you may need to replace the picker
assembly.
See Figure 76 on page 644.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
643
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Figure 76 Picker Pivot/Reach
Graphical Report
Verification Test Logs
Each verification test produces a test log that details all information and
results from the individual tests and subtests. In addition, the log
includes information to help you understand the test results and to help
resolve any problems encountered. To view a test log, click Reports on
the Verification Tests dialog box to display the report window, and
then click the Text tab.
644
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
You can view results for the five most recent tests. Click Reports, and
then click the test results you want to view.
This log file is appended with data as each test finishes. You can repeat
the test if any problems are found and fixed. If the Verification Tests
dialog box was not closed during the retesting, all results are contained
in one log file.
To save the information that the test generates, click Send. If you are
using the remote LMC client, you can choose to save the log to your
hard drive. If you choose to save directly to your hard drive, the report
listing and test log are combined into one text file.
Figure 77 on page 646 shows an example of a test log. It provides the
following information:
• The test output is from the library alignment test.
• In dual-robotics libraries, the test output is for the robot on which
the test was run (the currently active robot).
• The test title is always shown between rows of equal signs.
• A brief guide for understanding coordinates and offsets used in the
test results is provided near the beginning of the log.
• The X-axis and Y-axis limits applied by this test are shown. FAILED
output is placed between brackets; for example, (30) and [45].
• The results of the subtest appear between dashed lines.
• Coordinates are represented as A (aisle), F (frame), R (rack), S
(section), C (column), and R (row).
• All location values are in 0.1 mm.
• All results that you should review are identified with four arrows
(>>>>) in the column to the left of the detailed results.
• At the end of every test, summary results of every subtest are given.
The overall test result appears between asterisk lines, and a
summary of subtest results follows. See Figure 77 on page 646.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
645
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Figure 77 Example Test Log
Output
646
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Running the Verification Tests
This section provides instructions for starting the installation verification
test, partial test, FRU operational test, and custom test.
To stop a test, disable the robotics by pressing the Robotics Enable
button on the operator panel or by clicking Stop on the Verification
Tests dialog box. Control will be returned to you as soon as the current
command is completed.
The test results appear after the tests complete. The different reports
(Library Report, Drive Report, and Blade Report) will be generated
and viewable in the Reports area of the Verification Tests dialog box.
If a typical user logs on while an administrator is logged on and running
a verification test, testing will continue unaffected. Only one
administrator can be logged on at any given time.
Install Verification Test
When the Install verification test is running, no one else can log on to
the library. The message, “Verification Test is Running,” appears in the
Activity area of the main LMC display.
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Tools > Verification Tests. The Verification Tests dialog box
appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
647
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
4 From the Select Test drop-down list, click Install.
5 Click Start.
6 If prompted to take the library offline, click Yes. The IVT Pre-Test
Questionnaire appears.
648
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Gen 1 Pre-test Questionnaire
Gen 2 Pre-test Questionnaire
7 Complete the pre-test questionnaire by clicking inside the box next
to the questions.
You cannot continue with the installation verification test until you
have completed and verified the question requests on this
questionnaire.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
649
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Note: Make sure you physically verify each of the questions on the
questionnaire. Each of the items listed can cause the
installation verification test to have unexpected behavior and
unreliable results. The tests must be re-run if they fail.
8 After you complete the questionnaire, click Next. The following
dialog box appears.
9 Insert a “scratch” cartridge into the I/E station, and then click Next.
650
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Note: Make sure that your scratch tapes are formatted and
contain no data that cannot be overwritten. Scratch tapes
must have barcode labels with valid volume serial (volser)
numbers on them. Also, you might find it useful to write
down the volser number so that you can identify your
scratch tapes.
This procedure will not damage any cartridges that are
already installed in the library.
If the scratch cartridge becomes lodged in a drive or
magazine, it must be manually removed from the library. If
not removed, the cartridge will become part of the
partition the next time the accessor assembly is enabled.
The I/E station will be locked until the inventory is complete.
10 Select a scratch cartridge of each media type listed on the following
dialog box.
Note: You can select one scratch cartridge per media type. Each
test that requires a scratch cartridge will call the media
types as needed.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
651
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
11 After you select the cartridges, click Finish.
As the tests run, the library will generate RAS tickets if problems are
discovered. You must close the Verification Tests dialog box to view
those tickets. Return to the Verification Tests dialog box to view
test results.
652
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
12 After the test is complete, click Reports to view the test results.
The report window appears with the Graphical tab displayed.
• Use the Graphical tab to view graphical reports and to quickly
identify areas where failed results occurred.
• Use the toolbar to navigate between graphical reports or to
save the results in PDF format. For more information about how
to work with graphical reports, see Verification Test Graphical
Reports on page 630.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
653
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
13 For more detailed test results, click the Text tab to view the test log
generated by the LMC.
14 Review the test log to find failed test results, and to see
troubleshooting information. For information about how to
interpret test logs, see Verification Test Logs on page 644.
15 To e-mail the test log, print it, or save it as a text file, click Send and
then specify the output location. For more information, see Mailing,
Saving, and Printing Status Information on page 548.
654
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
16 To see the results for a previous test, click Reports, and then click a
test. The LMC saves the most recent five test results.
17 When you are done working with the test results, click Close to
close the result window.
18 If you are done performing verification tests, click Close to close the
Verification Tests dialog box.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
655
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Mailing, Saving, and Printing Test Logs
The Send button on the Text tab on the report window enables you to
send a verification test log to e-mail addresses. If you are accessing the
LMC from a remote client, Send also enables you to save the log to a file
or print it.
Note: You can mail, save, or print verification test logs from a remote
client. However, you cannot save or print logs from the library’s
touch screen.
The information that is sent will be the same as what the Text tab
appears at the time that you click Send.
Note: Before you perform the following procedure, you must make
sure that e-mail is appropriately configured in the LMC so that
the library can send logs to the recipient. See Configuring Email on page 187.
1 Make sure that the Text tab on the report window displays the log
that you want to send.
2 Click Send. The Email, Save or Print dialog box appears.
3 Perform one of the following tasks:
• To indicate that you want to send the log as an e-mail message
to a recipient, select Email, and then either type an e-mail
address in the Email text box or select an existing address from
the drop-down list. You can type a comment in the Comment
text box to send with the log.
656
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
• To indicate that you want to save the log, select Save, and then
either type in the Save text box a path and a file name to which
you want the log saved or click Browse to specify a location and
a file name.
Note: The Save option is available to remote client users only. It
appears grayed out on the touch screen.
• To indicate that you want to send the log to a printer, select
Print.
Note: The Print option is available to remote client users only. It
appears grayed out on the touch screen.
4 To send, click OK.
Partial Tests
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Tools > Verification Tests. The Verification Tests dialog box
appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
657
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
4 From the Select Test drop-down list, click Partial.
5 From the Select Subtest drop-down list, click either Frame or
Configuration or both. A check mark indicates the test is selected.
6 Click Start.
7 If prompted to take the library offline, click Yes. The following
dialog box appears.
658
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
8 Select either Continue With Scratch Tapes or Continue Without
Scratch Tapes, and then click Next.
9 If you selected Continue With Scratch Tapes, insert a “scratch”
cartridge into the I/E station, and then click Next.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
659
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Note: Make sure that your scratch tapes are formatted and
contain no data that cannot be overwritten. Scratch tapes
must have barcode labels with valid volume serial (volser)
numbers on them. Also, you might find it useful to write
down the volser number so that you can identify your
scratch tapes.
This procedure will not damage any cartridges that are
already installed in the library.
If the scratch cartridge becomes lodged in a drive or
magazine, it must be manually removed from the library. If
not removed, the cartridge will become part of the
partition the next time the accessor assembly is enabled.
The I/E station will be locked until the inventory is complete.
10 Select a scratch cartridge of each media type listed on the following
dialog box, and then click Next.
Note: You can select one scratch cartridge per media type. Each
test that requires a scratch cartridge will call the media
types as needed.
660
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
11 Select the number of the frame and racks where the tests are to be
performed.
The following example shows both the frame and configuration
tests because both were selected.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
661
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Test progress is shown in the Verification Tests dialog box.
662
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
12 After the test is complete, click Reports to view the test results.
For more information about how to work with graphical reports, see
Verification Test Graphical Reports on page 630.
For information about how to interpret test logs, see Verification Test
Logs on page 644.
For information how to e-mail, print, or save text logs, see Mailing,
Saving, and Printing Test Logs on page 656.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
663
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
FRU Operational Tests
There are two ways to run the FRU operational tests. You can select the
FRU test from the Verification Tests dialog box. Alternatively, you can
run the test from the Ticket Details dialog box if that FRU is supported
by the verification tests.
The screens displayed by the FRU operational tests vary, depending on
which subtest was selected. For example, if you click Picker Assembly,
IE Assembly, or Drive Sled Assembly, the following dialog box appears
for selecting a scratch tape.
664
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Running FRU Operational Tests from Verification Tests Dialog Box
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Tools > Verification Tests. The Verification Tests dialog box
appears.
FRU tests are available for the Accessor Assembly, Picker
Assembly, Drive Sled Assembly, IE Assembly, and Scan Barcode.
You can only test one FRU at a time. The following steps provide
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
665
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
instructions for running the Scan Barcode test. The other tests
provide similar windows and functionality for the other FRUs.
4 From the Select Test drop-down list, click FRU.
5 From the Select Subtest drop-down list, click Scan Barcode.
6 Click Start.
7 If prompted to take the library offline, click Yes. The following
dialog box appears.
666
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
This dialog box enables you to enter any coordinate address in the
library (aisle, module, rack, section, column, and row). The address
does not need to be occupied by a drive or cartridge.
8 Click Finish. Test progress is shown in the Verification Tests dialog
box.
9 After the test is complete, click Reports to view the test results.
For more information about how to work with graphical reports, see
Verification Test Graphical Reports on page 630.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
667
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
For information about how to interpret test logs, see Verification Test
Logs on page 644.
For information how to e-mail, print, or save text logs, see Mailing,
Saving, and Printing Test Logs on page 656.
Running FRU Operational Tests from Ticket Details Dialog Box
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Tools > Tickets. The Ticket dialog box appears.
4 From the Tickets dialog box, click the categories of the tickets you
want to view and click OK. The Ticket List dialog box appears.
668
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
5 Click a ticket to highlight it, and then click Details. The Ticket
Details dialog box is displayed.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
669
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
6 From the Ticket Details dialog box, click FRU Test.
After the FRU test successfully verifies that the FRU has PASSED, all
tickets associated with the failure are transitioned to the Verify
state.
Custom Tests
The Custom test enables you to run the Library Alignment sub-test.
1 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
2 Click Tools > Verification Tests. The Verification Tests dialog box
appears.
670
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
3 From the Select Test drop-down list, click Custom. The Select
Subtest field defaults to the Library Alignment subtest and cannot
be changed.
4 Click Start.
5 If prompted to take the library offline, click Yes.
6 Click Start. The following dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
671
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
7 Select the starting Module (frame) and Rack as well as the ending
Module (frame) and Rack where you want to perform the tests.
8 Click Finish. The test is initiated. Test progress is shown in the
Verification Tests dialog box.
672
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
9 After the test is complete, click Reports to view the current or
historical reports.
For more information about how to work with graphical reports, see
Verification Test Graphical Reports on page 630.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
673
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
For information about how to interpret and save test logs, see
Verification Test Logs on page 644.
Using the Partitions
Defragmentation Tool
Typically, partitions in a library are physically contiguous. That is, all tape
slots that belong to a partition are adjacent to one another in the
library. However, if a partition is enlarged, or if an expansion module is
added to a library, it is possible that some or all partitions in the library
will no longer be physically contiguous. In this case, the slots that
belong to a partition are not all adjacent to one other, and the partition
is fragmented. Fragmentation can make bulk loading media more
difficult.
Defragmenting partitions reassigns slots in the library so that all slots in
each partition are physically contiguous with one another. In addition,
media is moved as needed to make sure it resides in the correct
partition. In the process, tapes are first moved from their old location to
the I/E station, and then are moved to their new location in the library.
Note: Only partitions that contain an I/E station can be
defragmented. Also, at least one magazine in the
I/E station must be empty. Partitions that do not contain an I/E
station cannot be defragmented and will be skipped.
Caution: Depending on the size of the library, defragmenting
partitions can be a time-consuming process.
Defragmenting Partitions
After enlarging a partition or adding an expansion module to the library,
check for partition fragmentation, and then defragment partitions if
necessary.
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
3 Click Tools > Partitions Defragmentation. The Partitions
Defragmentation dialog box appears. This dialog box shows a
graphical representation of the tape magazines in the library.
674
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Magazines are color-coded indicating to which partition they
belong.
If the library has more than one frame, click the arrow buttons to
display the next or previous frame. If one or more partitions are
fragmented, you can defragment them.
4 To begin defragmenting partitions, click Start. A dialog box appears
notifying you that partitions that do not have a free I/E station slot
cannot be defragmented and will be skipped.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
675
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
5 Verify that the I/E station in each partition has at least one free slot,
and then click Yes. A dialog box appears notifying you that all
partitions must be taken offline before defragmenting can begin.
6 Click Yes to take all partitions offline.
The partitions defragmentation operation starts. A progress bar at
the top of the Partitions Defragmentation dialog box displays the
percentage complete for the operation.
When defragmenting is complete, a dialog box appears prompting
you to take all partitions online.
7 Click Yes to take all partitions online.
8 Click Close to close the Partitions Defragmentation dialog box.
Canceling Defragmentation
Depending on the size of the library, defragmenting partitions can be a
time-consuming process. If needed, you can click Abort on the
Partitions Defragmentation dialog box to cancel the defragmentation
operation at any time. When prompted, click Yes to confirm the action.
After you cancel defragmentation, the library finishes moving the
current magazine (and any media it contains), then defragmentation
stops. If you cancel defragmentation, no tapes will be stranded, and all
media will still be assigned to the correct partition. You can resume
defragmentation at a later time by clicking Start on the Partitions
Defragmentation dialog box.
Recovering After Defragmentation is Interrupted
If a defragmentation operation fails (for example, if a power
interruption occurs or the robotics go offline), no tapes will be stranded,
and all media will still be assigned to the correct partition. However, it is
possible that some media which was in the process of being moved will
remain in the I/E station.
In this case, simply import the media into the library. The media will
automatically be moved to a magazine in the correct partition. For more
information about importing media, see Importing Cartridges Into
Partitions on page 697.
676
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintenance Actions
Cycling Library Power
If library firmware seems to be at fault, or the robot will not move, or a
circuit board has gone down, try recycling power to the library. Cycling
library power involves shutting down the library, powering it off, and
then powering it on. For more information, see Shutting Down/
Rebooting the Library on page 485, Powering Off the Library on
page 487, and Powering On the Library on page 487.
Caution: Do not cycle library power for a drive problem. Use
Tools > Drives to power cycle the individual drive.
Removing Lodged
Cartridges
It is very unlikely that a cartridge will become lodged in the robot. If this
happens, contact technical support. It also is very unlikely that a
cartridge will become lodged in a drive. If this happens, it is not difficult
to remove it.
Removing a Cartridge From a Drive
Required tools: None
1 On the operator panel, press the Robotics Enabled button to turn
off power to the picker and return it to the home position. The
power is on to all other components.
2 Open the access door. Aisle power is disabled.
3 On the drive, press the Eject button, and then remove the cartridge.
4 Close the access door. The power is on.
5 On the operator panel, press the Robotics Enabled button to
enable the picker.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
677
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Using Sift Sort
Using Sift Sort
The Sift/Sort/Export functionality is to facilitate bulk movement of
cartridges from their standard slot locations to either specific storage
area within the library or the I/E station (the default setting will be the
left upper storage area within the library).
The default mode of operation is to relocate cartridges in sort order
within the library, based on slot number or other logical grouping. This
sort function helps you to quickly locate like-cartridge ID’s, view all
daily/weekly/monthly tapes easily (if a barcode nomenclature is
implemented)
Exporting Media via
Sift/Sort
678
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 From the Tools menu, select Sift Sort > Export. The Sift Sort
Export dialog box appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Using Sift Sort
Sort by
EDLM
scan test
result
You may choose to filter by partition or by barcode.
3 To filter by partition, in the SSE Source Filter area, do the following:
a Select a Partition from the drop down list.
b If EDLM is licensed on the library, you can filter media in the
EDLM library managed partition and partitions with EDLM
policies configured according to their media scan test result.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
679
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Using Sift Sort
From the drop-down list to the right of the Partition dropdown list, select All, Good, Suspect, Bad, or Untested.
c To use an additional filter, in the Media Filter field, type the
search string and click Filter.
For example, to filter all media containing the character 8, type
*8*.This field is case sensitive.
The appropriate media appears in the Select SSE Media section
below.
4 Optionally, in the Barcode File Selection section, you can filter
using a file using a “user-supplied” file (that lists barcodes).
a Click Browse to locate the appropriate file.
b Clicking Enable File Filter tells the interface to filter out
barcodes contained in that file.
If the barcodes in that file do not belong to the particular
partition selected, those barcodes are highlighted in red in the
Select SSE Media section and are not selectable.
5 Once you have selected media to sift sort, in the SSE Starting Slot
Destination area, click Explorer to select a coordinate location
graphically by clicking on a cell.
6 To relocate a cartridge to the last empty slot of the destination
element selected, ensure Relocate Full check box is checked.
Note: The Relocate Full box is checked as the default condition.
When Relocate Full is checked, any tapes in the destination area
will be moved to the lowest available element address location in
the partition.
When Relocate Full is not checked, tapes that exist in the
destination area will not be moved (skipped).
7 Click OK. The Control Module screen appears.
680
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Using Sift Sort
Based on the selections you made on the Sift Sort Export screen,
the Control Module screen displays the available storage locations.
8 Click the desired storage location slot for the export function. The
coordinates and details for that location appear in the Information
area of the screen.
9 Click Select. The Sift Sort Export screen appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
681
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Retrieving MIBs
Capturing Sift Sort
Screen Shot
Use the Capture Sift Sort screen to capture a picture of the last sift sort
export you performed. The picture can be saved to a file on your local
work station or e-mailed to a recipient.
1 Log on as an administrator.
2 From the Tools menu, select Sift Sort > Capture Report. The
Capture Sift Sort screen appears.
3 On the top of the screen, click the circle next to the type of capture
you want to perform - BMP, GIF, PNG, or JPEG.
4 Click Capture. The Capture Sift Sort Export screen appears.
5 Send the capture via email or save it on your computer.
E-mail the capture
a Click the circle next to Email.
b Either type the email address or select one from the drop down
list. The Comment section is enabled for entry.
c In the Comment section, you can include a note to the
recipient, or any comments about the capture.
Save the capture
a Click Save, and then click Browse to locate the location where
you want to save the capture on your computer.
Retrieving MIBs
The Tools menu’s Retrieve MIBs option allows you to retrieve the Scalar
i6000 MIB files, which can be compiled into your SNMP Management
tools. After retrieving the MIB files, you can extract the contents and
then use a third-party SNMP tool such as Landesk or HP Operations
Manager.
Emailing or Saving an
MIB File
682
1 Log on as an administrator.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintaining Air Filters
2 From the Tools menu, select Retrieve MIBs. The Retrieve MIBs zip
file dialog box appears.
3 Send the MIB file via email, or save it on your computer.
E-mail the MIB File
a Click the circle next to Email.
b Either type the email address or select one from the drop down
list. The Comment section is enabled for entry.
c In the Comment section, you can include a note to the
recipient, or any comments about the MIB file.
Save the MIB File
a Click Save, and then click Browse to navigate to the location
where you want to save the MIB file on your computer.
Maintaining Air Filters
The access door of each control and expansion module has two air
filters: one located at the top, and the other located at the bottom, as
shown in Figure 78.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
683
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintaining Air Filters
Figure 78 Top and Bottom Air
Filters
top air filter
bottom air filter
Many factors exist that contribute to the need to regularly service the air
filters. For example, the total number of tape drives and the operating
environment greatly affect the rate at which debris accumulates in the
air filters.
With the maximum number of tape drives operating in a normal data
center environment, you should check the filters every two years. If you
see dust and debris on the inlet side of the filters, remove the filters and
use water and a mild soap to clean them. The materials in the filters
should last for the life of the product. However, if abnormal
contamination occurs, you should replace them. To order filters, contact
your service representative.
684
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintaining Air Filters
Removing an Air Filter
Use these instructions to remove either a top or bottom air filter.
Required tools: #1 Phillips screwdriver
FRU ID: 1001 (air filter)
1 Take the library offline.
For information about taking the library offline, see Changing the
Library’s State on page 475.
2 On the operator panel, press Robotics Enabled to turn off power to
the picker and return it to the home position. The power is on to all
other components.
3 Open the access door. Aisle power is disabled.
4 Use the Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the two retaining
thumbscrews. The screws remain attached to the retaining bar.
thumbscrew
retaining bar
thumbscrew
5 Remove the air filter.
6 Use water and a mild soap to clean the air filter.
7 Allow them to dry.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
685
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Maintaining Air Filters
Replacing an Air Filter
Use these instructions to replace either a top or bottom air filter.
Note: Make sure that the air filter is completely dry before placing it
back in the access door.
Required tools: #1 Phillips screwdriver
FRU ID: 1001 (air filter)
1 Take the library offline.
For information about taking the library offline, see Changing the
Library’s State on page 475.
2 On the operator panel, press Robotics Enabled to turn off power to
the picker and return it to the home position. The power is on to all
other components.
3 Open the access door. Aisle power is disabled.
4 Place the filter in the opening.
5 Place the retaining bar over the filter to hold it in place. Use the
Phillips screwdriver to tighten the two retaining thumbscrews.
thumbscrew
retaining bar
thumbscrew
6 Close the access door.
686
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Robot, Tower and Power Rail Health Checks
7 On the operator panel, press Robotics Enabled to enable the picker.
8 Bring the library online. See Changing the Library’s State on
page 475.
Robot, Tower and Power Rail Health Checks
The library automatically performs health checks on the robot(s), towers
and robot power rails. If problems are found, a RAS ticket is generated.
By default, the library performs each check once per day. You can
change how often the library performs these checks. The interval can be
set in increments of days, from once per day to once per year. You can
also set it to never run. Quantum recommends a once-per-day health
check for the robots, towers and power rails.
To change the health check interval:
1 Select Setup > System Settings > Health Check Intervals.
2 The Health Check Intervals screen appears. The intervals for rails,
robot, and towers (if applicable) are displayed.
3 Change any of the intervals by typing in a new value in the field. The
check is performed every time the interval has elapsed. If you type
zero, the health check will never be performed.
Note: The intervals are in increments of days. Accepted values are
form 0 (health check never performed) to 180.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
687
Chapter 15: Maintaining Your Library
Robot, Tower and Power Rail Health Checks
688
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 16
Working With Cartridges
and Barcodes
The Library Management Console (LMC) simplifies cartridge loading and
unloading, importing and exporting, and moving and inventory
operations. The maximum library can be configured to accommodate
from 100 LTO cartridges to 7,146 LTO cartridges (for a single-robot
library) or 7,224 LTO cartridges (for a dual-robot library). For libraries
containing high-density expansion modules, the maximum capacities
are 12,006 LTO cartridges (for a single-robot library) or 11,760 LTO
cartridges (for dual-robot libraries) for the following drive types:
Note: A library with Gen 2 hardware does not support DLT tape drives
and media.
• SCSI or Fibre LTO-1
• SCSI or Fibre LTO-2
• Fibre LTO-3
• Fibre LTO-4
• Fibre LTO-5
• Fibre LTO-6
• Fibre LTO-7 (IBM only)
Every partition in the library must contain at least one cleaning
cartridge.
This chapter consists of the following sections:
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
689
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Handling Cartridges Properly
• Handling Cartridges Properly on page 690
• Write-Protecting Cartridges on page 691
• Supported Barcode Formats on page 692
• Barcode Label Requirements on page 693
• Installing Barcode Labels on page 693
• Using Cleaning Cartridges on page 696
• Managing and Moving Media on page 697
Handling Cartridges Properly
To ensure the longest possible life for your cartridges, follow these
guidelines:
• Select a visible location to post procedures that describe proper
media handling.
• Ensure that anyone who handles cartridges has been properly
trained in all procedures.
• Do not drop or strike cartridges. Excessive shock could damage the
internal contents of cartridges or the casings themselves, rendering
the cartridges unusable.
• Do not expose cartridges to direct sunlight or sources of heat,
including portable heaters and heating ducts.
• Do not stack cartridges more than five high.
• The operating temperature range for LTO cartridges is 10º to 35ºC.
The storage temperature range is 16º to 32ºC in a dust-free
environment with a relative humidity range between 20% and 80%
(non-condensing).
• If cartridges have been exposed to temperatures outside the ranges
specified above, stabilize the cartridges at room temperature for the
same amount of time they were exposed to extreme temperatures
or 24 hours, whichever is less.
• Do not place cartridges near sources of electromagnetic energy or
strong magnetic fields, such as computer monitors, electric motors,
690
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Write-Protecting Cartridges
speakers, or x-ray equipment. Exposure to electromagnetic energy
or magnetic fields can destroy data and the embedded servo code
written on the media by the cartridge manufacturer, rendering the
cartridges unusable.
• Place identification labels only in the designated slots on the
cartridges.
• If you ship cartridges, ship them in their original packaging or
something stronger.
• Do not insert damaged cartridges into drives.
• Do not touch the tape or tape leader.
• Do not degauss cartridges that you intend to reuse.
Write-Protecting Cartridges
All cartridges have a write-protect (write-inhibit) switch to prevent
accidental erasure or overwriting of data. Before loading a cartridge into
the library, make sure that the write-protect switch is positioned
correctly (either on or off).
• For LTO cartridges, slide the red or orange write-protect switch to
the right so that the padlock shows in the closed position. The
switch is located on the left side of the cartridge front. See
Figure 79 on page 692 for the location of the switch on an LTO
cartridge.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
691
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Supported Barcode Formats
Figure 79 Write-protect Switch
on an LTO-1 Cartridge
Supported Barcode Formats
Quantum supplies industry standard LTO barcode labels with a length of
6 barcode characters + 2 media identifier characters. For advanced
uses, your Quantum library supports tape cartridge barcode label
lengths of up to 15 characters. However, refer to Barcode Label
Requirements on page 693 for details as LTO barcode labels longer than
13 characters may not conform to the barcode label requirements when
it is affixed to the LTO tape cartridge.
two-character media
identifier (L1, L2, L3,
LT, L4, LU, L5, L6, LV, L7,
LW)
692
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Barcode Label Requirements
Barcode Label Requirements
Cartridges must have an external barcode label that is machine
readable. Quantum-supplied barcode labels provide the best results.
Barcode labels from other sources can be used, but they must meet the
following requirements:
• ANSI MH10.8M-1983 Standard
• Font: Code 39 (3 of 9)
• Allowable characters: Uppercase letters A to Z and numeric values 0
to 9
Note: Checksum characters are not supported on barcode labels.
• Number of characters: 5 to 15 (default for LTO is 6+2)
• Background reflection: Greater than 25 percent
• Print contrast: Greater than 75 percent
• Ratio: Greater than 2.2
• Module: Minimum 254 mm (10 mil)
• Print tolerance: ± 57 mm
• Length of the rest zones: 5.25 mm ± 0.25 mm
• No black marks may be present in the intermediate spaces or rest
zones
• No white areas may be present on the bars
Installing Barcode Labels
Each cartridge in the library must have an external label that is operator
and machine readable to identify the barcode number. Most
manufacturers offer cartridges with the labels already applied or with
the labels included that you can attach.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
693
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Installing Barcode Labels
Note: Duplicate barcodes are not supported even if you have mixed
media or multiple partitions in the library. If the library has
cartridges with identical barcode labels, the library will issue a
ticket notifying you of the problem. Areas in the LMC where
media IDs are listed will show information for the first
cartridge, but the cartridge with the duplicate barcode label
will not be listed.
All barcode labels are applied to the front of a cartridge. Peel off the
label and place it on the cartridge. Verify that label is oriented so that
the numbers appear above the barcode. Figure 80 on page 695 shows
an example of a barcode label being applied to an LTO cartridge.
Note: Barcode labels should be placed on the front of the tape with
the barcode bars on the bottom and the human readable
characters at the top.
Caution: Do not place any extra labels on the tapes other than on
the front. Extra labels will cause tape handling issues, tapes
getting stuck in drives and inventory operations to fail.
694
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Installing Barcode Labels
Figure 80 Applying Barcode
Labels to Cartridges
top of cartridge
barcode label
write protect lock
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
695
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Using Cleaning Cartridges
Using Cleaning Cartridges
Most tape drives require occasional cleaning. A cleaning cartridge cleans
accumulated debris from the tape drive and the read/write head.
Caution: You must use a separate cleaning cartridge for each
partition in the library.
Backup applications or archive software applications use different
techniques to automate the process of cleaning drives. These tools
specify cleaning cycles based on cycle counts of the drive, drive
requests, or regularly scheduled intervals.
The cleaning process itself requires certain considerations:
• Cleaning tapes must be labeled with a barcode. The preferred
method of labeling a cleaning cartridge is to have CLN or CLNU as
the prefix on the label. Any cartridge detected with a CLN or CLNU
prefix will be considered a universal cleaning cartridge, regardless of
any media identification extension. Cartridges containing a media
identification of C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6, and CU will be considered
cleaning cartridges and will be tracked and treated as a universal
cleaning cartridge.
• Insert a cleaning tape just as you do any other data tape. For
example, the most common method is by means of the I/E station
using host application control.
• Cleaning tapes often have limited lives that can last only as long as
20 cycles. The controlling host application manages the number of
uses of a cleaning tape. Errors can occur if a tape is inserted into a
drive when the tape has already been used the maximum number of
times.
• Export a cleaning tape just as you would export any other data tape.
• The concepts of physical and partitions must be considered when
setting up cleaning procedures and methods. In general, cleaning
cartridges must be treated in the same manner as data cartridges.
Any physical cartridge (cleaning or data) can exist in only one
partition. There can be no sharing of cleaning cartridges between
partitions.
696
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Managing and Moving Media
Managing and Moving Media
The LMC provides you with commands for:
• Importing Cartridges Into Partitions on page 697
• Exporting Cartridges From Partitions on page 699
• Loading Drives on page 700
• Unloading Drives on page 702
• Moving Media Within a Partition on page 703
• Moving Media Between Active Vault or AMP and Standard Partitions
on page 704
• Taking Inventory on page 706
The following sections provide step-by-step instructions for performing
these tasks.
Note: Unless the situation requires it, use the host application to
move, load, unload, import, or export cartridges instead of
doing so through the LMC. Using the host to move media
makes sure that the host’s view of the library remains in sync
with the library’s actual configuration.
Exception: When moving media into and out of library
managed partitions, you must use the LMC since library
managed partitions are not visible to hosts (see Moving Media
Between Active Vault or AMP and Standard Partitions on
page 704).
Importing Cartridges
Into Partitions
When you first start using your library, open the door and manually
insert, directly into storage slots, as many cartridges as you plan to use.
The cartridges will not go back all the way if they are inserted
incorrectly.
After your library begins operation, use the Import Media dialog box to
add cartridges without interrupting library operations. Place cartridges
in the I/E station. The scanner automatically reads the barcodes on new
cartridges.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
697
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Managing and Moving Media
1 Make sure that you are viewing the partition into which you want to
import a data cartridge. From the View menu, click the name of the
appropriate partition.
2 Insert a data cartridge into an appropriate I/E station. You can insert
multiple cartridges up to the maximum number of slots in your I/E
station.
3 To see which I/E stations are associated with a particular partition,
click Monitor > IE Station.
4 Click Operations > Import or click the Import toolbar button.
If the partition is not offline, you receive a message that asks you
whether you want to take it offline.
5
Click Yes. The Import Media dialog box appears with a list of
cartridges in the I/E station displayed.
The following table describes the elements on the Import Media
dialog box.
Element
Description
Media ID
The volume serial number of the cartridge.
698
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Managing and Moving Media
Element
Description
Slot
The number of the slot in the I/E station magazine. To understand the location
designation, see Understanding Location Coordinates on page 459.
IE Station
The number of the module. To understand the location designation, see
Understanding Location Coordinates on page 459.
Magazine
The number of the magazine (section) where the slot is located, numbered
from the top down. To understand the location designation, see
Understanding Location Coordinates on page 459.
Results
“Imported” or “Failed”.
6 Click a cartridge to highlight it, and then click Import.
The picker automatically moves the cartridge from the I/E station to
the first available empty slot in that partition. You cannot manually
specify the slot.
Exporting Cartridges
From Partitions
When partitions are created, specific I/E station slots are associated with
that partition. When you export cartridges in a library with partitions,
cartridges are exported to the partition’s I/E station slots. You can only
export cartridges if I/E station slots for that partition are empty.
1 Make sure that you are viewing the partition from which you want
to export a data cartridge. From the View menu, click the name of
the appropriate partition.
Click Operations > Export or click the Export toolbar button. The
Export Media dialog box appears with a list of cartridges in the
partition displayed.
Note: The physical library must be online.
If the partition is not offline, you receive a message that asks
you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
699
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Managing and Moving Media
2 If you want to display one or more media IDs that match a
particular pattern, type a media filter in the Media Filter text box,
and then click Filter.
Filter performs a search for media IDs that match a particular
pattern. In the example, the media filter has been set to capture
media IDs beginning with the string “J00.”
3 Select the corresponding check box in the leftmost column for each
cartridge that you want to export.
The maximum number of slots that are available in the I/E station
partition appears at the top of the table.
4 Click OK.
All designated cartridges are exported to the I/E station slots that
are associated with the partition. After the operation completes, the
library automatically refreshes information in the table.
Loading Drives
The Load Drives dialog box enables you to load drives with cartridges
from the current partition.
1 Make sure that you are viewing the partition from which you want
to load drives. From the View menu, click the name of the
appropriate partition.
700
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Managing and Moving Media
2 Click Operations > Drives > Load. The Load Drives dialog box
appears.
3 If you want to display one or more media IDs that match a
particular pattern, type a media filter in the Media ID text box, and
then click Filter.
Filter performs a search for media IDs that match a particular
pattern. In the example, the media filter has been set to capture
media IDs beginning with the string “J00.”
4 Click the data cartridge to load into the drive to highlight it.
Note: You can load only one cartridge at a time.
The parameters used to define a cartridge are media ID (barcode)
and location. Location is defined as a series of coordinates
representing the aisle, module, rack, section, column, and row
where a cartridge is located. See Understanding Location
Coordinates on page 459.
The Select Media area shows the full slots.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
701
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Managing and Moving Media
5 Click the destination drive to receive the media to highlight it. The
Select Drive area is populated with empty drives. You can select
only one drive at a time.
6 To load the data cartridge into the selected drive, click OK.
Unloading Drives
The Unload Drives dialog box enables you to rewind the cartridge in
the drive, eject it, and return it to storage.
1 Make sure that you are viewing the partition from which you want
to unload drives. From the View menu, click the name of the
appropriate partition.
2 Click Operations > Drives > Unload. The Unload Drives dialog
box appears.
3 If you want to display media IDs by media type, click the
appropriate media type from the Media Type drop-down list.
4 Click the drive you want to unload to highlight it. You can only
unload one drive at a time.
The parameters used to define a cartridge are media ID (volume
serial number) and location. Location is defined as a series of
coordinates representing the aisle, module, rack, section, column,
and row where a cartridge is located. SeeUnderstanding Location
Coordinates on page 459.
5 Click OK. The library rewinds the data cartridge, unloads it from the
drive, and returns it to storage.
702
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Managing and Moving Media
Moving Media Within a
Partition
The Move Media dialog box enables you to move media from one
location to another within a partition.
Note: Only one cartridge can be moved at a time.
1 Make sure that you are viewing the partition within which you want
to move media. From the View menu, click the name of the
appropriate partition.
2 Click Operations > Move Media. The Move Media dialog box
appears.
The table in the Select Source area lists slot locations with
cartridges, and the table in the Select Target area lists slot locations
without cartridges.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
703
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Managing and Moving Media
You can limit the cartridges that are listed in the Select Source table
in the following ways:
• To list cartridges by location, click the arrows next to the
location coordinate boxes at the top of the Select Source area,
click the appropriate numbers or All, and then click Show. For
information about location coordinates, see Understanding
Location Coordinates on page 459.
• To list a particular cartridge by media ID, type the volume serial
number of the cartridge in the Media ID text box, and then click
Show. You also can type a partial volume serial number, such as
“K00”, to list all cartridges within the specified location
coordinates that have a volume serial number containing the
specified string of characters.
• You also can limit the slot locations that are listed in the Select
Target table by device type. From the Device Type drop-down
list, click I/E Station, Storage, or Drive.
3 In the Select Source table, click the media ID for the cartridge that
you want to move to highlight it. If necessary, you can use the scroll
bar to display additional media IDs for cartridges that are in drives
or I/E stations.
4 In the Select Target table, click the destination for the cartridge that
you want to move to highlight it. If necessary, you can use the scroll
bar to display additional slot locations.
5 Click OK. The media moves to the new location.
Moving Media Between
Active Vault or AMP
and Standard Partitions
The library does not allow you to move media directly between one
standard partition and another standard partition. However, you are
allowed to move media directly from a standard partition to a library
managed partition, and vice versa. Library managed partitions include
Active Vault, Automated Media Pool (AMP), and Extended Data Lifecycle
Management (EDLM) partitions.
Note: Manual movement between library managed partitions and
standard partitions will require inventory reconciliation with
the backup application managing the standard partition.
704
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Managing and Moving Media
Note: Moving media between a standard partition and a library
managed partition will take the standard partition offline
during the operation.
1 Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View
menu, click the name of the physical library.
2 Click Operations > Move Media. The Move Media Wizard
appears.
3 Click Next. The Select Source and Destination Partitions screen
appears.
4 Select a source partition from the Select Source Partition section
and select a destination partition from the Select Destination
Partition. You cannot move media between library managed
partitions or between standard partitions.
5 Click Next. The Select Media to Move screen appears.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
705
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Managing and Moving Media
6 From the Source Slot Type drop-down list, select the area from
which you want to move the media (Storage Slots or I/E Slots).
7 From the Select Media list, select the tape(s) you want to move.
8 From the Destination Slot Type drop-down list, select the area to
which you want to move the media (Storage Slots or I/E Slots).
9 Click Next. The Media Move Completion Page appears, listing
source location, destination location, and which media will be
moved.
10 Click Finish.
11 Click Close.
Taking Inventory
The Inventory command causes the library to scan all storage locations,
drives, and I/E stations. The library automatically performs an inventory
when doors are closed or the library’s configuration information is
changed in any way. You can configure inventories to automatically
occur whenever the power is cycled, or you can perform an inventory
whenever you want by clicking Operations® Inventory. To enable
automatic inventories, see Setting Up Policies for the Physical Library on
page 180.
1 Log on as an administrator.
706
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Managing and Moving Media
2 You can perform this procedure while either viewing the physical
library or a partition. From the View menu, click the name of the
physical library or the appropriate partition.
Click Operations > Inventory. The Inventory dialog box appears.
Note: If you want to perform an inventory of the physical library,
and it is not offline, you receive a message that asks you
whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
If you want to perform an inventory of a partition, and if
the physical library is offline, you receive a message asks
you whether you want to take the physical library online.
Click Yes. Also, if the partition is online, you receive a
message that asks you whether you want to take it offline.
Click Yes.
This dialog box shows the total number of slots and the number of
occupied slots in the physical library or the partition, depending on
the view you chose.
3 To perform an inventory, click OK.
The inventory process take a few minutes to complete.
4 When the “Inventory completed successfully” message appears,
click OK.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
707
Chapter 16: Working With Cartridges and Barcodes
Managing and Moving Media
708
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Appendix A
Frequently Asked Questions
This appendix answers some questions that are most often asked about
the library.
Where do I find installation instructions?
The library requires that a trained Quantum Support Engineer perform
the installation.
Where are error messages described?
When the library detects issues, it sends you e-mail notifications and
creates tickets that provide you with detailed information about the
issues and corrective actions you can perform. A ticket can direct you to
obtain further help from technical support. For more information about
troubleshooting, see Troubleshooting Your Library on page 43.
How do I clean a drive?
You can set up automatic drive cleaning when you manually create a
partition (see Creating Partitions Manually on page 136) or you can
manually clean drives at your discretion (see Configuring Drive Cleaning
on page 227).
How do I know when the drives need cleaning?
If you do not have periodic drive cleaning configured (see Creating
Partitions Manually on page 136) for your drives, a diagnostic ticket is
generated when a drive needs to be cleaned.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
681
Appendix A: Frequently Asked Questions
What is a partition?
A partition is an abstraction of a single underlying physical library that
presents the appearance of multiple, separate libraries for purposes of
file management, access by multiple users, or dedication to one or more
host applications. It is a collection of real physical elements, combined
to create a grouping that is different from the physical library, and is
often dedicated to a single host application. For example, you can
choose to run one software application in one partition, and a different
software application in a second partition. For a more information, see
Working With Partitions on page 128. To learn how to create a partition,
see Creating Partitions on page 134.
Where can I find the library’s serial number?
The serial number appears in the ID column for the first line of output
on the System Status dialog box (Monitor® System). Use the serial
number when contacting technical support for assistance.
How many characters can be in the barcodes?
For LTO media barcodes, the library dynamically supports 1 to 14
characters for volume serial number plus a two-character media type
identifier. The image below is an example of a supported LTO barcode
label.
two-character media
identifier (L1, L2, L3, LT
L4, LU, L5, L6 or LV)
What barcode formats are supported?
Cartridges must have an external barcode label that is machine-readable
to identify the volume serial number. A barcode must use only
uppercase letters A to Z and/or numeric values 0 to 9. The library
currently supports Code 39 (3 of 9) type barcode labels.
What do I do if I lose my password?
Contact technical support and they will tell you how to reset the
password. See Getting More Information or Help on page xvii.
What do I do if I lose power during a backup?
If your library contains a redundant power supply, it is unlikely that
power will ever be completely unavailable to the library.
682
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Appendix A: Frequently Asked Questions
The library should recover even if power goes out completely during a
backup. If power remains off, press the Power button and leave it in the
off position until you can obtain a reliable power source. When the
power to the library is turned back on, the library will recover. You must
re-run the backup using your application software.
If the library does not automatically come back up after a power
outage, cycle library power. Cycling library power involves shutting
down the library, powering it off, and then powering it on. For more
information, see Shutting Down/Rebooting the Library on page 485,
Powering Off the Library on page 487, and Powering On the Library on
page 487. The blue LED on the power supply will be on and not
blinking.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
683
Appendix A: Frequently Asked Questions
684
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Appendix B
Network Port Settings
Table 1 describes the port and network details for customer site-to-site
firewall settings.
Table 51 Network Port Settings
Port
Protocol
Description
Direction
TCP/UDP
22
SSH
SSH Access for CLI usage.
Inbound
TCP
25
SMTP
eMail Client
Outbound
TCP
53
DNS
DNS Client Model
Outbound
UDP+TCP
67-68
DHCP
DHCP Client
Outbound
UDP
80
HTTP
Library is a webserver for
administration purposes
Inbound
TCP
80
HTTP
Library is a client for SKMv1
Outbound
TCP
123
NTP
NTP Client
Inbound/
Outbound
UDP
161
SNMP
SNMP queries and management
Inbound/
Outbound
UDP
162
SNMP
Trap output
Outbound
UDP
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
685
Appendix B: Network Port Settings
Port
Protocol
Description
Direction
TCP/UDP
389
LDAP
Non-secure LDAP client
Outbound
TCP
427
SLP
Service Locator Protocol
Inbound/
Outbound
UDP+TCP
443
HTTP
Secure Webserver
Inbound
TCP
443*
QEKM
Secure connections for QEKM
encryption protocol. IBM Drives only
Outbound
TCP
636
LDAPS
Secure LDAP Client
Outbound
TCP
10091108*
RMI
Java GUI RMI Connections, this is a
bidirectional interface
Inbound/
Outbound
TCP
3801*
QEKM
Non secure connections for QEKM
encryption protocol. IBM Tape drives
only
Outbound
TCP
5696*
KMIP
KMIP Communication port on the
server. Library uses non priviledged
ports
Outbound
TCP
5988
SMIA
SMIS/OpenWBEM
Inbound
TCP
5989
SSMIS
Secure SMIS/OpenWBEM
Inbound
TCP
6000,
6001
SKM
SKM tape encryption protocol
Outbound
TCP
* user configurable. The default value is shown
686
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Glossary
This glossary consists of terms unique to the library along with
some storage industry terminology.
A
Access door
Refers to the doors on either the control module or expansion
module from which you can access the magazines and accessor
assembly.
C
Capacity on demand (COD)
An Quantum library feature that enables users to have a large
physical library, but users pay only for what capacity they are
currently using. License upgrades enable more capacity to be
added without a system interruption.
Control management blade (CMB)
A version of the MCB that has no I/O ports for Ethernet, SCSI,
serial, or Fibre Channel. It is the controller board for the I/O
management unit in expansion modules.
Control module
The first component of the library. It consists of an library
management module, cartridges, drives, power, and an I/E
station.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
687
Glossary
Control Path Failover (CPF)
The Scalar i6000 provides support for configuring the HP LTO-5
and later drive for control path failover. To configure a control
path failover drive, you must have a Storage Networking License
(SNW).
When control path failover is used, one drive is assigned as the
primary control path and another drive as the control path
failover (secondary) drive. The control path failover drive is used
whenever the primary control path drive fails or is inoperable.
D
Data path
One of the many possible paths that data can move over in the
storage area network environment, potentially involving many
components or connections between initiators and targets that
have been set since the initial configuration occurred.
Data path failover
You can use Data Path Failover to allow an alternate data path
when a preferred data path fails. Data Path Failover is provided
as part of the Storage Networking license and applies to HP
LTO-5 and later Fibre Channel tape drives only.
The HP LTO-5 and later Fibre Channel tape drives have two Fibre
Channel ports. If you enable Data Path Failover on the tape
drive, one port will be used as the “active port” for data
transmission, and the other port will stand by to be used if the
active port fails. If the tape drive loses its Fibre Channel link with
the active port,
it will automatically “fail over” and use the standby port to
continue drive operations.
DN
Distinguished Name
Drive pooling
Drives to be held in a pool (or pools) of drives. You can specify
policy settings for the drive pools to configure how each pool
will react to a drive failure and load balancing.
Drive sled position
A slot where a Fibre Channel or SCSI drives reside in the control
module or expansion module in one of the two drive clusters.
688
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Glossary
There are six drive sled positions in each of the two drive
clusters.
E
Encryption Key Management (EKM)
A generic term used to encompass any encryption key
management solution.
Ethernet Expansion blade (EEB)
Provides Ethernet connectivity to 6 Ethernet drives. This
connectivity is to the library's internal Ethernet and should not
be connected to an external Ethernet source.
Expansion module
Expansion modules enlarge the library configuration by adding
modules for additional media storage. You can add up eleven
expansion modules to a library configuration. The first seven
expansion modules may contain optional hardware, such as
additional drives, I/O blades, and I/E stations.
F
FQDN
Fully Qualified Distinguished Name
I
I/E station
A door on the access door of the control module (or expansion
modules) that contains magazines into which cartridges can be
imported into or exported out of the library.
All single door I/E stations are numbered starting with 1 at the
control module. All double door I/E stations are numbered with
a number and a letter--for example 2A and 2B--the module
number (1-8), with A as the left I/E station and B the right.
I/O management unit
A management and connectivity interface for the library. The
control module and first seven expansion modules can have I/O
management units installed. The I/O management unit may
contain a CMB, FC
I/O blades and Ethernet Expansion blades.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
689
Glossary
L
Latchhook
The latches used to lock the printed circuit blades into place
when they are inserted into the I/O management unit or library
management module (LMM).
Library Management Console (LMC)
The management software client for the library. You can use the
LMC either locally from the touch screen operator panel on the
control module or remotely through a Web browser running a
Java applet.
Library management module (LMM)
The connectivity interface for the three blades that provide
intelligence and connectivity to the library through the control
module. The management control blade (MCB), robotics control
unit (RCU), and library motor drive (LMD) blades are installed in
the LMM.
Library managed partition (LMP)
Partition in the i6000 that is like any other partition, except it is
not visible to any backup applications or hosts. Allows the
library to be able to manage the partition, rather than the
backup application managing the partition. Use the LMP
partition as a workspace for library to do value-added features
outside environment — like EDLM (automated data integrity
checking routine).
Linear Tape-Open (LTO)
A media technology that is open format. LTO comes in two
formats, Accelis and Ultrium. Accelis is the fast access
implementation, while Ultrium is the high capacity
implementation.
M
Management control blade (MCB)
The library controller board, which resides in the LMM. The MCB
has
I/O ports for Fibre Channel, Ethernet, serial, and SCSI.
P
Partition
A partition is a logical portion of the physical library that is
viewed by the host as if it is a complete library. Partitions
690
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Glossary
present the appearance of multiple, separate libraries for
purposes of file management, access by multiple users, or
dedication to one or more host applications.
Picker
The robotic hand portion of the accessor assembly that handles
cartridges.
Q
Quantum Encryption Key Manager (Q-EKM)
Quantum's encryption key management solution that supports
IBM LTO-4, LTO-5, and LTO-6 FC and SAS tape drives.
R
RDN
Relative Distinguished Name.
S
Scalar Key Manager (SKM)
Quantum's encryption key management solutions that supports
HP LTO-4, LTO-5, and LTO-6 FC and SAS tape drives.
Service door
The door on either the control module or expansion module
that provides access to the I/O management unit, LMM, power
supplies, drive sleds and other components.
Storage area network (SAN)
A dedicated, high-performance network whose primary purpose
is the transfer of data along FC or high-speed Ethernet
connections between servers, interconnect devices, and storage
peripherals.
Storage networking (SNW)
A licensable feature that allows you to take advantage of the
control path failover and host access configuration features of 8
Gb/s HP LTO-5 or later tape drives, without those drives being
connected to a 4 Gb/s /Fibre Channel I/O blade.
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
691
Glossary
U
Universal drive sled (UDS)
A sheet metal case that houses LTO or SCSI drives in the drive
clusters.
W
WORM
The Scalar i6000 library supports write once, read many
technology in LTO-3 and greater tape drives. WORM allows nonerasable date to be written once and provides extra data
security by prohibiting accidental data erasure.
X
X-axis
The horizontal position of the accessor assembly.
Y
Y-axis
The vertical position of the accessor assembly.
692
Quantum Scalar i6000 User’s Guide
Download PDF